almost slaine two or three of our men But God had pittie on vs so that there happened no other hurt but that some of them were a litle amazed This continued to the fourteenth of April without any change whereupon all the Officers of the shippe assembled together with others of the companie taking counsell what was best to be done and perceiuing the shippe not to bee strong enough to passe the Cape they concluded by protestation whereunto they subscribed their hands to sayle with the ship to Mosambique and there to winter and to repaire the shippe and prouide all necessaries for it which greatly greeued the common sort because they did find as great danger in turning backe againe to Mosambique as to passe the Cape for that they were to sayle againe by the land Donatal which they feared as much as the Cape and also though they did arriue at Mosambique yet they accounted it as much as a lost Viage For that they must stay there till the next yeare and there spend all they haue for that all things that come thether are brought out of India so that euerie thing is there as â—eare as gold which would bee hard for the poore Saylers and Swabbers as hauing but little meanes to relieue themselues and therby they should be constrained to sel that litle they had broght with them for halfe the value and besides that they were as then about â—00 miles froÌ„ Mosambique Wherefore there grew great noyse and murmuring in the ship among the Saylers that cursed the Captaine and the Officers because the ship was badly prouided for it had not one rope more then hung about the ship nor any thing wherof to make them if those that we had should haue chanced to breake The Captaine laide the faulte on the Master because hee asked them not when hee was at land and the Maâ—ter saide that he had spoken for them and that the Cairo or Hemp whereof in India the ropes are made was deliuered vnto the Captaine and that he had sold y e best part thereof to put the money in his purse that was the cause why we wanted with this disorder they bring their matters to passe not once remembring what may after fall out but when they are in danger theÌ„ ther is nothing els but crying Misericordia and calling to our lady for helpe the Captaine could not tell what to answere séeing vs in that trouble but said that he maruelled at nothing so much as why our Lord God suffered them beeing so good Christians and Catholiques as they were to passe the Cape with so great torments and dangerous weather hauing so great and strong shippes and that the Englishmen béeing as he said Heretickes and blasphemers of God with so smal weake vessels passed y e Cape so easilie for they had receaued newes in India that an English Shippe had passed the Cape with verie great ease And so wee made backe againe towards Mosambique being in great dispaire for that no man cared for laying his hand to worke and hardlie would any man obay the Officers of the Shippe In this manner sayling wee perceiued diuers vesselles and bordes with dead men bound vpon them driuing in the Sea which comforted vs a little thinking that some other of the shippes were in the same taking and had throwne some of their goods ouer bord and so made towardes Mosambique before vs whereby we thought to haue company and that we alone were not vnfortunate for that is commonlie said that companions in miserie are a comfort one to an other and so it was to vs but I would to God it had bene so as we imagined but it was farre worse then turning backe againe for those were the signes of the casting away of the S. Thomas as being in the Iland of S. Helena as we were afterwards aduertised The 15. of April we had an other great calme which continued till the 17 day and taking the hight of the Sunne we found our selues to be vnder 37 degrees to the great admiration of al the company for that being as I said vnder 35 degrees and hauing sayled for the space of 5 dayes with so great a wind and stormy weather towards Mosambique we should rather by al mens reason haue lessened our degrees by estimation wee made account to haue bene vnder 30 or 32 degrees at the highest but the cause why our shippe went backward in that sort against wind and weather towards the Cape thinking wee made towards Mosambique was by the water which in those countries carieth with a verie strong streame towards the cape as the Pylot tould vs he had proued at other times yet he thought not that the water had runne with so great a streame as now by experience he found it did so as it séemed that God miraculouslie against all mans reason and iudgement and all the force of wind and stormes would haue vs passe the Cape wheÌ„ we were least in hope thereof whereby we may plainelie perceiue that all mens actions without the hand of God are of no moment The same day againe we saw gréene water and the birdes called Mangas de Velludo or veluet sléeues which are certain signes of the cape de bona Speranza which put vs once againe in hope to passe it and about euening a swallow flew into our shippe wherat they much reioiced saying that it was a sign and foreshowing that our Lady had sent the Swallow on bord to comfort vs and that we should passe the Cape wherewith they agreed once againe to proue if we could passe it séeing we had such signes and tokens to put vs in good comfort that God would help vs. This being concluded we sung the Letany with Ora pro nobis and gaue many almes with promises of pilgrimages and visitations and such like things which was our dayly worke With that the saylers others began to take courage and to be lustie euery man willinglie doing his office offering rather to lose life and welfare in aduenturing to passe the Cape then with full assurance of their safetie to returne vnto Mosambique we had as then great waues and very bigge water in the sea which left vs not till wee came to the other side of the Cape The 18 of Aprill we fell againe into the wind with as great stormes and foule weather as euer we had before so that we thought verily we should haue bene cast away for that at euerie minute the sea couered our ship with water to lighten her we cast diuers chestes and much Cinamon with other thinges that came first to hand ouer bord wherewith euerie man made account to die and began to confesse themselues and to aske each other forgiuenes thinking without more hope that our last day was come This storme continued in this sort at the least for the space of 24 houres in the mean time great almes were giuen in our shippe to many Virgin Maries and other Saints
hearbe is like Samper but yellow of colour hath berries like Goose berries but nothing in them The Portingalles call it Sargasso because it is like the herbes that groweth in their welles in Portingall called Sargasso wherevpon that sea is called Sargasso It is not knowne from whence it commeth for there is no land nor Island that is knowne to bee neare that sea but the coast of Africa which is at the least more then 400. miles from thence It is thought it commeth from from the ground and yet there is no ground in that place to bee founde and in sayling to India the shippes come not into that sea for then they kéepe closer to the shore so that it is not once séene and it is not found in any place but there beginning at 20. degrées continuing to 34. degrées so thicke and so full as if they were whole Islandes most strange to beholde In that countrey it is as cold in winter as it is here with vs when it fréezeth not which the Portingalles estéeme a great cold and cloath themselues against it as we doe in a mightie great frost The last of Iune wee were vnder 23. degrees being right vnder the Sunne for y t the Sun was then in the same height and we also vnder y e Tropike of Cancer which is the furthest part that the Sunne goeth Northwarde and then it turneth againe vnto the Equinoctial line and from thence into the South Wee passed y e line of Tropicus Capricorni twice once on the South side by the ende of the Island of S. Laurence and then againe vnder 23. degrées after we had passed the Cape de bona Speranza The 2. of Iuly wee were vnder the height of the Islands of Canarie which lie vnder 28. and 29. degrées and are distant from the coast of Barbarie and Africa from 30. to 80. miles which Islandes lay on our right hande and because in those Islandes there are many things that are worthie the noting therefore I thought it conuenient to make a briefe description of them The 96. Chapter A briefe description of the Islands of Canaria THe Islandes of Canaria are seuen which in times past were called the Fortunadas and at this day by the Spaniards are called the Canaries by reason of the great numbers of dogges which they founde in them when they were first discouered The names of the Islands are great Canarie Teneriffe La Palma La Gomera El'Hierro Lansarotte and Fuerte Ventura In the Island of Teneriffe there is a hil called Pico de Terraira which is thought to bee the highest hill that euer was found for it may easily bee séene at the least threescore miles into the sea before they come at it It cannot be climed but in the monthes of Iuly and August for all the other monthes it lyeth full of snowe although below in the Island and in other Islands thereabouts they sée no snow It is thrée dayes iourney to clime vp into it and on the toppe therof it is flat and when it is clear and faire weather a man may from thence sée all the Islandes round about it although some of them are at the least 50. miles distant and as much in compasse The two monthes in which they vse to clime vp vpon the hill they bring downe certaine peeces of brimstone from whence it is much caried into Spaine and at my being in the Island of Tercera a shipper one of my acquaintance that came from Teneriffe gaue me a péece thereof for a remembrance of him In one of those Islandes called Hierro or of Iron there is a wonderfull and strange thing to be séene and I verely thinke it is one of y e strangest things in the world This Island is on of the greatest of all the seuen but it is an vnfruitful and barren land and so drie that in all the Island there is not one droppe of fresh water to bee found but onely in some places vppon the sea side which is farre from hand so that it profiteth the inhabitants but very little But God of his mercie hath prouided for the want of water both for men and beastes in this maner for there is a great trée which no man knoweth for the like is not found in any other place the leaues whereof are small and long and alwaies gréene without chaunging colour this trée is couered and compassed about with a small cloud which alwaies continueth in one forme and neuer altereth nor diminisheth and this cloud casteth dew vpon the leaues of the trée which hang down and drop continually without ceasing a most cleare thinne and fine water which falleth into certaine Cesternes that by the inhabitants of the Island are made round about vnder the trée therein to kéepe and preserue the water The Island of Ascention so called because it was discouered vppon the day of Christs ascention into heauen is not inhabited because of the vnfruitfulnes therof because it wanteth fresh water which is also the cause that it is not visited by the ships for that they hope for no refreshing in the same The hilles of this Iland are redde like Bolus About this Iland are many birds because of the great numbers of fishes that are about it specially small flying fishes which in Portingall are called Pisce Bolodor Reade more hereof in the booke in Folio 175. And this water is in so great abundance that it serueth all the Island for their necessarie vses not onely for the people but also for their cattle throughout all the Isle and no man can remember when that wonder first began On the right side of this Island about an hundred miles distant there is yet an other wonder to be noted which is that oftentimes there is an Islande séene thereaboutes called San Borondon where diuers men haue been on lande being onely such as fell vppon it on the sodaine and not looking for it who affirme it to bee a very fayre pleasant and gréene Countrey full of trées and all kinds of victuaile and that it is inhabited by people that are Christians but no man knowes of what nation they are neyther what language they speake The Spaniards of the Islandes of Canaria haue many times sayled towardes it to view it but they could neuer find it whereupon there goeth diuers opinions of it for some think it to be inchanted and that it may not bee seene but vppon certaine dayes some thinke it to bee very small and alwaies couered with cloudes and that therefore it can not bee séene nor founde out and also the great stormes and strength of the water driueth the shippes from it but to conclude it is holden for a truth that the Ilande lyeth thereaboutes as all those that come from thence doe certainly affirme The Ilandes of Canaria are very fruitfull and plentifull of all thinges both victuailes and other necessaries They haue of all kinds of corne specially excellent good Wine which from thence is caried into
sun in their wars insteed of Ancients they tie the bones of certaine men who in their liues were valiaunt in armes vppon long staues and so carry them before them to incorage others to be the like and make them the readier to fight Their weapons are arrowes pikes made of palme tree wood and stone swordes They bury their kings with golden neckelaces sette with emerauldes and with bread and wine wherof the Spaniards haue foūd many such graues which they haue opened The people that dwell vpon the aforesaid great riuer are all Caniballs or Caribes as also those that dwell about saint Martha and in time past were Caribes The inhabitants of the Islandes of Boriquen Dominico Matitini Cibuchine now called saint Croce and Guadalupe as it is already declared which rowe on the water with scutes made of a certayn wood called Canois and that fought against those of Hispaniola and the people of the firme land whome they spoyled and eate The common opinion is that they came first out of the firme land of Caribana by Vraba and from Nombre de Dios in Indian speech called Caribes and all strong and valiaunt menne are nowe by them called Caribes which are very expert in bowes and arrowes The Brasilians name them Prophets or Soothsayers and Caribes Priests The people inhabiting in the valley of Tunia poison their arrowes and before the Spaniards ouercame them they hadde continuall warres against the people of Bagota or Bogota they are good souldiers cruel and very reuengeatiue when they goe to warres they carry their Idoll Chiappen with them as a iudge of the victorie vnto whome before they enter into the field they offer many sacrifices and offerings of certaine liuing men béeing the children of slaues or of their ennemies painting all the Image with bloud which doone they doe eate the flesh when they retourned victorious they helde great feasts with dauncings leapings and singings some drinking themselues druncke and agayne besmeering their Image with blood and being ouercome they were sorrowfull and heauy seeking by new sacrifices to intreats theyr Chiappen that hée woulde helpe and assist them and send them victory against theyr enemies S. Martha SAint Martha is also a Towne and Hauen of the Spaniardes lying on the firme land vnder eleuen degrees on the north side of the Equinoctial line about fiftie Spanish miles from Carthagena it lieth at the foote of certayne hills so monstrous high that it is incredible howe in so great extreame heate so great quantitie of snowe should lie vpon the toppes of those hills which is seene a great way off and whereby the hauen is knowne This country was discouered and taken by Roderigo de Bastidas in 1524. where it cost him his life not by the enemy but by his owne men that when he was asleepe killed him and gaue him fiue woundes in his body The people of this country are so cruell and fierce that they haue oftentimes driuen the Spaniards from their countrey not caring for the shippes but running into the sea till the water mounted as high as their breasts shooting with thousandes of poysoned arrowes and neuer would giue ouer were it not by meanes of the great shot together with the cries of such as were afraid and ran away thinking them to be thunder claps which oft times happen in those countries by reason of the euennesse of the countrey with the height of the hills The compasse of this hauen is three Spannish miles and so cleere that they may see stones lying on the ground within the water although it is at the least twentie elles deepe into this hauen there floweth twoo running waters but not fit for great ships but onely for little boates cut out of peeces of wood it is a great pleasure to heare what they report of the great numbers and goodnes of the fishes that are taken thereabouts both in fresh and salt water for the which cause they found many Fishermen thereabouts with many nettes made of packethreede hanging on cotten ropes which was their greatest liuing for that for fish they had whatsoeuer they desired of their neighbours In this country they found saphires emerauldes calcedonies iaspers amber brasil wood golde and pearles that is in the two prouinces Caramaira and Sacurma wherein the two hauens Carthagena and S. Martha do lie Caramaira is a very fruitfull and pleasant countrey wherein there falleth neither hard winter nor ouer hote summer day and night being there almost of a length The Spaniardes hauing taken in this country found gardeins ready planted moystned with strange waters like the gardeins in Italie their common meate is Ages luca Maiz Batatas and some fruites of trees such as other Indians therabouts do vse they eate fish also and mans flesh but not often Ages are rootes of the greatnesse of long turnopes in Italie pleasant of taste not much vnlike chesnuttes which they vse in banquets insteede of fruit Iuca is also a kinde of roote whereof they do make bread the Iuca that groweth in Cuba Hayti other Ilands is very hurtful being eaten raw and to the contrary that of S. Martha is very wholsome being otherwise eaten it is very good of taste these roots are planted not sowne which being ripe are as great as a mans arme or the smal of his leg ripeneth in halfe a yere but if it stand two yéeres in the ground it maketh better bread being ripe they are prest betweene 2 stones wherby the sap runneth forth which is very hurtful in the Islands vnlesse it be sodden as we doe milke otherwise being drunke of men or beasts it kills them as being a strong poison but sod till it consumeth to the half so let stand til it be cold it may be vsed insteede of vineger being sod til it be thick it becoms sweet like hony so they vse it in the firm land being raw for drink and sodden for vineger hony I said in the firme land for that in the Islands it is very dangerous venomous of the material substance of the roote being prest which is like almonds that are stampt they make round cakes as big as dollars which they bake is their Cacaui or bread wherewith they so long haue norished themselues this bread is somwhat harsh in the throat if it be not tempered with water or mixed with other meate Yet I had rather eate bread made of Maiz that is Brasilia wheate for that it giueth no lesse sustenance than our wheate is very wholsome agreeing with y e stomak wherof they make bread as we do of wheat Batatas are also common in great aboundance in this country which are roots of the thicknesse of a mans arme some smaller pleasant of taste and procuring good norishment yet they cause wind vnlesse you rost thē then they loose that effect specialy when they are eaten with any good wine of these rootes they also make conserues not much vnlike that which
Snakes like Eales bigger driuing in the sea you must likewise vnderstand that the streame of the water at the Cape de bona Speranza till the times aforesaid doe alwaies runne from the Cape del Gado or to the cape de bona Speranza southwestward notwithstanding y t some streams runne crosse through them that is along the Islandes as I 〈…〉 Pâ—â—iera runne Westward vpon the bankes of Cabo das correntes to the Riuer called Aguada de Boapaz the streames run likewise Westwardes towardes the creeke that lyeth by the Cape das Agulhas at Agundi de San Bras the streame runneth towardes the land and vpon these coastes you shall find y t the stiffer the wind bloweth out of the West the more the water and streames runne against the wind The 5. Chapter Of the nauigation and course from Lisbone to the East Indies written set down by the Kings Pilot called Rodriges de Lagos a Portingall WHen you put out of the riuer of Lisbone to saile to the Iland called Porto Santo you must run Southwest and setting out of Lisbone you must marke the sunne by the Compasse to proue it that is in the rising and setting of the Sunne and the middle betweene her rising and setting which is North and South and as much as you finde the needle of the compasse to lie northeastward so much you must run southwarde for 〈◊〉 lyeth northeast and southwest with y e riuer of Lisbon wherewith it meeteth full and euen when you perceiue or haue a sight of Porto Santo or the Iland Madeia sayling to the Iland La Palma then you shal giue all that which the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeastward and somewhat more for that it lyeth more Eastwarde then it is set downe in the sea Carde and from thence to the Island de Ferro to the which Island you shall likewise winde a little more Westward then it lyeth in the Carde and hereof fayle not as being negligent to obserue it for although you abate ten miles from your course to the Islande La Palma as it is in the Carde yet you shall go right vpon it and hauing past the Island La Palma then your best way is to run southward 30. miles from the Islands of Capo Verde alwaies giuing all that which the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeastward or that you shall runne betwéene two meale tydes that the one mealetide South and the other South and by East setting your course to the South or the better to vnderstand it all that which the Néedle of the Compasse yeeldeth which may be halfe a strike and rather lesse then more and sayling from vnder 22. to 18. degrées you shall sée gréene water which commeth from the point called Capo Branco and from the créeke where the fortresse of Aâ—guâ—â—n lyeth which gréene water if you see it more then two meale tides then it is a signe y t you are near the coast but if you see but a little gréen water that is lesse then for the space of two mealetides then you are nearer to the Islandes and comming vnder ten degrees as long as you are by the coast of Guinea you shall giue the Needle of the Compasse no abatement or cutting off because the water draweth towardes the land whereby the Northeasterne drawing of the Needle of the Compasse which may bee a thirde parte of a strike agréeth with the drawing of the water and so the shippe runneth southeast and the water and streame commeth alwaies out of the south whereby it is driuen vnto the shore Sayling from 5. to 3. degrées it is good to keepe off the coast from 70. to 100. miles and not more for being more it would not be good for your voyage the reason is for y t being 100 miles or more froÌ„ the coast theÌ„ you haue but few south windes to get the coast againe but rather haue all the thunders and lightnings from the East to the South and southeast which kéepe you from getting to the shore and because those thunders come vpon you on all sides therefore it is good to runne if it be possible from â—0 to 8â— miles that is to 2â— degrees and 1 â— where you shall finde a southeast wind continuing from the 2â— of Aprill to the 15. of May but if you stay till the end of Aprill it may happen that as then you shall not haue the southeast wind before you be vnder one degrée of the Equinoctiall line The signes you haue vppon this coast of Guinea are some of the birds Garagiaus and if the thunders come out of the East being 60. or 70. miles from the shore you shal sée certaine Swallows and Duckers when you haue the southeast wind and that you make towardes the point or bough of Brasilia although in the first day of your nauigation it diminisheth not so much in the height as it should you must not be abashed thereat for that which you find to be lesse diminished is not by reason that the water or streame hindreth you as many and the most parte of men are of opinion for that the degrees hard by the Equinoctiall are greater then others that are higher as you shall well perceyue sayling to India or comming from thence with a fore wind vnder the line then the degrées diminish but a little whereby it may be assured that the small diminution or running forwarde is not by reason of the water or streame that runne to the Antilhas or foure Ilandes of the Spanish Indies comming to the line or a degrée further then in any sorte turne not againe vnto Guinea for it woulde bee against your selfe and thereby you should spende your time in vaine for that some ships that departed out of Lisbone in my company that from vnder the line they would wind towardes Guinea which I did not but contrarily made ouer to Brasilia whereby those shippes came a month later then I did into India In this bough or crossing to Brasilia you shall set your course as the wind serueth and looke well to your Compasse for that as soone as you are past the line then the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth halfe a strike and more to the Northeast and sailing from the 8. of the 18. degrée then the more the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeast the further you are from the coast of Brasilia and saie that you lay East and West with Cape S. Augusten and that the Néedle of the Compasse should yéelde two third partes of a strike Northeastwarde then you are 150. miles from it to seaward in which is thus to be vnderstoode that if the Compasse were made in Portingall there lay halfe a strike Northeastward if it bee good and true it will do the same vpon the coast of Brasilia being East and west with the Abrolhos and about 170 or 200. miles from it then the Néedle of the compasse shal lie a whole strike or somewhat more Northeastward for that the Meridian of
aforesaid point lyeth a riuer called Rio do Sal that is the riuer of Salt from whence the salt is carried to Canton it is a great hauen and entrie being past this riuer of Salt foure miles forward there is an other riuer lying by an other point or hooke which riuer by the Chinaes is called Chaochen and by the Portingales Porâ—o de Pecas that is the hauen of Peces for there are made the good peeces of Chinish silkes and other costlie wares This riuer is verie great and hath manye places and villages to land ware that are inhabited lying along by the water it lyeth with the southwest point of this Iland Lamon east southwest and west northwest the land of Lamon lyeth vnder 23 degrees and ¼ it is great and verie high couered with bushes trees it reacheth as the coast doth about a mile from the firme land as you come from Macau sayling along on the west southwest side it sheweth like 2 IlaÌ„ds although it is but one it hath on the southwest or the land side some stony cliffes close by it which at low water are vncouered and at high water the sea breaketh vpon theÌ„ but all the rest of the channell betweene the Iland and the firme land is faire and deepe inough yet you may not passe through for it is full of bushes and other stuffe that driueth although I haue past through it by coÌ„pulsion but with great paine therefore I counsell no man to passe through it vnlesse it be with a Soma that is a Chinish Caruell wherewith they sayle along the coast for the traffick on this aforesaid southwest point of the Iland to seaward there lyeth certaine small flat Ilandes and other rockes betweene the which and the Iland you may not passe and on the northeast point on the land side a verie great creeke where there is a verie good harbor and low road for all windes where likewise our shippes may enter if occasion serueth it is three fadom and ½ deep ground muddy and to enter in you goe nere on the southwest side for I haue beene in it From this southwest point of the Iland aforesaid a mile and a halfe inward to sea there is a riffe that sheweth aboue the water being of some black stones that reach all on a rowe Eastward about three myles and on the syde thereof three flat long Cliffes also in a row whereof that outward is the greatest you may by no meanes passe ouer nor betwéene this riffe and cliffes but betweene the riffe and the Iland there is a verie good channel for I haue past through it it is 20 fadome deepe smal thinne flat sandy ground and you haue nothing there to care for then onlie to keepe by the Iland and the aforesaid Riffe it is good for those that come from Iapon to passe through it for if you passe outward by the sea to auoyde the Riffe it happeneth oft tymes that there you finde the winde sharpe and therefore can hardlie reache the Coast whereby if it chance you must indure great payne before you can get it From this Iland Lamon 6. or 7. myles Eastnortheast lyeth the Hauen of Chabaquon which is an arme of the sea that runneth northeast very déepé to laÌ„dward at the entrie thereof on the southeast side there lyeth a thicke and great poynt of land which from thence ryseth very high and on the Northwest syde it is a low land of sandie strandes From the aforesaid point of land in the same course about the length of the shot of a great peece lyeth a Ryffe of sand wherevpon the water breaketh if you desire to enter into this hauen you must put to the Southeast syde running along by the poynt of the entrie where it is two fadome and ½ deepe half a mile aboue the aforesayd poynt of land on the Southeast part of the land there lyeth a small Créeke or bay of muddie ground which is a good harber in foule wether and for more security you may run so close to the land that you may runne into the mud so leap on shore on the northwest side which is by an Iland where there lieth a town or village where you finde much prouision of victuails other thinges This course is done with Iuncos Somas which are Chinish ships boates this hauen lieth vnder 23. deg ½ behind this créek on the sea side lieth another créek by y t which forward about the leÌ„gth of the shot of a great péece lieth 4 or 5 IlaÌ„ds betwéen the which the laÌ„d you may passe this créeke of the Iland is a barber for the Monson of Malacca that is for the windes that blow when you saile from Malacca to China within it is very good and faire ground the land lying betwéene these two aforesaid créekes is a high and greene cuntrey without bushes or trées the aforesaid islands are round and high stretching along all in a rowe FroÌ„ this Hauen of Chambaqueo to Chinchon the coast runneth Northeast and Northeast and by East and is in distance 22. miles it is all high land and close by the land it is sixtéene fadome déepe and there runneth many hard and great streames From Chabaqueo six or seuen miles forward lyeth Enseada Pretta that is the Blacke créeke by the country people called Lauho aboue the which there lyeth a high land with very black shining bushes and in the mouth of the entry it hath two Islands within it is very good and faire ground béeing a harbour or defence against certaine windes wherein Ruij Lobo with his ship another Iunco or Chinish ship did winter Two miles to seaward from it lye two Islands of white stonie cliffes close togither betwéene the which the Firme land it is all faire good ground From this Enseada Pretta or Blaâ—ke creeke seuen myles forward there lyeth two high and small Islands some what longer than round without either bushes or trees close by each other reaching Northwest southeast betwéen both hauing thrée or foure stone cliffes These Ilands and cliffes lie distant from the Firme land about halfe a mile right ouer against them lyeth a small Créeke from a verie lowe hooke or point of land along by the sea and on the Island that lyeth nearest to the lande on the Southwest side lyeth a Sand baye which is a good Hauen or Rode of seuen or eight fadome déepe where the Cliffes lying to Sea-ward on you make a defence you may goe close to the lande of the Sand bay for I haue laine in it because I put into it with a storme as I came from Iapon the Iaponers haue many times wintered therein with their shippes The entry thereof lyeth on the Northeast side close along by the point of the Iland that lyeth towardes the land and when you enter in you shall holde towards the Island not to misse the Hauen and you may alwayes goe out and in as
Mossambique Being at Mossambique wee were foure of our Fléete in company together only wanting the Saint Phillip which had holden her course so nere the coast of Guinea the better to shun the Flats of Bracillia that are called Abrollios whereon the yere before she had once fallen that she was so much becalmed that she could not passe the Equinoctiall line in long time after vs neyther yet the cape de Bona Speranza without great storms foule weather as it ordinarilie happeneth to such as come late thether whereby shee was compelled to compasse about came vnto Cochin about two months after we were al ariued at Goa hauing passed and endured much misery and foule weather with sicknes and diseases as swellings of the legs and the scorbuicke and paine in their bellies c. The 4. Chapter The description of Mossambique which lieth vnder 15. degrees on the South side of the Equinoctiall line vppon the coast of Melinde otherwise called Abex or Abexim MOssambique is a Towne in the Iland of Prasio with a safe although a small hauen on the right side towardes the cape they haue the golden mines called Sofala on the left side the rich towne of Quiloa and by reason of the foggie mistes incident to the same the place is both barren vnholsome yet the people are rich by reason of the situation In time past it was inhabited by people that beleeued in Mahoomet being ouercom kept in subiection by the tirant of Quiloa his lieftenant which the Arabians called Zequen that gouerned them Mossambique is a little Iland distant about halfe a mile from the firme land in a corner of the said firme land for that y e firme land on the north side stretcheth further into y e sea theÌ„ it doth before it there lie two smal Ilands named S. George S. Iacob which are euen w t the corner of the firme land and betwéene those two Ilands not inhabited the firme land the ships doe sayle to Mossambique leauing the Ilands southward on the left hand and the firm land â—n the north and so without a Pilot compasse about a mile into the sea to Mossambique for it is déepe enough and men may easily shun the sands that lie vpon the firme land because they are openly séene The ships harbour so neare to the Iland and the â—ortresse of Mossambique that they may throw a stone out of their ship vppon the land and sometimes farther and lie betwéene the Iland and the firme land which are distant halfe a mile from each other so that the ships lie there as safely as in a riuer or hauen The Iland of Mossambique is about halfe a mile in compasse flat land and bordered about with a white sand Therein growe many Indian palmes or nut trées some Orange Apple Lemmon Citron and Indian Figge trées but other kindes of fruit which are common in India are there verie scarce Corne and other graine with Rice and such necessarie marchandizes are brought thether out of India but for beasts and foule as Oâ—en shéep Goats Swine Hennes c. there are great aboundance and very good and cheape In the same Iland are found shéepe of fiue quarters in quantitie for that their tayles are so broad and thicke that there is as much flesh vpon them as vpon a quarter of their body and they are so fatte that men can hardlie brooke them There are certaine Hennes that are so blacke both of feathers flesh and bones that being sodden they séeme as black as inke yet of very swéet taste and are accounted better then the other whereof some are likewise found in India but not so many as in Mossambique Porke is there a very costly dish and excellent faire and swéete flesh and as by experience it is found it farre surpasseth all other flesh so that the sicke are forbidden to eate any kinde of flesh but onely Porke because of the excellency thereof MOssambique signifieth two places one which is a whole kingdome lying in Africa behinde the cape of Bona Speranza betweene Monomotapa Quiloa the other certaine Ilands herafter drawne and described lying on the south side of the Equinoctiall line vnder 14. degrees and a halfe whereof the greatest is called Mossambique the other two Saint Iacob and Saint George These Ilands lie almost in the mouth of a riuer which in Africa is called Moghincats About Mossambique is a verie great a safe hauen fit to receiue and harbour all ships that come and goe both to from Portingal the Indies and although both the Kingdome and the Iland are not very great yet are they very rich and abundant in all kinde of thinges as appeareth in the description of the same Mossambique the chiefe greatest of them is inhabited by two maner of people Christians and Mahometanes the Christians are Portingales or of the Portingales race there is also a castle wherin the Portingales keepe garrison from whence also all other castles and fortes thereabouts are supplied with their necessaries speciallie Sofala where the rich mine of Gold lieth there the Portingale ships doe vse to harbour in winter time when of wind or by meanes of foule weather they cannot accoÌ„plish their voiage The Indian ships doe likewise in that place take in new victuals and fresh water This Iland beeing first discouered by the Portingales was the only meanes that they found the Indies for that froÌ„ thence they vsed to take Pilots which taught them the way touching the manner and customes of these people read the Authors description at large they are good shooters in musket and caliuer and expert Fishermen Sayling along further by the coast towardes the Indies you passe by Quiloa which in times past was called Rapta not great but verie faire by reason of the great trees that grow there which are alwaies fresh and greene as also for the diuersities of victuals it is also an Ilande lying about the mouth of the great Riuer Coauo which hath her head or spring out of the same lake from whence Nilus doth issue This Iland is inhabited by Mahometans and they are all most white apparelled in silk and clothes of cotton wooll their women weare bracelets of gold and precious stones about their neckes and armes they haue great quantitie of siluer workes are not so browne as the men well membered their houses are commonly made of stone chalke and wood with pleasant gardens of all kind of fruit and sweet flowers from this Iland the kingdome taketh his name This point asketh a larger discourse which you shal finde in the leafe following They haue no swéet water in this Iland to drinke but they fetch it from the firme land out of a place called by the Portingales Cabaser and they vse in their houses great pots which come out of India to kéepe their water in The Portingales haue therein a verie faire and strong castle which now about 10. or 12. yeares past was fullie
finished and standeth right against the first of the vnhabited little Ilands where the ships must come in and is one of the best and strongest built of all the Castles throughout the whole Indies yet haue they but small store of ordinance or munition as also not any souldiers more then the Captaine and his men that dwel therin But when occasion serueth the married Portingales that dwell in the Iland which are about 40. or 50. at the most are all bound to kéepe the Castle for that the Iland hath no other defence then onely that Castle the rest lieth open and is a flat sand Round about within the Castle are certaine whollie accustomed therunto as if they were Horses Moyles or Asses I haue spoken with men that came from thence and haue séen them and affirme it for a truth But returning to our matter of the gouernmement and vsage of the Portingales and their Captaine I say that the Captaine maketh the commoditie of his place within thrée yeares space that hee remaineth there which amounteth to the value of 300. thousand Duckets that is nine tunnes of golde as while we remained there the Captaine named Nuno Velio Perena himselfe shewed vs and it is most in gold that commeth from Sofala Monomotapa as I said before from Mossambique they carrie into India Gold Ambergris Eben wood and Iuorie and many slaues both men and women which are carried thether because they are the strongest Moores in all the East couÌ„tries to doe their filthiest and hardest labor wherein they onely vse them They sayle from thence into India but once euery year in the month of August till half September because that throughout the whole countries of India they must sayle with Monssoyns that is with the tides of the year which they name by the windes which blow certaine monthes in the yeare whereby they make their account to goe and come from the one place to the other the time that men may commonly sayle betwéene Mossambique and India is 30. dayes little more or lesse and then they stay in India till the month of Aprill when the winde or Monssoyn commeth againe to serue them for Mossambique so that euery yeare once there goeth and commeth one shippe for the Captaine that carrieth and bringeth his marchandise and no man may traffique from thence into India but only those that dwel and are married in Mossambique for that such as are vnmarried may not stay there by speciall priuiledge from the King of Portingall graunted vnto those that inhabite there to the end the Island should be peopled and therby kept and maintained Behind Mossambique lyeth the countrey of Prester Iohn which is called by them the countrey of Abexines wherevpon the coast of Mossambique vnto the red sea is commonly called the coast of Abex and diuers men of Prester Iohns land do send men of that country some being slaues and others tree into India which serue for Saylors in the Portingalles shippes that traffique in those countries froÌ„ place to place whose pictures counterfets as also their religioÌ„ maner of liuing and customes doeth hereafter follow in the pictures of India This coast of Abex is also by the Portingalles called the coast of Melinde because that vpon the same coast lyeth a towne and a Kingdome of that name which was the first towne and Kingdome that in the Portingals first discouerie of those countries did receiue them peaceably without treason or deceit and so to this day doth yet continue Wee stayed at Mossambique for the space of 15. dayes to prouide fresh water and victuails for the supplying of our wants in the which time diuers of our men fel sicke and died by reason of the vnaccustomed ayre of the place which of it selfe is an vnholsome land and an euill aire by meanes of the great and vnmeasurable heat The 20. of August wee set saile with all our companie that is our foure shippes of one fléete that came from Portingall and a shippe of the Captaines of Mossambique whose thrée yeares were then finished his name was Don Pedro de Castro in whose place the aforesaide Nuno Velio Pereira was then come The said Captain Don Pedro returned w t his wife family again into India for that the Kinges commandement and ordinance is that after the expiration of their thrée yeares office they must yet stay thrée years more in India at the commandement of the Vice Roy of India in the kings seruice at their owne charges before they must returne into Portingall vnlesse they bring a speciall patent from the King that after they haue continued thrée yeares in their office they may returne into Portingal againe which is very seldome séene vnlesse it be by speciall fauour and likewise no man may trauell out of India vnlesse hee haue the Vice Royes Pasport and without it they are not suffred to passe for it is very narrowly looked into The 24. of August in the morning wée descryed two Islandes which are called Insula de Comora and Insula de Don Ian de Castro The Islande Comora lyeth distant from Mossambique 60. miles Northwardes vnder 11. degrées on the South side is a very high land so high that in a whole dayes saile with a good winde wee could not lose the sight therof the same day the shippes seperated themselues againe according to the ancient manner for the occasions aforesaid The third of September we once againe passed the Equinoctiall line which runneth betwéene Melinde and Braua townes lying vppon the coast of Abex and the line is froÌ„ Mossambique Northwards 230. miles and from the line to the Cape de Quardafum are 190. miles and lyeth vnder 12. degrées on the North side of the Equinoctiall vpon this coast betwéene Mossambique and the Cape de Guardafum lyeth these townes Quiloa in time past called Rapta Mombassa which is a towne situate in a little Island of the same name which sheweth a farre off to be high sandie downes and hath a hauen with two fortes to defende it Melinde Pate Braua and Magadoxo each being a kingdome of it selfe holding the lawe of Mahomet the people are somewhat of a sallower colour then those of Mossambique with shining hayre gouerning their Citties after the manner of the Arabians and other Mahometanes This corner or Cape of Guardafum is the ende of the coast of Abex or Melinde and by this cape East Northeast 20. miles within the Sea lyeth the rich Island called Socotora where they find Aloes which taketh the name of the Islande being called Aloe Socotorina and is the verie best being close and fast and from thence is it carried and conueyed into al places By this corner and Island beginneth the mouth or enterance of the â—streito de Mecka for that within the same vpon the coast of Arabia lyeth the citie of Mecka where the body of Mahomet hangeth in the ayre in an iron chest vnder a sky made of Adamant stone which is greatly sought vnto
them withall which they call Catâ—auentos Cayrus hath very high houses with broad peint-houses to yeelde shadowe therby to auoide the heate of the Sunne in the middle of these houses are greate Pipes of ten cubites longe at the least which stand Northward to conuaye and spread the colde ayre into their houses specially to coole the lowest romes In winter time it is as colde with them as it is in Portingale the water that they drinke is brought from the firme land which they kéepe in great pots as the Tinaios in Spaine and in Cesternes whereof they haue verie great ones within the fortresse which water for a yeare or a yeare and a halfe against they shall neede like those of Mossambique They fetch water by the Iland of Barein in the Sea from vnder the salt water with instruments foure or fiue fadome déepe which is verie good and excellent sweete water as good as any fountaine water There is in Ormus a sickenesse or common Plague of Wormes which growe in their legges it is thought that they procéede of the water that they drink These wormes are like vnto Lute strings and about two or thrée fadomes longe which they must plucke out and winde them aboute a Straw or a Pin euerie day some part therof as longe as they féele them creepe and when they hold still letting it rest in that sort till the next daye they binde it fast and annoynt the hole and the swelling from whence it commeth foorth with fresh Butter and so in ten or twelue dayes they winde them out without any let in the meane time they must sit still with their legges for if it should breake they should not without great paine get it out of their legge as I haue séen some men doe Of these wormes Alsaharanius in his practise in the 11. Chapter writeth thus In some places there grow certaine Wormes betweene the skinne and the flesh which sicknesse is named the Oxen paine because the Oxen are manye times grieued therewith which stretch themselues in great length creepe vnder the skin so long till that they pearce it the healing thereof consisteth in purging the body of corrup fleame c. Reade further In my master the Archbishops house we had one of his seruants borne in Ormus newly come from thence which drewe thrée or The 8. Chapter Of the towne fortresse and Island of Diu in times past called Alambater THe Towne and Ilande of Diu lyeth distant from the ryuer Indo 70. miles vnder 21. degrées close to the firme land in times past it belonged to y e King of Cambaia in whose land and coast it lyeth where the Portingals by negligence of the Kinge haue built a fortresse in processe of time haue brought the Towne and the whole Iland vnder their subiection and haue made it very strong in a manner inuincible which fortresse hath béene twice besieged by souldiers of Cambaia and their assistants first in Anno 1539. and secondly in Anno 1546. and hath alwaies béene valiantly defended by the Portingals as their Chronicles rehearse This Towne hath a very great Hauen and great traffique although it hath verye little or nothing at all of it selfe more then the situation of the place for that it lyeth betwéen Sinde and Cambaia which Countries are abundant in all kind of things wherby Diu is alwaies ful of strange nations as Turks Persians Arabians Armenians and other countrie people and it is the best the most profitable reuenue the King hath throughout all India for that the Banianen Gusaratten Rumos and Persians which traffique in Cambaia from thence to Mecca or the red Sea doe commonly discharge their wares and take in their lading in Diu by reason of the situation thereof for that it lyeth in the entrance of Cambaia and from Diu it is shipped and sent to Cambaia and so brought backe againe to Diu. The Towne of Diu is inhabited by Portingals together with the natural borne Countrimen like Ormus and al the townes places holden by the Portingals in India yet they kéepe their fortresse strong vnto themselues This Iland aboundeth and is very fruitfull of all kind of victuals as Oxen Kine Hogges Shéepe Hennes Butter Milke Onions Garlicke Pease Beanes and such like whereof there is great plentie and that very good and such as better cannot be made in all these Low-countries but that the Fuell is not so well drest they haue likewise Chéeses but they are very drie and sault much Fish which they sault and it is almost like vnto salt Ling or Codde and of other sortes they make hanged flesh which is very good and will continue for a whole Viage of all these victuals and necessarie prouisions they haue so great quantity that they supply the want of all the places round about them especially Goa and Cochin for they haue neither Butter Onyons Garlicke Pease Oyle nor graine as Beanes Wheat or any séede they must all bee brought from other places thether as in the orderly description of the coast as it lyeth I will shew you what wares goods marchandises victuals fruites and other things each lande Prouince or Countrie yéeldeth and affordeth From Diu sayling along by the coast about fiftéene or sixtéene miles beginneth the mouth of the water that runneth to Cambaia which is at the entrie and all along the said water about 18. miles broade and 40. miles long and runneth in North-east and by North and at the farther ende of the water is the Towne of Cambaia whereof the whole Countrie beareth the name and lyeth vnder twentie thrée degrées there the King or Solden holdeth his Court. The 9. Chapter Of the kingdome and land of Cambaia THe land of Cambaia is the fruitfullest Countrie in all India and from thence prouision of necessaries is made for all places round about it whereby there is a greate traffique in the Towne as well of the inhabitants as other Indians and neighbors as also of Portingals Persians Arabians Armenians c. The King obserueth the law of Mahomet but most parte of the people that are dwellers and naturall borne Countrimen called Gusarates and Baneanem obserue Pythagoras law are the subtilest and pollitiquest Marchauntes of all India whose counterfets and shapes are placed in this booke by those of India with a description of their liuing ceremonies customes as in time and place shall be shewed This lande of Cambaia aboundeth in all kinde of victuals as Corne Rice and such like grain also of Butter and Oyle wherewith they furnish all the Countries round about them There is made great store of Cotton Linnen of diuers sorts which are called Cannequins Boffetas Iorims Chauâ—ares and Cotonias which are like Canuas thereof do make sayles and such like things and many other sortes that are very good and cheape They make some therof so fine that you can not perceyue the thréedes so that for finenesse it surpasseth any Holland cloth they make
the Portingals and other countreymen can better brooke it then other places in India From these coastes they vse great traffique vnto Bengala Pegu Sian Malacca and also to India there is excellent faire linnen of Cotton made in Negapatan Saint Thomas and Musulepatan of all colours and wouen with diuers sorts of loome workes and figures verie fine and cunningly wrought which is much worne in India and better estéemed then silke for that it is higher prised then silke because of the finenes cuÌ„ning workmaÌ„ship they are called Rechatas Cheylas wherof the Christians Portingals in India do commoÌ„ly make bréeches They likewise make clothes thereof for women to put about them from their nauelles downeward bound about their bodies which they weare within the house very finely made the best sort are named clothes of Sarasso some being mingled with thréedes of golde and siluer and such like stuffe of a thousand sortes very beautifull to behold wherewith they cloath themselues in very comely manner In this coast growe the great and thicke réeds which are vsed in India to make the Pallankins wherein they carry the women as in the Indian figures you shall sée which are so thicke that a man can hardly gripe them with both his handes very faire to looke vpon and very high being of diuers colours as blacke redde c. Whereof in an other place I will say more The 16. Chapter Of the Kingdome of Bengalen and the riuer Ganges AT the ende of the Kingdome of Orixa and the â—ast of â—horamandel beginneth the Riuer Ganges in the kingdom of Bengalen This is one of the most famous Riuers in all the world and it is not knowne from whence it springeth Some are of opinion that it commeth out of the earthly paradise because of an old speech of the Bengalers which is that in time past a certaine King of Bengalen was desirous to know froÌ„ whence the riuer Ganges hath her beginning to the which ende hee caused certaine people to bee brought vp and nourished with nothing but rawe fish and such like foode thereby to make them the apter to accomplish his desire which people hauing made boats fitte for the purpose he sent vp the riuer who were certain monthes vpon the water so long til they came where they felt a most pleasant and swéete sauour and founde a very cleare and most temperate skie with still and pleasant water that it séemed vnto them to bee an earthly paradise and being desirous to rowe further vpwardes they could not so that they were compelled séeing no remedie to returne againe the same way that they came and being returned certified the King what they had séene They that will not credit this are hard of beliefe for my parte I leaue it to the readers iudgement This Riuer hath Crocodiles in it like the riuer of Nilus in Aegipt the mouth or entry thereof lyeth vnder 22. degrées and the coast runneth East and by South to the Kingdome of Aracan which is about 80. miles it is an vneuen coast full of Islandes sholes hookes and créekes for the lande of Bengalen lyeth inwards of the gulf which is called Bengala for that froÌ„ Aracan the coast beginneth againe to runne South and East outwardes towardes Malacca and to the vttermost hooke which is called Singapura But returning to Bengala and the Riuer Ganges you must vnderstand that this riuer is holden and accounted of all the Indians to be a holy and a blessed water and they do certainely belieue that such as wash and bath themselues therein bee they neuer so great sinners all their sinnes are cleane forgiuen them and that from thenceforth they are so cleane and pure from sinne as if they were newe borne againe and also that hee which washeth not himself therein cannot be saued for the which cause there is a most great and incredible resorte vnto the same from all the partes of India the East countries in great troupes where they vse diuers strange ceremonies and superstitions most horrible to heare for they doe most stedfastly beléeue that they shall thereby merit eternall life From thâ— Riuer Eastward 50. miles lyeth the towne of Chatigan which is the chief towne of Bengala The naturall borne people of Bengala are in a manner like those of Seylon but somewhat whiter then y e Chingalas they are a most subtill and wicked people and are estéemed the worst slaues of all India for that they are all théeues and the women whores although this fault is common throughout all India no place excepted They haue a custome that they neuer dresse or séeth meat twice in one pot but haue euery time a new pot Whensoeuer they are found in adulterie they haue their noses cut off and from that time forwarde they must leaue ech others company which is most narrowly looked vnto by their law The countrey is most plentiful of necessary victuails specially Rice for that there is more of it in that countrey then in al the cast countries for they do yearly lade diuers shippes therewith which come thether from all places and there is neuer any want thereof and all other things in like sort and so good cheape that it were incredible to declare for that an Oâ—e or a Cowe is there to be bought for one Lariâ—n which is as much as halfe a Gilderne Shéepe Hens and other things after the like rate a Candit of Ryce which is as much little more or lesse as fourteene bushelles of Flemmish measure is sold there for halfe a Gilderne and for halfe a Doller Sugar and other ware accordingly whereby you may wel conceiue what plentie they haue The Portingalles deale traffique thether and some places are inhabited by them as the hauens which they call Porto grande and Porto pequeno that is the great hauen and the little hauen but there they haue no Fortes nor any gouernement nor policie as in India they haue but liue in a manner like wild men and vntamed horses for that euery man doth there what hee will and euery man is Lord and maister neyther estéeme they any thing of iustice whether there be any or none and in this manner doe certayne Portingalles dwell among them some here some there scattered abroade and are for the most part such as dare not stay in India for some wickednesse by them committed notwithstanding there is great trafficke vsed in those partes by diuers ships and marchants which all y e year diuers times both go come to and from all the Orientall parts Besides their Ryce much Cotton linnen is made there which is very fine and much estéemed in India and not only spread abroad and carryed into India and al the East parts but also into Portingal and other places this linnen is of diuers sorts and is called Sarampuras Cassas Comsas Beatillias Satopassas and a thousande such like names They haue likewise other linnen excellently wrought of a hearbe which
they spinne like yearne this yearne is to be sâ—ene at the house of Paludanus it is yealowish and is called the hearbe of Bengalen wherewith they do most cunningly stitch their couerlits pauilions pillowes carpets and mantles therein to christen children as women in childbed with vs vse to doe and make them with flowers and branches and personages that it is wonderfull to sée and so finely done with cunning workemanshippe that it cannot be mended throughout Europe likewise they make whole péeces or webbes of this hearbe sometimes mixed and wouen with silke although those of the hearbe it selfe are dearer and more estéemed and is much fayrer theÌ„ the silke These webs are named Sarrijn and it is much vsed and worne in India as well for mens bréeches as dublets and it may be washed like linnen and being washt it sheweth and continueth as faire as if it were new From Bengala commeth much Algallia or Ciuet but by the subtiltie and villany of the Bengalians it is falsifyed mixed with filth as salt oyle and such like stuffe whereby it is not much estéemed Also in Bengala are found great numbers of the beasts which in Latine are called Rhinocerotes and of the Portingalles Abadas whose horne téeth flesh blood clawes and whatsoeuer he hath both without and within his bodie is good against poyson and is much accounted of throughout all India as in an other place shall be shewed more at large There groweth likewise marble coloured Réedes whereof you may sée many sortes in the custodie of Paludanus which the Portingalles call Canas de Bengala that is Réedes of Bengala within they are full of pith and are about the thicknesse of Spanish réedes but somewhat thinner and when they are gréene they bowe and bend like Willow twigges they are outwardly of diuers colours and speckled as if they were painted They vse them in Portingall for olde women to beare in their handes when they goe abroad or vppon the stones There is another sorte of the same réeds which they call Rota these are thinne like twigges of Willow for baskets whereof Paludanus can shewe you great numbers with the which in India they make many faire baskets and a thousande other curious deuises Sugar Butter and such like ware they haue in great quantitie as I said before but this shall suffice for Bengala whereof we leaue to speake and returne to the description of the coast as it lyeth along the shore The 17. Chapter Of the coasts and lands of Aracan Pegu and Sian to the Cape of Singapura the towne and fortresse of Malacca BEyond the kingdome of Bengala beginneth the kingdomes of Aracan Pegu which coast stretcheth from Bengala south and by East to the town and hauen of Martauan in the land of Pegu and is 70. miles Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrées from whence beginneth the kingdome or land of Sian these kingdomes of Aracan and Pegu are very rich fruitfull of all things besides Gold and precious stones as Rubies Espinels Saffires Iacinthes Emeraldes Granates and such like as it is well knowne by the great numbers that are dayly brought out of those countries into all places Likewise they make harde ware which is carried throughout the world There are greater number of Elephantes in those countries then in any other place of India or the Orientall countries the Portingalles that traffique there affirme that the king of Pegu hath a white Elephant which hee prayeth vnto and holdeth it to bée holy The Peguans haue a custome that when any stranger commeth into their land to deale and traffique with them of what nation soeuer he bee they aske him how long he meaneth to stay there and hauing tolde them they bring him many maides that of them he may take his choice and make contract and agrée with the parentes of the maid that liketh him best for the vse of her during his continuance there which done he bringeth her to his lodging and she scrueth him about all his affaires both by day by night like his slaue or his wife but hee must take heede that in the meane time hee keepeth not company with other women for thereby hee may incurre great daunger and stand in perill of his life When the time of his residence is ended he payeth the friendes or parents of the maid as much as he agreed for with theÌ„ which done he departeth quietly away and the maid returneth with credite home againe vnto her friendes and is as well estéemed of as euer she was before and if after that the same maide chance to marrie were it with the principallest of the Countrey and that the aforesaid stranger shold come to traffique in the same place againe hee may againe demand his woman and he shall haue her without resistance of her husband or any shame vnto him and she remaineth by the stranger as long as he abideth there and he trauelling from thence she goeth home againe vnto her husband which among them is holden for a most sure and inuiolable law Likewise when any gentleman or noble man will marrie with a maide hee goeth to séeke one of his friendes or a straunger and intreateth him to lie with his bride the first night of their mariage and to take her maydenhead from her which he esteemeth as a great pleasure honour done vnto him that another man wold take vpon him to ease him of so much payne This custome is not onely vsed among the Gentlemen and chiefe nobilitie of the lande but by the King himselfe Also diuers of the Peguans weare a bell vpon their yarde and some two as bigge as an Acorne which is made fast betweene the flesh and the skinne Of the like Belles Paludanus can shew you one which I brought out of India and gaue it him which bels haue a very sweet sounde This custome of wearing Belles was ordained by them because the Peguans in time past were great Sodomites and vsing this custome of belles it would be a meane to let them from the same The women go altogether naked onely with a cloth before their priuie members which as they go openeth vncouereth shewing all they haue which is by them ordayned to the ende that by such meanes it should tempt men to lust after women and to auoid that most abhominable accursed sinne of Sodomie There are likewise some among them that doe sowe vp the priuie member of their female children as soone as they are borne leauing them but a little hole to auoid their water and when she marrieth the husband cutteth it open and maketh it as great or as little as hee will which they with a certaine oyntment or salue can quickly heale I saw one of those women in Goa whom the Surgeon of my Mayster the Archbishops house did cut open men would iudge all these thinges to be fables yet they are most true for I doe not onely knowe it by the dayly trafficking of the Portingalles out of
and that after their deathes they shall receiue either good or euill reward in the world to come according to their workes Wherefore they vse faire and costly Graues and beléeue that in the world to come men shall neuer more die but liue for euer there are also in this land many and diuers faire Vniuersities and Schooles for learning where they studie Philosophie and the lawes of the land for that not any man in China is estéemed or accounted of for his birth family or riches but onely for his learning and knowledge such are they that serue in euery Towne and haue the gouernment of the same being serued and honoured with great solemnities and worthinesse liuing in great pleasure and estéemed as gods They are called Loâ—ias and Mandorijns and are alwaies borne in the stréetes sitting in Chariots which are hanged about with Curtaines of Silke couered with Clothes of Golde and Siluer and are much giuen to banketing eating drinking making good cheare as also the whole land of China No man may rule gouerne or vse any Office of Iustice in the Towne or place where he was borne which they saye the King doth because their friendes or parents should not mooue or perswade them to doe any thing contrarie to Iustice or to the hinderance of the Kings seruice When any of the aforesaide gouernours or rulers die in China they kill diuers of their seruants and wiues and cause all kinde of victuals and necessaries with diuers Iewels to bee put into the Graue with them whereby they thinke themselues well prouided and to haue good companie with them to liue withall in the other world The Countrie is verie temperate good ayre for it beginneth vnder 19. degrées and is in some places higher then 50. degrées whereby it is to be presumed that it must of force be fruitfull a great helpe thereunto is the earnest and continuall labour the countrimen and inhabitants take to build houses in their land whereby there is not one foote of land lost or that lyeth wast for euen to the verie mountaines it is both plowed planted because there are so many people in the Countrie It is not in mans memorie that euer there was plague in that Countrie and they haue a law which is very straightly holden that no man may goe or depart out of the Countrie without licence nor yet that any stranger may come into the land without leaue vpon paine of death Likewise no man may trauaile through the Country to begge whereof they haue a great care and looke néerely vnto it The people are well formed and commonly fat and well liking of body broade and round faces smal eyes great eye-browes broad foreheads small and flat noses litle beards seauen or eight hayres aboue their lippes and vnder their chinnes and verie blacke haire which they estéeme verie much haue great care in y e keming thereof and in keeping it cleane as well men as women and weare it as long as it will growe and then binde it in a knot on the top of their heads and vpon it they put a péece of Silke netting Those that dwell on the Sea side with whome the Portingals traffique that is in Machau and Canton are a people of a brownish colour like the white Moores in Africa and Barbaria and part of the Spaniards but those that dwell within the land are for color like Netherlanders high Dutches There are many among them that are cleane blacke which haue great eyes and much beard but verie few of them as it may well bee thought and as the men of China themselues report Their ofspring was out of â—artaria or from other of their neighbours of straunge Countries at such time when they had licence to trauaile into those Countries and to haue conuersation with them by trade of marchandise which nowe they may not doe as it is saide before They vse to weare the nayles of their left hands very long and on the right hand short which they hold for an auncient ceremonie of their law and beliefe Their apparell as I said before is most of Silke of all colours that is such as are of welth indifferent rich others such as are poore do weare apparel of Cotton linnen of blacke and coloured Sayes and such like stuffe Cloth made of Wooll nor Veluet they can not make in all China although there wanteth no wooll and they haue many shéepe notwithstanding they know not how to vse it and wonder much at it when the Portingalles bring it thether The women goe verie richly apparelled with long and wide Gownes they weare many Iewels on their heades within their haire and also vppon their bodies they doe commonly hold their hands couered they are but little séene abroad but sit most part within the house and estéeme it for a great beautifying vnto them to haue small féete to the which end they vse to binde their féete so fast when they are young that they cannot grow to the full whereby they can hardly goe but in a manner halfe lame Which custome the men haue brought vp to let them from much going for that they are verie iealous and vnmeasurable leacherous and vnchast yet is it estéemed a beautifying and comlinesse for the women Those that are of any wealth or estate are born in chaires through the stréets hanged and couered with Silke Sattin and Damaske Curtins wouen with siluer and golde thréedes and haue small holes to looke through so that they may sée and not be séene The 24. Chapter Of the Prouinces Townes and other things worthie of memorie in the kingdome of China THe kingdome of China is deuided into 15 prouinces euery one being as great as it is reported founde written as the best kingdome in Europe and are gouerned by a Viceroye or Gouernour which by the Chinaes is called Cochin Two of the said Prouinces are ruled by the King himselfe and his Councell which are Tolanchia and Paguia wher the King is alwaies resident The other Prouinces are called Foquiem Olam Sinsay Xansay Oquiam Aucheo Hona Canton Quicheo Chequeam Saxi Aynaon Susâ—an Most of these Prouinces haue riuers and waters running through them haue conference and familiaritie by buying and selling with each other both by water and by land It is recorded by the Chinaes themselues in their Chronicles that in these fiftéene Prouinces ther are 591. chiefe Citties 1593. other Citties besides villages whereof some are so great as Citties whereby you may consider the greatnesse of the land Most of the Townes are built vppon riuers and running streames and closed about with broade ditches and thicke stone walles Without the Walles betwéene them and the Ditches is a walke where sixe men on Horse backe maye ryde in ranke and the like within which space is made to mende and repaire the Walles when néede requireth whereof they are very carefull and looke warily vnto them The high waies and foote pathes throughout the
the same as an infallible law which groweth vpon this occasion A long time since there was in China a great mightie familie which together with all their friends and acquaintance secretly conspired and agréed to ryse vp against the King of China to driue him out of his kingdome and to kill him and hauing so done to place themselues therein but it could not so secretly be contriued and wrought but in the end it was knowne whereupon the king punished them most gréeuously and caused diuers of the principall conspirators to be put to death and all others he found to be consenting therunto should haue felt the like paine which gréeued the Counsell and other Noble men of the countrie for that diuers of their néerest kinsmen were of that conspiracie so that with humble and long petition to the King they besought him to let them liue and to punish them with some easier punishment then death but that which they sought desired at the king all things considered was little better then death which was that he would banish them and all their posteritie for euer out of the countrie into the Ilands of Iapen which as then were not inhabited and this as they desired was done whereby there is so great enuie and hatred betwéene them and the men of China that they hate each other to the death and doe all the mischief one vnto the other that they can imagine or deuise euen vntill this time The men of Iapen haue done much mischief vnto the men of China and many times fallen vpon their coasts and put all to fire and sword and now at this present haue not any conuersation with them but onely they trafficke with the Portingales and to shewe themselues whollie their deadlie enemies in all their actions they are cleane contrary vnto the men of China and to the same end haue changed all their customes ceremonies and manners of curtesie from the men of China To recite the particulars would be ouer long yet I will in briefe set down some fewe examples of the customes and manners therein One is where the China vseth the curtesie of salutation to a man with the head and hand wheÌ„ they méet together the Iapens to the contrarie put off their shoes whereby they shewe them reuerence and as the Chinaes stand vp when they minde to receyue any man and to doe him reuerence they to the contrarie set themselues down accounting it a verie vnséemely thing to receyue or bid a man welcome standing on their féet and as we put on our clokes when we meane to goe abroad into the towne or countrie they put them off when they goe forth putting on great wyde bréeches and coming home they put them off again and cast their clokes vpon their shoulders and as among other nations it is a good sight to see men with white and yealow hayre and white teeth with them it is estéemed the filthiest thing in the world and séeke by all meanes they may to make their hayre and téeth blacke for that the white causeth their grief and the blacke maketh them glad The like custome is among the women for as they goe abroad they haue their daughters maydes before them and their men seruants come behind which in Spaigne is cleane contrarie and when they are great with childe they tye their girdles so hard about them that men would thinke they shuld burst and when they are not with Childe they weare their girdles so slacke that you would thinke they would fall from their bodies saying that by experience they do finde if they should not doe so they should haue euill lucke with their fruict and presently as soone as they are deliuered of their children in stéed of cherishing both the mother and the child with some comfortable meat they presently wash the childe in cold water and for a time giue the mother very little to eate and that of no great substance Their manner of eating and drinking is Euerie man hath a table alone without table clothes or napkins and eateth with two peeces of wood like the men of China they drinke wine of Rice wherewith they drink themselues drunke and after their meat they vse a certaine drinke which is a pot with hote water which they drinke as hote as euer they may indure whether it be Winter or Summer The Turkes holde almost the same maÌ„ner of drinking of their Chaona which they make of certaine fruit which is like vnto the Bakelaer and by the Egyptians called Bon or Ban they take of this fruite one pound and a half and roast them a little in the fire and then sieth them in twentie poundes of water till the half be consumed away this drinke they take euerie morning fasting in their chambers â—ut of an eâ—rthen pot being verie hote as we doe here drinke aquacomposita in the morning and they say that it strengtheneth and maketh them warme breaketh wind and openeth any stopping The manner of dressing their meat is altogether contrarie vnto other nations the aforesaid warme water is made with the powder of a certaine hearbe called Chaa which is much estéemed and is well accounted of among them and al such as are of any countenance or habilitie haue the said water kept for them in a secret place and the gentlemen make it themselues and when they will entertaine any of their friends they giue him some of that warme water to drinke for the pots wherein they sieth it and wherein the hearbe is kept with the earthen cups which they drinke it in they esteeme as much of them as we doe of Diamants Rubies and other precious stones and they are not esteemed for their newnes but for their oldnes and for that they were made by a good workman and to know and kéepe such by themselues they take great and speciall care as also of such as are the valewers of them and are skilfull in them as with vs the goldsmith priseth and valueth siluer and gold and the Iewellers all kindes of precious stones so if their pots cuppes be of an old excelleÌ„t workmaÌ„s making they are worth 4 or 5 thousaÌ„d ducats or more the peece The King of Bungo did giue for such a pot hauing thrée feet 14 thousand ducats and a Iapan being a Christian in the town of Sacay gaue for such a pot 1400 ducats and yet it had 3 peeces vpon it They doe likewise estéeme much of any picture or table wherein is painted a blacke trée or a blacke bird and when they knowe it is made of wood and by an ancient cuÌ„ning maister they giue whatsoeuer you will aske for it It happeneth some times that such a picture is sold for 3 or 4 thousand ducats and more They also estéeme much of a good rapier made by an old and cunning maister such a one many times costeth 3 or 4 thousand Crowns the péece These things doe they kéeepe and estéeme for their Iewels as
nor yet obay him The fléet being out it sayleth backewarde and forwards along the coast and sometimes into some hauens till the Month of Aprill and about the last of that Month they enter againe into the riuer of Goa where they winter and then the soldiers are frée and euery man goeth his way without any further pay of the king Then the Viceroy maketh a certificate for the Generall of the fléete wherein he testifieth that such a Captaine by his commaundement hath béene so many Monthes in the kings seruice at sea hauing done any matter of importance it is therein set down at large and how that hee out of his owne purse hath spent and laid out much money for the seruice of his Maiestie and according to this certificate the Captaine Generall maketh certificates for euery one of his vnder Captaines and soldiers in the same sort There are likewise some Gentlemen that in winter time keepe open houshold for all soldiers that will come thether to meate whereof also they haue certificates and for all things that they doe which certificates they kéepe till they be some ten twelue or twentie and with the Viceroyes licence go therewith to Portingall asking some recompence for their seruices according to their certificates withall they must bring a certificate from the Matricola General of that their residence in India and that there hath not any deuise or subtilty béene vsed about setting downe their titles The like must they haue from all other officers receiuers and accountants both for munition and armour wherewith they serued in warre for victuails also and such like whereof many times the captaines and soldiers doe make but badde accounts and many of them are aforehande with the king which is presently registred vnder the title of him that hath committed the fault from these Officers also they must haue certificates that there is no such thing committed by them with these certificates they sayle to Portingall where there is an office of remembrances to aske their rewardes by as their qualities and seruices are or shal be rewarded but if they haue any friend in the court to speake for them by greasing their hands to procure dispatch then doe they obtaine those offices for thrée yeares as Captaynes Factors Clearkes Iudges c. and all other offices and places in India but they must serue the place themselues in person Some of them by fauour get licences to passe them away to sell them or to giue them with their daughters in mariage and then the patent for such offices are registred in the Kings Chancery and sent into India where they must be confirmed by the Viceroy These offices are alwaies giuen in reuersion after him that hath it promised before them and then the Register is searched to sée how many are before him that asketh the said places when their time is out or that they chaunce to die before they come to it or be absent as many times it happeneth then he which is next in reuersion hath the place and is ready to receyue it And this in briefe is the manner of their gouernement and policie for martiall affaires their other gouernment for iustice and equitie is as they vse it in Portingall By the table hereafter following you may sée the description of the strait streete in Goa with the dayly méeting therein which they call Leylon liuely portrayed The 30. Chapter Of the Portingalles and Mesticos their houses curtesies mariages and other customes and manners in India Goensi se quanta foro viden area pandat Plana frequens tectis splendida dives opum Vt mercem hic properet gemmis auroque nitentem Ille abducta procul vendere mancipia Congesta huc videas Ga◠〈…〉 Insulae et Eoo max◠〈…〉 Fori Goensis tabernarum mercium et mercatorum illud frequentantium aperta explicatio per â—Linschoten 〈…〉 When they haue any weddinges and are married whosoeuer they be if they haue any wealth all the friendes and neighbours come together euery man on horsebacke and hee that hath not a horse wil borrow one and are euery man very costly apparelled at the least some 50. or 100. horses little more or lesse as the person is of qualitie and so they ride altogether in good order vnto the Church with their seruantes and euery man his hatte for the Sunne the parentes and friendes in the hinder part and in y e last row the bridegroome betwéene two of them whom they call gossops after them followeth the bryde betwéen two Commeres each in their Pallamkin which is most costly made and after them followe the slaues both men and women going in troupes as if they ranne to hunt and so comming to the Church and being married according to the order vsed in the Church of Rome they are in the same order brought home again and passing through the stréets the neighbours leaning vppon Indian Carpets looke out of the windowes and throwe Rose water vpon the Bryde Bridegroome and other sweet smelling waters with Roses and Sugar Comfets or corne In the mean time their slaues play vppon Shalmes and Trumpets most pleasant and melodious to heare and comming to the house where the Bride and the Bridegroome dwel with great reuerence and curtesie bowing downe their bodies they take their leaues of all the company which are all on horsebacke about the dore And so the Bride the Bridegroome and the Commeres go vp sit with great grauitie in a window and then beginne the horsemen that led them to Church in honor of the married couple one after the other to runne a course the gossops beginning first and the rest following twice or thrice one after the other with continuall playing on Shalmes which are very common in India for that he which is of any wealth hath them of his own within his house This being ended they all passe before the window where the Bride and Bridegroome sit with a great reuerence and so passe on all sauing the Gossoppes for they go vp to the Bride and Bridegroome and bid God giue them ioy then is there some Comfets and Marchpane brought forth to drinke a cuppe of water withall and after some curteous salutations and congratulations to the 〈…〉 couple they take their leaues 〈…〉 so there remaineth with the Bride â—idegroom but three or four of their nearest friendes and kinsemen for whome there is a dinner prepared with little meate yet very costly which they passe ouer very lightly and not many wordes which done they presently bring the Bride to bed without any other ceremonies or charges wherewith the mariage is done and ended Oftentimes it chaunceth that they go to bed at y e least two houres before Sunne setting not hauing the patience to stay so long as we do in these countries When a childe is to be christened it is likewise in the same sorte led to Church with horses last of all commeth the father alone after whom followeth
being dead are burnt to ashes and some women being aliue are burned with them that is such as are Gentlemen or Noblemen and the wiues of the Bramenes which are their Idolatrous Préestes Also for the Marchantes some of them eate all things except Cowes or Buffles flesh which they esteeme to be holy Others eate not any thing whatsoeuer that hath either life or bloud in it as those of Gusarata and the Banianes of Cambaia which obserue Pythagoras lawe most of them pray vnto the Sunne and Moone yet they doe all acknowledge a God that made created and ruleth all things and that after this life there is an other wherein men shall be rewarded according to their workes But they haue Idoles and Images which they call Pagodes cut and formed most vgly and like monstrous Deuils to whome dayly they offer and say that those holy men haue béene liuing among them whereof they tell so many miracles as it is wonderfull and say that they are intercessors betwéene them and God The Deuill often times answereth them out of those Images whome they likewise know and doe him great honour by offering vnto him to keepe friendshippe with him and that hee should not hurt them They haue a custome when any maide is to bee married and that they will honour their Pagode for the more credite to the Bridegrome they bring the Bride with great triumph and Musicke before their Pagode which is made with a Pinne of Iuorie bone to whome the neerest friends and kinswomen of the Bride together with the Bride doe goe and by force make the Image to take the Brides maydenhead so that the bloud remaineth still vpon the Image for a remembrance thereof and then after other deuelish superstitions and ceremonies hauing made their offrings they bring the Bride home where she is deliuered to the Bridgrome he being verie ioyfull and proud that their Pagode hath honored him so much and eased him of so much labour They haue for the most part a custome to pray vnto the first thing they méete withal in the morning and all that day after they pray vnto it be it Hogge or any other thing And if in the morning when they goe out they chaunce at the first sight to sée a Crow whereof there are great numbers in India they will not goe forth of their doores all that day no not for all the goods in the world for they estéeme it an euill signe and an vnluckie day They pray likewise to the new Moone and when shee first appeareth they fall vppon their knées and salute her with great deuotion there are among them certaine people called Iogos which are such as we call Hermits and those doe they estéeme for holy men these men liue a verie strict life with great abstinence and make the common people belieue many strange things They haue likewise many Southsayers and Witches which vse Iugling and trauell throughout the countrie hauing about them many liue Snakes which they know how to bewitch and being shut vp in little baskets they pull them out and make them daunce turne and winde at the sound of a certaine Instrument wheron they play and speake vnto them They winde them about their neckes armes and legges kissing them with a thousand other deuises onely to get money They are al for the most part verie skilfull in preparing of poysons wherewith they doe many strange things and easily poyson each other their dwellings and houses are verie little and lowe couered with straw without windowes and verie low and narrow doores so that a man must almost créepe vpon his knées to goe in their houshold stuffe is Mats of straw both to sit and lie vpon their Tables Table-clothes and Napkins are made of the great Indian Figge leaues they serue them not onely for Tables Shéetes and other linnen but also for Dishes wherein they put their meate which you shall likewise sée in the Grocers and Pothecaries shops to put and wrap in all things whatsoeuer they haue within their shops as we doe in paper They likewise ioyne them together in such sort that they can put both butter oyle such liquid stuffes therein and also whatsoeuer coÌ„meth to hand To dresse their meat they haue certaine earthen pots wherein they séeth Rice and make holes in the ground wherein they stampe it or beate it with a woodden pestel made for the purpose and they are so miserable that they buy the Rice in the Huskes as it groweth on the grounde and some of them haue Rice sowen behinde their house to serue their necessarie vse They vse to drinke out of a copper Canne with a spout wherby they let the water fall downe into their mouths and neuer touch the pot with their lippes Their houses are commonly strawed with Cowe dung which they say killeth Fleas They are verie cleane on their bodies for euery day they wash themselues all their body ouer as often as they ease themselues or make water both men and women like the Moores or Mahometans They wash themselues with the left hand because they eate with the right hand and vse no spoones They doe kéepe and obserue their ceremonies and superstitions with great deuotion for they neuer goe forth without praying when they trauaile by the way They haue on euery hill cliffe hole or denne their Pagodes and Idols in most diuilish and deformed shapes cut and hewed out of the stones and rockes with their furnises hard by them and a cesterne not farre from them which is alwaies full of water and euery one that passeth by washeth their féete therein and so fall downe before their Idoll some setting before him for an offering fruits Rice Egges Hennes c. as their deuotions serue then commeth the Bramenes their Priest and taketh it away and eateth it making the common people beléeue that the Pagode hath eaten it When they will make a voyage to Sea they vse at the least fourtéene dayes before they enter into their ships to make so great a noyse with sounding of Trumpets and to make fiers that it may be heard and seene both by night and day the ship being hanged about with flagges wherewith they say they feast their Pagode that they may haue a good Voyage The like doe they at their returne for a thankesgiuing fourtéene dayes long and thus they vse to doe in all their feastes affaires mariages childbirths and at other times of the yeare as sowing and mowing c. The heathenish Indians that dwell in Goa are verie rich Marchants and traffique much there is one stréete within the towne that is full of shops kept by those Heathenish Indians that not onely sell all kindes of Silkes Sattins Damaskes and curious workes of Porselyne from China and other places but all manner of wares of veâ—uet Silke Sattin and such like brought out of Portingall which by meanes of their Brokers they buy by the great and sell them againe by the péece or elles wherein they are
verie cunning and naturally subtill There are in the same steéet on the other side that haue all kindes of linnen and shirts with other clothes ready made for all sortes of persons as well slaues as Portingales and of all other linnen worke that may bee desired There are Heathens that sell all kindes of womens clothes and such like wares with a thousand sorts of clothes and cottons which are like Canuas for sayles and sackes There is also another street where the Benianes of Cambaia dwell that haue all kinds of wares out of Cambaia and all sortes of precious stones and are verie subtill and cunning to bore and make holes in all kinds of stones pearles and corrals on the other side of the same street dwell other heathens which sell all sortes of bedstéedes stooles and such like stuffe very cunningly couered ouer with Lacke most pleasant to behold and they can turne the Lacke into any colour that you wil desire There is also a stréet full of gold and Siluer Smithes that are Heathens which make all kinde of workes also diuers other handicrafts men as Coppersmithes Carpenters and such like occupations which are all heathens and euery one a stréet by themselues There are likewise other Marchantes that deale all by great with Corne Rice and other Indian wares and Marchandises as wood and such like Some of them farme the kinges rents and reuenewes so that they are skilfull euery way to make their profites There are also many Heathen Brokers very cunning and subtill in buying and selling and with their tongues to pleade on both sides The Heathens haue likewise their shops with all kinde of spices which they sell by retaile both by waight and measure as Grocers and Potticaries doe with vs and this is onely vsed among them They haue likewise of al sorts of wares whatsoeuer but yet with lesse curiositie then with vs for it is mingled with dust and garbish These are commonlie the Brainenes which serue likewise for Priestes and Idolatrous Ministers haue their shops throughout the Cittie In euerie place and corner and vnder pentises whereby euery man may haue to serue him at his néed There are likewise many barbers which in euery end of the streetes doe call to those that haue cause to vse them They kéepe no shoppes but for a small peece of money come In the Month of September when winter endeth the bankes of sand doe fléete and vade away out of the Riuer so that not onely smal shippes may come in and go out but also the great Portingall ships of 1600. tunnes may fréely enter without a Pilot for it is déepe enough and without daunger In winter it is a heauie and melancholike being there for there is no other exercise to be vsed but onely to sitte in their shirtes with a paire of linâ—en bréeches and goe passe the time away with their neighbours in playing and such exercises for that throughout the whole town there is no other doing The women and Mesticos take great pleasure in the winter time when it rayneth with their husbandes and slaues to go into the fieldes or some garden whether they carry good store of victuailes there in their gardens haue many Cesternes or pondes of water wherein they take their delightes to swimme and to bath themselues In this time most of their Indian fruit is in season The summer beginneth in September and continueth till the last of Aprill and is alwaies clear sky fair weather without once or very little raining Then all the ships are rigged and made ready to saile for all places as also the Kinges armie to kéepe the coast and to conuoy Marchantes and then the East winds beginne to blow from off the lande into the seas whereby they are called Terreinhos that is to say the land windes They blow very pleasantly coolly although at the first by chaunging of the weather they are very dangerous cause many great diseases which do commonly fall in India by y e chaunging of the time These winds blow alwaies in summer beginning at midnight and continue till noone but they neuer blowe aboue tenne miles into the sea from off the coast and presently after one of the clocke vntill midnight the west winde bloweth which commeth out of the sea into the lande and is called Vâ—rason These winds are so sure and certaine at their times as though men helde them in their handes whereby they make the land very temperate otherwise the heate would bee vnmeasurable It is likewise a strange thing that when it is winter vpon the coast of India that is from Diâ— to the Cape de Comorin on the other side of the Cape de Comorin on the coast called Choramandel it is cleane contrarie so that there it is summer and yet they lye all vnder one height or degrées and there is but 70. miles by land betwéene both the coasts and in some places but 2â— miles and which is more as men trauel ouer land from Cochin to S. Thomas which lyeth on the same coast of Choramandel and comming by the hill of Ballagatte where men must passe ouer to goe from the one coast vnto the other on the one side of the hil to the top thereof it is pleasant clear sunne shining weather and going downe on the other side there is rayne winde thunder and lightning as if the worlde should end and be consumed which is to be vnderstood that it chaungeth from the one side to the other as the time falleth out so that on the one side of the hilles it is Winter and on the other side Summer and it is not onely so in that place and countrey but also at Ormus on the coast of Arabia Felix by the Cape of Rosalgatte where the shippes lie it is very still cleare and pleasant water and faire summer time and turning about the Cape on the other side it is raine and wind with great stormes and tempests which with the times of the yeare doe likewise change on the other side and so it is in many places of the Orientall countries The sicknesses and diseases in Goa and throughout India which are common come most with the changing of the times and the weather as it is said before there raigneth a sicknesse called Mordexim which stealeth vppon men and handleth them in such sorte that it weakeneth a man and maketh him cast out all that he hath in his bodie and many times his life withall This sicknesse is very common killeth many a man whereof they hardly or neuer escape The bloody Flixe is there likewise very common and daungerous as the plague with vs. They haue many continuall feuers which are burning agues and consume mens bodies with extreame heate whereby within foure or fiue dayes they are eyther whole or dead This sicknes is common and very daungerous hath no remedie for the Portingalles but letting of blood but the Indians and heathens do cure themselues with hearbes Sanders
and other such like oyntments wherewith they ease themselues This sicknes consumeth many Portingalles euery yeare some because they haue little to eat lesse to drink of any meat or drink that is nourishing vse much company of womeÌ„ because y e land is naturall to prouoke theÌ„ thervnto as also y e most part of the soldiers by such means haue their liuing and their maintenance which often times costeth them both life and limme for although men were of iron or steele the vnchaste life of a woman with her vnsatiable lustes were able to grinde him to powder and swéep him away like dust which costeth many a mans life as the Kinges Hospitall can wel beare witnes wherein they lodge whensoeuer they are sicke where euery yeare at the least there entered 500. liue men and neuer come forth till they are dead and they are only Portingals for no other sick person may lodge therin I mean such as are called white men for the other Indians haue an Hospitall by themselues In this Hospitall they are verie well looked vnto by Iesuites and Gentlemen whereof euery month one of the best is chosen and appointed who personally is there by them and giueth the sicke persons whatsoeuer they will desire and sometimes spend more by foure or fiue hundred Duckats of their owne purses then the Kings allowance reacheth vnto which they doe more of pride and vaine glorie then for compassion onely to haue the praise and commendation of liberalitie It is no shame there to lie in the Hospitall for many men go thether willingly although they haue wherewith to keepe themselues in their houses and haue both wife and children These Hospitals in India are very necessarie for the Portingals otherwise they shold consume away like miserable men but by y e means they are relieued whatsoeuer they haue eyther sicknesse wounds secrete diseases pockes piles or any such like there they are healed and sometimes visited by the Viceroy himselfe when he thinketh vpon them and that his commodities come in He that wil not lie there and hath any woundes or priuie diseases may come thether twice euery day and be drest goe his way againe without any question or deniall When they die therein they are by two slaues carried into the Church yarde without eyther singing or ringing onely one man followeth after them throweth some holy water vppon the graue but if the sicke man chanceth to leaue any goods behind him and speaketh vnto the Priestes to bring him to his graue and to say Masses for his soule then they runne thither by heapes and burie him like a man of countenance eyther in the Church or chauncell according to his will and then hath hee singing and ringing enough But returning to our matter of sicknesse pockâ—s and piles with other secret diseases they are in those countries verie common not hidden or concealed for they thinke it no shame more then to haue any other disease They heale them with the roote China there are some that haue had them at the least thrée or foure times and are not any thing at all shunned or disliked for the same but dare both boast and bragge thereof It is not any thing perillous for the bodie insomuch that they had rather haue them and feare them lesse then any of the foresaid diseases The plague hath neuer béen in India neither is it known vnto the Indians but poysoning witchcraft such like whereby some lose their healthes and some their liues is their dayly exercise and very common with them The stone grauel and rupture raigneth much among them specially among married men by reason of the great quantitie of water that they drinke being giuen to all pleasure and riotousnes enioying all what their hearts desire sitting alwayes with their bellies open in their shirtes in a gallerie recreating themselues with the wind which cooleth them sometimes hauing a slaue to scratch and pare their nayles and féete another the head the third holds a Fan to driue away the flées Their is the common vse for two houres after noone where likewise they take an afternoones sléepe and euer as they haue thirst they bring him a dish of conserues or other comfets that the water shoulde not worke too much in his bodie but taste the better With such and the like exercises they do passe the day til night comes on so that commonly they haue all swollen bellies like Bacchus whereby the soldiers and other Indians call them Barrigois that is bellies or great bellies The day both Summer and Winter is there all of a length not much difference onely in the chaunge they haue about an houres difference The sunne riseth at sixe and setteth at sixe When it is noone commonly they haue the Sunne in the middle of the element iust ouer their heades and it giueth no shadowe although it stretcheth somewhat out as the Sunne taketh his course In Goa you may sée both the Poles of the world the North and South starres stande not farre aboue the Horizon And this shall suffice for the times and seasons of the yeare sicknesses and other diseases in India as breuitie requireth The 35. Chapter Of the money waight and measure of India and Goa THe principall and commonest money is called Pardaus Xeraphiins and is siluer but very brasse and is coyned in Goa They haue Saint Sebastian on the one side and thrée or foure arrowes in a bundle on the other side which is as much as thrée Testones or thrée hundred Reijs Portingall money and riseth and falleth little lesse or more according to the exchange There is also a kinde of reckoning of money which is called Tangas not that there is any such coined but are so named onely in telling fiue Tangas is one Pardaw or Xeraphin badde money for you must vnderstande that in telling they haue two kinds of money good and badde for foure Tangas good money are as much as fiue Tangas bad money Wherfore when they buy and sell they bargaine for good or badde money There is likewise a reckoning of Vintiins which is not likewise in coyne but onely named in telling of these foure good and fiue badde doe make a Tangas The lowest and smallest money is called Bazaruco these are fiftéene badde and eightéene good to a Vintiin and three Bazarucos are as much as two Reiâ—s Portingal money It is molten money of badde Tinne so that 375. Bazarucos are one Pardaw or Xeraphiin There is also a kinde of money out of Persia called Lariins which are long very good and fine siluer without any allay These are worth 105. and 108. Bazarucos as the exchaunge goeth little more or lesse They haue a kind of money called Pagodes which is of Gold of two or three sortes and are aboue eight Tangas in value They are Indian and Heathenish money with the picture of a Diuell vpon them and therefore are called Pagodes There is another kinde of gold money which
rents of the Portingales the Kings reuenewes in the land of Bardes Salsette and the Island of Goa so that often times for any question or strife they must appeare in law where they alwaies come without Counsellor or Atturney and knowe so well how to place their words according to the lawes of Portingall not onely temporall but spirituall that they are able to set downe and shew where it standeth written as well as any Counsellor could doe make their petitions requests without any mans aduise that the Portingales doe wonder at their readie wits as I haue oftentimes found in them When they are to take their othes to beare witnes with any man they are set within a circle made of ashes vpon the pauement where they stand still laying a fewe ashes on their bare heades holding one hand on their heads the other on their breasts and then in their own spéech sweare by their Pagode that they wil tell the truth without dissimulation whatsoeuer shall bee asked them for that they certainely beleeue they should be damned for euer if as then they should not say the truth but conceale it These are their principall customes and ceremonies yet are there many others which for breuity I omit The 39. Chapter Of the Canarijns and Corumbijns of India THe Canarijns Corumbjins are the Countrimen and such as deale with tilling the land fishing such like labors to get their liuings look vnto the IndiaÌ„ Palme trées whereon the Cocos doe grow There are some among them that doe nothing els but wash cloathes which is there vsed like another occupation they are called Maynattos there are others that are called Patamares which serue onlie for Messengers or Posts to carie letters from place to place by land in winter time when men can not trauaile by sea These Canarjins and Corumbjins are the most contemptible and the miserablest people of al India and liue very poorely maintaining theÌ„selues with little meate They eate all kinde of things except Kine Oxen Buffels Hogs and Hens flesh their religion is like the Decanijns and Canâ—ras for they are all of one Countrie and custome little differing they goe naked their priuie members onely couered with a cloth The womeÌ„ go with a cloth bound about their middles beneath their nauels and hanging downe to the middle of their thighes and the other end thereof they cast ouer their shoulders wherby halfe their breasts are couered They are in a manner blacke or of a darke browne colour many of them are Christians because their chiefe habitation and dwelling places are on the Sea side in the countries bordering vpon Goa for that the palme trées doe grow vpon the Sea coasts or vpon y e bankes by riuer sides The rice is sowed vppon low ground which in winter time is couered with water wherewith those Canarijns doe maintaine themselues these bring hennes fruit milke egges and other such like wares into the towne to sell They dwell in little straw houses the dores whereof are so low that men must créepe in and out their houshold stuffe is a mat vpon the ground to sléepe vpon and a pit or hole in the ground to heate their rice in with a pot or two to féeth it in and so they liue and gaine so much as it is a wonder For commonly their houses are full of small children which crall and créepe about all naked vntill they are 7. or eight yeares old then they couer their priuie members When the Women are readie to trauaile with Childe they are commonly deliuered when they are all alone and their husbands in the fieldes as it fortuned vppon a time as I and some other of my friends went to walke in the fieldes into the villages where the Canarijns dwell and hauing thirst I went to one of the Canarijns houses to aske some water therewith to refresh vs which they commonly drinke out of a Copper Canne with a spout thereat to drinke without touching it with their mouthes which is all the mettell they haue within their houses because I was verie thirstie I stooped downe and thrust my head in at the doore asking for some water where I espied a woman alone within the house tying her cloth fast about her middle before her hauing a woodden trough by the Portingales called Gamello full of water where she stood and washed a childe whereof as then she had newly bin deliuered without any help which hauing washt she laid it naked on the ground vpon a great Indian figge leafe and desired mee to stay and shee would presently giue mee water When I vnderstood by her that she had as then newly béene deliuered of that Child without any help I had no desire to drink of her water but went vnto another to aske water and perceiued the same woman not long after going about her house as if there had bin no such matter and the children are brought vp in that manner cleane naked nothing done vnto them but onely washed and made cleane in a little cold water and doe in that sort prosper and come vp as well as man would wish or as any child within these countries can do with all the tending they haue liue many times vntill they be a hundreth yeares old without any headach or toothach or loosing any of their téeth They weare onley a tuske of haire on the toppes of their heads which they suffer to grow long the rest of their haire is cut short they are very expert in swimming and diuing they row vp and downe the Riuers in boates called Almadias whereof some of theÌ„ are hewen out of a péece of wood and so narrow that a man can hardly sit in them and it chanceth oftentimes that they turne ouer ouer twice or thrice before they passe the riuer and then they leape out into the water and turne them vp and so powring out the water they get into them again They are so miserable that for a penny they would indure to be whipped and they eate so little that it séemeth they liue by the aire they are likewise most of them leane and weake of limmes of little strength very cowardes whereby the Portingales doe them great outrage and villanie vsing them like dogges and beasts In their mariages and deathes they obserue the manner of the Decanâ—ins Canaras as also in their religion ceremonies When the man is dead his body is burnt and the woman cuts her haire off and breaketh all her Iewels although they be but few small for they are most of glasse By the pictures following you may see the Decanijns or Canaras or the Marchantes of Goa also the Banianes or Gusurates of Cambaia with the Bramenes his wife in what sort all the women doe goe as wel Benianes as Decaniins Moores Indian women that inhabite the countrie How those of Goa and Ballagate kéepe their weddings among the Decaniins and Canaras with the manner how the
liuing women burne themselues with their dead husbands what estate the Embassador of Hidaleam holdeth in Goa how he is caried in the stréets also a true description of the Canariin with his wife the manner how the Indian heathenish children are brought vp also of the soldier of Ballagate which is called Lascariin with the heathenish whore called Balliadera who is a dancer because shee is commonly vsed therevnto in any feast or open playes are ready to be hired for a small péece of mony whereof many of theÌ„ dwell in Goa with the maner of the dwellings houses of the Decaniins Canariins Corumbiins how they row in the riuers with their scutes whereby I haue placed the maner of the boats vsed by those of the Malabares in Cochin so that I shall not néede to make a seuerall Chapter of them by themselues The 40. Chapter Of the Arabians and Abexiins dwelling in India THere are many Arabians Abexiins in India The Arabians obserue Mahomets law the Abexiins some are Mahometans some christians after their manner for they are of Prester Iohns land which stretcheth behind Mosambique in Aethiopia vnto the red sea and the riuer Nilus in Egypt and by their common traffique and conference with the Moores and Mahometans there are diuers of them infected with the same sect There are many of them in India that are slaues and captiues both meÌ„ and women which are brought thether out of Aethiopia sold like other Oriental Nations the Abexiins that are christians haue on their faces 4. burnt markes in manner of a Crosse one ouer their nose in the middle of the forehead betwéene both their eyes on each of their chéekes one betwéene their eies and their eares and one vnder their neather lip downe to the chin and this is their Baptisme when they are made Christians which they vse in stead of water These Abexiins and Arabians such as are frée doe serue in al India for saylers and sea faring meÌ„ with such marchants as saile from Goa to China Iapon Bengala Mallaca Ormus and all the Oriental coast for that there they haue no other saylers nor there are no other because the Portingalles although they serue for Saylers in the Portingalles shippes that come into India and haue neuer bene other in Portingale but Saylers yet are they ashamed to liue in that order and thinke it a great discredite vnto them together with a great diminishing of their authorities estimations which they account themselues to hold in India so that they giue themselues out for maisters of shippes and by their captaines are also called Pilots and chief Botesonnes but not lower for if they should descend but one step lower it would be a great blot and blemish vnto them all their liues after which they would not indure for anie thing in the world These Abexijns and Arabians serue for small money and being hyred are verie lowlie and subiect so that often times they are beaten and smitten not as slaues but like dogs which they beare very patientlie not once speaking a word they coÌ„monlie haue their wiues and children with them in the shippe wherein they are hyred which continually stay with them what voyage soeuer they make and dresse their owne meat which is Rice sodden in water with salt fish among it The cause why the women sayle in the ship is for that in Summer and not else their shippes goe to sea wheÌ„ they alwayes haue calme water and faire weather with good windes they haue commonlie but one Portingale or two for Captaine maister and Pilote and they haue a chief Boteson which is an Arabian which they cal Mocadon and he is ruler of the Arabians Aberijns that are saylers whome he hath vnder his subiection euen as if they were his slaues or subiects This Mocadon is he that conditioneth and maketh bargaine with the owners of the ship to haue so manie saylers and he receiueth the monethlie money for their wages and accounteth with the saylers particularlie but for gouernment of the ship he hath not to doe neither troubleth himselfe therewith The shippes when they sayle vse no caske for water because there is not any throughout all India nor any made there saue onely such as come out of Portingall and vsed in the Portingall shippes but in stéed of pypes they vse a great foure cornered woodden cesterne y t staÌ„deth by the main maste at the very foote therof vpon the keele of the shippe which is verie well pitched and made fast wherein they lade as much water as they thinke will serue them for their voyage The captaine maister or Pilote Marchants and passingers haue euerie man their meat by themselues and their water in great Indian pots called Martauans whereof in y e description of Pegu I haue alreadie spoken These people are so seruiceable and willing to doe any thing that if there chanceth but a hat or any other thing to be blowen ouer or fall into the water they will presently leape cloathes and all into the sea to fetch it again for they swimme like fishes when the ships lie within the hauen or riuer and that they will all goe on land then they goe into the boate and so row to shore which done one of them roweth backe againe with the boate which he tyeth fast to the ship and swimmeth to land and when they will goe abord again if any of the saylers be vnwilling to swimme to fetch the boate they are by the Mocadon or the maister with strokes compelled to doe it but they coÌ„monlie neuer stay till it cometh so â—arre but rather striue who shall be first in the water to shew their diligence and when they doe any thing abord as hayling ropes and other things they sing answere each other very sweetlie so y t it séemeth to be very good Musick Their exercise on land is all the day to drinke and to sit in tipling houses with their wiues and children and then they goe hand in hand through the stréets réeling here and there making a great noise with singing and gaping after their manner there womeÌ„ weare breeches like the Arabians and Mahometans The 41. Chapter Of the blacke people of Mosambique which are called Caffares and of their manners and customes THe black people or Caâ—fares of the land of Mosambique and all the coast of Ethiopia and within the laÌ„d to the Cape de bona SperaÌ„za go al naked although those of Mosambique that is the women do a little couer themselues which they do by meanes of the daylie conuersation they haue with the Portingales who for Gold siluer and Iuory bones and such like doe exchange Cotton lynnen brought out of India that within the land and to the cape they vse in those countries otherwise they couer themselues with the like apparell that Adam and Eua did weare in Paradice They are all as black as pitch with curled and singed hayre both on their heads and beards
which is very little their noses broad flat and thicke at the end great bigge lippes some haue holes both aboue vnder in their lippes and some times besides their mouthes through their cheekes wherein they thrust small bones which they esteeme a bewtifying there are some among them that haue their faces and all their bodies ouer rased and seared with irons and al figured like rased Sattin or Damaske wherein they take great pride thinking there are no fairer people then they in all the world so that when they see any white people that weare apparell on their bodies they laugh and mocke at them thinking vs to be monsters and vgly people and when they will make any deuelish forme and picture then they inuent one atfer the forme of a white man in his apparell so that to conclude they thinke and verily perswade themselues that they are the right colour of men and that we haue a false and counterfait colour There are among them that file their téeth as sharp as nedles which they likewise estéeme for a great ornament Many of them hold the law of Mahomet that is to say such as dwell on the coast of Abex or Melinde and round about those places as also in Mosambique by reason the red sea is so néere vnto them together with the Arabian Mahometans with whome they dayly traffique as they also did in al places IlaÌ„ds throughout the Orientall countries before the Portingales discouery and conquest of India whereby all the Orientall countrie where they trafficked was infected with their deuelish law and their poyson spread and throwne abroad in all places which is one of the principall occasions that the Gospell taketh no better effect in those countries their pestiserous law beeing as it were rooted and ingrafted in their mindes There are some of them that are become Christians since the Portingales came thether but there is no great paines taken about it in those couÌ„tries because there is no profite to be had as also that it is an infectious and vnholesome countrie and therefore the Iesuites are wary inough not to make any houses or habitations therein for they sée no great profite to be reaped there for them as they doe in India the Ilands of Iapan in other places where they find great quantities of riches with the sap whereof they increase much and fill their beehyues therewith to satisfy their thirsty insatiable desires most part of the Caffares liue like beastes or wild men yet they haue their houses in troups or heaps like couÌ„try vilages wher they asseÌ„ble dwel together and in euery Village they haue a Lord or King to whome they are subiect and obedient they are commonly in warres one with an other and one place or Village against an other and haue law and Iustice among them with some small Policie concerning their worldly affaires and gouernment but as concerning Religion and faith they know not what it meaneth but liue like beastes without any knowledge of God or any likelyhoode or shadow thereof they maintaine themselues by hunting which they doe in the woods where they take all that they finde they eate Elephants flesh and all other kind of wild beastes and of the Elephants téeth they make their weapons instéede of Iron and Stéele they doe commonly make warre one against the other and some of them eate mens flesh and some there are also that eate it not but such as deale with the Portingals When they take any man prisoner in the warres they sell him to the Portingales or exchaunge and barter him for Cotton linnen and other Indian wares They haue a custome among them that when they goe to warre against their enemies if they win the battaile or ouerthrow each other he that taketh or killeth most men is holden and accounted for the best and brauest man among them and much respected and to witnesse the same before their Kings of as many as they haue slaine or taken prisoners they cut off their priuâ—e members that if they bee let goe againe they may no more beget children which in processe of time might mischiefe them and then they drie them well because they should not rot which being so dried they come before their Kings with great reuerence in the presence of the principall men in the Village and there take these members so dried one by one in their mouthes and spit them on the ground at the Kings feete which the King with great thankes accepteth and the more to reward and to recompence their valour causeth them all to bee taken vp and giuen to them againe for a signe and token of honour whereby euer after from that time forwards they are accounted as Knights and they take all those members wherewith the King hath thus honoured them and tie them all vpon a string like a Bracelet or Chaine and when they marrie or go to any wedding or feasts the Bride or wiues of those knights doe weare that Chaine of mens members about their neckes which among them is as great an honour as it is with vs to weare the golden Fléece or the Garter of England and the Brides of such Knightes are therewith as proude as if they were the mightiest Queenes in all the world From Mosambique great numbers of these Caffares are caried into India and many times they sell a man or woman that is growne to their full strength for two or three Ducats When the Portingales ships put in there for fresh water and other necessaries then they are dearer by reason of the great numbers of buyers the cause why so many slaues and Captaines of all nations are brought to sell in India is because that euerie ten or twelue miles or rather in euery Village and towne there is a seuerall King and ruler of the people one of them not like an other neither in law spéech nor manners whereby most part of them are in warres one against the other and those that on both sides are taken prisoners they kéepe for slaues and so fell each other like beastes hee whose euill fortune is such that hee is one of the captiues must be patient wherein they shew not much dislike for when they are asked how they can content themselues with that yoke of bondage they answere that they can beare it well enough séeing their Planet will haue it so and for that their friends and neighbours shall reuenge their cause against those that haue done it Also in time of pouertie or dearth the fathers may sell their children as it happened in my time that there was such a dearth and scarsitie of victualls in the firme lande and countries bordering vppon Goa that the men of India came to Goa and other places where the Portingales are resident to sell their children in great numbers and for small prices to buy them victuals I haue séene Boyes of eight or ten yeares giuen in exchange for fiue or sixe measures of Rice and some
cleane golde of the bignes of a Puppet or a Baby solde in faires hard by the Church without the great doore stood within y e Earth a great foure cornered or square Cesterne he wed out of frée stone with staires on each side to goe downe into it full of gréene filthie and stinking water wherin they wash them selues when they meane to enter into the Church to pray From thence we went further and still as we went in euery place wee found Pagodes hewed out of hard stones standing in their holes of such liuely shapes and figures as wee tolde you before These stand in the waies vnder certaine couertures without the Churches and haue hard by each of them a small Cesterne of water cut out of the stone to wash their féete with halfe an Indian Nut that hath a handle and hangeth there to take vp water withall And this is ordained for the trauellers that passe by who commonly at euerie one of those Pagodes do fall downe and make their praiers and wash their féete in those Cesternes By the said Pagodes commonly doe stand two little Furnaces with a Calfe or Cow of stone before the which they set their offerings which are of such things as are to be eaten euerie man as his deuotion serueth which they think the Pagode eateth in the night but it is taken away by the Bramene We found in euerie place such offerings standing but we had little desire once to taste therof it looked so filthily and as we had sufficiently beholden their mishapen figures and monstrous Images we returned againe vnto the village wherein we saw the stone Church because the Bramene had aduertised vs that the same day about Euening the Pagode should be caried in procession to sport it selfe in the fieldes and to fetch a circuite which we desired to sée And about the time which he appointed they rung a little Bell which they had gotten of the Christians wherewith all the people began to assemble and tooke the Pagode out of his diabolicall Cell which with great reuerence they set in a Palamkin borne by the chiefe men of the towne all the rest with great deâ—otion following after with their vsual noyse and sounds of Trumpets and other instruments wherewith they went a reasonable way round about a field then brought him to the stone Cestern where washing him verie cleane although he were verie filthy stinking they caried him againe into his Cel leauing him shut herein withall his Lampes to make good cheare and hauing made a foule smoke and stincke about him and euery man left his offering behind him they went home to their houses leauing the Bramene alone who in stéed of the Pagode made good cheare at their costs with his wife and family This is the maner of their ceremonies and daily superstitions worshippings of false gods wherein the Deuill hath so blinded them that thereby they are without all doubt perswaded to obtaine eternall life and tell many miracles of their Idols whereby wee are mooued and put in mind to call to remembraunce how much herein we are bound to God and to giue him thankes that it hath pleased him to illuminate vs with the truth of his holy Gospel and that we are not borne or brought vp among those Heathens and diuelish Idolaters and to desire God that it would please him of his gracious goodnesse to open their eyes and to giue them the truth of his holy word among them as hee is our onely trust for they are in all things like vs made after Gods owne Image and that when his good pleasure is hee will loose them out of the bands of Sathan and giue both them and vs that which is most necessarie for our soules Amen The better to vnderstand the maner of their diuelish shapes and figures of Pagodes I haue hereunto annexed the picture thereof euen as they openly stand in the high wayes or hilles with a Cow or Calfe of stone by them also their Church called Meskita belonging to the Mahometans and Moores dweling in Malabar with the Cesterne of water wherein they wash themselues The 45. Chapter Of all the kinde of beastes Cattell and foules in India THere is ouer all India great store of Cattell as Oxen Kine Shéepe Hogges Goates Kids and such like and verie good cheape and in great aboundance although the flesh is not of so good a tast as that in Europe which procéedeth from the heate of the countrie therfore it is not much estéemed A man may buy the best Cow in Goa for fiue or sixe Pardawes Oxen are there little killed to eate but are most kept to til the land all other things as hogges shéepe and goates are sold after the rate Mutton is little estéemed of and not much vsed to be eaten for it is forbidden to such as are sicke the Hogs flesh is much better sounder which is rather permitted vnto sicke persons then Mutton Ther are shéepe in that countrie of fiue quarters in quantity for that the tayle is as great hath as much flesh vpon it as any of the quarters there are many Buffles but nothing good to be eaten vnles it be by poore people but their Milke is very good and is very well solde and ordinarily eaten for you shall sée the slaues Canarijns in great numbers all day going about the stréetes to sell the Milke of Buffles and Goates and excellent swéete Creame and fresh butter in small péeces They make likewise some small white Cheeses but they are very salte and drie wilde Bores some Hares Conies Harts and Hindes are there also to be found but not many Cockes Capons Pheasantes and Doues are there in great abundance and good cheape In the Island of Goa and there about are Sparrows and some other small birdes yet not many but on the coast of Cochin and Malabar there are very few Sparrows nor any such like small birdes There are in India many Battes and some of them so great that it is incredible to tell They doe great mischiefe to trées fruites and hearbes whereby the Canariins are constrained to set men to watch in their trées and yet they can hardly ridde them away The Indians eate them and say they are as good meat as a Partridge There is a most wonderfull number of black Crows which do much hurt and are so bold that oftentimes they come flying in at their windowes and take the meat out of the dish as it standeth vpon the table before them that are set downe to eate and as I my selfe sate writing aboue in a chamber of the house the windowes being open one of those Crowes flew in at the window and picked the cotton one of mine Inke horne and blotted all the paper that lay on my table do what I could to let him They sitte commonly vppon the Buffles backes and pecke off their haire so that you shal find very few Buffles that haue any haire vpon their backes and
therefore to auoide the Crowes they get themselues into marishes and watrie places where they stand in the water vppe to the neckes otherwise they could neuer be rid of them There are likewise great numbers of Rattes and some as bigge as young Pigges so that the Cattes dare not touch them Sometimes they digge downe the houses for that they vndermine the walles foundations through and through wherby many times the houses fall downe and are spoyled There is another sort of Rattes that are little and reddish of haire They are called sweet smelling Rattes for they haue a smell as if they were full of Muske Of Ants or Pismires there is so great aboundance throughout al India and so noysome that it is incredible to such as haue not seene it for that men may set nothing whatsoeuer it be that is to be eaten or fattie nor yet their clothes nor linnen but you shall presently find at the least a thousand vpon it and in the twinckling of an eye they wil presently consume a loafe of bread wherefore it is the manner throughout India to make all the Cubbords wherein they kéep their victualls and chests where their linnen and apparrell lyeth with foure féete or pillers and vnder euery foot or piller a stone or woodden Cestern full of water and place the Cubbord or chest in the middle of the roome not néete the wall whereby they cannot come at it otherwise it would be spoyled and if they do neuer so little forget to powre water into the Cesternes if it be but a Pater noster while presently ther will be so many Pismires crawling all ouer it that it is wonderfull so that it séemeth to bee a curse or plague of God sent vppon that countrey There are some likewise that vse such Cesternes of water vnder their bedstéed because they wold not be troubled with them as they lie in their beds and also vnder their tables Some men which kéep Canary birds or such small fowles that are brought thither from Portingall or out of Turkey and Persia for their pleasures are forced to set them on a sticke or pearch made for the purpose with a Cesterne of water vnder it otherwise it would presently be killed by the Pismires and though it hangeth in the top of the house yet they will come at it if it haue a string to hold it by The soldiers and poore people that haue not the meanes to buy Cubbordes with Cesternes put the bread and other victuaâ—les which they leaue which is not ouer much into a cloth tyed on knots and hang it on a nayle against a wall and make a circle about it of Charcoale so that the Pismires cannot get ouer nor come at it There is another sorte of Pismires which are almost a finger long and reddish of colour they runne into the fields do great hurt to the herbes fruites and plants Moathes wormes which créepe and eate through mens cloathes are there in great aboundance whereby men must vse no more cloathes nor linnen in those countries then that he necessarily and dayly weareth on his back otherwise they are presently moath-eaten and spoyled They can hardly kepe any paper or bokes from wormes which are like eare wormes but they do often spoyle consume many papers euidences of great importance There are also many Wall-lyce There is a kind of beast that flyeth twice as bigge as a Bee and is called Baratta These creatures also do much hurt and are commoÌ„ly in Sugar Hony Butter Oile and al fatte wares and swéet meats Many of them likewise come into their chestes among their clothes and linnen which they doe also spoyle and spot They are in great numbers and verie hurtfull There can bee nothing so close shut or made fast but they wil get in spoile it for where they lie or be they spot all things with their egges which stick as fast as sirop vpon a paper so that ther may bee estéemed they are to draw they binde the fat or packe fast with a rope that he may féele the waight thereof and then the keeper speaketh vnto him whereuppon hee taketh the corde with his snout and windeth it about his teeth and thrusteth the end into his mouthâ— so draweth it hanging after him whether they desire to haue it If it be to be put into a boate then they bring the boate close to the shore of the Key and the Elephant putteth it into the boate himselfe and with his snout gathereth stones together which he laieth vnder the fat pipe or packe with his teeth striketh thrusteth the packe or vessell to see if it lie fast or not It will draw any great shot or other Iron work or mettall being made fast vnto it be it neuer so heauie they draw fustes small Gallies and other great boats as Caruels and such like as easily out of the water vpon the land as if no man were in them so that they serue their turnes there euen as our slids or carts with horses doe here to carrie our wares and marchandises their meat is rice and water they sléepe like kine oxen horses and all foure footed beastes and bow their knées and all their members as other beasts doe In winter when it beginneth to raine then they are vnquiet and altogether mad so that their kéepers cannot rule them and then they are let some whether out of the towne to a great trée and there tyed vnto it by the legs with a great iron chaine where they cary him meate and so hee lieth in the open aire as long as he is mad which is from Aprill to September all the Winter time when it raineth and then he commeth to him selfe and beginneth to serue againe as tamely that a maÌ„ may lie vnder his bellie so you doe him no hurt but he that hurteth him hee must take héede for they neuer forget when any man doth them iniurie vntill they be reuenged Their téeth which is the Iuor bone is much vsed in India specially in Cambaia whereof they make many curious péeces of workemanship the women weare manillas or arme bracelets therof ten or twelue about each arme whereby it is there much worne and are in great numbers brought out of Aethiopia Mosambique and other places In the Island of Seylon and Pegu they fight most vpon Elephants and bind swords vpon their teeth they haue likewise woodden Castles vppon their backes wherein are fiue or sixe men that shoot out of them with bowes or peeces and also cast out wildfire They doo no other hurt but onely serue to put the enemie out of order and to scatter them out of their rankes but if any one of them once turneth his backe then they all begin to turne runne ouer their owne people and put them all out of order They are very fearefull of a rat or a mouse and also of the Pismyres because they feare they would créepe into their snouts They are likewise
afraide of gunne shot and of fire vnlesse by length of time they be vsed vnto them When they haue the companie one of the other the male Elephant standeth vpon the higher ground and the female somewhat lower As they goe along the way although you see them not you may heare them a farre off by the noyse of their féet and clapping of their eares which they coÌ„tinually vse They are as swift ingoing almost as a horse and are very proud and desirous of honour When there is any great feast or holiday kept in Goa with solemne procession commonly the Elephants go with them the yong before and the old behind and are all painted vppon their bodies with the Armes and Crosses of Portingall haue euery one fiue or six trumpetters or players vpon the Shalmes sitting vppon them that sound very pleasantly wherewith they are as well pleased and goe with as great grauitie and in as good order as if they were men It hapned in Goa that an Elephant shuld draw a great fust out of the water vnto the land which fust was so great and heauie that hee could not doe it alone so that they must haue another to help him whereupon the keeper chid him vsing many hard wordes saying that he was idle and weak and that it would be an euerlasting shame for him that they must fetch another to helpe him wherewith the Elephant was so desperate that he thrust away his fellow which was brought to help him and begâ—n freshly againe to draw with so great a force more then hee was well able to doe that with extreame labour hee burst and fell downe starke dead in the place At such time as I was to make my voyage froÌ„ Cochin to Portingall the Rudder of our ship was out of order so that it must of force be brought on land to make it fit againe and so it was drawn to the riuer side at the sterne of the boat which the Elephant should draw on land vppon two bordes that it might slide vp and because it was heauie as the Rudder of a ship of 1400. or 1600. tunnes requireth as also that the Elephant was as yet but yong and not growne to his ful strength so that he could not draw it out alone yet he did the best hee could but seeing hee could not doe it he fell on his fore legges and began to crie and weepe that the teares ran out of his eyes and because many of vs stoode vpon the shore to behold this sight the kéeper began to chide him and with hard words to curse him because he shamed him thus in presence of so many men not to be able to draw vp such a thing but what strength or labour soeuer the Elephant vsed he could not doe it alone but when they brought another Elephant to help him they both together drewe it halfe out of the water so that it lay partly vppon the bordes The first Elephant perceiuing that with his head and teeth thrust the other Elephant away and would haue no more helpe but drew it out himselfe whereby it may bee considered that they are in vnderstanding and desire of commendation like vnto men They are likewise very thankefull and mindfull of any good done vnto them When new yeares day coÌ„meth their kéepers vse of coÌ„mon custome to aske new yeres gifts of the Viceroy the Archbishop and other gouernours and Gentlemen and then the Elephants come to the dore and bow their heads downe and when any thing is giuen they knéele on their knees with great lowlinesse and thankefulnesse for the good déedes so done vnto their keepers which they thinke to bee done vnto themselues They vse as they passe by such houses to bow their heads at the dores as also when they passe by the Church doores and by Crosses which their Masters teach them They haue a custome that they goe often into the market where herbes are sold as Reddish Lettice Colworts and such like stuffe and those that are liberall to the Elephant doe vse to throw something before him Among the rest there was one Hearb wife which alwaies vsed to throw something of her wares before the Elephant Now wheÌ„ the time came on that the Elephant groweth mad as I said before they vse to goe with them thrée or foure dayes or a weeke about the stréets before they bind them vp beeing as then but halfe mad to ask something of euery body for the féeding of the mad ElephaÌ„t in the winter time And going thus about the stréetes the master is not able to rule him for hee runneth about with his head downeward and by his roaring giueth the people warning to beware and when he findeth or séeth no man hee leapeth and ouerthroweth whatsoeuer he méeteth withall whereby heâ— maketh great sport and pastime much like to the baiting of Oxen in Spaine which neuer ceaseth vntil one two or more of them be slaine the like rule is kept with the mad Elephant in India It chanced in this running about that the Elephhnt ran through the stréets and in haste at vnwares came into the market throwing downe all that was in his way whereat euery man was abasht and leauing their ware ranne to saue themselues from being ouer run by the Elephant and by meanes of the noyse and prease of people they fell one ouer another as in such cases is commonly seene Among them was this woman that alwaies vsed to giue the Elephant some thing to eat which had a little childe in the market lying by her in a basket and by the hastie rising vp and throng of the people the woman ran into a house not hauing time to snatch vp her Child and take it with her and when the Elephant was alone in the market place where he roared vp and downe ouerthrowing all thinges that were before him hee came by the child that as I said lay still in the market and as euery man looked specially the mother which cried out verily thought that the Elephant had taken it and cast it on his shoulder and spoiled it as he did all other thinges Hee on the contrarie notwithstanding all his madnesse béeing mindfull of the good will and liberalitie of the childes mother dayly vsed vnto him tooke vp the child handsomlie and tenderly with his snout and layde it softly vpon a stall by a shop side which done hee began againe to vse the same order of stamping crying and clapping as he had done at the first to the great wondering of al that beheld it specially to the ease and ioy of the mother that had recouered her child sound and well againe These and such like examples do often happen in India which would be too long to rehearse and therfore I thought good onely to set these thrée or foure before your eyes as things worthy memorie thereby to teach vs to bee mindfull of all good déeds done vnto vs and with thankfulnes to requite them considering that these
such like chances happen dayly by those fishes in India as well in the sea as in the Riuers specially among the Fishers for Pearles whereof many loose their liues In the Riuer of Goa in Winter time when the mouth of the Riuer was shut vp as commonly at that time it is the fishermen tooke a fish of a most wonderfull and strange forme such as I thinke was neuer seene eyther in India or in any other place which for the strangenes therof was presented to my Lord the Archbishop the picture whereof by his commandement was painted and for a wonder sent to the King of Spaine It was in bignes as great as a middle sized Dogge with a snout like a hogge small eies no eares but two holes where his eares should bee it had foure féet like an Elephant the tayle beginning somewhat vppon the backe broad and then flatte and at the verie end round and somewhat sharpe It ranne a a long the hall vppon the flore and in euerie place of the house snorting like a hogge The whole body head taile legs being couered with sâ—ales of a thumb breadth harder than Iron or steele Wee hewed and layd vppon them with weapons as if men should beate vpon an Anuill and when wee stroke vppon him hee rouled himselfe in a heape head and féete altogether so that hee lay like a round ball wee not beeing able to iudge where hee closed himselfe together neyther could wee with anie instrument or strength of hands open him againe but letting him alone and not touching him hee opened himselfe and ranne away as I said before And because I am now in hand with Fishes of India I will here declare a short and true Historie of a Fish although to some it may seeme incredible but it standeth painted in the Viceroyes Pallace in India and was set downe by true and credible witnesses that it was so and therefore it standeth there for memorie of a wonderfull thing together with the names and surnames of the ship Captaine day yere when it was done and as yet there are many men liuing at this day that were in the same shippe and aduenture for that it is not long since and it was thus That a ship sayling from Mosambique into India and they hauing faire weather a good fore winde as much as the Sayles might beare before the winde for the space of fourteene dayes together directing their course towards the Equinoctiall line euery day as they tooke the height of the Sunne in stead of diminishing or lessening their degrées according to the Winde and course they had and held they found them selues still contrarie and euery day further backewards then they were to the great admiration and wondering of them all and contrarie to all reason and mans vnderstanding so that they did not only wonder theraf but were much abasht beeing stedfastly perswaded that they were bewitched for they knew very well by experience that the streame or course of the water in those countries did not driue them backe nor withholde them contrarie to all Art of Nauigation whereupon they were all in great perplexity and feare standing still and beholding each other not once knowing the cause thereof At y e last the chiefe Boteson whoÌ„ they call the masters mate looking by chance ouerbord towards the beakhead of the ship he espied a great broad taile of a Fish that had winded it selfe as it were about the beake-head the body therof beeing vnder the keele and the heade vnder the Ruther swimming in that manner and drawing the shippe with her against the wind and their right course whereby presently they knewe the cause of their so going backewards so that hauing at the last stricken long with staues and other weapons vppon the fishes taile in the ende they stroke it off and thereby the fish left the ship after it had layne 14 dayes vnder the same drawing the ship with it against wind and weather for which cause the Viceroy in Goa caused it to be painted in his pallace for a perpetuall memory where I haue often read it with the day and time and the name both of the shippe and Captaine which I can not well remember although it bee no great matter There are many other fishes in those seas and riuers In the Riuer of Bengala called Gâ—aâ— and by Malacca there are Crocodiles and other sea Serpents of an vnspeakeable greatnes which often times doe ouerturne smal fisher boates and other sentes and deuoure the men that are therein and some of them creeping out of the water vnto the lande do snatch vppe diuers men which they hale after them and then kill them and eate them as it dayly happeneth in those Countries There are by Malacca certaine fish shelles found on the shore much like Scalop shelles so great and so heauie that two strong men haue enough to doe with a Leauer to draw one of them after them Within them there is a fish which they of Malacca do eate There were some of those shelles in the ballast of the shippe that came from Malacca kept company with vs from the Island of S. Hâ—lenâ— to the Islande of Tercera where the shippe was cast away and some of the shelles taken out of her which the Iesuites of Malacca had sent vnto Lisbone to set in the wals of their church and Cloyster which they there had caused to bee made and most sumptuously built The like happened to a shippe called S. Peter that sayled from Coâ— towardes Portingall that fell vpon a sande which at this day is called after the same ships name S. Peters sande lying from Goa South Southeast vnder 6. degrees vpon the South side where it was cast away but all the men saued themselues and of the woode of the shippe that was cast away they made a small Barke or Caruell wherewith they all arriued in India while they were busied about building of their ship they found such great Crabbes vpon that sand and in so great numbers that they were constrained to make a sconce and by good watch to defend themselues from theÌ„ for that they were of an vnreasonable greatnes so that whomsoeuer they got vnder their claws it cost him his life this is most true and not long since done for that in the same shippe wherein I came out of India into Portingal there were two of the Saylors that had beene in the same shippe called S. Peter and affirmed it for a truth as it is likewise paynted in diuers places in Goa for a perpetual memory which I thought good to set downe to shewe the strangenesse of those fishes and it is to be thought that there are many other fishes and sea monsters as yet to vs not known which are dayly found by such as continually vse to sea and doo often meete with them And this shall be sufficient for the fishes sea monsters of India The 49. Chapter Of all fruits trees plants and common hearbs
in India and first of a certain fruit called Ananas ANanas by the Canarijns called Ananasa by the Brasilians Nana and by others in Hispaniola Iaiama by the Spaniards in Brasilia Pinas because of a certain resemblance which the fruite hath with the Pineapple It commeth out of the Prouince of Sancta Croce first brought into Braâ—lia theÌ„ to the Spanish Indies and afterwardes into the East Indies where nowe they grow in great abundance of the bignes of Citrones or of a common Melon They are of a faire colour of a yellow greene which greennes when it is ripe vadeth away It is sweet in taste pleasant in smell like to an Abricot so that by the very smell of them a man may know the houses wherein these fruites are kept A far off they shew like Artichâ—kes but they haue no such sharpe prickes on their leaues the plants or stalkes whereon they grow are as bigge as a Thistle and haue a roote also like a Thistle wheron groweth but one Nut in the middle of the stalke and rounde about it certaine small stalkes whereon some fruite likewise doeth often times grow I haue had some of the Slips here in my garden that were brought mee out of Brasilia but our colde countrey could not brooke them This fruite is hot and moist and is eaten out of wine like a Peach light of disgesture but superfluous in nourishing It inflameth and heateth and consumeth the gums by reason of the small threedes that run through it There are many sortes of this fruite among the Brasilians which according to the difference of their speeches haue likewise differeÌ„t names whereof three kindes are specially named and written of The first called Iaiama which is the longest the best of taste and the substance of it yellow The second Bomama that is white within and not very sweet of taste The thirde Iaiagna which is whitish within and tasteth like Renish Wine These fruites likewise do grow some of themselues as if they were planted and are called wilde Ananasses and some growe in gardens whereof we now make mention The wilde growe vppon stalkes of the length of a pike or Speare rounde and of the bignesse of an Orange ful of thorns the leaues likewise haue sharpe pricks and round about full of soft 〈…〉 the fruite is little eaten although they are of an indifferent pleasant taste The whole plantes with the rootes are ful of iuyce which being taken about seueÌ„ or eight of the clocke in a morning and drunke with Sugar is holden for a most certaine remedie against the heate of the liuer and the kidneyes against exulcerated kidneyes mattery water and excoriation of the yarde The Arabians commend it to be good against Saynt Anthonies fire and call it Queura He that is desirous to reade more hereof let him reade Costa in the proper Chapter of Ananas and Ouâ—edius in the eight booke and eighteenth Chapter and Theuetius in his obseruations of America in the six and fortieth Chapter Ananas preserued in Sugar are like Cocumbers whereof I haue had many Ananas is one of the best fruites and of best taste in all India but it is not a proper fruit of India it selfe but a 〈…〉 fruite for it was first brought by the â—ortingalles out of Brasillâ— so that at the 〈◊〉 it â— is sold for a noueltie at a 〈…〉 and sometimes more but now there are so many growen in the Countrey that they are very good cheape The time when they are rype is in Lent for then they are best and sweetest of taste They are as bigge as a Melon and in forme like the heade of a Distaffe without like a Pine apple but softe in cutting of colour redde and greenish They growe about halfe a fadome high from the grounde not much more or lesse the leaues are like the Hearbe that is brought out of Spayne called Aloe or Semper viua because it is alwayes greene and therefore it is hanged on the beames of houses but somewhat smaller and at the endes somewhat sharpe as if they were cut out When they eate them they pull off the shell and cutte them into shee s or peeces as men desire to haue them drest Some haue small kernelles within them like the kernelles of Apples or Peares They are of colour within like a Peach that is ripe and almost of the same taste but in sweetenesse they surpasse all fruites The iuyce thereof is like swéete Muste or newe Renish Wyne a man can neuer satisfie himselfe therewith It is very hotte of nature for if you let a knife sticke in it but halfe an houre long when you draw it forth again it will bee halfe eaten vppe yet it doeth no particular hurte vnlesse a man shoulde eate so much thereof that hee surfet vpon them as many such greedie and vnreasonable men there are which eate all thinges without any measure or discretion The sicke are forbidden to vse them The common way to dresse the common Ananasses is to cut them in broad round cakes or slyces and so being stooped in wine it is a very pleasant meat The 50. Chapter Oâ— Iaqua or Iaacca THis fruite groweth in Calecut and in some other places of India neere to the Sea and vpon ryuers or waters sides It is a certaine fruite that in Malabar is called Iaca in Canara and Gusurate Panar and Panasa by the Arabians Panax by the Persians Fanax This fruite groweth vpon great trees not out of the branches like other fruites but out of the body of the tree aboue the earth and vnder the leaues The leaues are as bigge as a mans hand greenish with a thick hard veine that goeth cleane thorough the length of them The smallest of this fruite specially that which groweth in Malabar and is the best of all is greater then our greatest Pumpians I meane of Portingall They are without couered with a hard shell of colour greene otherwise it is much like the Pine apple saue onely that the shell or huske seemeth to be set ful of pointed Diamants which haue certaine greene and short hookes at the endes but at the verie points are blackish and yet are neither sharpe not pricking although they seeme so to be These fruites are like Melons and sometimes greater outwardly greene and inwardly Yelow with many soft prickles apparrelled as it were like a Hedgehog Those that grow in Goa are not so good nor of so good a taste as those in Malabar This fruit being ripe which is commonly in December smelleth very sweete and is of two sorts wherof the best is called Barca the other Papa which is not so good and yet in handling it is soft like the other The best cost about 40. Maruedies which is somewhat more then a Ryall of plate and being ripe they are of a blackish colour and with a hard huske the outward part thereof which compasseth the Nut is of many tastes some times it tasteth like a Melon somtimes like a Peach and
inwardly yealowish but in cutting it is waterish yet some not so much they haue a verie pleasant taste better then a Peach and like the Annanas which is y e best y e most profitable fruit in al India for it yeeldeth a great quātity for food sustenance of the countrie people as Oliues do in Spaine and Portingale they are gathered when they are gréene and conserued and for the most part salted in pots and commonlie vsed to be eaten with Rice sodden in pure water the huske being whole and so eaten with salt Mangas which is the continuall food for their slaues and cōmon people or else salt dryed fish in stéed of Mangas without bread for Rice is in diuers places in stéed of bread These salted Mangas are in cutting like the white Spanish Oliues and almost of the same taste but somewhat sauorie and not so bitter yet a little sowre and are in so great abundance that it is wonderful there are others that are salted and stuffed with small péeces of gréene Ginger and Garlike sodden those they call Mangas Recheadas or Machar they are likewise much vsed but not so common as the other for they are costlie and more esteemed these are kept in pots with Oyle and Vineger salted The season when Mangas are ripe is in Lent and continueth till the Moneth of August The 52. Chapter Of Caions THis fruite groweth on great trees not much vnlike Apple trees but the yong trees haue leaues like Lawrell or Bayleaues they are of a pale greene and thicke with white blossoms like Oringe trees but thicker of leaues yet not so sweete of smell The fruit is in greatnesse and forme like a Goose Egge or a great Apple verie yellow of good sauor moyst or spungie within and ful of Iuice like Lemmons but without kernels sweete of taste but yet harsh in a mans throate they seeme not to haue beene common in East India but brought thether from Brasillia where those Nuts are much eaten although Theuet in his description of America 61. Chapter writeth otherwise At the end of this fruit groweth a Nut of forme like the Kydney of a Hare whereof I had many brought me by a Pylot of Portingall of an Ash colour or when they are ripe of a reddish Ash colour These Nuts haue two partitions betweene which two partitions there is a certain spongious fattie matter like Oyle hotte and sharpe but in the innermost part thereof is a white kernell very pleasant to eate like Pistaccios with a gray skin ouer it which is pulled off These Nuts being a little rosted are eaten in that sort vsed to prouoke lust The fruit and also the Nuts are vsed in bankets being eaten with wine without wine because of their good taste They are good for the weaknesse of the Maw and against perbreaking and loathing of meate but such as will not vse them to that ende doe eate them only dipped or steeped in a little water the sharpe Oyle betweene both the partitions is verie good for Saint Anthonies fire and flashing in mens faces The Brasilians vse it against scurffes this tree was at the first planted of the very Nut but the first and greatest fruite had neither seede nor kernell some thinke it to bee a kind of Anacardy because it is very like it for the sharpe iuyce that is betweene the partitions Reade more hereafter in Carolus Clusius his obseruations vppon Graciam first Booke and third Chapter Cajus groweth on trées like apple trées and are of the bignes of a Peare at one end by the stalk somewhat sharp and at the head thicker of a yelowish colour being ripe they are soft in hādling they grow very like aples for wher the apples haue a stalke these Cajus haue a Chesnut as big as the fore ioynt of a mans thumb they haue an other colour and fashion then the Chesnuts of Iaqua and are better more sauorie to eate but they must be rosted within they are white like y e Chesnuts of Europa but haue thicker shelles which are of colour blewish and dark gréene When they are raw and vnrosted you must not open them with your mouth for as soone as you put them to your mouth they make both your tongue and your lippes to smart whereby such as know it not are deceiued wherefore you must open their shelles with a knife or rost them and then they wil péele This fruite at the end wher the stalke groweth in the eating doth worke in a mans throate and maketh it swel yet it is of a fyne taste for it is moyst and full of iuice they are commonlie cut in round slices and layd in a dish with water or wyne and salt throwne vpon them for so they do not worke so strōglie but are verie good and sauorie to eate the time when they are ripe is in Lent and in Winter time like Mangas but not so good as Mangas or Ananas and of lesse account They are likewise in great numbers ouer all India The 53. Chapter Of Iambos IN India ther is an other fruit that for the beautie pleasant taste smell and medicinable vertue thereof is worthie to bee written of and is of great account in India being first brought out of Malacca into India The tree whereon this fruite groweth is as great as the greatest Orange tree in all Spaine with manye branches which spread verie broade and make much shadow and is faire to behold The bodie and great branches thereof haue an ash colour-gray barke the leaues are faire soft longer then the breadth of a hand they are somewhat like the point of a Speare or Pike with a thicke threed or veine in the midle and many small veines or branches in the sides outwardly verie greene and inwardly somewhat bleaker with blossomes of a liuely darke Purple colour with many streekes in the middle verie pleasant to beholde and of taste like the twynings or tendrels of a Vine The fruite is as bigge as a Peare or as some are of opinion of the bignesse and colour of a great Spanish Wal-nut they tooke their name of a King Ther are two sorts of this fruit one a browne red seeming as though it were blacke most part without stones and more sauory then the other which is a palered or a pale Purple colour with a liuely smell of Roses and within it hath a little white hard stone not verie rounde much like a Peach stone white and couered with a rough skin This is not ful so great as the other yet are they both fit for such as haue daintie and licorous mouthes They smel like sweete Roses they are colde and moyst and altogether soft couered with a thinne Rinde which cannot be taken off with a knife The Iambos tree taketh deepe roote within foure yeares after it is set doth beare fruit and that many times in one yeare and is neuer without fruite or blossomes for that commonly euerie branch hath both
ripe and vnripe fruit and blossomes all at once contrarie to the nature of all other trees and euerie day as the blossomes fall whereby the earth vnder it seemeth to bee painted red there growe new on and when some of the fruite begin to grow then others are almost ripened and others being ripe are greater The tree being lightly shaken the ripe fruit falleth easily off by reaching the nether bowes This fruite is ordinarily eaten before other meate be set vpon the Table and also at all times of the day The Malabares and Canarijns call this fruite Iamboli the Portingales inhabiting there Iambos the Arabians Tupha Indi the Persians Tuphat the Turkes Alma the trees are called by the Portingales Iambeiro The blossomes and the fruite are conserued with Suger and are vsed for hotte Agues to câ—le mans thirst The trées whereon the Iambos do grow are as great as Plumtrees and verie like vnto them it is an excellent and a verie pleasant fruite to looke on as bigge as an apple it hath a red colour and somewhat whitish so cleare and pure that it seemeth to be painted or made of waxe it is very pleasant to eate and smelleth like Rose water it is white within and in eating moyst and waterish it is a most daintie fruite as well for bewtie to the sight as for the swéet sauour and taste it is a fruite that is neuer forbidden to any sicke person as other fruites are but are freelie giuen vnto sicke men to eate that haue a desire thereunto for it can doe no hurt The blossomes are likewise very faire to the sight and haue a swéet smell they are red and somewhat whitish of colour This trée beareth fruite thrée or foure tymes euery yeare and which is more wonderfull it hath commonly on the one side or halfe of the trée ripe Iambos and the leaues fallen off and on the other side or half it hath all the leaues and beginneth againe to blossome and when that side hath fruite and that the leaues fall off then the other side beginneth again to haue leaues and to blossome and so it continueth all the yeare long within they haue a stone as great and very néere of the same fashion as the fruite of the Cipres trée The 54. Chapter Of other fruites in India THere is a fruite called Iangomas which groweth on trées like Cherrie trées they are in bignes like smal rouÌ„d pluÌ„mes of a darke red colour they haue no stones in them but some small kernels they are of taste much like pluÌ„mes whereof there are very many but not much esteemed of The fruit Iangomas groweth on a tree not vnlike in greatnesse and fashion to our Plum trees as also in leaues and white blossoms saue onely that these trees are ful of Prickles or thornes they grow of them selues in euerie place also in gardens at Bachaim Chaul and Balequala the fruits are like Sorben smal and round they are harsh in the throat like Slowes or vnripe Plums and haue no stone within them but some small kernels when they come first out they are like Pistaccios The fruit being ripe must first bee brused and crushed with mens fingers before it can bee eaten yet it looseth thereby none of his vertue of binding and therefore they are thought good to stop the Flux withall although they are but little esteemed by the Indians They say that this fruite is eaten by certaine foules and being voyded out againe set in the ground together with the same Birdes dung it wil grow the sooner and be the fruitfuller There is an other fruite called Carambolas which hath 8 corners as bigge as a smal aple sower in eating like vnripe plums and most vsed to make Conserues The fruite which the Malabares and Portingales call Carambolas is in Decan called Camarix in Canar Camarix and Carabeli in Malaio Bolumba and the Persians Chamaroch It groweth on trees that are like Quince-trees hauing leaues greater and longer then our apple-trees verie greene and bitter of taste with small blossomes of fiue leaues a peece reddish without any white and of no speciall smel but faire to the eye and of taste like Sorrell The fruit is like a great Hondâ—s bey long and yellow and as if it were parted into foure parts the Coddes are somewhat deepe presse the fruite together in the middle they haue some small kernels which for the sharp tast are pleasant to eate This fruit is conserued in Suger much eaten in medicines and with meate The ripe are vsed for hotte Feauers in steede of Sirop of Vineger which wee vse in these countries The Canarijns vse the Iuyce with other medicines there growing which are mixed with it to make colours thereof wherewith they take spots and blemishes out of mens eyes Costa writeth that he knew a midwife in India which vsed this fruite dryed and beaten to poulder with Bettele leaues to make women to auoide their dead fruite out of their wombes this fruite is alâ—o kept in pickle because it is pleasing to the taste and procureth an appetite There are yet other fruites as Brindoijns Durijndois Iamboloeâ— Mangestains and other such like fruites but because they are of small account I thinke it not requisite to write seuerallie of them but onelie of two of them Fructuum Mangas Cajus Iambos Iaquas et Annanas qui in India nascuntur qui esusuaves et Zimziberis cujus e copia magna illic vilitas virentis viva imago Die fruyten die in Indien wassen en seer lieffelick zyn om te eten al 's Mangas Cajus Iambos Iaquas en Annanas met die Gember welcke om der menichte weynich geacht is affconterfeytinge naert leeven gelyck die staen en wassen The Barkes of these trées are kept and brought ouer sea hither and are good to make Vineger withall as some Portingales haue done Of the fruit called Iambolijns The trees that beare this fruit haue a barke like Lentiscus or the Mastick tree to the shew much like a Mirtle but in leaues like the Arbutus of Italy It groweth of it self in the wilde fields the fruit is like great ripe Oliues of Cordoua and harsh in a mans throate This fruite is little vsed by Physitions but is much kept in pickle and eaten with sodden Ryce for they procure an appetite to meate but this fruit as also Iaka is by the Indians not accounted among wholesome fruits There is also a fruite that came out of the Spanish Indies brought from beyond y e Philippinas or Lusons to Malacca froÌ„ thence to India it is called Papaios and is very like a Mellon as bigge as a mans fist and will not grow but alwaies two together that is male and female the male trée neuer yéeldeth any fruite but onely the female and when they are deuided set apart one from the other then they yéeld no fruite at all It is a trée of the hight of a man with great leaues
This fruite at the first for the strangenes thereof was much estéemed but now they account not of it There are likewise in India some fig trées of Portingal although the fruite doth neuer come to good perfection Oranges Lemons Citrons and such like fruite are throughout all India in great abundance and for goodnes and taste surpasse those of Spaine Grapes are not ther to be found but onelie vpon some houses as we haue theÌ„ in netherlaÌ„d yet against Christmas and Lent there are raysins brought into Goa by the Decanaes and Indians out of the firme land and from Ballagate but they are not so good as those in Spaine and verie fewe they are but for price as good cheape as other fruites There are also in India manie Melons but not so good as those in Spaine for that they must be eaten with Suger if you wil haue any swéetnes in theÌ„ but ther is an other sort like Melons called Patecas or Angurias or Melons of India which are outwardlie of a darke gréene colour inwardlie white with blacke kernels they are verie waterish and hard to byte and so moyst that as a man eateth them his mouth is full of water but yet verie swéet and verie cold and fresh meat wherfore manie of them are eateÌ„ after dinner to coole men Cucumbers and Radishes are there in great numbers also Colewortes but not so good as in Europa for the Colewortes neuer grow to their full growth but are loose with their leaues open They haue likewise some sallet hearbs but verie little hearbs whereof men make Porridge are not there to be had nor manie swéet smelling hearbs nor flowers as Roses lillies rosemary or such like sorts of flowers plants there are none yet they haue some fewe Roses and a little Rosemarie but of no great smell The fields neuer haue any other flowers in them but onelie grasse and that is in Winter when it rayneth for in SuÌ„mer it is cleane burnt off with the excéeding heat of the Sunne There is onelie a kinde of blossomes of trées which grow all the yeare long called Fulle that smell verie swéet the women doe ordinarily throw them among their Lynnen and apparell to make them swéet They likewise make Collers or strings ful of them which they weare about their necks and strew them in their beds for they are verie desirous of swéete sauors for other sorts of swéet flowers hearbs whereof thousands are found in Europe they are not in India to be had so that when you tell them of y e sweet flowers and herbes of these countries they wonder much thereat and are verie desirous of them By these pictures you may sée the forme and fashions of the fruites called Iaacka Ananas Mangas Caius Iambos which are the fyue principallest most estéemed fruites in all India for others are but of small account of Ginger also as it groweth whereof in an other place I will say more when I make mention of the spices and drie wares of India all which are set down according to the life although the leaues are not altogether so proportionable with their strings and veynes as they should be or as the Physitions and Doctors in their Herbals haue described them hauing onely shewed the forme and growth of the fruites as I haue seene and vsed them The 55. Chapter Of the Indian Figges Nuces Indicae magni in India usus et ques tuosae cibum et potum homi nibus suaves et navibus materiam prebent idonâ—am quibus e aedem et onerantur et aluntur nautae Indiaensche nooten ofte Palmboomen welcke in Indien veel opbren gen want geven soete spijs en dranck stoff tot scheepen sensen en touwen en daer die selffde scheepen met gelaeden en die schip luyden mede gevoet werden Ficus Indica per totum annum ferens fructâ— copâ—ose â—entes quotidianam mul to rum escam Een plante draegende het qeheele Iaer vruchâ—n dâ—â—men Indiaâ—nsche vygen noâ— seer voâ—denâ— en â—en daegelickse spijse der Indianen Fructuum icon quos Arrecca sive Faufel vocant et Bettele folia quos pauco calcis subactos integrum diem masticant succum deglutientes ad corporis purgationem aliasque utilitates Eruyten diemen Arrecca ofte Faufel noemt en die blaeden Bet telle welcke met wat calcks vermenâ—t die Indianen een gant schen dach kauwen het say doorswelgen om â—lichaem te purge ren en ander haerder crachten Piperis fruteâ— haederae non absimilis Orientaelsche Peeper wasschen de â—inuer cruyt niet ongelyck Indian Figges are by the Arabians called Moris and not Musa not Amusa and the tree Daracht Moris by the Brasilians Pacona and the tree Paquouer by Brocardus in his description of the holy land Paradise Apples by Ouâ—edus in the Historie of India in his eight Booke and first Chapter Platanus in Guinea Bananas in Malauar Patan in Malayen Pican in Canara Decan Gusurate and Bengala Quelli Auicenna Serapio and Rhasis haue likewise written certaine Chapters heereof Auicenna in his second Booke and 491. Chapter writing of the properties and qualities of this fruite sayeth that it yeeldeth but small sustenaunce that it ingendereth Choller and Flegme and that it spoyleth the stomake wherefore he counselleth such as are of a hotte constitution after they haue eaten these Figges to take some Honie and Vinegar sodden together with cold seeds They are good against heate in the stomake Lungs and Kydnies and prouoke Vrine Rhasis of the same in his thirde Booke of Physicke and twentie Chapter sayth also that they are hurtfull for the maw which I also found being in Syrie when I vsed them they make men to haue an euill appetite to their meate a desire to ease their bodies and doe qualifie the rawnesse of the throate Serapio in his Booke of Phisicke in the 84. Chapter sayth that this fruit is in the ende of the first degree warming and moystning and that they are good against the heate of the stomake and Lungs but for him which eateth many of them they breede a heauinesse in his Mawe but by meanes of their hastâ—e ripening they are good for the Kidnies prouoke Vrine and make men apt for leacherie The Indian Phisitians doe vse this fruit in medicines for Feauers and other diseases The opinion as I thinke why this fruite is called Paradise Apples is partly for the pleasantnes of taste smell and colour for the taste is betweene sweete sower the smell somwhat like Roses and the colour a faire yelow and green partly also because this fruit being cut in the middle haue certaine veines like a crosse whereon the Christians in Siria doe make many speculations and discourses which many strangers that haue trauelled in those countries doe verifie He which desireth to reade more heereof let him reade the worthie and learned Commentaries of Carolus Clusius vpoÌ„ Garsia ab horto wher he shall receiue good contentment and satisfaction There
and tasteth much like a hasel nut but somewhat sweeter The Lanhos haue within them a good draught of water which is very cleare sweet and coole to drink It is at the least halfe a Can full when men walke abroad and are thirstie they go vnto the Canarijns who presently with a great knife in their handes come vp the tree and cut off as many Lanhos as a man desireth selling them for a Basaruco or a two peece which they make very ready and cleare to be drunke the first shell that is ouer the inward fruit which as the nut is come to his full ripenes becometh almost to bee wood is then but thin and soft and very pleasant to eate with salt and do taste almost like Artichokes a man may drinke as much of this water as hee will for it will not hurt him but is a verie pleasant drinke when the fruit is ripe there is not so much water in it and is white within and somewhat thicker of substance and then the water is not so good as it was before beeing Lanhos for then it becommeth somewhat sower These Cocus being yet in their husks may be carried ouer the whole world and not once hurt or brused and it happeneth oftentimes that by continuance of time the water within the Cocus doth conuert and congeale into a certaine kinde of yellow apple which is verie sauorie and sweet The huske beeing taken off the shel serueth for many vses as to make ladles with woodden handles and also certaine little pots which beeing fastned to a sticke they doe therewith take and lade water out of their great pots they make thereof also small vessels to beare wine in when they walke into the fieldes and a thousand other thinges These shelles are likewise burnt serue for coales for Goldsmithes which are very good and excellent Of the white of these nuts in India they make porrage and dresse meate withall strayning and pressing out the milke wherin with many other mixtures they seeth their rice to bee short they neuer dresse any rice which they cal Carrijl is the sauce to their meate thereunto but they put some of their Cocus milk into it els the Cocus is but little eaten for there it is not esteemed of but serueth for meate for the slaues and poore people They likewise breake the Cocus in péeces and taking off the shell they drie the fruit or white meat that is within it and it is caried in great quantities out of Malabar to Cambaia and Ormus to the Northern coastes and quarters beyond Goa as also to the countrie of Ballagate traffique much therewith Of this white substance they make Oyle which they stampe in cesterns like Oliues and it maketh verie good oyle as well to eat as to burne which is likewise very medicinable There are two sortes of Oyle made of these nuts one out of the fresh or greene nuts stamped and mixed with warme water which beeing pressed foorth the oyle swimmeth aboue the water◠this oyle is vsed to purge the maw and the guts for it purgeth very gently without hurt some mixe therewith the iuyce of Thamarindes maketh thereof a verie wholesome medecine the other Oyle is prest out of the dried Cocus which is called Copra is good also to purge the maw and against the shrinking of the sinews as also for old aches and paines in the ioyntes and lims This dried Cocus which is so caried abroad is called Copra When they desire to haue no Cocus or fruite thereof they cut the blossomes of the Cocus away and binde a round Potte with a narrow mouth by them called Callao fast vnto the tree and stop the same close round about with pot earth so that neyther wine nor aire can eyther enter in or come forth in that sort the pot in short space is full of water which they call Sura is very pleasant to drinke like sweet whay somewhat better This water being drunke is very good against the heate of the liuer and the kidnies and cleanseth the yard from corruption and filthie matter The same water standing but one houre in the sunne is very good viniger and in India they haue none other This Sura beeing distilled is called Fula or Nipe is as excellent aqua vitae as any is made in Dor◠of their best rēnish wine but this is of the finest kinde of distillation The second distillation thereof is called Vraca which is verie good wine is the wine of India for they haue no other wine It is very hot strong yet y e Indians drinke it as if it were water the Portingales vse it in this sort They put it into vessels and to a pipe of Vraca they put 3. or 4. Hands of reasons that are brought for marchandise into India from Ormus euerie Hand is 12. poundes which beeing washed they put into the vessell leauing the bung opē the pipe not being full for if it were it wold burst by reason of the heat because therewith it séetheth in the Pipe like water on the fire and boyling so it is stirred euery day for the space of fourteene or fifteene dayes in which time the Vraca getteth as faire a redde colour as if it were Portingall wine and differeth not much in taste but yet sweeter and hotter of it selfe howbeit it is altogether as fayre and of as good a colour as their Portingall Wyne so that they can hardly bee discerned one from the other this Wine is called Wine of Passa or Reasons With this Wine there is great traffique vsed to Bengala Malacca China and other places and euery Pipe thereof costeth within Goa 30. Pardawen the péece little more or lesse Of the aforesaide Sura they likewise make Sugar which is called Iagra they seeth the water and set it in the Sun whereof it becommeth Sugar but it is little estéemed because it is of a browne colour and for that they haue so great quantitie and abundance of white Sugar throughout all India The innermost parte of the trée or trunke is called Palmito and is the pith or hart of the same trunke which is much estéemed and sent for a present vnto men of great account It is as thinne as Paper and also white and is as if it were plaited or prest together as they vse to plait presse womens huykes in the Low countries it is also long and slender and hath sometimes 50. or 60. foldes or plaites in it like a paper booke This the Indians vse for paper and bookes which continueth in the same foldes whereon they write when it is gréene and so let it drie and then it is impossible to get the letters out againe for it is printed therein with a kind of Iron instrument The Indians cal it Olla whereof all their bookes wrytinges and Euidences are made which they can seale and shutte vp as we doe our letters Of this Paper with the
blacke sauing the first outmost huske is white and smooth without any wrinckle but hath the verie self same vertue and taste that black pepper hath It cometh oftentimes mingled with the Malacca pepper The pepper that groweth in the countries about Malacca is many times also brought into Portingal but verie little for that it is 2 yeares betweene euery ship that sayleth out of Portingale thither which being there taketh in some pepper but most Cloues and Nutmegges with their flowers and other marchandises of China But the most part of that pepper is vsed in the same countries as in Pegu Syon specially in China and other countries bordering on the same which deal continually one with an other Pepper by the Malabares is called Molanga and in the countries by Malacca Lada in Arabia Filâ—il the Gusarates of Cambaia and Decamins of Ballagate cal it Meriche and they of Bengala Moroâ—s and the long pepper which groweth onely in BeÌ„gâ—la and Iaua is called Pelcâ—m Pepper groweth and is planted at the foote of an other trée and most part at the foote of the trée called Arecca or some such like trée groweth vpon the tree like Bettele or Iue The leaues of pepper are like Orange leaues but somewhat smaller they are green and sharp at the ends in the chawing it biteth the tong and tasteth much like to Bettele it growes in bunshes like grapes but a great deale lesser and thynner yet somewhat thicker then Gooseberries they are alwaies green til they begin to drie and to ripen which is in DeceÌ„ber and Ianuary for at that time they are gathered The long pepper groweth in Bengala and some in the Iland of Iaua and is an other kinde of trée the long pepper is of the length of a néedle or the tagge of a point but somewhat thicker and all of a like thicknes it is outwardly rugged and of an ashie colour and within somewhat white with small seedes but in taste and vse it is like the other black and white pepper The white pepper as I sayd is like the black both in taste and forme yet it is accounted for better stroÌ„ger and is not in so great quantitie as the black The Pepper called Canariins in the countrie of Goa and Malabar almost of the fashion of Panike it is of an ashe colour and holow within with some smal kernels which in eating tasteth and heateth like other pepper yet it is vsed onely by the poore people and therefore is called Canariin pepper that is to say Countrie mens pepper or poore peoples pepper therefore it is neuer laden away for it is verie course and of little value neither would it be able to rayse the fraight and therfore is it left in the countrie The other pepper is in India and all other Eastern countries much vsed and spent by the Indians themselues and that in greater quantitie then yearelie is carried or laden from thence for other places for they eate not any kinde of meate but they put therein handfuls of pepper al vnbeaten so that they waste the more In the description of Malabar I haue set downe in what places pepper doth grow and is coÌ„monlie laden and the hauens where the Portingall shippes doe come and fetch it therefore it néedeth not here to be rehearsed pepper is likewise much vsed wheÌ„ it is green to be put in pots with vineger and salt and so is kept a long time and in the same manner carryed into Portingal but it is most vsed in that sort to be eaten in India and is called pepper in Achar in which manner they vse to dresse all other sorts of spices in India and eate it commonlie to procure an appetite as we doe Capars Oliues and Lemons being pickled Pepper is vsed in the kitchen and in Apothecaries shoppeâ— although in both places not as a meate or food but for physicke it warmeth the mawe and consumeth the cold slymenes thereof to ease the payne in the mawe which proceedeth of rawnesse and wind It is good to eate fyue pepper cornes euerie morning He that hath a bad or thick sight let him vse pepper cornes with annis â—ennel seed and Cloues for thereby the mystinesse of the eyes which darken the sight is cleered and driueÌ„ away The Apotheâ—ries make a confection of 3. sorts oâ— peppeâ— in this sort of whâ—te blacke and â—ong Pepper of each 25 draÌ„mes wilde tyme ginger â—nis seed of each an ouâ—ce with honnie is much as needeth to make a conâ—eâ— which is good for such as haue a cold 〈◊〉 the Nucken the paine in the liuer and the Dropsie The 63. Chapter Of Cinamom CInamon in Latin is called Cinamoâ— by the Arabians Quirsa by the Persians Daâ—china by the men of Seylon where it most groweth Curdo of the people of Malacca Caysman and by the Malabares Camea the trees are as great as Oliue trees and some lesser with leaues of Colmi like Baye leaues but of fashion like Citron leaues though somewhat smaller They haue white blossomes and a certaine fruite of the greatnes of black Portingall Oliues whereof also Oyle is made which is vsed for manie thinges The tree hath two barkes but the second bark is the Cinamon it is cut off in foure square péeces and so laid to dry at the first it is ashe colour after as it beginneth to dry it roulleth together of it self and looketh of the colour as it commeth hether which procéedeth of the heate of the Sunne The trée from whence the barke is taken they let it stand within 3 yeres after it hath an other barke as it had before These trees are in great abundance for they grow of themselues without planting in the open fields like bushes the roote of this tree yeeldeth a water which smelleth like Camphora it is forbidden to be drawn forth for spoyling the trees The Cinamon that is not wel dried is of ashe colour that which is ouer much dryed blackish but the best dryed is reddish there is much and excellent water distilled out of CinamoÌ„ while it is half gréen which is much vsed in India manie times caryed into Portingal and other places it is very pleasant both to drinke and to smell but very hote and strong it is vsed against the Colicke and other diseases procéeding of cold it is likewise good against a stincking breath and euill sauor of the mouth There is likewise a water made of the blossomes of this tree but not so good nor so well esteemed as that of Cinamon it self The places where Cinamon groweth is most and best in the IlaÌ„d of Seylon wherin there is whole woods full of Cinamon trees in the coast of Malabar there groweth likewise great store and some woods of Cinamon but not half so good and lesser trees the barke being grayer and thicker and of smal vertue The Cinamon of the Iland of Seylon is the best and finest and is at the least three times dearer in the price The
Cinamon of Malabar is called Canella de Mato or wilde Cinamon and is forbidden to be carried into Portingale yet there is great quantity shipped but all vnder the name of Cinamon of Seylon whereby it passeth and the King hath his full custome as well for the good as for the bad When the â—on of Seylon is worth in India 50 or 60 Pardawes the Quintale the wilde Cinamon is worth but 10 or 12 Pardawes but it is all registred in India for Seylons Cinamon and payeth custome in Lisbon each Quintale 15 or 16 Milreyes as well the good as the bad and all other spices after the rate and there may be nothing shipped in India no not so much as the slaues but it must all be registred in Cochin and if there be any thing found to be brought into Portiâ—l and not registred there it is forfait to the King There groweth Cinamon also in the Ilands of Iaua and by Malacca but very little and not so good as that of Seylon The trees which they burne in India for wood some of them are like Cinamon in burning and smell Cinamon healeth it openeth streÌ„gtheneth all the inward parts it is somewhat attractiue stretcheth the mawe and digesteth the meate it is also vsed against all kinde of poyson that may hurt the hart Cinamon with Pennyâ—oy all and Biuoet water drunk driueth away the Volgher openeth the matrice and maketh women haue their flowers it is likewise good against Fusten and Catharres that fall downe from the head into the lower parts also against the Dropsie and breaking or stopping of the kidneyes c. The water and Oyle of Cinamon doe greatlie strengthen all the inward parts as head hart mawe and lyuer c. The 64. Chapter Of Ginger GInger groweth in manie places of India yet the best most caryed abroad is that which groweth in the coast of Malabar it groweth like thin and young Netherland reedes of two or thrée spannes high the roote whereof is the Ginger being greene it is much eaten in India for sallets as also sodden in Vineger which they call Achar as I said of pepper and other fruites that are vsed in that maÌ„ner throughout al India the time wheÌ„ they are most gathered and begun to be dried is in December and Ianuarie they drie it in this sort that is they couer it with pot-earth which they doe to stop and fill vp the holes and thereby to make it continue the fresher for the pot-earth preserueth it from wormes without the which it is presentlie consumed by them it is little estéemed in India notwithstanding there is much shipped as well to the red sea as to Ormus Arabia and Asia but little for Portingal because it will not saue y e fraught and custome onlie the gunner of the Indian shippes may lade and bring certaine Quintals without paying any custome which by the King of Portingale was of long tyme granted vnto them and is yet obserued and this they may fel to marchants and so by this meanes there is some brought otherwise but very little for that the most part of Ginger brought into Spain cometh from Cabo verde the Ilands of S. Thomas Brasiliâ— and the IlaÌ„d of S. Domingo in y e spanish Indies which is much trafficked withall in Spaine wherefore that of the Portingall Indies is little brought out of the couÌ„try because of the loÌ„g way great charges yet it is better theÌ„ other Ginger as also all other spices mettals and stones that are brought out of the Orientall Indies that is out of the Portingales Indies are for goodnesse and vertue better then any other which the continuall traffique hath sufficiently made knowne There is likewise much Ginger conserued in Suger which commeth out of the countrie of Bengala but the best commeth from China it is verie good to eate and much vsed in India broght out of Portingal into these countries Ginger by the Arabians Persians and Turkes is called Gengibil in Gusurate Decan and Bengala when it is freshe and greene Adrac and when it is dryed Sucte in Malabar both dryed green Imgi in Malayo Aliaa It groweth like water Lillies or Sword-hearbe but somewhat blacker with a stalke aboute two or three handfuls high and with a roote like a Lillie not spreading forth as Antonius Musa writeth and is not so sharpe specially that which groweth in Bacaim because of the ouer great moysture This roote is cut small and mixed with other rootes and so eaten for Sallets with oyle salt and Vineger it is also sodden with flesh and fish It goweth in all places of India and is sowed or Planted for that which commeth vp of it selfe is not so good The best and greatest store commeth out of Malabar and by the Arabians and Persians it is much desired next it is the Ginger of Bengala The third is that of Debut and Bacaim and of all the coast along in the wilde fields and inwardly within the land there is little found There is also some found in the Ilands of S. Laurence and Comaro The vertue and properties of Ginger is that it maketh a man to goe easily to the stoole and restoreth a mans strength that is decayed But it is found contrary in other Authors that Ginger stoppeth for that it causeth good digestion and so laskements proceeding of raw moystnesse is stopped It heateth a colde maw and is good against humors that darken the eyes and is vsed in many medicines The 65. Chapter Of Cloues CLoues are by the Turkes Persians Arabians and most part of the Indians called Caâ—aâ—â—r and in the Ilands of Maluco where they are only found and do grow Chamke These Ilands are fine lying vnder the Equinoctiall line as in the descriptions therof is declared They haue nothing else but Cloues which are caried froÌ„ thence through out the world the trees whereon they grow are like Bay-trées the blossomes at the first white then greene and at the last red and hard which are the Cloues and when the blossomes are gréene they haue the pleasantest smell in all the world The Cloues grow verie thicke together and in great numbers they are gathered and then dried their right colour when they are drie is a darke yelow and to giue them a blacke colour they are commonly smoked The Cloues that stay on the trée vngathered are thicke and stay on till the next yeare which are those that are called the mother of the Cloues And in the place where the trées stand there groweth not any grasse or gréene Hearbe at all but it is wholly drie for that those trees draw all the moysture vnto them That which the Portingals call Baston or with vs the stocke of the Cloue and is the stalke whereby they hang on the trees is gathered with the Cloues and so they are mingled together for that in Maluco they neuer garble their Cloues but in India they are many times parted though verie little for they are
most part sold and vsed with dust and stalkes and all together but such as are to bee sent to Portingall are seuered and clensed The Cloues are so hotte of nature that whensoeuer them are made cleane and seperated from their Garbish if there chance to stand either Tubbe or Payle of water in the Chamber where they clense them or any other vessell with wine or any kind of moysture it will within two dayes at the furthest be wholly soken out and dryed vp although it stand not néere them by reason of the great heate of the Cloues that draw all moysture vnto them as by experience I haue often séene The same nature is in the vnspunne Silke of China so that whensoeuer the Silke lyeth any where in a house vpon the flowre that is to say vppon boordes a foote or two aboue the ground and that the flowre is sprinkled and couered with water although it toucheth not the Silke in the Morning all that water will bee in the Silke for that it draweth it all vnto it And this tricke the Indians often times vse to make their Silke weigh heauie when they sel it for it can neither be séen nor found in the Silke But returning to our matter the Cloues grow about the length of a great shot from the Sea side and are neither planted nor set and nothing else is done vnto them but only when they plucke and gather them they make the place vnder the trées verie cleane The trée will not grow verie close to the Sea side nor farre from it for these Ilands are altogether compassed about with the Sea When it is a fruitfull yeare then the Cloues are in greater abundance then the leaues When they gather them they do not pluck them with their hands but with ropes which they fasten about the branches and by force they shake them off and by that meanes the trées are so spoyled that the next yeare after they yeelde but little fruite but the second yeare then after ensuing there grow vp trées of the Cloues that fell vpon the ground when they gathered them two yeares before like Chesnut trées and they growe verie sound because of the great rayne that falleth in those places for those Ilandes lye vnder the Equinoctiall line and yéelde fruite within eight yeares and so continue aboue a hundreth yeares The time when they are gathered and dried is from September to Ianuarie When the Cloues are gréene they make good conserues in Sugar and are likewise salted in Vineger so kept in pots and made of Achar in which manner they are carried into Malacca and India They likewise distill water out of the gréen Cloues which is verie cordiall and vsed in many Medecines The Indian women vse much to chawe Cloues thereby to haue a swéete breath which the Portingales wiues that dwell there doe now begin to vse the leaues of the Cloue-trees are altogether like Bay-leaues Cloues grow on trees like Bay-trees both in forme and quantitie saue onely that their leaues are somthing lesser like Almonds or Willow leaues They are full of branches and haue aboundance of blossomes which doe turne these fruites and are called Cloues because in forme and shape they doe resemble a Birdes clawes They growe like the Mirtle-tree vpon the vttermost branches Cloues are much vsed both in meate and in medicines The people of Iaua desire the gray Cloues that hang a whole yere and more vpon the trees and are no Males as Auia doth absurdly aduise and as we of the common sort doe who couet the thinnest When they are greene they vse to salt them with salt and Vineger in Maluco and some they put in Suger which are verie pleasant to bee eaten The water of greene Cloues distilled is very pleasant of smel and strengthneth the hart likewise they procure sweating in men that haue the Pox with Cloues Nutmegges Mace long and black Pepper some lay the poulder of Cloues vpon a mans head that hath a paine in it that proceedeth of colde They strengthen the Liuer the Maw and the hart they further digestion they procure euacuation of the Vrine and stop lascatiuenes and being put into the eyes preserueth the sight and foure Drammes being drunke with Milke doe procure lust The 66 Chapter Of Mace Folie or flowers of Nutmegges and of Nutmegges THe Nutmegge trée is like a Peare tree or a Peach trée but that they are lesse and it hath round leaues These trées growe in the Iland of Banda not farre from Maluco and also in the Ilandes of Iauas Sunda from whence they are carried to China and Malacca and also into India and other places The fruite is altogether like great round Peaches the inward part whereof is the Nutmegge This hath about it a hard shell like wood wherein the Nut lyeth loose and this wooden shel or huske is couered ouer with Nutmeg flower which is called Mace and ouer it is the fruite which without is like the fruite of a Peach When it is ripe it is a verie costly meate and of a most pleasaunt sauor This fruite or Apples are many times conserued in Sugar being whole and in that sort caried throughout India and much estéemed for in truth it is the best conserue in all India and is many times brought ouer into Portingall and from thence hether They are likewise salted and put in Vineger which is much vsed in India When the Nuttes begin to be ripe then they swell and the first shell or huske bursteth in péeces and the Nutmegge flowers doe continue redde as any Scarlet which is a verie faire sight to behold especially if the trées bee full of fruite Sometimes also the Mace breaketh which is the cause that the Nutmegges come all together without the Mace and when the Nutmegge drieth then the Mace falleth off and the red changeth into Orenge colour as you sée by the Mace that is brought hether The Ilands where they grow specially Banda are very vnholesome countries as also the Ilands of Maluco many that traffique thether die before they depart from thence or if they escape they are in great perill of their liues by sicknesse notwith standing great gaine maketh men to trauell thether The Nutmegge by the inhabitants of Banda where they are most growing is called Palla and the Mace or Nutmegge flower Buna Palla The Decanijns and Indians call it Iapatry and the Mace Iayfol The trees whereon Nutmegs and Mace do grow are not vnlike to Peare trees but shorter and rounder leaues they are good for paine in the head for the mother and the Sinewes The Nut is compassed about with three kinds of Barkes The first outermost is like the greene shell of an Acorne and when they are ripe that shel openeth then you find a thin shell or barke like a Nutte which compasseth the fruite and by vs is called Mace which both in meate and Medicine is verie seruiceable and wholesome The third shell is harder and more
it Xercast and Xerkest that is to say milke of trees for it is the dew y t falleth vpon the trées and remayneth hanging vpon the leaues like water that is frozen and hangeth in drops at gutters and pentises It is also gathered and kept in glasse Vials and so brought into India and other Countries for in India they vse it much in all sorts of purgations There is another sorte of Manna called Tiriamiabiin or Trumgibiin which they gather froÌ„ other leaues and hearbes that commeth in small peeces as big as Hempeséed and somewhat bigger which is red of a reddish colour Some thinke this Manna groweth on the bodies of the trées as Gumme doth it is much vsed in Ormus and Persia for purgations but not in India so much as the first sort there is yet another sorte which commeth in great peeces with the leaues among it it is like the Manna of Calabria this is brought out of Persia vnto Bassora and so to Ormus and from thence into India and is the dearest of all the rest There commeth also a Manna that is brought in leather bags or flasks which in Turkey and Persia they vse to ride withall is melted like Hony but of a white colour and in taste like the other sortes of Manna being altogether vsed for purgations and other medicines Manna very gently purgeth the gall it easeth and moystneth the harshnes of the throat the breastes and the stomacke it quencheth the thirst but because it purgeth but weakely it is strengthened with Tyme or Isop mingled with some strong purgations maketh them to effect their operations with more perfection and power by meanes of the sweetnesse thereof which is apter and more plyable vnto nature But because it is no special marchandise I will speake no more thereof but for that wee are nowe in hande with medicines to purge I wil say some thing of the roote called Rhubaâ—be although there is no certaintie how or in what sort it groweth yet it is most certaine y t it is not to be found in any couÌ„try but in China and in the farthest parts therof it is most brought by land through the Prouince of Vsbeke whereof I spake before which Prouince lyeth in Tartaria and bordereth on the one side vpon China and so reacheth behinde India vnto Persia Out of this Prouince it cometh vnto Ormus and from thence into India yet it is likewise brought by water but because it is not so good and doth sooner rot and spoyle by water then by land therefore most part of it is brought by land That which is most esteemed best sold and greatliest desired cometh in this manner that is first from China through Vsbeke and so through Turkie from whence it is caryed to Venice from thence into all these countries so that the Rhubarbe of Venice is better because it cometh ouer land then that which is brought into Portingall because it cometh by water as also all thinges and herbes that belong to Physicke because they are better preserued by land then by water they are little brought by sea but it is a marchandise that is most caryed by land vnto Venice as also because the Portingales deale not much therein and are little giuen to curiosities conteÌ„ting themselues to deale with such wares as are commonlie knowne to all men without seeking further for they trouble not themselues with other things The 74. Chapter Of the wood called Sanders THere are 3. sorts of Sanders that is white yelow and red the white and the yealow which is the best come most out of the IlaÌ„d of Tymor which lyeth by Iaua This Iland hath whole woods and wildernesses of Sanders both of white and yealow and froÌ„ theÌ„ce it is caryed throughout all India and other couÌ„tries and trafficke much therewith the red Sanders groweth most in the coast of Choramandel and Tanassariin which is in the countrie of Pegu the trees of Sanders are like Nut trees and haue a certaine fruite vpon them like Cheries at the first green and after black but of no taste nor any thing worth for it presently falleth off onlie y e wood of y e trée is accounted of which is the SaÌ„ders It is called by the Inhabitants of the countrie where it groweth Chandanacon the Decannus Gusurates Canariins and other Indians cal it Sercandaa the Arabians and Persians Sandal wherevpon the Portingalles likewise doe call it Sandalo The yellow and white Sanders is much vsed and spent ouer all India by all the inhabitantes both Indians Moors Heathens and Iewes whatsoeuer they beate it or stampe it in water till it be as soft as pappe that done they besmere themselues therewith and let it drie vpon their bodies for it cooleth very much also because all the Indians doe much delight in sweet smelling sauours The white yellow or bleakish Sanders is likewise vsed by vs with Rose-water against the hotte paines in the head annointing it therewith all those woods as well the red as the white and yellow are good against hotte feauers being beaten and drunken into the body they help the hot stomacke as also laid vpon the stomacke with Rose water in burning feauers This Sanders is not onely good for the purposes aforesaid but also for strengthening the hart and therefore with great vse it is put into Cordiall medicines such as are made against the beating of the hart The red Sanders is little spent in India but they vse it onely against hot agues annointing their pulses therewith as also the temples their foreheads but it is much â—ryed into other countries as being very medicinable for many thinges and the Indians make their Pagodes and Idoles thereof because they should be the costlier The â—5 Chapter Of Palo de Cebra or Snake-wood SNakewood is most in the Island of Seylon it is a lowe Trée the roote thereof being the Snake-woode is of colour white shewing somewhat yellowe very harde and bitter in taste it is much vsed in India they stampe and bruse it like Sanders in water or Wine and so drinke it it is very good well proued against all burning feauers one ounce thereof bruised and mixed with water is good against all poison and sicknes as the collick worms and all filthie humors and coldnes in the body and specially against the stinging of Snakes whereof it hath the name it was first found by means of a little beast called Qâ—il or Quirpele which is of bignesse very like a Ferret wherewith in those Countries they vse to driue Cunnies out of their holes and so ketch them whereof in India they haue many in their houses which they play withall to passe the time away as also to kill their Myce and Rattes and to driue them away This beast by nature is a great enemie to the Snake so that wheresoeuer she findeth any she fighteth with them and because it is often bitten by the Snake it knoweth how to heale it selfe with
will be as fresh and liuely as if they neuer had béene sicke hauing vsed this rule aforesaid And although the roote China being sodden in the water causeth a great appetite and a hungry stomacke neuerthelesse they must in any sorte beware that they eate but little and with measure that according to the rule prescribed for if they break it but one day nay but one houre all their labour were lost and so they must be forced to begin their diet again It must likewise bee vnderstood that the older and longer of continuance the pockes are so much the sooner will the roote heale them as also the older the persons to be healed are of yeares because that then the humors are not so ripe as in young yeares When the 3â— dayes are expired they must beware of drinking other drinke and to that end they must keepe the peeces and slices that were cut and sodden as before euery ounce by it selfe and therof take euery day a heape of the same roote so sodden and seeth them againe in a pot with as much water as they shall need to drinke but this seething need not to be done as the first seething with consumption of the water but only let it seeth vp once and no more This water must they drinke in this sorte for the space of 2â— or 30. dayes more and beware of fish or any goose or heauie meates as Oxe Cow or Hogges flesh and such like as also they must keepe themselues from much aire or winde whereby their bodies beeing healed may returne to their perfect healthes againe and after these twenty or thirty dayes are full expired then they must begin to vse all kinde of meates and drinkes although when the first thirtie dayes are out they may well goe abroad so they bee carefull of themselues and they shall not neede to sweate any more after the said first thirty dayes also it must bee remembred that such as meane to take this diet for their healthes it will bee good before they vse it to take a good purgation when the first fifteene dayes are out then take a second and so at the end of the thirtie day anâ— other whereby it will worke with more effect and with Gods help they shall be as lustie and sound as euer they were as it hath beene prooued by many thousandes in India This roote is not onely good for the Pockes and Piles but also for crampes and palsies and all cold diseases as for lumites that are stiffe and benummed with cold for the Gout for the Emperour Charles the fift himselfe did vse the same and found that it did him good But it must bee vnderstood that it is not good to vse it at all times of the yeare for in the dogge dayes and also in Summer by reason of the heat it is not good neyther in winter because of the cold but it is best to be vsed in Lent and Haruest time for then it is most temperate weather yet alwaies with the counsell of the learned Phisition the better to know the disposition complection inclination and age of the persons together with the time of the yeare the situation and climate of the countrie The manner of healing aforesaid is as it is vsed in India but in China which is a colder countrey and almost vnder the same degrees that these Countries are vnder they vse to seeth the water stronger for there they put 2 ounces or an ounce and a halfe of the wood into so much water and let it seeth vntill the water be two partes consumed which in India will not bee borne because of the great heate It is likewise to be vnderstood that the person and the disease of the person must be well considered for that if the sicknes bee not very great they must take lesse roote and let lesse water consume in the seething the younger persons also must haue stronger drinke then old â—olkes because they haue more humors in their bodies And yee must consider that hee which will take or vse this roote or the water thereof not beeing sicke it will waste and consume his flesh and good blood and doe himselfe great hurt wherfore good counsell and aduise must alwaies be taken before it be vsed and also iâ— it bee taken too hotte and too much it burneth both the liuer and the lunges and will fill the body full of pyles scurffe and maâ—gâ—es with other such like diseases whereby a man shall haue worke enough to driue those new diseases out of his body and fall out of one sicknes into another rather become worse then hee was at the first This I thought good in briefe to shew you thereby to teach such as knowe it not the true vse of his roote if it bee done in time when neede requireth for that many doe spende their wealthes and which is more are all their liues long out of hope for eâ—er to recouer their healthes againe vpon a disease which with so little cost is so easilie to be cured The summe of the foresaid water is likewise good against all scabbes and swellinges of the said Mâ— Neapo◠〈◊〉 or y e French pockes the best rootes are the blackest with few knots and white within for the reddish are not so good the wood or trée wherof it groweth is like a Haw-thorne straight and about three or foure spannes high the roote thereof is called the wood of China or Pockewood when they are gréene they eate them raw and being sodden they taste almost like suger canes but not so sweet The tree hath but few leaues but they are almost like the leaues of a young Orange tree These plants or trees in China are called Lampaton as the Chinos themselues doe say This shall suffice for this root of China so called because it is found in no place but in China what is more to be said of it I leaue vnto the learned Phisitions others that deale withall and haue better experience thereof The roote of China is commonlie vsed among the Egyptians not onelie for the pockes but for many other diseases specially for a consumption for the which they seeth the roote China in broth of a henne or cocke whereby they become whole and faire of face This roote drieth much and cooleth sweate it resisteth euill humors and strengthneth the liuer it healeth watery and filthie Vlcers and scurffes Leprie Is is good for a man that hath the pockes and for those that are dried vp and medicinable against a hard and a great milt The 78. Chapter Of Amsion alias Opium AMsion so called by the Portingales is by the Arabians Mores and Indians called Affion in latine Opio or opium It commeth out of Cairo in Egypt and out of Aden vpon the coast of Arabia which is the point of the land entring into the red Sea sometimes belonging to the Portingales but most part out of Cambaia from Decan that of Caâ—o is whitish and
vsed in India for many medicines caryed into al places Galanga is a roote with many â—nots being red both inwardly outwardly the knottes running about it smelling well and sharpe of taste for sauor and fashion like the Cyperus roote wherefore by some men it is esteemed for Cyperus of Babylon It heateth and dryeth in the third degree therefore it comforteth the stomake and driueth away the payne thereof proceeding of cold and windynesse It healeth a stincking breath it helpeth the beating of the hart being drunk with the iuyce of the leafe of Weghe it healeth the Colicke proceeding from wind it is good also against the windines of the Mother it increaseih lust heateth the kidneyes and euerie morning eating a little therof it healeth the head-ache which hath long indured Of these and such like herbes there are manie in India and in the Orientall parts the names and properties whereof are to mee vnknowne because they are not so common nor knowne among the meaner sort of people but onlie by Physitians Apothecaries and Herbalistes therefore I haue onlie spoken of such as are commonlie knowne and daylie vsed And this shall suffice for Spices Drugges and medicinable herbes The 84. Chapter Of all sorts of Pearles both great and small and of precious stones as Diamantes Rubies Topaces Saffires and other such like stones called Oriental stones and of the Bezers stone which is good against poyson and such like diseases and in what manner and place they are found PEarles by the Portingales are called Perolas that is such as are great and the small Alioffar in Latin Margaritas in Arabia Lulu in Persia and India Motu and in Malabar Mutiu The principall and the best that are found in all the Orientall countries and the right Orientall pearles are some betwéene Ormus and Bastora in the straights or Sinus Persicus in the places called Bareyn Catissi Iulfar Camaron other places in the said Sinus Persicus from whence they are brought into Ormus The King of Portingale also hath his Factor in Bareyn that stayeth there onlie for the fishing of pearles There is great trafficke vsed with them as well in Ormus as in Goa There are also other fishings for pearle as betwéene the Iland of Seylon and the Cape de Comriin where great numbers are yearelie found for that the King of Portingale hath a captaine there with certaine soldiers that looketh vnto it they haue yearlie at the lest aboue 3 or 4 thousaÌ„d duckers y t liue onlie by fishing for pearles and so maintaine themselues whereof euerie yeare many are drowned or deuoured by y e fishes called Tubarones or Hayen whereof I haue alreadie made meÌ„tion these pearls are not so good nor so much esteemed as the pearles of Ormus and are of a lower price which they know likewise how to discerne at the first sight There are also pearles found by the Iland of Borneo and the Iland of Aynon on the coast of Cauchinchina but those of Ormus surpasse them all They are fished for by dukers that diue into the water at the least 10 12 and 20 fadome déepe They grow in Oysters but the great pearls are found in the Oysters that swimme aloft and the smallest called Alioffar are commonly in the bottome of the sea The duckers are naked hauing a basket bound at their backes which being at the bottome to make the more hast they rake full of Oysters and durt together and then ryse vp againe and throwe them into boates that lie readie for the purpose with men in them which presentlie take the Oysters and lay them on land to drie where with the heate of the Sunne they open of themselues and so they find the pearles of Alioffar in the fish and when they haue made an end of fishing for that day all the Fishers with the Captaine Soldiers laborers and Watchmen for the King goe together and taking all the pearles that are caught that day they diuide them into certaine heapes that is one part for the King an other part for the Captaine and Soldiers the third part for the Iesuites because they haue their Cloyster in that place and brought the Countrie first vnto the Christian Faith and the last part for the Fishers which is done with great Iustice and equalitie This fishing is done in Summer tyme and there passeth not any yeare but that diuers Fishers are drowned by the Cape de Comoriin which is called the Kings fishing and manie deuoured by Fishes so that when the fishing is done there is a great and pitifull noyse and cry of women and Children heard vpon the land for the losse of their husbands and friends yet the next yeare they must to the same worke againe for that they haue no other meanes to liue as â—lso for that they are partlie compâ—lled thereunto by the Portingales but most part are content to doe it because of the gaine they get thereby after all the danger is past They finde sometimes many and sometimes but a few Pearles in one oyster sometimes two hundred graines and more The oysters that haue the best Pearles in them are thinne and white which the Indians call Cheripo wherof they make spoones and cups to drink in The Pearles are sold by siues which are made of mettell driuen into thin plate for that purpose whereof the holes are round There are many sorts of these siues the first hath small holes and the Pearles that passe through them are at one price the next siue hath greater holes and the Pearles that fall through it are at higher price and so foorth at the least seauen or eight siues The small stuffe that serue for no Pearles they call Alioffar and are sold by the ounce and vsed by Potticaries and Phisitions and to that end many of them are caried into Portingall Venice and are very good cheape To giue the Pearles a faire colour in India they vse rice beaten a little with salt wherewith they rub them and then they become as faire and cleare as christall and so continue There is yet an other sort of oysters by the Indians called Chaâ—lia by the Portingales Madre Perolâ— or in other of Pearle are of the shell fishes that wee call inkehornes which they know how to prepare and make cleane They bring many of them into Portingale to sâ—rue for to drinke in and to keepe for an ornament for pleasure specially those that come out of China and Bengalen some guilt and painted with colours very faire some wrought with branches and other figures as we dayly see them brought thether In India they make diuers thinges of them as deskes tables cubbards tables to play on boâ—es staues for women to beare in their hands and a thousand such fine deuises which are all inlaid and couered with this Chanco or Mother of Pearle very faire to beholde very workmanlike made and are in India so commoÌ„ that there is almost no place in those countries but they haue of them
all the boates being still abord which commonly doe hang at her at the least a mile or halfe a mile within the sea because it is calme This ship called the Arrelikia beginning in this manner to sayle among other romaâ— that stood vpon the hatches there were certaine hennes cages from whence certaine hennes flew out whereupon euery man claimed them for his owne and vpon a Sunday as in such cases it is commonly seene they ranne all on a heape vpon the one side wherby the ship being light of Balast and laden with many chestes aboue the hatches as I said before it swaied so much on the one side that by little and little it suncke cleane vnder the water so that not aboue a handfull of the maste could be seene aboue the water The people leaped into the â—oats that as yet were hanging about the ship which was good Fortune for them otherwise there had not one escaped aliue but by that meanes they were all saued the slaues onely excepted that were bound with iron chaines and could not stirre and so they were drowned God knoweth what riches was lost in her for nothing was saued but some few chestes that stood aboue the hatches which the Duckers got vp and yet the goods in them was in a manner spoyled and the rest vtterly lost by this it may be considered what manner the Portingales vse in lading of their ships and that it is to bee thought that as many ships as are cast away whereof there hath bin heard no newes or tydinges are onely lost by meanes of euill order and gouernment This being so vnluckily fallen out the Marchants vsed all the speed and meanes they could by witnesses to make protestation against the Officers and the Factors of the pepper that they might be punished for taking out the Ballast but they kept themselues out of the way and by prolonging of time it was forgotteâ—â—nd nothing done therein so that the Marchants that had receiued all the losse were glad to put it vp In the same moneth came newes out of Malacca that it was in great danger that many died there for hunger as also that the ship that went from Portingall thether was forced to stay there because they had no victuals to dispatch it away and likewise that the straight of Sumaria was kept by the enemy so that there could no shippes passe that way to China or Iapan This was done by the Kinges of Sumaria that is to say the kinges of Achem and â—or lying by Mâ—lacca vpon the Firme land which rebelled against the Portingales in Malacca vppon a certaine iniurie done vnto them by the Captaine there These newes put Goa in a great alteration for that their principall traffique is to China Malacca and Iapan and the Ilâ—ndes bordering on the same which by meâ—nes of those warres was wholly hindeâ— whereupon great numbers of â—ustes gallies and ships were prepared in Goa to relieue Malacca and all the townes men tasked euery one at a certaine summe of mony besides the money that was brought from other places and men taken vp to serue in the ships for by means of their late ouerthrowes and losse of ships India was at that time very weake of men In the month of May Anno 1587. there came a ship or galley of Mosambique vnto Goa bringing newes that the ship S. Phillip had bin there and taken in the lading of pepper that was in the ship called S. Laurenâ— that had ariued there in her Voyage towards Portingall and was all open aboue the hatches and without mastes most of her goods being throwne into the sea whereby miraculouslie they saued their liues and by fortune put into Mosambique In this ship called S. Philâ—ip were the young Princes the kings children of Iapan as is before declared From Mosambique came the same Galley that brought the newes to Goa the same Galley likewise brought newes of the Army that was sent out of Goa in December 1586. being the yeare before vnto the coast of Melinde or Abex to reuenge the iniurie which they had receiued in the Fléete whereof Ruy Gâ—nsalues da Camara was Captaine as I saide before as also to punish the townes that at the same time had vnited themselues with the Turke and broken league with the Portingales Of this armie was Generall a gentleman called Martin 〈◊〉 de Mello wherewith comming vpon the coast of Abex or Melinde which lyeth betweene Mosambique and the red sea they went on land because the Turks whome they sought for were gone home through the read sea they determined to punish and plague the townes that had fauored the Turkes and broken their aliance with them and to the same end entred into the countrie as farre as the townes of Pate and Bâ— that little thought of them and easily ouerrâ—n them because most part of the people fled to saue themselues left the townes whereby the Portingales did what pleased them burning the townes and razing them to the ground with others that lay about them and among those that fled to saue theÌ„selues they tooke the King of Pate whose head in great furie they caused to bee striken off and brought it vnto Goa where for certaine daies it stood vpon a maste in the middle of the towne for an eâ—ample to all others as also in signe of victorie wherewith the Portingales began to be somewhat incouraged and so they went from thence to Ormus and from Ormus they were to goe help the King of Persia as the Viceroy had commanded them but being at Ormus many of their men fell sick and died among the which their Generall Martin Alfonso da Metto was one whereupon they returned againe vnto Goa without doing any other thing The same armie sayling to the coast of Abex and falling on the Island of Zamzibar which lieth vnder sixe degrees on the south side about 70. miles froÌ„ Pate towards Mosambique about 18. miles from the Firme land there they found the Saint Saluador that came from Cochiin sayling towards Portingall being all open hauing throwne all her goods ouerboard sauing only some pepper which they could not come at and were in great danger holding themselues by force of pumping aboue the water vppon the point to leaue being all wearie and readie to sink which they certainly had done if by great good fortune they had not met with the armie which they little thought to finde in those parts The Armie tooke the shippe with them to Ormus where the rest of the pepper and goods remaining in her were vnladen and the ship broken in péeces and of the bordes they made a lesser shippe wherein the men that were in the great ship with the rest of the goods that were saued in her sailed to Portingall after a long and wearisome voiage ariued there in safetie The 17. of September 1587. a Galliot of Mosambique arriued at Goa bringing newes of the ariual of foure ships in Mosambiquâ— that came
the South vnder seuen de grées and from that time forwards we saw her no more but onely the tokens of y e casting of her away about the Cape de bona Speranza which after being at the Island of S. Helena was tolde vs more at large The same day we had a great storme of wind and raine so that the Ruther of our great maste by force of the Sea was broken And from the line we had a North and northwest wind with continuall raynes stormes and fowle weather neuer ceasing vntill wee came vnder 20. degrees which was vpon the 25. of Februarie and then wee had a Southeast wind with fayrer weather called by the Portingalles the generall wind which they commonly finde and looke for vnder 12. degrees but we had it not before we were vnder â—0 degrees the cause whereof wee thought to be for that we had put so farre into the sea out of the common way This wind commonly holdeth vnto 27. or 28. degrées little more or lesse and then they must looke for all kindes of windes and weathers vntill they come to the Cape de bona Speranza without any certainty of winds The 5. of March being vnder 25 degrées we had an East winde with a most great storme and exceeding raine so that our Ruther-staffe brake and two more that we had in the shippe one after the other being put vnto it broke likewise with the pinne and y e ioynt wherein the ende of the Ruther hung and we were forced to lie and driue without steering hauing stricken all our sayles and the shippe so toised by the waues on all sides that wee had not one drie place in all the ship In this sort wee lay driuing for the space of two dayes and two nights together with a continuall storme and fowle weather with rayne The same night we saw vppon the maine yarde and in many other places a certaine signe which the Portingalles call Corpo Santo or the holy body of brother Peter Gonsalueâ— but the Spaniards call it S. Elmo and the Greekes as ancient writers rehearse and Ouid among the rest vsed to call it Helle and Phryxus Whensoeuer that signe sheweth vpon the Maste or maine yarde or in any other place it is commonly thought that it is a signe of better weather when they first perceiue it the maister or the chiefe boteswaine whistleth and commaundeth euery man to salute it with a Salue corpo Santo and a misâ—ricordia with a very great cry and exclamation This constellation as Astronomers do write is ingendred of great moysture and vapors and sheweth like a candle that burneth dimly and skippeth from one place to another neuer lying still We saw fiue of them together all like the light of a candle which made mee wonder and I should haue hardly beleeued it but that I saw it and looked verie earnestly vpon it and although it was fowle weather whereby I had no great leasure to think vpon such curious thinges notwithstanding I came purposely from vnder the hatches to note it Those fiue lights the Portingals cal Coroa de nossa Seâ—liora that is deere Ladies Crowne and haue great hope therein when they see it And therewithall our men being all in great feare and heauines and almost out of hope began againe to reuiue and to be glad as if thereby they had beene fully assured of better comfort The seuenth of March wee had better weather and then we tooke counsell how to mend our Ruther some were of opinion we shoulde saile to Mosambique and rule the Ruther with a rope others were of contrary opinion and said we might mend it abord and so performe our voyage so that at the last we pulled certaine péeces out of the ships side for we had not brought one with vs as néede required but being pulled forth they were all too little and woulde not serue In the ende wee sound it conuenient to take one of the bosses in our shippe and thereof to make an Anuile and of two Oâ—e hydes a payre of bellowes wherewith wee went to worke and of a péece of an olde hooke or dragge wee tooke two or three ends whereof but one woulde serue and that halfe broken and the splinters wee bounde with an Iron hoope and so being fitter to the Ruther wee set forwards in the name of God This asked vs two dayes worke before wee could dispatch it theÌ„ we hoysed sayle again with great ioy gaue diuers almes to our Lady and the Saintes wâ—th many promises of better life as being in misery mâ—n commonly do The day after we tooke the height of the Sunne and found our selues to be vnder 28. degrees and two thirdes being in the height of the land called â—erra Dâ—natal although wee were at the least â—â—â— miles to seaward from the lande and there wee had good weather with a Southeast winde In this countrey called â—erra Doâ—â—â—aâ— which reacheth to 3â— degreesâ— and at the Cape de bona Spâ—â—anza and is the hardest passage that is in all the voyage and oftentimes they feare the land of Natal more thâ—n â—he â—ape for there commonly is stormy and fowle weather and many shippes haue â—eene spoyled and cast away as the Portingalles recordes can verie well shew In the same countrey also wee founde the signes of the casting away of the S. Thomas so that to to conclude commonly the shippes doe there pay tribute by casting some lading ouer bord or else leaue body and all behind and therefore it is called Terra Donatal that is to say the lande of Christmasse and for this cause they neuer passe it without great feare but with good watch and great foresight all their ropes being stiffe and well looked vnto the peeces drawne in and all chestes pottes fattes and other roomage that are not stowed vnder hatches being throwne ouer borde into the sea and euery thing setled and made ready in his place for that in this coast they haue one houre fayre weather and another houre stormie weather in such manner as if heauen and earth should waste and be consumed In that place likewise with a cleare and fayre weather there commeth a certayne cloude which in shew séemeth no bigger then a mans fist and therefore by the Portingals it is called Oâ—ho de Boy or Oxe eye and although as then it is cleare and calme weather and that the sailes for want of wind do beate against the mastes yet as soone as they perceyue that cloude they must presently strike all their sayles for that commonly it is vpon the ships before they perceyue it and with such a storme and noyse that without al doubt it would strike a shippe into the water if there be not great care had to looke vnto it as it chaunced to the second fléete after the Portingalles had discouered the Indieâ— there being ten or twelue shippes in company which in such a calme and fayre weather let all their sailes hang and regarded them not and
with great deuotion promise of other wonderfull things when they came to land at the last God comforted vs and sent vs better weather for that the 19 of Aâ—â—ill the wether began to cleéere vp and therewith we were in better comfort The 20. of Aprill we tooke the hight of the Sunne and found it to be â—6 degrées and againe we saw greene water and some birds which they call Alcatraces and many Sea-wolues which they hold for certain signes of the cape de Bona SperaÌ„za as we thought were hard by the land but yet saw none the same day we had the wind somewhat fuller and were in great hope to passe the Cape so that the men began to be in better comfort by reason of the signes we haue seene All that day we saw greene water till the 22 of Apr. vpon which day twice and in the night following we cast out the Lead and found no ground which is a good signe that wee had passed the Cape called das Agulhas or the cape of needles which lieth vnder 35 degrees and is about 20 miles from the Cape de bona Speranza which lieth vnder 34 degrées a half And because that about this cape Das Agulhas there is ground found at the least 30 or 40 miles from the land we knew wee were past it as also by the colour of the water and the birds which are alwaies found in those countries and the better to assure vs thereof the great high sea left vs that had so long tormented vs and then we found a smoother water much differing from the former so that as theÌ„ we seemed to be come out of hell into Paradice with so great ioy that we thought we were within the sight of some hauen and withall had a good winde though somewhat cold The 23 of Aprill we passed the Cape de Bona Speranza with a great and generall gladnes it being as then 3 months and three dayes after we set sayle from Cochiin not once seeing any land or sand at all but onelie these assured tokens of the said Cape which happened very seldome for that the pilots doe alwaies vse what meanes they can to see the cape and to know the land thereby to know certainlie that they are past it for then their degrees must lessen and there they may as soone make towards Mosambique as to the Iland of S. Helena for although they can well perceiue it by y e water yet is it necessary for them to see the land the better to set their course vnto S. Helena wherein they must alwaies kéepe on the left hand otherwise it were impossible for them to come at it if they leaue that course for if they once passe it they can not come to it again because there bloweth continually but one kind of wind which is South east and thus hauing passed the Cape we got before the wind The 24 of Aprill the Pilot willed vs to giue the Bona viagen vnto the Cape de Bona Speranza according to the custome with great ioy and gladnes of all that were in the shippe for that as theÌ„ they assure themselues that they sayl to Portingal and not to turne againe into India for so long as they are not past the Cape they are alwaies in doubt and as then we were about 50. miles beyond the Cape The signes and tokens whereby they know themselues certainly to haue passed the Cape are great heapes and péeces of thicke réedes that alwaies thereabouts driue vppon the water at least 15 or â—â— miles from the land as also certaine birds by the Portingals called Feyâ—oins somewhat greater then sea mâ—wâ—s being white full of blacke spots ouer al their bodies very easie to be known from al other birds These are certain signes whereby the Pilotes doe certainly perswade themselues that they are past the Cape and hauing passed it they set their course for S. Helena Northwest Northwest by west The 27 of Apr. we were right in the wind and so continued till the next day and theÌ„ we had a calm being vnder 3â— degrees on Portingal side The â—9 of Apr. wâ— gâ—t before the wind which is the generall wind y t alwaies bloweth in those countries al the whole yere vntill y â— come to the Equinoctial line and is a Southeast wind so y t they may wel let their sayles stand lay them down to slâ—ep for in y e greatest wind y t bloweth there they need not strike their maine yard aboue half the mast The 12 of May in the morning betimes we discouered the IlaÌ„d of S. Helena whereat there was so great ioy in the ship as if we had bene in heauen as then we were about 2 miles from y e land the Iland lying from vs West south west whereunto we sayled so close that with a caliuer shot we might reach vnto the shore being hard by it we sayled about a corner of the land that from vs lay Northwest which hauing compassed wee sayled close by the land West North west the land on that side beeing so high and still that it séemed to be a wall that reached vnto the skyes And in that sort we sayled about a mile and a half and compassed about y e other corner that lay westward from vs which corner béeing compassed we presentlie perceiued the shippes that lay in the road which were those ships that set sayle before vs out of India lying about a small half mile from the foresaid corner close vnder the land so that the land as then lieth South east from them and by reason of the high land the shippes lie there as safe as if they were in a hauen for they may well heare the wind whistle on the top of their maine yards but lower it can not come and they lie so close vnder the land that they may almost cast a stone vpon the shore There is good ground there at 25 and 30 fadomes deep but if they chance to put further out or to passe beyond it they must goe forward for they can get no more vnto y e land and for this cause we kept so close to the shore that the height of the laÌ„d took the wind froÌ„ vs the ship wold not steer without wind so that it draue vpon the land wherby our horesprit touched y e shore therwith we thought that shippe goods had all beene cast away but by reason of the great depth being 1â— fadomes water and with the help of the Boats and men off the other ships that came vnto vs we put off from the land without any hurt and by those Boates wee were brought to a place wher the other ships lay at Anker which is right against a valley that lyeth betwéene two high hilles wherein there standeth a little Church called Saint Helena There we found fiue shippes which were the ship that came from Malacca and the S. Mary that had béene there about 15. daies
which came both together to the Cape de Bona Speranza the S. Anthonie and the S. Christopher being Admiral that had arriued there â—0 daies before and the Conception which came thether but the day before vs so that ther wanted none of the Fléet but the S. Thomas and by the signes and tokens that we and the other ships had séene at Sea we presumed it to be lost as after we vnderstoode for it was neuer seene after for the other shippes had seene Mastes Deales Fattes Chestes many dead men that had bound themselues vpon boards with a thousand other such like signs Our Admiral likewise had béene in great danger of casting away for although it was a new ship this the first Viage it had made yet it was so eaten with Wormes that it had at the least 20 handfuls déepe of water within it and at the Cape was forced to throw halfe the goods ouer bord into the Sea and were constrained continually to Pumpe with two Pumpes both night and day and neuer holde still and being before the Iland of S. Helena had ther also sunke to the ground if the other ships had noâ— holpen her The rest of the shippes coulde likewise tell what dangers and miseries they had indured About thrée Monthes before our arriuall at S. Helena there had béene a ship which the yere before set out of Ormus with the goods men that remained in the S. Saluador that had béene saued by the Portingal armie vpon the coast of Abex and brought vnto Ormus as in an other place I haue declared That ship had wintered in Mosambique and had passed verie soone by the Cape so sayled without any companie vnto Portingall hauing left some of her sicke men in the Iland as the maner is which the next ships that came thether must take into them These gaue vs intelligence that about foure monthes before our arriuall there had béene an English ship at the Iland of Saint Helena which had sayled through the Straights of Magelâ—anaes and through the south seas from thence to the Ilands of Phillippinas and had passed through the Straights of Sunda that lyeth beyond Malacca betwéene the Ilands of Sumatra and Iaua in the which way she had taken a shippe of China such as they call Iunckos laden with Siluer and Golde and all kind of Silkes and that shee sent a letter with a small present to the Bishop of Malacca telling him that shee sent him that of friendship meaning to come her selfe and visite him Out of that ship of China they tooke a Portingall Pilot so passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and came to the Iland of Saint Helena where they tooke in fresh water and other necessaries and beate downe the Alter and the Crosse that stoode in the Church and left behind them a Ketle and a Sword which the Portingales at our arriual found there yet could they not conceiue or thinke what that might meane Some thought it was left there for a signe to some other ships of his companie but euerie man may thinke what he will thereof In the ship of Malacca came for Factor of the Pepper one Gerrit van Afhuysen borne in Antwarpe and dwelling in Lisbone who had sayled in the same ship from Lisbone about two yeares before for that they staied in Malacca at the least fourtéene Monthes by reason of the warres and troubles that were in that countrie vntill Malacca was relieued as I saide before whereby they had passed great miserie and béene at great charges And because it is a very vnwholesome countrie together with y e constraint of lying there so long of 200. men that at the first sayled from Lisbone in the ship there were but 18. or 20. left aliue and all the rest dyed so that they were enforced to take in other vnskilfull men in Malacca to bring the shippe home This Gerrard van Afhuysen being of mine acquaintance and my good friend before my departure out of Portingall for India maruelled and ioyed much to find me there little thinking that we should méete in so strange a place and there we discoursed of our trauels past And of him among diuers other things I learned many true instructions as well of Malacca as of the countries and Ilands lying about it both for their manner of dealing in trade of Marchandise as in other memorable things By the pictures following you may sée the true description of the Iland of Saint Helena and of the thrée sides therof as we passed by it and as we sayled about it to the road as also of the Iland of Ascention The description of which two Ilands you may here perceiue and learne as I my selfe could marke the same The 94. Chapter A briefe description of the Iland Saint Helena SANCTA HELENA THe Iland of Saint Helena is so named because the Portingales discouered it vppon Saint Helens day which is the twentie one of May. It is in compasse sixe miles little more or lesse and lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and a quarter on the South side of the Equinoctall 550. Spanish miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza and from the coast called Angola or Ethiopia 350. miles from Brasilia 510. miles These are the two néerest lands adioyning to it It is a verie high and hillie countrie so that it commonly reacheth vnto the cloudes the countrie of it selfe is verie ashie and drie also all the trees that are therein whereof there are great store grow of themselues in the woodes are little worth but only to burne for it hath no special substance but sheweth as if it were halfe consumed so that it should seeme that some mines of Brimstone hath in times past béene in that Iland as commonly all the Ilands are all much subiect to the same for that in some places thereof they find Sulphur and Brimstone When the Portingales first discouered it there was not any beasts nor fruite at all within the Iland but onely great store of fresh water which is excellent good and falleth downe from the mountaines and so runneth in great abundance into the Valley where the Church standeth and from thence by small chanels into the Sea where the Portingales fill their vessels full of fresh water and wash their clothes so that it is a great benefit for them and a pleasant sight to behold how cleare in how many streames the water runneth downe into the valley which may bee thought a myracle considering the drinesse of the country together with the stonie Rockes and hilles therein The Portingales haue by little and little brought many beastes into it and in the valleyes planted al sorts of fruites which haue growne there in so great abundance that it is almost incredible For it is so full of Goates Buckes wild Hogges Hennes Partridges and Doues by thousands so that any man that will may hunt and take them ther is alwaies plentie and sufficient although there came as many shippes more
meanes we could to saue him yet we could not doe it by reason wee sayled before the winde The same day at night wee saw the Iland of Ascention and lauered all that night because we would not passe the Iland In the Morning the 28. of May we sayled about the Iland to sée if there were any ground to Anker on because the Admirall was so leake that shee could no longer holde out and the men desired the Officers of the shippe that they would lay the goods on land in the Iland of Ascention and there leaue it with good watch and necessaries for them that keepe it and so sayle with the emptie ship to Portingall and there procure some other shippe to fetch the goods thinking it was sufficient to haue it well watched and kept there for that there commeth not a ship in twentie yeares into that Iland because there is nothing in it to be had We went close vnto it by a verie white and faire Sand where the Admirall and all the shippes cast out the Lead and found from eightie to fiftie and 4â— Fadomes water and although they might haue gone closer to the land yet the Officers excused themselues saying that they coulde not goe neerer and that it was too deepe and verie dangerous for them to Anker there Which they said to pacifie the men desiring that they might borow two Pumpes nore of the other shippes and so without doubt they woulde bring the shippe safe vnto Portingall and although it would bee great paine and labour for them to doe it yet they must of force content themselues for that the Admirall and all the Gentlemen that were in the shippe pumped both day and night as their turnes came about as well as the meanest in the shippe onely to encourage the people They borowed one Pumpe of the Saint Mary and sent to desire vs to lend them another and although our ship was none of the best among the Fleet we were of opinion not to lend him any as not knowing what neede wee should haue our selues hauing so long a way to sayle yet in the end seeing the great necessitie they were in we lent them one the rather because they sayd that the Admirals meaning was if it were calme wether to discharge some of their wares into other shippes thereby to lighten themselues but it fell not out as they thought so that with great miserie and labor they ouercame their iournie The 95. Chapter Of the Iland called the Ascention THis Iland was discouered vpon Ascention daye and in shew séemeth as great as the Iland of Saint Hellena but not so high It is ful of hilles and dales lying vnder eight degrées and a halfe on the South-side of the Equinoctiall line and lyeth Northwest distant from Saint Helena 19â— Spanish miles and from the Equiâ—octiall line 140. miles There is not any fresh water in the Iland nor one greene leafe or branch It hath many hilles of a reddish colour which shew like a certaine Earth in Spaine called Almagro and is full of stonie hilles and dryed land it is like Saint Helena There hath beene some shippes there that missed Saint Helena and sought for fresh water in that Iland but could find none It hath certaine faire and white Sandes about it and great store of Fish wherein it surpasseth S. Helena but in it there are no beastes at all onely by reason of the great quantitie of Fishes Ther are so many Birds in it y t it is strange and they are of the bignesse of young Geese came by thousands flying about our ships crying and making great noyse and ranne vp and downe in the shippe some leaping and sitting on our shoulders and armes not once fearing vs so that wee tooke many of them and wrung of their neckes but they are not good to eate because they taste morish I thinke the cause they are so tame is because they see but few men and some desire to goe to them About that Iland and the Iland of Saint Helena vnto the Equinoctiall line there are flying Fishes as great as Herings which flie by great flockes together two or thrée Fadome aboue the water and flie in that manner at the least a quarter of a mile vntill their wings or finnes be drie and then they can flie no longer but fall into the water and there wet themselues and then flie againe aboue the water The cause why they flie in that sort is because they are chased by the great fishes that eate them and to escape from them they flie aboue the water and some times into the shippes for many of them fell into our ship which flew too high for wheÌ„ their wings are drie they must needes fall From that Island of Ascention the shippes held their course Northwest and by West til they be a degree past the Equinoctiall line on the North side where there lyeth a cliffe called Penedo de Sam Pedro which many times they sée and to it from the Islande of Ascention are 300. miles The 5. of Iune we passed againe the Equinoctiall line and then again began we to see the North starre which we had lost vnder ten degrées on this side Cochijn and now began to lose the sight of the South starre and there we had the sun in the South at twelue of the clocke at noone in which on the other side of the line at the same time is in the North. The 8. of Iune being 4. degrées in the North we lost our generall South east winde that had serued vs from the Cape de bona Speranza thether then began the raines and calmes for as then we began to come neare the coast of Guinea which continueth to 9. degrees These calmes and raines helde vs till 11. degrées being the 20 of Iune whereby the ships seperated themselues by reason of the calmes which made them not able to stéerre and in the 11. degrees they met againe and there we had a North east wind which is called the generall winde because it floweth continually in those Countries and holdeth to 30. and â—2 degrées beginning many times at 6. and 7. degrees but wee had it not till wee were vnder 1â— degrées This wind is somewhat scant for wee must of force saile in the wind because our chiefe course is Northwest and by North. The 23. of Iune we passed the point of Capo Verde which is vnder 15. degrées and the 26. of the same month we passed the Islands of Capo Verde which are ten in number They beginne vnder 15. degrées and end in 19. degrées and are distant from the firme land of Capo Verde from 70. to 1â—0 miles inwards to the sea Then wee entred into the sea called Sergasso which is all couered with hearbes so that it séemeth to be like a gréene fielde so thicke that a man can not see the water neyther can the ships passe through them but with great labour vnlesse they haue a strong wind The
the officers are so pleased and vse no more delaies The eight of August the officers of the ships tooke counsell together with the Gouernour of the Island what they were best to doe thinking it not good to follow the kinges aduise considering their long staying and fearing some other hard fortune if they should stay and because a great Gallion being a maÌ„ of warre and very strong lay as then before the Island wherein was the Gouernour of Brasilâ—a who by foule weather had put in there they concluded that this Gallion being well appointed should sayle with them to Lisbone and although they did it without the aduise and commandement of the king yet bad they rather so to aduenture their liues vpon the seas then againe to stay the danger of the Hauen for that the winter did daylie more and more increase so that they were not to looke for any better weather and in that sort appointing themselues as well as they could and taking in all necessarie prouisions the same day they all set saile with no small feare to fall into some misfortune by the way but because many that were of the ship of Malacca stayed at Tercera to saue such goods as by any meanes might be saued and by that meanes to help themselues among the which was the Factor of the pepper béeing one of my acquaintance at whose request as also because the Pepper of that ship and of all the other ships belonged all to one Farmer by whom I was appointed Factor and séeing the necessitie he bad and that he alone could hardly dispatch so great a matter I tooke order for mine owne affaires and hauing dispatched it by other shippes I stayed there to help him till wee had further aduise and order from the Farmers of the Pepper and other spices and wares of the which goods we saued a great quantitie by meanes of Duckers and other Instruments that we vsed hauing aduise from the Farmers the King that it shuld not be long before they sent for vs willing vs to stay there and to looke vnto the goods This staying and fetching vs away continued as I said before for the space of two yeares and a halfe whereby you may consider the good order and pollicie of the Admiraltie of Portingall and with what diligence and care they séeke for the common profit of the land and the poore Marchantes of the Countrie whome they ought to fauor and help as much as possiblie they may but they do cleane contrarie as those which deale in Portingall doe well finde The 13. of August the ships came back againe vnto the Island of Tercera because they had a contrarie wind as also for want of fresh water but they ankered not The day before the Earle of Cumberland with â— or 7. ships of warre sayled by the Iland of Tercera to their great good fortune passed out of sight so that they dispatched themselues in all haste for the more securitie tooke with them 4. hundred Spaniards of those that lay in Garrison in the Island with theÌ„ they sayled towards Lisbon hauing a good wind so that within a 11. dayes after they arriued in the riuer of Lâ—sbone with great gladnes triumph for if they had stayed but one day longer before they had entred the riuer they had all béene taken by Captaine Drake who with 40. ships came before Cascalis at the same time that the Indian ships cast anker in the riuer of Lisbone being garded thither by diuers Gallies Now by the discourse of this long and perilous voiage you may sufficiently perceiue how that onely by the grace and speciall fauour of God the Indian ships doe performe their voiages yet with great miserie paine labour losse and hinderance wherby men may likewise consider the manner of their NauigatioÌ„ ordinances customes and gouernments of their ships so that in coÌ„parison of many other Voyages this present Voyage may be estéemed a happy prosperous voyage for oftentimes it chanceth that but one or two ships of the fiue that yearely saile to India come safe home as of late it hath bin séene some being taken and some lost altogether by their owne follies bad order as herin at large you may perceiue c. The 97. Chapter Of the description of the Islands of Acores of the Flemmish Islands THe Isles of Acores or the Flemmish Islands are â— that is Terceâ—a Saint Michael S. Mary S. George Gratiosa Pico Fayâ—el There are yet two Islands called Flores and Coraâ— which are not contained vnder the name of Acores but yet at this day are vnder the gouernment of the same Islands so that they are in all accounted â— Islands They are called Acores that is to say Sparhaukes or Haukes because that in their first discouerte they found many Sparhaukes in them whereof they hold the name although at this day there is not any there to be found They are also called the Flemmish Islands that is of the Neatherlanders because the first that inhabited the same were Neatherlanders whereof till this time there is a great number and ofspring remaining that in manner and behauiour are altogether like Neatherlanders and there is yet in the same Island a running water that issueth out of a hill so runneth into the sea where as yet those issues or ofspringes of NeatherlaÌ„ders inhabite is called Ariberâ—dos â—ramengos that is the Flemmish riuer The principall Iland of them al is that of Tercera called Iusuâ— de Iesus Câ—stus of Tercera It is betwéene 1â— or â—6 miles in compasse and is altogether a great Cliffe of land whereby in it there is little roome for it is as it were walled round about with Cliffes but where any strand or land is there standeth a sort It hath no Hauens nor entrance of waters for the securitie and safetie of the ships but only before the chiefe towne called Angra where it hath an open Hauen which in forme is like a halfe Moone by the Portingales called Angra whereof the towne hath her name It hath on the one side in manner of an elbow sticking forth two high hilles called Bresyl which stretch into the sea so y t a far off they séeme to bee deuided from the Iland Those hils are very high so that being vpon them a man may see at the least 10 12 and sometimes 15. miles into the sea being cleare weather Vpon these hils there stand two small stone pillers where there is a CeÌ„tinell placed that continually watcheth to 〈◊〉 what ships are at sea and so to aduertise those of the Island for that as many ships as hee séeth coÌ„ming out of the west that is from the Spanish Indies or Brasâ— Câ—bo vâ— Guinea and the Portingal Indies and all other waies lying south or west for euerie ship he setteth a flagge vppon the piller in the west and when the ships which he deserieth are more then 5. then hee setteth vp a great auncient betokening a whole fleet
and desert as it sheweth and nothing but harde stones and rockes In good ground their Vines will not grow but onely in the wild stony places for that cause they are much esteemed The good groundes and plaine fieldes which in some places are verie many specially by villa da Prava are sowed with corne and woad they haue so much corne that they neede not bring any from other places although that besides their inhabitants natural borne Islanders They haue continually with them 14. companies of Spaniards which are all fed and nourished by the corne that groweth in the countrey vnlesse there chance to come a hard vnfruitfull yeare as oftentimes it doth for then they are forced to helpe themselues with forraine corne and that specially because of the soldiers that lie in the Iland yet it is strange that the corne and all other things in the Iland continue not aboue one yeare and that which is kept aboue a yeare is nought and nothing worth And therefore to keepe their corne longer then a yeare they are forced to bury it in the earth for the space of foure or fiue monthes together to the which end euery townseman hath his pit at one ende of the towne in the common high way which is appointed for the purpose and euery man setteth his marke vpon his pitte stone the Corne is but lightly buried in the earth the holes within are rounde and the toppes thereof so wide that a man may créep in wherunto there is a stone purposely made to couer it which shutteth it vppe very close Some of the pittes are so great as that they may holde two or thrée lastes of corne some greater some smaller as euery maÌ„ hath his prouision and as soone as the corne is reaped and fanned which is in Iuly euery man putteth his corne into those pittes laying straw vnder and round about it then they fill it ful or but half ful according as their quaÌ„titie is and so stoppe it vppe with the stone which they couer with earth so let it stande vntill Christmas when euery man that will fetch home his corne some let it ly longer and fetch it by little and little as they vse it but the corne is as good when they take it out as it was at thâ— first houre that they put it in and although that Cartes horses and men do commonly passe ouer it and also that the raine rayneth vppon it yet there entreth not any droppe of rayne or moysture into it and if the corne were not buried in that manner it woulde not continue good aboue foure monthes together but would bee spoyled and when it hath béene thus for a long time buried in the earth it will continue the whole yeare through and then they keep it in chestes or make a thing of mattes like a coope to preserue it in not once stirring or mouing it and so it continueth very good The greatest commoditie they haue in the land and that serueth their turnes best is their oxen I belieue they are the greatest fayrest y t are to be found in al Christendom wâ— vnmeasurable great and long horns Euerie Oxe hath his seuerall name like men and although there bee a thousande of them in a hearde and that one of them be called by his name hee presently commeth forth vnto his mayster that calleth him The land is verie high and as it séemeth hollow for that as they passe ouer a hill of stone the grounde soundeth vnder them as if it were a Seller so that it séemeth in diuers places to haue holes vnder the earth whereby it is much subiect to earthquakes as also all the other Ilandes are for there it is a common thing and all those Ilandes for the most part haue had mynes of brimstone for that in many places of Tercera and Saint Michael the smoke and sauour of Brimstone doeth still issue forth of the ground and the Countrey rounde about is all sindged and burnt Also there are places wherein there are fountaines and welles the water whereof is so hotte that it will boyle an egge as well as if it hung ouer a fire In the Iland of Tercera about three miles from Angra there is a fountayne in a place called Gualua which hath a propertie that all the woode which falleth into it by length of time conuerteth into stone as I my selfe by experience haue tryed In the same fountayne by the roote of a tree whereof the one halfe runneth vnder that water and is turned into as harde stone as if it were steele and the other parte of the roote which the water toucheth not is still woode and roote as it should bee The Iland hath great store and excellent kindes of woode specially Cedar trees which grow there in so great numbers that they make scutes Cartes and other grosse workes thereof and is the commonest woode that they vse to burne in those Countries whereby it is the wood that with them is least esteemed by reason of the great quantitie thereof There is another kinde of wood called Sanguâ—nlâ—o and is very fayre of a redde colour and another sorte that they call white woode being of it selfe as whyte as Chalke other that is pâ—râ—â—ite yellow and all naturall without any dying and therefore there are diuers good workemen in Tercera that are skilfull in Ioyners ocupation make many fine peeces of worke as Deskes Cubbordes Chestes and other such like thinges whereof many are caried into Portingall and much esteemed there as well for the beautie of the woode as for the workemanshippe and specially the Spanish Fleete which ordinarily refresh themselues in that Iland do carry much of it from thence for it is the best and finest that is made in all Spayne and Portingall although it be not comparable to the Seskes and fine workemanshippe of Nurenbergh and those countries but for wood it excelleth all other countries for that they haue in the Spanish Fleete besides their owne kindes of woodes at the least a thousande sortes of Woode of all colours that man can imagine or deuise and so fayre that more fayrer can not be paynted There is a certaine kinde of Woode in the Islande Pico situate and lying twelue miles from Tercera called Teâ—xo a most excellent and princely wood and therfore it is forbidden to be cut but only for the Kings owne vse or for his Officers The wood is as hard as Iron and hath a colour within as if it were wrought like red Chamlet with the same water and the older it is and the more vsed the fairer it is of colour so that it is worthie to be estéemed as in trueth it is All those Ilands are inhabited by Portingals but since the troubles in Portingall there haue bene diuers Spanish soldiers sent thether and a Spanish Gouernor that kéep all the Forts and Castles in their possessions although the Portingales are put to no charges nor yet hardly
vsed by them but are rather kept short so that not one soldier dareth goe out of the towne without licence and therefore men may quyetlie trauell throughout the Iland both day and night without any trouble Likewise they will not suffer any stranger to trauel to sée the Country and this order was not brought vp by the Spaniards but by the Portingals themselues before their troubles for they would neuer permit it and which is more all strangers that came thether were vsually appointed a certain street wherin they should sel their wares and might not goe out of that stréet Now it is not so straightlie looked vnto but they may goe in all places of the towne within the Iland but not about it to view the coast which notwithstanding was graunted vnto vs by the Gouernor himself who lent vs his horses to ryde about and gaue vs leaue to sée all the fortes which at this time is not permitted to the naturall borne Ilanders neyther are they so much credited We road twice about the Iland which he granted vs leaue to doe by meanes of certaine particular friendship we had with him neyther could the Portingales hinder vs therein because wee were in the Kinges seruice as Factors for the Kinges Pepper and for that they held and accounted vs as naturall borne Portingalles for the Gouernor would willinglie haue had mee to haue drawne a plot of the whole Iland that hee might haue sent it to the King wherein I excused my self yet I made him the town with the Hauen coming in and Fortes of Angra which he sent vnto the King the like whereof you may in this Booke behold for the which the Gouernor was greatlie affected vnto mee and shewed mee much friendshippe Wee had in our Lodging a French Marchant and a Scot that willinglie would haue gone with vs to sée the Iland but could not be suffered for the Portingalles thinke that they would take the proportion thereof and so seeke to defeate them of their right But returning to our matter the Ilandes are verie good and holesome ayre and the diseases that are most common in those Countries though not verie plentiful but only here there one are one sicknes called O Ax that is a kind of bad ayre y t taketh them maketh them altogether lame or half lame of their limmes or of some one limme and an other sicknes that is called O Sange that is a certaine blood that hastelie cometh vppon a man as a swelling in the eyes or other places of the face or of the bodie is as red as blood for as they say it is nothing els but méere blood these are two diseases like the plague and are commonest sicknesses in those Countries which grow by reason of the great windines of the Ilandes that are subiect to all stormes and foule weathers and are vnreasonable moyst which is one of the principall causes of these diseases for the windes are there so strong and dangerous that they consume both the Iron and the Steele of their houses and bring them into powder for I haue seene Iron grates in the Kings Custome house as thicke as a mans arme and the windowes of hard free stone which were so consumed by the wind that the Iron in some places was become as thynne as a straw and the stone in like sort and therefore in those Countries they vse to make their Rooffes and painthouses of stones which they digge in the water out of sandes vppon the Sea coast of those Illandes whereon the wind hath not so great a power to consume it and yet that Custome house had not bene made aboue 6 or 7 yeares before at the most In this Iland besides the two townes there are diuers great villages as S. Sebastians S. Barboran Altares Gualua Villa noua with manie other parishes and hamlets so that for the most part it is built and inhabited sauing onely the places that are wild and full of woods which can hardlie bee trauelled much lesse inhabited Their most traffique is as I said before the wood that groweth in those countries I meane for such as deale in marchandise and the workemen that make it but the rest waight for the fleets that come and goe to and from the Spanish and Portingall Indies from Brasilia Cabo Verde and Guinea all which countries doe commonly come vnto Tercera to refresh themselues as lying very fitly for that purpose so that all the inhabitants doe thereby richlie maintaine themselues and sell at their wares as well handie works as victuals vnto those shippes and all the Ilandes round about doe as then come vnto Tercera with their wares to sell it there For the which cause the English men and other strangers keepe continually about those Ilandes béeing assured that all shippes for want of refreshing must of force put into those Ilandes although at this time manie shippes doe auoid those Ilandes to the great discommoditie of the Ilands and the shippes From Tercera Southeast about 27. or 28. miles lyeth the Iland of S. Michael which is about 20 myles long and is likewise full of Townes and Villages inhabited by Portingalles for ayre and all other thinges like vnto Tercera The chief Towne is called Punta del Gada where there is great traffique of English Scots and French men onlie as in Tercera because of the woad which is more abundant in that Ilande then in all the rest of them for that euerie yeare there is made aboue two hundreth thousand Quintalles of Woad It hath likewise great abundance of Corne so that they helpe to victuall all the Ilandes that are round about them It hath neither Hauens nor Riuers but onlie the broad sea and haue lesse safegard and defence then those which are of Tercera but there they ly not vnder the commandement of any Fort so that many set sayle with all the windes and put to sea which in the road of Tercera they may not doe and therefore the strangers shippes had rather sayle to S. Michaels for there they can not be constrayned to doe anie thing but what they will themselues to doe There is also a company of Spaniards in a Castle that standeth by the Towne of Punta del Gada which is made by the Spaniards for the defence and maintenance of the same towne From the Iland of S. Michaels Southwardes twelue myles lyeth the Island Santa Maria which is about ten or twelue myles compasse and hath no traffique but onlie of pot earth which the other Ilands fetch from thence It hath no Woad but is full of all victualles like Tercera and inhabited by the Portingales There are no Spaniardes in it because it is a stonie Countrie like Tercera and hard to bord whereby the inhabitantes themselues are sufficient and able enough to defend it While I remained in Tercera the Earle of Comberland came thether to take in fresh water and some other victuals but the inhabitants would not suffer him to haue it but
mattes laid vpon the ground Their meat is made of great white rootes taken out of the earth called Iniamos very pleasant of taste like the spanish Baâ—at 〈…〉 or chesnuts They are both rosted and sodden with other rootes and sugar canes and Bananas which are a fruite of a tree like the Indian figges mentioned in this booke long like cucumbers with a tart sweetish but a pleasant taste sometimes likewise they eate both fish flesh which they lay al in one vessell togither and so sit round about it like a company of beastes and neuer drinke but after they haue done eating The gouernours eate alone out of a tin vessel the rest out of a filthie earthen vessel and sit vpon a mat spread vpon the ground The most worke that the women do is to fetch water and fruite and to dresse the meate they will by no meanes ease themselues vppon the ground esteeming that a great offence but haue great vessels made for the same purpose which are sette in the earth They vse no other weapons against their enemies but onely fistes and traues they that dwell by the mine are better appointed with bowes arrowes pikes and targets as long as a man made of barkes of trees and such like things Their Drums are broade aboue and narrow below they haue likewise Cornets of Elophants teeth of all these kindes of instruments and weapons I had some brought from thence Our men being in the Riuer of Gaban came vnto an Iland where they were carried on shore by a Moore that had a great tooth sticking in his vpper lip with a broade knife in his hand and all his body rased and pinked as I saide before where he brought them into a house among the Moores wherein were certaine couerlets made of the rinds or barkes of trees laide vppon the earth where they sate downe not making anie choyse and being sette he clapt them on the shoulders pointing vpwards with his fingers saying in his language Maâ—â—bam they not knowing what hee meant looked vp where they perceiued a blacke man sate vppon the top of a certaine paire of Staires like an image with many chaines of bones and rings hanging about him fearefull to beholde at his feete lay certaine blacke women with Elephants tailes in their handes to beare away the flies and to make winde whereby they vnderstood him to be the Lorde of the Island Wherupon they kneeled vpon one of their knees honouring him according to the custome of the lande clapping their hands vntill the Maâ—â— or Lord made signes vnto them clapping his handes which done they rose vp the Maâ—â— giuing them some of those mars made of barks as a princely present of the which with their linnen I can shew you others of the same ship taking their pinnace entred into another creeke in the same Riuer about two miles higher and there founde a great village lying on the same riuer so neere that they might throw a stone ouer the houses and being within two ships length or the shore they cast anker on the shore there stood at least 1000. Moores men women and children whereof some had pikes kniues and other wepons in thâ—ir hands crying with loude voyces 〈◊〉 and other wordes clapping their handes together which to them was strange both to heare and see Not long after a Moore that by them about foure or fiue miles froÌ„ thence had beene taken into their pinnace stepped into the water and went on shore where being on land the Moores specially the women hong about him in such numbers that he could hardly passe singing and throwing grasse vppon him that our men could neither heare nor see the man neuer ceasing to sing and make a noyse but still continuing dancing leaping and with their kniues cutting off al the grasse meane time there came one out of the village hauing a long staffe in his hand as â—f he were some officer willing them to leaue off theyr noyse driuing thâ—m from the shore but to no end 〈◊〉 reason of the great number of people that were there assembled at the last the Moore that went out of the pinace from our men with one of their Canuyten for so they called their boates came aboord bringing two men and an old woman that was one of the gouernors wiues hauing her breast painted greene and in each hande a branch of a tree shaking both her handes and the two men clapping with their hands giuing to vnderstand as our men conceiued according to their manner that they were welcome with them two of our men went on land whereat the Moores made great ioy with singing dancing leaping and such like pastimes and going vnto the gouernor diuers of them followed specially the women running both before and behinde them leaping and dancing like mad men most of them hauing of the great broade kniues in their handes striking them together in most feareful maner but it was no wonder to see them make so great ioy and shew so much pastime for that it was strange for them to see white men which they neuer had seene for that neuer any had beene or traffiked among them true it is that the Portingales had beene in the same Riuer but not so high for our men were at the least tenne or twelue miles from their shippe within the Riuer and the Riuer before that village called Crementun was about a mile broade hauing another village on the other side and 〈◊〉 with their pinnace before that village they shot off a peece whereat all the people â—ne backe being afraid but came presently againe and as our men went vnto the â—ouernour they led them by the armes singing and shewing great signes of ioy for the comming of these white men into their countrie and being at the Gouernours house which was made of reeds they stayed about halfe an howre before he came out meane time the people that followed theÌ„ neuer left singing making anoyseâ— and when hee came there were three mattes and two stools a great and a little brought with him by certain Moores that followed him All his body and his face was painted white either with chalk or some other painting a sacke of whiting bring likewise brought after him On his head he wore a cappe made of a skin stuck ful of feathers with chains made of bones aboue 100. times about his necke armes and legs being set vpon his stoole there came an old woman that gaue him some of the whiting wherewith hee made as if he had washt his hands the rest he threw vpon his face with that he held vp both his hands meane time his wise had whiting giuen her which done shee began to come forth of the house singing and dauncing al the other women following her doing the like with that the gouernour called the Moore that brought our meÌ„ with him from the place aforesaid saying vnto him that our men were welcome clapping his handes together and saying Fuio Fuio
according to their manner and after many other wordes hee willed them to bring some Iron saying they should haue teeth for it which hauing done he brought forth his teeth This riuer as I saide is verie broad and full of Crocodiles and sea horses it hath many creekes and as they sailed from Crementun it lyeth Southeast where in the night they lauered 2. or 3. houres and came twice on ground and â—â— sayling forwardes they passed by an Island called Caraceâ—â—bo lying in the mouth of the riuer as there are many being verie low and flat land and ful of trees From that Island there came a Caâ—utien aboord their ship and in it eighteene persons and with them they had a smal drum of a hollow stocke whereon they played and being by the ship foure or fiue of them stept in whereof one of them vppon his face breast and armes was al white he bore a greene branch of a tree with a little bel and some whiting in his hand which hee strowed about the ship ringing the bel when they or any of our men spake hee made shewe as it were to consecrate and blesse the ship which done sirting downe and stammering in his words like a man possessed with some sprite or one that had a shaking feuer There was a great pot of Palme wine brought forth whereof they dranke one vnto the other which continued for the space of halfe an houre which done they went into their scâ—te rowed to land making signes to our men to come on shore and to barter with them for their wares which they did carrying them some Iron and other marchandise and went into the gouernors house being in a village where among other things they saw a little cottage about three foote high couered with straw and opeÌ„ on the side vnder the which stood a little gibet wheron hung a little horne with certaine stuffe therein which they would not lette them see by no meanes and vnder the gibet stood a staffe with a dead childes scul fixed vpon it hauing in the one eye a bone much like the bone that is founde in the head of a â—addocke whereof with vs they make horses bridles and collars for degs at the foote of the staff lay al sorts of bones both of fishes and beasts and among the rest the â—awes of a Prisâ—â— which in our countrey is called a sword fish without teeth which the master tooke away brought it vnto me our men asking what y t might signifie they said there lay a dead carcas and being in another village as they passed forwarde they sawe at the least twentie men sitting at the doore of one of their houses whereof some seemed to bee of the principal commanders and within that house there was a noyse of singing both by great and smal that it made them muse whereupon they asked what it meant they saide there was one dead The women being in trauel are not any thing ashamed but euery one both yong and old men and women run vnto her the doore standing wide open but one thing is to be wondered at that the children are al circumcised and yet they haue neither law order nor knowledge of God The countrey is fruitful and ful of al strange fruites and abounding in al kinds of beasts and birds of diners formes both great and smal There are some trees where vpon one branch there hang at the least 100. birdes nests altogether most pleasant to behold They hang by certaine strawes made fast vnto the boughes because snakes should not creepe in and suck their egges many of those nests were brought vnto me This shall suffice for the discription of the coast of Guinea after the which followeth the mightie kingdome of Congo The ancient writers helde opinion that this lande was not inhabited calling it Torriâ—â—am Zonam that is a place in the earth that through the heate of the sunne is burnt vp but they were altogether deceiued for as Odoardus Lopez a Portingale witnesseth hauing with many other Portingales long time inhabited therein There is good dwelling and the aire coÌ„trarie to al mens iudgements very temperate and that in winter there is no extreame cold but onely such weather as it is in haruest time at Rome They vse no linings nor shirte bandes nor change of clothes neither care they for the fire it is likewise no colder on the tops of the hilles then in the vallies but generally it is warmer with them in the winter then in the summer onely because of the continual raines specially about the middle of the day two houres before and as much after dinner which heat is very euill for our meÌ„ to endure The people of the countrie are black but part of the women fear what â—â—llow their haire for the most part is blacke and curled and some haue red haire they are of a mean stature therin not much vnlike the Portingales the balles of theyr eyes being of diuers colours blacke and sea colour their lips not so thicke as those of Nâ—bâ—a other Moores their faces of al proportions fat leane and indifferent betweene both like the Portingales and not like other Moores of Guinea that are foule and deformed The length of the day and night is in a maâ—er al one for that it differeth not one quarter of an houre to anie mans iudgement throughout the whole yeare their winter beginneth in our lent about the middle of March and their summer in the middle of September â— in winter it raigneth there continually for the space of fiue moneths that is Aprill May Iune Iuly August in which time there are but few faire daies and there the raine falleth in such great drops that it is wonderful which water is al dronke vp into the earth with the drienesse of the land in summer time wherein it raineth scarce once in sixe moneths with the raine likewise the riuer is filled with thick muddie water so that it floweth ouer the banks and moystneth the ground The windes that in summer doo continually blow in those countries are as Hippocrates and after him Iulius the first emperor of Rome naming them with a greek name Eâ—esâ—oâ— Northwest by the Portingales called Venâ—o Maestro or general wiâ—d as being ordinarie at that time of the yeare in all those countries which are likewise causes of the raines by driuing vp of mâ—stes and vapors vppon the tops of the hils which being there and resoluing into water doo fil the earth with raine and those continual raines are likewise causes of the growing and increasing of the great riuers that are in Egypt and Ethiopia as Niger and Nylus and al the riuers there abouts some running into the Mediterranean others into y e great Ocean seas by reason of their slime fattines and because in our sumer which is their winter for the most part it raineth throughout the countryes of Congo and Ethiopia it is not to be wondered at if the riuers be greater
and do ouerflow more then they are in the furder and very drie countries for in Egypt not accounting Alexandria with the places bordering on the same where it neuer raineth it is holden for a verie strange wonderful thing how the riuer Niâ— should grâ—w so high ful of thicke muddie water and alwaies at one time of the yeare not fayling therein thereby refreshing the earth and giuing foode both to man and beast whereby the ancient inhabitants of those countries did vse to offer sacrifices vnto that Riuer calling it as Ptolomeus in his fourth booke rehearseth a good Spirit and yet at this day many Christians esteeme it for a miracle for that without the increase thereof they would die for hunger their liues â—as Iohn Chrisostome sayth consisteth of the increasing of the waters so then the Northwest winds that in our summer time which is their winter blow in our countries are the meanes in those countries to gather cloudes and moystures vpon the high hilles from whence their raine proceedeth which raine is the cause that their countrey is not so colde as ours ingendering in those hot countries a certaine kinde of warme water Those raines then are likewise the cause of the growing ouerflowing of the riuer Niâ—us and other riuers in those countries wherof the inhabitants haue deuised and written to many fables But in their summer which is our winter there bloweth contrary windes as south and southeast which without al doubt are cold as blowing from the contrarie part of the Pole Antarctike and coole those countries as our winds do here in these countries like as with theÌ„ they cause a faire cleare aire so with vs they cause great store of raines by a certain natural disposition of the heauens the climates ruled and gouerned by the high wisedom of God that hath diuided the heauens ordained the course of the sun and other planets in such maner that al parts of the earth by their light brightnes are filled with warmth and coldnes therein do continue with great proportion and equalitie so that for certain if the freshnesse and coldnes of those winds did not refresh the countreyes of Ethiopia Congo and other places bordering on the same it were impossible for the inhabitants to indure the heate The same windes likewise doo refresh and comfort the inhabitants of Grecia the Islands of Candia and Cipies the countries of Asia Mynor and those of Suria and Egypt which liue by the refreshing of those generall Northwest west winds which rightly by the Grecians are called Zoephero that is bringing life those also are the cause that in Ethiopia Congo and other countries bordering thereon it neuer Snoweth no not vpon the highest hilles vnlesse it bee further off towardes the Cape de Bona Speranza or in some certaine places by the Portingales called Snow hilles as in Congo they finde neither Ice nor snow which with them would bee more esteemed then gold therewith to coole their drink so that the Riuers do not increase by the melting of snow but only by means of the coÌ„tinual raine of fiue moneths as I said before But returning to our former matter you may trauel to Congo by two waies one by the main sea to S. Helena and so further ouer or along by the coast of Affrica to the Island of Saint Thomas and so to the Cape of Lopes Gonzales lying vnder one degree vppon the South side of the Equinoctiall line about 21. Duch miles from Saint Thomas Island and from thence they saile with the wind that commeth off the land along the coast euerie euening casting anker in some creeke or hauen vntill they arriue at the place where they desire to be The kingdome of Congo beginneth at the Cape de S. Catharina which lyeth on the South side of the Equinoctial line vnder two degrees and a halfe and passing along the coast you saile by certain hils and strands not woorth the noting till you come to two creekes in forme somewhat like a paire of spectacles where there is a good hauen called Baro D Aluaro Gonzales that is the creeke or hauen of Aluaro Gonzaleâ— not farre from it runneth a little riuer into the sea by reason of the rednesse thereof by the Portingales called Rio de â—as Boreras Râ—slas because the water runneth ouer a certaine redde sande that coloureth the water at that place beginneth a high hill called by the Portingales la Sierra Complida that is a long hill passing further there is another riuer called â—a â—e â—as Almadias which is as much to say as the creeke or hauen for shippes because in that place many bankes are made in the mouth of this riuer there lyeth three Islands wherof the greatest is the middle being inhabited wherein there is a hauen for little ships the other two are not inhabited Parting from thence you come to the great riuer of Congo called Zaâ—e taking his beginning or spring partly froÌ„ the same lake froÌ„ whence the riuer Nylus doth flow This riuer casteth forth so great aboundance of water that it is incredible for that before it runneth into the sea it is at the least 5. miles broad on y e vpper part it is fresh water for 8 10. 16 Duch miles vnto the red sea whereby the pilots sailing ouer it know what place they are in Vpwards into this riuer you may saile with great barks she length of fine miles but not higher by reason of the discending and fall thereof from a steep high ground as the riuers of Nilus Donow and Rhein do in some places which are called Cataraâ—tas that is shedings or fallings of waters making so great a noyse that it may bee heard a great way from it In this riuer at the entry into the sea are many Islands al inhabited and very populous that haue diuers gouernours al subiectes to the king of Congo In tunes past those Islands made warres one against the other in certaine scutes cut out of the bodie of a great tree in their language called Licondo whereof some are so great that sixe men cannot fadome them with height and length correspondent so that one of the greatest being cutte in proportion of a scute woulde holde two hundred men Those scutes they rowe with ores wherwith they make great speede euery man hauing an ore and a bowe and when they fight they lay downe the ore and vse their bowe and to steere and winde those scutes they vse no other ruther than one of those ores In this riuer there are many strange beastes specially Crocadiles that are very great in their language called Carman the sea horse and another that seemeth to haue handes and a taile like vnto a Flaske which they call Ambize Angulo that is a sea hogge because it is as fatte as a hogge it hath a good and sauoury flesh not like fish although it bée a fish which feedeth not of that which is in the riuer but eateth
the grasse that groweth on the riuers side and hath an head like an ore whereof there are some that weigh fiue hundred poundes the Fisher men that take them are bound vpon pain of death to bring them to the King There you finde an other hooke of land called Cabo di Padran and alittle from thence the riuer Lelunda which commeth out of a small lake lying within the land from whence more Riuers haue their off-spring specially one called Coanza wherof hereafter I will speake This riuer Lelunda when it rayneth not is very drie so that it may be passed ouer by foote it runneth vnder the hill whereon Congo the chiefe cittie doth stand and from thence to the riuer of Ambrizi which is a great riuer with a hauen and runneth not farre from the riuer of Congo into the sea a litle further you come to an other riuer called â—â—ze which hath no hauen and from thence to Onzo another riuer with a good hauen hauing her spring out of the same lake from whence the riuer Nylus doth issue and somwhat more to the south lieth the riuer Lemba but it hath no hauen nor yet saileable From thence you come to Damde a very great riuer wherin ships of two hundred tuns may saile out of this riuer there runneth an arme or braunche lying southward called Bengo which with Coanza another great riuer make the Island of Loanda both their streames meeting together driue foorth much filth and sand which make the Island greater Bengo is a great streame or riuer which may be sailed vppe at the least fiue and twenty Italian miles which are about fiue Dutch miles and betweene these two Islands as I saide before lieth the rich Island of Loanda with the hauen called by the name of the Island Loanda which is as much to lay euen or flat land without hilles This Island is about four miles long and somewhat lesse than a quarter of a mile broad and in some places not aboue a bowe shoote broad where there is a thing much to be wondered at that when it is ful sea if one dig but twoo or three handfuls deep into the grouÌ„d they shal find fresh water and digging in the same ground when it ebbeth the water is salt and brackish In this Island of Loanda are fished the Schulpekens which in the kingdome of Congo and other places borduring thereabouts are vsed for mony which fishing is done in this maner There are certayne women that being on the sea side goe alittle way into the water lading certayne baskets with sand which being filled they carry them on land wash the sand from the Schulpkens that are very small and in great numbers by them esteemed of twoo sortes some males other females which in shew and colour are the fairest and although many of them are found vpon the strand or shore of the riuer of Congo yet those of Loanda are the best fairest most esteemed of they are very shining and of an ash colour other colours are of no account for those Schulplikens you may buy any kinde of thing whether it be gold siluer or any kinde of victualles whereby you may perceiue that not onely in the kingdome of Congo and the countries about it but also in other places of Affrica and in the kingdome of Chyna and some part of India they haue vsed other kindes of things in steed of mony as we vse gold siluer copper and such like mixtures for in Ethiopia they vse pepper corns for mony In the kingdome of â—buâ—o about the riuer Niger Shuâ—penes and Porcelleten as also in China and Ben â—alen so that mettall is not so much esteemed of in most partes of the worlde as it is in Europa and other places circumtacent In this Island there are seauen or eight villages by them called Libatâ— whereof the principall is called the Holighost wherein the gouernour is resident being sent from Congo where he administreth Iustice and looketh sharpelye to the fishing of Schalpekens There are many beasts goates and wilde swine for that the tame become wilde and runne into the woods also therein groweth a great and strange tree called Enlanda being alwaies gréene of a strange form specially in the branches that grow very high and cast downe certaine small threedes which touching the earth do bring forth roots from whence other plants or trees do spring forth most aboundantly in great numbers vnder the first rhinde or barke of this tree groweth a certaine linnen which being beaten and made cleane and then stretched foorth in breadth and length it serueth to apparell the common people In this Island also they vse shipps made of palme or Indian nut trees the boordes being peeced together after the manner of the Portingale barkes wherein they vse both sailes and oâ—es and with them they fish in all the riuers thereabout which are very full of fish and with them likewise they row vnto the firme land On that side which reacheth towardes the firme land there are trees that growe in certaine deepe places on the shore vpon the rootes whereof the sea continually beateth where groweth oysters as broade as a mans hand verie good to be eaten and wel knowne to that countrey people which they call Ambiziamatare which is to say stone fish The Island at one ende is very neere vnto the firme land and the chanell is oftentimes swoome ouer by the countrey people and in the same chanel there are certaine smal Islandes which when it floweth are not seene but when it ebbeth they appeare aboue the water and being vncouered they finde the oysters lying at the rootes of the trees hare by the Island on the outwarde part swim many whales that are blacke and fight togither killing ech other wherof being fished taken vp by the Moores they make treane oile with the which and with pitch togither they dresse their ships the mouth of the â—auen lieth in the north in breadth aboue halfe an Italian mile being very deep and right ouer against it on the firme land lieth the village of S. Paul not very strongly fortified and inhabited by Portingales that are brought the thither with wife and children out of Portingale all the channell is very full of fish specially of Sardins and Enchâ—ones which in winter time are there in so great abundaunce that they leape vpon the shore also diuers other good fishes as soales sturgeons barbles and great creuiâ—hes which are very wholesome and are there found in great numbers whereby the common people doe liue Satling further from Loanda you come to the Riuer called Coanza which Riuer with Bengo and other Riuers aforesaide doe make the Island of Loanda so that Coanza also hath her off-spring from a little lake which maketh a Riuer that floweth out of the same greate lake from whence Nylus and other Riuers haue their issue which Lake in this Carde is called Zane or Zembre of the ancient fathers Tritoms Lanis because therein as it is saide
Portingales do yearely watch for the Turkish ships which saile with many costly wares not hauing licence of them they are boorded and spoyled of their wares by the Portingales presuming themselues to be lords of al the traffike in those coūtries not permitting any other to traffike therin but onely themselues or by theyr licence Hauing sailed about this Cape de Guarda Fuy and setting your course towardes the redde Sea there are other townes and hauens inhabited by the Mahometanes the first called Meth the other being somewhat further Barbora and there are the last white people from thence you finde al blacke people and beyond that you come to Ceila Dalaca Malaca Carachin which coast in their spéech is called Baragiam being al Moores and expert in armes their apparrell from the middle vpwarde being of cotten linnen The chéefe gouernours or nobles weare Cappoten which they cal Bermissi this countrey is rich of gold Iuory mettal and al kind of victuals From thence you come to the mouth of the red sea wherein lyeth an Island called Babelmandel on both sides wherof there runneth a channel into the red sea whereof the West side is almost fiftéene Italian that is three Duch miles broade through the which al the shippes doe passe both in and out the channel lying on the other side is shallow and ful of sandes and cliffes so that in al it is about sixe Duch miles broade whereof the one poynt lying in the Affrican shore is called Raibel and the other lying in the countrey of Arabia Felix is called Ara whereabouts also is the hauen of the rich towne of Aden in Arabia alreadie spoken of in this booke This water runneth inward vnto Swes being about 1200. Italian miles in lēgth on both sides altogether dry and verie shallow ful of Islandes déep only in the middle where the shippes do ordinarily saile which is onely by the great swift course of the water which scouring the channel kéepeth it cleane and déepe casting vp the sande on both sides Now to say something of Prester Iohn being the greatest and the mightiest prince in all Affrica his countrey beginneth from the enterance into the red sea and reacheth to the Island of Siene lying vnder Tropicus Cancri excepting the coast of the same sea which the Turke within these fiftie yeares hath taken from him so that his gouernment towards the Northwest and East lieth most part by the red sea and Northeast vpon Egypt and the desarts of Nubia and on the South side vpon Monomugi so that to set downe the greatnesse of all the countries which this Christian king hath vnder his commandement they are in compasse 4000. Italian miles The cheefe Cittie whereof and wherein he is most resident is called Belmalechi his gouernment is ouer many countries and kingdomes that are rich and aboundant in gold siluer and precious stones and al sorts of mettals his people are of diuers colours white blacke and betwéene both of a good stature and proportion The noblemen and gentlemen of the countrey apparrel themselues in silke Imbrodered with gold and other such like In this countrey they obserue lawes for wearing of apparrel by degrées as they do in Portingale for that some are not permitted to weare any other apparrel but Leather the people are Christians but hold certaine ceremonies of the Iewish lawe and vpon the day of the conception of the virgin Mary al the kings and Princes vnder his obedience do come vnto the saide towne of Belmalechi there to celebrate the feast euerie man bringing with him such treasor or yearely tribute as he is bound to pay and at the same feast the people come thither in pilgrimage to honour it wherevppon that day there is a great procession and out of the church from whence they come they bring an Image of the virgin Mary in form like a man of Massie gold and where the eyes should be it hath two great rubies the rest of the whole Image beeing wrought with excellent workmanship and set with many precious stones laying it on a beere of gold very cunningly wrought At this procession Prester Iohn himselfe is personally present either sitting in a Chariot of golde or riding on an Elephant most richly trapped himselfe apparrelled in most strange and costly cloth of golde al embrodered and set with pearles and stones most sumptuous to beholde to see this feast and Image the people runne in so great troupes that by reason of the prease many are thrust to death This Emperour Prestor Iohn is not rightly named for that his name is Belgian Bel signifying the highest perfectest and excellentest of all things and Gian Lorde or Prince which is proper to all that commaund or gouerne ouer others so then Belgian signifieth the chiefe or highest Prince which name being so ioyned is proper to none but to the king hauing also a surname of Dauid as our Emperours the name of Caesar or Augustus Here I must alittle discourse of the riuer Nylus which hath not her issue in Belgians land neither from the hilles of the Moone nor as Ptolomeus saith from the two lakes which he placeth in the midle between east and weast with the distance of almost foure hundred and fiftie Italian miles one from the other for that vnder the same pole wher in Ptolomeus placeth the saide two lakes lieth the two kingdoms of Congo and Angola towardes the weast and on the other side towards the east the kingdome of Monomotapa and Sofala with distance from the one sea to the other of about twelue hundred Italian miles and Odoardus saieth that in these countries there is but one lake which lieth on the bordures of Angola and Monomotapa which is in bignesse about a hundred ninety fiue Italian miles of the which lake wee are well assured and truely certified by those of Angola but on the east side of Sofala and Monomotapa there is no mention made of any other lake whereby it may be saide that vnder the same degrees there is no other lake True it is that there are yet two other lakes but they lie clean contrary to those whereof Ptolomeus writeth for hee as I saide before placeth his lakes right in the middle betweene east and weast and those whereof I speake lie right by direct line betweene north and south distant about foure hundred miles Some men in those countries are of opinion that Nilus springeth out of the first lake and then againe hideth it selfe vnder the earth and issue out againe in another place which some men deny and Odoardus saith that right the opinion therein is that Nylus passeth not vnder the earth but that it runneth through certayne fearefull and desart valleis where no man commeth or inhabiteth without anye certaine channell and so it is sayd that it runneth vnder the earth Therefore it is most certaine that Nyl◠floweth out of the first sake which lieth vnder twelue degrees by the pole antartike which lake is almost compassed
some passage through the same to enter into the East Indies but al in vaine for the most part consuming and destroying themselues therein found much ice and snow The people of this Island are wel proportioned of bodie and limbes wel made and fitte to labour they paint their bodyes thereby to seeme faire and weare siluer and Copper rings in their eares their apparrel is speckled furres and marternes and such like in winter they weare the furs inward and in summer outward like the Lapelanders and Vinnen they gird themselues with cotteÌ„ girdles or with fish skins and such like things their cheefe foode is fish specially Salmon although they haue both birdes and fruit inough their houses are made of wâ—od whereof they haue great quantities and couered with the skinnes of beastes or fishes In this land are griffons white beares and birdes There is a countrey vnder 44. degrees and a halfe called Baccalao taking the name of some kind of fishes which thereabouts are so aboundant that they let the shippes from sailing This countrey of Baccalaos reacheth nine hundred miles that is from the Cape de Baccalaâ—â— to Fâ—orida which is accounted in this sort from the point of Baccalao to the bay of the riuer are 70. miles froÌ„ the bay of the Riuer to the bay de los Islos 70. miles from thence to Rio Fundo 70. miles from thence to Cabo Baxo 160. miles and again to the riuer of Saint Anthony 100. miles from thence to the furthest Cape 180. miles and againe to the Cape of saint Elena 110. miles and from Saint Elena to the poynt of Canauerall or the Reedlyooke 100. miles then to Florida 40. miles which is in all nine hundred miles which is the greatnes of this land whereof the least latitude from the Equinoctial line is 48. degrees and a halfe this country both on the sea coast and otherwise is verie populous and like the low countries because it lyeth in a corner This Land hath many Islandes lying about it as Curia Regia Baya Bica Stella the Cape of Hope and the Brittons Cape Before you come to Florida the prouince Cichora lyeth by the Riuer Iordan and another hard by it called Guada Lupa The west side of Noua Frauncia hath diuers prouinces now discouered as Quiui a â—euola Astaclan Tethchichimichi The south side of Florida is called by the Spaniards Floridum Pascha because Iohannes Pontio Legionensi founde it out on Easter day in Anno 1512. and not because of the greennesse and budding of the trees in the same land as Theueâ— writeth The north side of noua Frauncia is as yet not discouered and because our Carde discouereth no further then to Florida we wil begin therwith and describe some part of the situation thereof because it is worthie memorie as beeing a place wherein many Spaniards Frenchmen haue lost their liues as also because it is the first best knowne of al new France whereunto the Frenchmen haue vsed to saile and therein in the time of Charles the ninth had a certaine fort which was called by his name Charles burgâ— but was after taken by the Spaniards and al the Frenchmen slaine contrary to their fayth and promise specially such as yeelded themselues into their hands But because my meaning is not to recite histories I remit the reader to the bookes which make mention thereof Florida hath a Cape lying far into the sea stretching Southward in maner of a tong reaching an hundred miles the measure being taken from the lowest northerne corner to the south poynt This Cape or hooke as I sayde is long and narrow like Italy in length an hundred miles and in breadth twentie or fiftie miles where it is broadest On the East side it hath the Islands of Câ—ehora Banama and Lucaya on the west side towardes Spaine and the gulfe of Mexico it is diuided from new Spaine by the land of Anauaca On the north side it bordureth on the firme land it lieth right against the point towards the south 25. miles into the sea lieth the famous Island Cuba otherwise called Isabellâ— the sea that runneth between this poynt of Florida and Iucâ—tan is called Mare Catayum by other the gulfe of Ferdinando Cortosi or the gulfe of Florida or of Mexico It is a flat lande wherein are many riuers which moysture the land and make it fertile the sea side being sandie whereon there groweth diuers pine trees without nuts or shels also many acornes wild cherries mulberies chesnuts but ranker of taste then oures in these countreyes many Mastike Cedars Cipres Bayes Palme trees Nuls and wild vines which grow vppon the trees that are next them bringing forth grapes that are good to be eaten also a certain fruit of Medlars greater and better then ours there are also plums verie faire to behold but not good of taste there are also Framboisen or Hinnebesien and some verie small round berries of a pleasant taste not much vnlike our Clappe beries there groweth rootes which in their speech they cal Hatle whereof in time of dearth they make bread Fourefooted beasts are there likewise in great aboundance as Harts Hinds rain Deare Goats Beares Leopards Fores many kind of Wolues wild Dogs Hares Conies c. Their birds are Peacocks Partriges Parrats Pigeons ring Doues Turtledoues Meerelens Crowes Hauks FalcoÌ„s Marlens hearns Cranes Storkes wild Geese Ducks water Rauens white red blacke and ash coloured Reighures and many other water foules Crocadiles in so great aboundance that it is incredible which ofteÌ„ times do eat and deuoure men swimming in the water there are likewise many kindes of snakes and a certain kind of beast not much vnlike the lion in Affrica Golde and siluer wherewith they traffike they haue it as they say out of the ships which fal on ground vpon the Cape which is not vnlikely because most of the ships are cast away vpon that Cape so that there is more money thereabout then in the north parts They said likewise that in the hils Apalatcyaeris there is gold to bee found in this countrie also groweth the roote China which by meanes of the Emperour Charles hath gotten a great report and is much vsed by phisitions which some also vse to heale the French pocks Besides al these things aforesaid there are diuers sortes of seedes and hearbes whereof many kindes of collours are made very profitable for painters the inhabitants knowe well how to vse them therewith to die al kindes of leather The people are in a manner a black yellow and euil fauoured yet strong of good proportion of bodie They couer their members with verie faire drest hart skins most part of them paint their bodies and also their armes and thighes with many figures which colour wil not off vnlesse it bee washed it is so printed and sunke into the flesh they haue black haire downe to theyr hippes being long which they verie cunningly bind vp in their dealings they are wholly light and
hauing seene hee stayed not there but went vnto an other poynt which hee named Cotehe where hee met with certayne Fishermen who with feare fled from him into the countrey aunswering or calling vnto him Cotehe Cotehe that is to say home home thinking hee asked them the way into the land whereby this poynt hath holden the name of Cotehe There vpon the sea side they found a great towne which for the greatnesse thereof they called Alkair after a Towne of the same name lying in Egypt yet I thinke it not to be halfe so great as they affirme it to be where by the Inhabitantes they were friendly receiued and being entered into the town they meruelled to see houses with high towers goodly churches paued streets and great trade of marchandise The houses were of hewen and carued stones woâ—kmanlike made and built with chalke but couered with strawe and leaues the chambers within them of tenne or twelue steps high they were likewise apparelled but not with wollen cloth because they had no sheepe but with cotten wouen in diuerse sortes very finely coloured the women likewise apparelled from the middle downe to the foot couering their heads and breasts in diuers sorts very carefully seeking to couer their feete that they might not be seene going diligeÌ„tly to church to which end such as were rich of authoritie had their owne paued stréet from their dores to the church but were Idolaters although they offred men vnto their Idolles yet they did not eate mans flesh They were likewise circumcised but it is not knowne why they vsed it vnlesse it were the diuell that ruled ouer them willed them so to do in their dealings they were vpright and kept their promises they traffiked without mony by bartering specially for cotten and apparell or gownes made therof all without sleeues which is the greatest riches they bring vnto their Lordes and which they carry to Mexico Capo di Honduraâ— and Cuba they haue likewise many Bees hony and ware but they knew not how to vse ware before the Spaniardes came thither golde and siluer mines they had none although the Countrey was a rough sharpe and stonie land yet it is fruitlesse ful of Maâ—z or Turkish wheate and aboundant in fish there was in those Countries before the Spaniardes arriuall at the least foure hundred thousand Inhabiters whereof there are scarce eight thousand left they haue beene so rooted out by the Spaniards some slaine some solde for slaues and carried into wild vnhabited places to see for golde and others by hiding themselues from the cruell Spaniardes Guatimala BY Iucatan inward to the land lieth the prouince of Guatimala wherein there was a towne hauing the name of the Prouince which vppon the eight day of September An. 1541. by meanes of continuall stormes and raine was wholy ouerthrown and destroyed wherein were killed about a hundred and twenty Spaniardes The day before it hapned some of the Indians went vnto the Bishop of Guatimala whose name was Franciscus Masoquin teling him that at the foote of the hill whereon the towne stoode they had heard a most horrible and fearefull noyse whereunto the Bishop answering them saide haue I not often times willed and instructed you not to thinke vppon such thinges and presently after about two houres after midnight there fell an vnmesurable water downe out of the hill that ranne with so great a force that it carried stones and all thinges with it diuers fearefull sightes and horrible cries beeing heard and séene in the aire after the which the Towne was new built placed in a plaine field about 3. miles distant from the place wherein it stood hauing about 80. or 90. houses in it all of free stone couered with tiles In this Prouince are many Earthquakes as Benzo writeth who continued long in those countries otherwise the countrie is of a good and temperate aire fruitful of corne and of trées that were brought out of Spaine thether yet fewe of them prosper onlie Figge trées and Apricockes but the fruit is not very sauorie There are likewise many Cacauaren as touching the Religion and manner of those people they are much like those of Mexico and of Nicaragua whereof I wil speake they likewise deale together but because this Prouince standeth not in our Carde I haue spoken sufficiently thereof Fonduras NExt to Guatimala is the great countrie of Fonduras wherein before it was inhabited by Spaniards there were at the least 410000. Indians whereof there are not at this present nor many yeares since aboue 8000. left aliue part of them slaine by the Spaniards part led Captiues and consumed in their golden mines and part ranne away to hide themselues in desert places and holes vnder the earth so to auoide the Spanish tirranie In this Prouince the spaniards haue erected 5. townes which are not in all aboue 120. or 130. houses most part built of reedes and stâ—aw and at this present not much inhabited because the gold which is their onlie desire beginneth to faile The chiefe of these townes in our Card is named Truxillo of others Trugillum or Turtis Iulia wherein there is a Bishop this Towne is situate vpon a litle hil on the sea side in the north part the rest of the townes shall likewise bee spoken of in the description of the coast And returning againe to the Cape of Iucatan right against it there lieth a most sweete and pleasant Iland by a king named Cozumelaâ— whose ancestors dwelt therein called Cosumell which from the further corner of Cuba Porto di Saâ—nt Anthoniâ— is seuenty miles and from Iucatan fiue miles it is round 45. miles being a flat and euen couÌ„trie very fruitfull they haue gold but it is brought from other places and great abundance of honie and war and all kind of fruits hearbs birds and foure footed beasts for other thinges as Churches Houses streets traffique apparrell and customes altogether like Iucatan some of the houses are couered with straw because they want stones yet there are many stonie places in some places pillers of Marble as they haue in Spaine At the first entrie of the Spaniards into that Iland they were not receaued but after the ruler thereof entertained them very curteouslie and brought them vp into a tower where they erected a Crosse because that they arriued there vpon the 5. of May being as then holie roode day and called the Iland S. Câ—â—s but in our Carde it keeptâ—h the old name In this Tower they found certaine chambers wherin they saw many Idols lying among other Images which they with great noyse called vpon prated vnto offering certaine sweet sauours and incense vnto them as other Idolaters and Heathens vse to doe therein fulfilling their Heathenish Ceremonies they are likewise circumcised From this cape to Rio Grando are 100. miles wherein are contained La Punta de las Mugeres and the Baliya de la Ascention Rio Grando lieth vnder 16. degrees and from thence are 150.
miles to Câ—uo di Camaron which are accounted in this manner first from the great riuer to the hauen of Higueras are 30. miles from Puerto Higueras to the hauen et Puerto di Caualloâ— other thirtie miles This is the second place by the Spaniards diuided into a colonie a dayes iournie from thence lieth Saint Pedro in a plaine field close to certaine hilles being the third Colonie of the Spaniardes not farre from thence runneth the riuer Vilua and the lake in the middle from whence he certaine hard groundes like Ilandes couered ouer with weedes which as the wind bloweth fleet from place to place From Puerto de Cauallas to Puerto del triumpho de la Crus are thirtie miles betweene the which lieth next to Guamareta Saint Iacob and Truxillo From Puerto del triumpho de la Crus to Capo de Honduras are 30. miles and from thence to Cabo del Camaron 20. miles from thence to Cabo de Gatias a dios lying vnder 14. degrées are accounted 70. miles this is likewise a Spanish colonie or towne builded by them and betweene them on the same coast lieth Carthago also a Spanish towne from Gracias a dios are 70. miles to del Aguadera which springeth out of the lake or sea of Nicaragua and is heere called Aguadaco now againe for a time we will leaue speaking of the coast to declare the Prouince and Countrie of Nicaragua Nicaragua DEparting from Fondura and passing the borders of Chiulutecca you come to the Prouince Nicaragua stretching towardes the south sea which is not verie great but rich fruitfull and pleasant but of so vnreasonable a heate that in Sommer time the heate cannot be indured in the day time but only in the night it raineth there for the space of 6. whole monthes together beginning in Maie The other sixe moneths are exceeding drie the day and night being all of a length honny waxe cotton wool and balsam growe there in great aboundaunce and many kindes of fruites which are not found in other prouinces neither yet in Hispaniola nor any other place and among the rest a kind of apple in forme much like a peare within it there is a round nut almost twice as bigge againe as one of our common nuttes very swéete and pleasant of taste the tree is great with small leaues There are few kine but many hogges which were brought out of Spaine to bréede therein The country is ful of Indian villages all with smal houses made of reedes and couered with strawe they haue no mettall yet at the first entraunce of the Spaniards the inhabitants had certaine common and base gold among them which was brought out of other places thither there are many parrats which doe great hurt vnto the seedes and would doe more were it not that they are driuen away by slings and other meanes The Spaniards at their arriuall in those countries by reason of the great abundance of al things called them the Paradise of Mahomet There are many Ginny hennes and a certaine fruit called Cacauate which they vse insteed of mony it groweth on an indifferent great tree and onely in warme and shadowe places as soone as the Sunne commeth vpon it it withereth and therefore it is sowed in woodes vnder trées and in moyst places and al little enough but the trées whereby it is planted must be higher than it and bound close together that they may defend and couer them from the heate of the sunne the fruit is like almonds and being taken out of their shels are couered with a thinne blacke skinne and the piths being taken out it may be diuided into two or thrée partes hauing browne and gray veines but of a hard taste When they make drinke thereof they drie it in a pot by the fire and then bruise it with stones which done they put it in a cullender or potte made with holes mixing it with water and putting thereto a litle of their pepper and so drinke it This drinke is somewhat bitter it cooleth the body not making them drunke and by them throughout all the country it is estéemed for a most pretious thing which they present to men of great account as we do maluesey or hypocrase The maners of this people are not different from those of Mexico they eate mans flesh their clokes and garments are without sléeues they kindle their fire by rubbing two péeces of wood one against an other which is their common custome throughout al India and although they haue great store of waxe yet they knew not how to vse it for that in steede of candles they vsed lights made of pine trée boughes their speech is diuerse but the Mexican spéech is the best and that is furthest knowen for that therewith men may trauell through the country aboue fiftéene hundred miles and is very easie to learne when they daunce they vse a very strange manner for they are at least three or foure thousand together sometimes more according to the number of inhabitants in the fielde where they wil daunce being all together they make the place very cleane then one of them goeth before leading the daunce commonly going backeward turning in and out all the rest following by three and foure together vsing the like apish toyes their minstrels and drummes singing and playing certaine songs whereunto hee that leadeth the daunce aunswereth and after him all the rest some bearing Wayerkens in their hands some rattles ful of stones wherewith they rattle others haue theyr heades al slucke with feathers some their legs and armes bound about with stringes full of shels some ouerthwart and some crooked turning their bodies some opening their legs some their armes some counterfeiting the deafe man and others the blind man some laughing others grinning with many strange deuises they keep their feasts al that day till night drinking nothing but Cocauate The ships that saile ouer the south sea to Nicaragua passe thorow the narow stream about fiue and twenty miles inwards towards the land til they come to a dorp called Reâ—lâ—gio where there are certaine reed houses inhabited by Spaniardes where the ships anker by reason of the good hauen and because of the wood A dayes iourney from this place eastward lieth Legio or Leoâ— the Bishops sea of Nicaragaa standing vpon the border of the lake of Francisco Fernandez as also Granaten and other Spanish townes lying vpon the same lake fifty miles from each other almost at the other ende where the lake issueth into the northerne sea Those two townes are both scarce fourescore houses part made of lime and stone and parte of reedes and strawe Fiue and thirtie miles from Leon lieth a hill that casteth out fire in such abundance that by night they may beholde at the least 100000. sparks of fire flying into the aire many Spaniards are of this opinion that therin must be gold which giueth the fire a continual essence wherby they haue sought many meanes to trie it but al in vaine
and therefore needelesse to rehearse Returning againe to the lake of Nicaragua therein are great fishes and amongest the rest a certaine kinde of fish in Spanish called Manâ— hauing finnes hard by their heades like two hands this fish is almost like an otter of 35. foote long and twelue foote thicke the head and tayle like an oxe small eies hard and hairie skinne of colour light blew with two feete like elophantes feete the sinnes standing out like Kopen feeding their yong ones with their dugges This fish feedeth both on land and in the water they are very familiar with men whereof the Indians tell a most wonderful thing which is that there was a king called Caâ—aâ—amavuis that had taken a yoong Mâ—nate which for the space of six and twenty yeres he kept and broght vp with bread in a lake called Guamabo that bordered vpon his house which fish in time became so tame that he surpassed the dolphin wherof we reade so many histories for that at what time soeuer the kings seruants called him Matto Matto which in Indian spéech is Manisecale or curteous hee would presently come out of the lake and eate meate out of their handes and woulde likewise come out of the water and goe into the house to fetch his meate and there woulde play with the children and when any man was desirous to go ouer the lake he would oftentimes take eight or tenne of them together and swimming beare them lightly on his backe ouer the water in which manner playing with him the Indians kept this fish long time til by some iniury done vnto him he became angry for that vppon a time as a Spaniard would prooue if his skinne were as hard as they reported it to be threw an arrow or dart at him and although it hurt him not yet he felt the sharp point of the arrow and from that time perceiuing that men with beards and in apparel were there they might wel call him but al in vaine for he would neuer come vp againe but in the end when the riuer Aâ—bunicus chaunced to flowe so high that it ranne ouer the bankes and so into the lake Guaniabo the fish folowed the streame and swamme into the sea these kindes of fishes are much seene and taken in that countrey for that their flesh is of a very good taste like hogs flesh which being salted is carried to Nombre de Dios and other places The lake of Nicaragua lyeth not farre from the south sea and about a hundred miles from the north sea running through a riuer that is ful of ships which the Spaniardes called Desaguadera that is falling of water therein Thereabouts in that riuer there are many crocadiles that lay their egges vpon the sands on the riuers sides as bigge as geese egs which being throwne against a stone wil bruised but not breake and in time of hunger are eaten by the spaniards their taste is like a Moschuâ— halfe rotten and by the Indians is accounted for an excellent kinde of meate by Nicaragua the country is rough and sharpe because of the thicke woodes and vneuen hilles where not onely horses but men can hardly passe ouer vnlesse it be with great paine and labour about this countrey for the space of foure months there are certaine Torteâ—ux that doe continue in the sea as also vppon the shoare which lay their egges as the crocadiles doe in the sand vppon the shoare whereof presently by reason of the great heate of the sunne there commeth yoong Torteaux the flesh of this beast being fresh is wholesome and pleasant to eate From Cabo de Gratias a dios to the Rio Grande or Desaguadera as I said before are seuenty miles from Desaguadera to Corobaro are fortie miles from Corobaro to Nombre de Dios fiftie miles betwéene Corobaro and Nombre de dios lieth Veragua and the riuer Swerus these 90. miles lie vnder nine degrees and ½ so that from the poynt of Iucatan to Nombre de Dios are 500. miles As touching the maners of the Indians of Sweren that are about the riuer Swerus dwelling by Veragua they are not much different from the rest onely that they eate no mans flesh in their countrey are many beares tigers and lions that are very fearfull and flee when they see a man there are likewise very great snakes but not venomous and many sea cats there is likewise an other kinde of beast called Cascui in a manner like a blacke pigge hairie with a hard skinne smal eies open eares like an elephant but not ful so open nor hanging down clouen feet and a litle snowt armed like an elephant and of so shril a voyce that it maketh men deafe and is of a good and sauory flesh There is likewise an other wonderful and straunge beast of Gesnerus called a Foxe apâ— on the belly whereof Nature hath formed an other belly wherein when it goeth into any place it hideth her young ones and so beareth them about her This beast hath a body and member like a foxe feete like mens hands or like sea cattes feete eares like a batte it is neuer seene that this beast letteth her yong ones come foorth but when they sucke or ease themselues but are alwayes therein vntil they can gette their own meate also there is another kind of beast called Iguanna or Iuanna not much vnlike our eftes hauing a thing hanging at his chinne like vnto a beard and on her head a combe like a cockes combe vpon his backe certaine sharpe quilles sticking vpright like thornes and amongest the rest some hauing teeth like a sawe with a sharp taile and stretching out sometimes winding like the adder This beast is accounted among the vnhurtfull snakes euery time it layeth it hath fortie or fiftie egs round and as big as a nut whereof the yellow is seperated from the white like hennes egs they are good to eate and very sauory flesh but not roasted either in oyle or butter onely in water this beast feedeth both on land and in the water it climeth trees and is fearful to behold specially to those that knowe not the nature thereof yet it is so gentle quiet that it maketh not any noyse and being taken and bound it liueth at the least tenne or twelue dayes without meate it is of a good and sauoury flesh and is kept for likorishnesse specially the women onely such as haue had the pox if they eate it their paine reneweth Nombre de Dios. NOmbre de Dios is a towne of traffike lying on the north sea so named by Diego de Niquesa a Spaniard that had indured some hard fortune and landing in that hauen with the rest of his men saide â—n Nombre de Dios that is in the name of God and so began his worke againe which before he did pretend and there erected certaine houses giuing the place the name aforesaid this towne lieth east and west vpon the sea side in the middle of a very
great wood in a very vnwholesome place specially in winter time by reason of the greate heate and moystnesse of the earth as also because of the moorish ground that lieth on the west side of the towne whereby many of the Indians die the houses are built after the Spanish maner as also those of Panama wherein many Merchants dwel that sell their wares by the great the rest of the houses are for strangers like Innes as also for Grocers handicraftsmen and such like most part of the merchants of Nombre de Dios haue houses likewise in Panama for that the traffique out of Peru commeth to Panama and out of Spaine to Nombre de Dios and there they are continually resident vntill they become rich and then they goe to other places or else returne into Spaine On the north side of this towne lieth the hauen wherein many ships may aâ—ker touching such fruits as they bring 〈◊〉 of Spaine into those countries there gâ—â—â—eth some in that vntemperate and vnâ—some ayre as lemons oranges re 〈…〉 hes coleworts and lettuce but very small few not very good other victuals are brought thither out of Hispaniola Cuba and the prouince of Nicaragua as India wheat or maiz bread called Cazabâ— salt fish hogges batatas and from Panama kine and flesh vnsalted all other kind of wares are broght out of Spaine thither for that euery yeere there commeth shippes out of Spaine laden with wine meale bread bisket oliues oile figs reasins silks woollen and linnen cloth and such wares necessary for the sustenance of man which wares being arriued in that country are carried in little scutes through the riuer Chiara to a place called Ciuâ—ce fifteene miles distant from Panama where it is deliuered to a Spanish Factor which registreth all the wares and kéepeth them vntill they be carried by beasts vnto Panama a Towne lying on the other side of the Lake from whence by ships they are conueyed into other places thorow the whole country of Peâ—â— Câ—aâ—câ—s and Chila as also northward in the out places of the Spaniards The breadth of the country betweene Nâ—mbre de Dioâ— and Panama from the one side to the other is not aboue seuenteene miles whereby Peru is no Island The Spaniards compare this towne to Venice but I think they nere saw it for if they had doubtles they would be of another opinion But letting Panamâ— rest til another time I will proceede with the description of the coast from Nombre de Dios to Farallones del Darien lying vnder eight degrées are seuentie miles touching the towne of Dariene til you come to the old virgine Mary it heth in an vnwholesome place therefore all the inhabitants are of a pale yellow collour like those that haue the yellow iandise yet it proceedeth not from the nature of the land for that in places of the same height there is wholsome dwelling that is where they haue fresh water and cleere fountains and where vnder the same height they dwel vpon hilles and not as Dariene which lieth in a valley the sides of the riuer being compassed with high hilles and by that means they haue the sunne but at noone time only right ouer them and on both sides both before and behinde they are no lesse troubled with the reflexion of the sunne beams causing a most vnsupportable heat in such sort that the dwelling in Dariene is not hurtful by reason of the nature of the land but because of the situation thereof it is likewise deadly by reason of the moorishnesse of the ground beeing wholly compassed about with moorish stincking water the Towne it selfe being a very pitte or moorish plotte of ground and when they throwe water vpon the floores of their houses it doth presently ingender toades and when they do digge but a spanne and a halfe deepe in the earth presently there appeareth Adders out of the poysoned water that are within the filthy earth of the riuer which floweth with filth and full of durt Out of this deepe valley euen vnto the sea in Dariene are Tygars Lions and Crocadiles Oxen Hogges and Horses in great abundaunce and greater than those that are brought thither out of Spaine many great trees and fruit and all kindes of fruits and hearbs that are to be eaten the people are of colour betweene darke and red yellow of good proportion with little haire or beardes onely vpon the head and the eie-browes specially the women which with a certaine hearb make it fall off they goe all naked specially vpon their heades they haue their members hidden eyther in a shell or in a case or else they couer it with a cotten linnen the women are couered from the middle to the knees all the rest is naked and bare in that countrey there is no winter for that the mouth of the riuer Dariene lieth lesse than eight degrees from the equinoctiall so that day and night is there of a length from the furthest point that reacheth into the sea lieth a village in the Prouince of Caribana nine miles from Dariene called Futeraca and from thence about three miles lieth Vraba wherof the whole stream hath her name and in time past was the chiefe Towne of the kingdome sixe miles off lieth Feâ— from thence to Zereme are 9. miles from Zereme to Sorache are twelue miles These places were all full of Camballes and when they had no ennemies to fight withall they fought one against the other that they might deuoure the men The gulfe of Vraba is 14. miles long and in the entrie sixe miles broade and the nearer it runneth to the firme land the narrower it is into this riuer runne many waters and one that is muche more prosperous then the Riuer Nilus whatsoeuer is sowed or planted in Vraba it springeth very speedily for that within 28. daies they haue ripe Cucumbers Goardes Melons c. In Dariene and Vraba there groweth much fruit that is verie pleasant and sweete of taste much aboue our fruits whereof whosoeuer is desirous to know more let him reade the histories thereof as Peter Martir in his ninth book of the descriptioÌ„ of the firme land In the mouth of the gulfe of Vraba lyeth a small Island called Tortuga that is the Island of Torteaux because it is formed like a Torteaux or because there are many Torteauxes therein and further on the same coast lyeth the Island l. Fuerte which is in the middle betweene Vraba and Carthago wherein also are Canibals most cruell villaines and from thence you come to Puerto de Caribana the hauen of Caribana or of Cambals whereof the Caribes haue receiued their name From thence you come to the riuer de Guerra and then to the riuer of Zenu which is a great hauen the town being about seuen or eight spanish miles and a half from the sea wherin is great traffike of fish fine gold siluer works They gather gold out of the riuers in great floods rains placing great nettes in the
water wherein they stay the gold which is in great grains it was discouered by Roderigo de Bastidas in the yeere of our Lord 1502. And within two yeares after by Giouanni de la Cosa And then againe in the yeare of our Lorde 1509. by Don Ancisus and after him followed Alonso de Hoieda who desiring to discouer their sands or barter with the inhabitants as also to learne their speech and to know the riches of the country sought to come acquainted with them but the Indians withstoode them and determined to fight wherewith the Spaniardes shewed signes of peace causing an interpreter that Franciscus Pizairo had brought from Vraua to speake vnto them saying that hée and his companions the Spaniards were christians peaceable and quiet people and such as hauing by long voyages passed the great Ocean seas had as then need of all necessary prouisions and of golde desiring them to barter the same with them for other costly wares which they had neuer seene Wherevnto the Cariben of Zenu answered them that it might well be they were such quiet people but yet they shewed not the signs of peace and therefore they willed them presently to departe out of their countrey for they saide they were not minded to be mocked by them neither meant they to indure an enemies or straungers weapon within their country Wherevpon D. Ancisus replying answered them and saide that he could not with honour depart from thence before he hadde deliuered his message vnto them for the which he was sent thither making a long oration thereby to perswade them to the christian faith grounded onely vpon one God maker of heauen and earth and of all creatures therein in the end telling them that the holy Father the Pope of Rome Christs lieutenant throughout al the world hauing absolute power ouer mens soules religion had giuen their countrey to the mighty king of Spaine his master that he was purposely sent thither to take possession thereof wishing them therefore not to oppose themselues agenst him if they meant to become christians and subiects to so great a Prince onelie paying a small yeerely tribute of golde Whereunto they in iesting manner and smiling aunswered much after the same manner as it is written of Attabalipa that they liked well of his proposition touching one only God but as then they were not minded to argue therof neyther yet to leaue their religion that the Pope might well bee liberall of other mens goods that belonged not to him or at least that he should giue that which was in his power to deliuer as also that the king of Spaine was either very poore to desire that which was none of his or very bold to seeke that which he knew not and that if he came to inuade their countrey they would set his head vpon a stake as they had done manie other enemies his like but the Spaniardes not esteeming their words entred vpon the land and ouercame them From the gulfe Vraba to Carthagena are 70. miles betweene the which two places the hauens and riuers aforesaide do lie the partition being passed ouer as also Puerto de Naos that is the hauen of Ships it is from Carthagena to S. Martha fiftie miles Carthagena CArthagena was so named because that in the mouth of the hauen there lieth an Island in Indian speech called Codego as also new Carthago in Spaine Scombria or els bicause al the Spaniards dwelling therin came out of the Cittie of Carthago in Spaine the Island is about two miles long and a mile broad When the Spanyardes came first into that countrey they found it ful of Fishermen whereof at this time they can hardly find any remnant which is not to be wondered at for that not onely in this prouince but in al the other Islands wherin the Spaniards haue béene there is hardly any Indians left because the Indians as long as possibl they might wold neuer haue any dealings with the Spaniardes because of their tyranny This Countrey is rich of fish fruites and all kinde of victualles necessary for men they couer their priuy members with clothes of cotten wooll both men and women go to the wars for in the yeere of our Lorde 1509. as a Spaniard called Martinus Amisus made warre vppon those of Zenu bordering vpon Carthegena hee tooke an Indian woman of the age of twenty yeeres that with her owne hands hadde slaine 28. Christians their arrowes are poysoned and they eate their â—nueâ—â—tes flesh and spoiled many Spanyards at their feasts which in times past they vsed to hold they beautifie their bodies in the best maner they can deuise with iewells and golden bracelets mingled with pearles and stones called smaragdes wearing them about their faces armes legges and other parts of their bodies their chiefe merchandises are salt fish and pepper which groweth in great abundance all along the coast it is of forme long and sharper than the â—st Indian pepper and much sweeter and pleasanter of smell than the common Braâ—ilia pepper which wares they carrie into such places as want it where they barter for other things before they were vnder the subiection of the Spaniards they had many kindes of fruites and trees cotten wooll feathers golde bracelets gold many pearles smaragdes slaues and diuers rootes wherwith they traffiked bartering them without any respect desire or couetousnes vsing these wordes Take this and giue me some other ware for it but no ware was more esteemed with them than victualles but now they likewise beginne to couet after golde and other thinges whiche they haue learned of the Spaniards Benzo in his second booke of the Indian historie and fift chapter sheweth a notable example saying that vpon a time he being very hungry went into an Indians house praying him to sel him a chickin and the Indian askt him what hee would giue him he pulling foorth a spanish riall of siluer gaue it him which the Indian taking helde betweene his teeth and saide Then I perceue you would haue my victualles and giue mee that which no man can eate neither is it of any account therefore take you your peece of siluer and I wil keep my victualls Betweene Carthagena and saint Martha there runneth a great swift riuer called Rio Grande which standeth in our Carde which issueth with such force into the Sea specially in winter that it beats the stream of the sea backe againe whereby the shipps that passe by it may easily take in water Sayling vpwardes into this riuer to the kingdome of Bogota by the Spaniards called Granada there are certaine mines of emeraldes found in the valley of Tunia in this Carde called Tomana whereabouts the spaniards haue builded new Carthage The inhabitantes of the valley of Tunia and the people bordering on the same doe worship the sunne for their chife god with such reuerence that they dare not stare or once looke stedfastly vpon it they likewise worship the Moone but not so much as the
string hiding their members therein or in a Snakes shel the rest of theyr bodies are al naked Thus much for the customes and manners of Curiana Betweene the Cape of Saint Roman and Golfo Triste lieth Core Taratara and P. Secco From Golfo Triste to Cariari are a hundred miles the coast lying vnder tenne degrees betweene them lieth manie hauens and riuers specialy Puerto di Canna Fistola P. Fleâ—chado that is the point where they were shotte at with arrowes Punto Muerte the dead hauen Cabo de Ioan Blanco the cape of Iohn White Cabo la Colhera Rio Dunari Illa de Pirico Maracapana Chelheribiche St. Fee that is holy Faith Rio de Cumana Punta D'araâ—a Câ—mâ—â— and Maracapana along by the coasts aforesaid lie many Islands as Moines that is the Isle of Moonks Quiracao Buenaire Good Ayre Rocques or Roca Stone Rockes de Aues the Birds Tortuga Torteaux and then Cubagna or Margaritha the Isle of Pearles A certaine description of Maracapana and Cumana CVmana signifieth a Prouince and a Riuer wherin there is a towne and a cloister of grey Friers because of the great numbers of pearles that are found thereabouts The people of this countrey went naked onely that they couered their members eyther in a gorde or Snakes shels or else with bandes of reedes or cotton wooll in wars they weare mantles and decke themselues with feathers at feasts and bankets they paint themselues or else stroke themselues ouer with certaine gum and salues that be clammy wherein they sticke feathers of all colours which is no ill sight they cut their haire aboue their eares and if any haire grow vpon their knees or on their faces they pul them out and will haue no haire vpon any place of their body although they are by nature most of them without beards or haire and such as let their haire grow after the Spanish manner they call them beasts these people make great meanes to make their teeth blacke and such as haue them white they esteeme them to be women because they take no paines to make them blacke which they do with the powder or sap of a certaine hearbe by them called Hay or Gay which leaues are very soft like turpentine leaues and in fashion like Mortella being of the age of 15. yeers and that their courages began to rise they begin to beare those leaues in their mouths and to chaw them vntil their teeth become as blacke as coles which blacknesse continueth vntill they die which likewise preserueth the teeth from rotting spoyling or any paine they mire the powder of that leafe with another sort of powder of a kinde of wood and with chalk of white shells burned in which sort those of the East Indies vse their betele and Arrecca with chalke of oysters which is already declared in the description of the East Indies the powder of these leaues woodde and chalke they beare continually in their mouthes still chawing it which they keepe in basketts and boxes made of reedes to sel and barter the same in the markets round about them for gold slaues and cotten and for other wares al the maides goe naked only they weare certaine bandes about their knees which they binde very hard that their hips and thighes may seeme thicke which they estéeme for a beauty the married women weare shooes and liue very honestly and if they commit adultery they are forsaken by their husbands punished The lords and rich men of the country haue as many wiues as they list and if any man come to their houses to lodge they giue them one of the fairest to lie by them the rest haue but one and some none the women till the land and looke to the house and the men not being in the warres doe fish and hunt they are highminded reuengeatiue and hastie their chiefe weapons are poysoned arrowes which they prepare in diuers maners as with the blood of snakes the iuice of hearbes and mixtures of many other things whereby there is no means to heale such as are once wounded therewith The children women and men from their youth vpwards learne to shoote in bowes their meate is horsleaches battes grashoppers creuishes spiders bees and rawe sodden and rosted lice they spare no liuing creature whatsoeuer but they eat it which is to be wondered at considering their country is so wel replenished with good bread wine fruite fish and all kinde of flesh in great aboundance whereby it commeth that these people haue alwaies spots in their eyes or else are dimme of sight which some notwithstanding impute to the propertie of the water in the riuer of Cumana they close their gardens or lands with cotteÌ„ yarne by them called Bexuco placing it about the height of a man and among them it is accouÌ„ted for a great offence if any man should venter either to climbe ouer or creep vnder that cotten holding for certaine that whosoeuer doth teare it shal die presently after it The men of Cumana as I said before are much giuen to hunting wherein they are verie skilful They hunt and kil Lions Tigers Goates Ileren Hogs and al other kinde of foure footed beasts which they kil with bowes or take with nettes There are likewise in these prouinces many verie strange beasts part whereof are alreadie described and part not he therefore that desireth further instruction heerein let him reade the Spanish historiografers that write larger The women as I said til the ground sow Maiz and all kinde of corne plant Batates and other trees watering them specially the Hay wherewith they make their teeth blacke they plant trées which being cutte there issueth a white liquour like milke which changeth into a sweete gumme verie good to smell vnto They plant likewise other trees called Guareâ—ma whereof the fruit is like a Mulberie but somewhat harder whereof they make a certaine kinde of sodden Must which healeth colde and out of the wood of the same tree they make fire They haue another kind of high and sweete smelling trée which seemeth to be Cedar whereof the wood is verie good to make chests cases by reason of the sweetnesse of the wood good to keep things in but putting bread into them it becommeth so bitter that it is not to be eaten the wood is likewise good to make ships for that it neuer consumeth in the water by wormes or any other meanes There are other trees from whence they haue lime wherewith they gette birdes and annoint their bodyes therewith wherein they stick feathers The land of it selfe bringeth forth Cassia but they eate it not neither knowe how to vse it There are so many Roses and sweete flowers in that countrey that the smel thereof maketh mens heades to ake in smel exceeding muske wormes as grashoppers Caterpillers and such like there are verie manie which destroy the seed There are likewise vains of sea coles burning like pitch whereof they make great profite Thus much concerning the fruitfulnesse of the countrey their
manners and customes in planting hunting c. Besides this these people take great pleasure in twoo things that is dancing and drinking often times spending eight dayes together in banquetting dancing and drinking themselues drunke besides their ordinarie dancings and meeting together at the feasts and coronations of their Kings and Lordes or in common assemblies and publike bankets many of them meete together euerie one drest in a seueral maner some with crowns of feathers others with shelles or fruits about their legges like Iuglers heere in our countrey vsing al kinds of toyes and deuices some straight others crooked some backwards some forwards grinning laughing counterfetting the deafe blind and lame man fishing weauing and doing al kinde of workes and that for the space of fiue or sixe howres together for that hee which continueth longest in that manner is the best man and he that drinketh wel is a lustie fellow hauing danced they sitte down crosse legged like a Taylor and make good cheare drinking themselues drunke at the kings charges of which their dancing I haue spoken in another place so that to speake any more thereof it were needlesse They are great Idolaters praying to the Sunne and the Moone thinking them to bee man and wife and to be great Gods They feare the Sunne verie much when it thundereth or lightneth saying that it is angry with them they fast when there is any eclipse of the Moone specially the women for the married women plucke theyr haires and scratch their faces with theyr nailes thâ— maides thrust thornes of fishes into their armes and therwith draw bloud thinking that when the Moone is in the full they thinke it is to be shot or hurt by the sunne by reason of some anger or greefe he hath conceiued against it when any blazing star appeereth they make a great noise with Drummes and hallowing thinking by that meanes it will bee gone for they thinke a blazing starre signifieth some great hurt or euill fortune Among many Idols and figures which they honour and inuoke for Gods they haue a certaine thing like a Burguinion Crosse which they hang vpon their new borne children thinking thereby they are preserued in the night from all euill things Their priests are called Pâ—aces who in those countries haue the maiden-heades of their Daughters when they marrie Their office likewise is to heale the sicke and to say truth to call vppon the the diuel and to conclude they are skilful in the blacke art and coniurers They heale with hearbes and rootes both sodden and raw beaten and miâ—â—ed with fat of birdes fish or beasts with wood and other things vnknowne to the simple men vsing certain darke wordes and sentences which they themselues do not vnderstand They sucke and sicke the place where the paineâ—s therby to draw out the euil humours and if the paine or feuer increaseth the priests say that their patients are possessed with euil spirits wherewith they rubbe their bodyes all ouer with their handes vsing certaine wordes of coniuracion and charmes sucking after that very hard often making them beleeue that by that meanes they cal the spirit which done they take a certaine wood wherof no man knoweth the vertue but onely themselues wherewith they rub their mouthes and throats so long vntil they cast al whatsoâ—uâ—r they haue within their stomackes and with so great force that ofteÌ„ times they cast forth bloud mean time stamping stammering calling and knocking with theyr feete against the earth with a thousande other toyes needlesse to rehearse Cubâ—gua or Margaritha CVbagua or Margaritha is the Island of pearles and is in compasse three miles lying vnder twelue degrees and a halfe vpon the north side of the Equinoctiall line foure miles from the point 〈◊〉 a countâ—â— wherein there is much salt although the grounde is both flat and euen yet it is vnfruitfull and drie both without water and trees and wherein there is little els found then onely Comes and some Sea foules The inhabitants paint theyr bodies they eate the oysters wherein the Pearles are founde and fetch all their fresh water from the firme land giuing pearles for it there is not any Island in the world so smal as it is that hath raised so much profit and made both the inhabitants and strangers rich as this hath doone for that the pearles which in few yeares hath bin brought from thence doe amount vnto aboue two millions of gold although thereby many Spaniards and slaues haue lost their liues From the point â— Arya to the Cape de Salines that is to the poynte of the Salt pans are seuentie miles between them lyeth Caâ—be and the Cape de tres Puntas which is the Cape of three poynts from the Cape de Salines to Punto Auegado that is the drowned hauen are more then seuentie miles and the ceast running along by the gulfe of Paâ—a the lande maketh with the Island Trinidad Paria IN the mouth of the gulfe of Paria lyeth the Island la Trinidad taking the name from a certaine promise made by Columbus in his second voyage in An. 1497. being in danger or because he first perceiued three hilles seeking for fresh water his people in a maner dying with thirst The mouth of this gulf was called os Draconis y t is the Dragons mouth because of the great streame that runneth therein The whole countrey and shore of Paria stretching towardes the South is the goodliest country in all India and the fruitfullest as Benzo and Columbus both doe witnesse so that by some it is called the earthly Paradice it is a great flatte and euen land ouerflowing and aboundant of all things alwaies bring forth flowers of sweete and vnsweete sauour The trees continually greene as it were in May or lent but not many fruitfull or wholsome trees and in some places thereof is great aboundance of Cassia Fistula the whole countrey is generally hot and moist whereby there are diuers wormes among the which are many Mytes which by night fall verie heauily vpon the people and many grashoppers that doo much hurt the inhabitants beare there members in a goord or reede as it were in a sheath letting their stones hang out before the Spaniards came into the countrey they wore such kind of codpeeces bordered with gold pearles and such like things which custome the Spaniards made them to leaue the marrted women couer their secret parts with an apron by them called Pampanillas and the maides tie a peece of cotten before their bellies their kings haue as many wiues as they will yet one of them is accounted for the right Queene and hath commandement ouer all the rest the common people haue three or foure as they think good and when they are olde they put them away and take yong for them They likewise let theyr Piacchos or priests he with their gentlewomen and their maids the first night of the marriage This people as also most part of the Indians maintaine themselues
small vnhabited Islandes called Maghensis full of birdes which are so tame that meÌ„ take them with their hands and kil them with staues From thence you go to Cape Frio a verie good hauen well knowne by meanes of the French traffike whereabouts the â—ouâ—upâ—nambauâ—â— friendes to the Frenchmen doo inhabite about this Cape are many great whales in Latine called Prestis and in Duch Sword-fishes yet they are no sword fishes for that their Iawes are full of teeth like Sawes There are likewise on this Cape manie Parrats in as great aboundance as crowes with vs about this Cape lyeth the creeke by the Barbarians called Ganabara and by the Portingales Rio de Ganeâ—râ— because it was discouered in the first moneth of the yeare and the Bayaseâ—moza this creeke is wel knowne to the Frenchmen because they traffike thither and therin had made a fort it lyeth vnder three twentie degrees on the South side of the Equinoctial line right vnder Tropicus Capricorâ— it is in the entrie sixe Spanish miles broad and further in but three or foure miles broad and there lyeth smaller hils then at the entrie The mouth of this creeke is verie dangerous for that if you leaue the sea you must saile by three vnhabited Islandes where it is great fortune but the ships doo strike in peeces vppon the rocks and cliffes you must likewise passe before a pointe not aboue three hundred paces broade which hangeth from a high hil hauing the form of a Piramides which not onely seemeth verie great but far off shewing as if it were made by mans art which by reason of the roundnesse as also because it is like a tower is by the Frenchmen called le pot de Buere that is the Butter potte a little further in the creeke is an euen rock about a hundred and twenty paces great by the Frenchmen called Râ—tier or Mouse fall to which Villagagno at his first arriuall brought all his necessaries and prouision thinking thereon to build a fort but the waues droue him backe againe about halfe a mile further lieth the Islande wherein the Frenchmen did dwell which before their arriuall was not inhabited and is in compasse about a thousand paces yet the breadth is six times more then the length all compassed about with cliffes as also with water in such sort that the shippes cannot come at it but with great danger onely in one place and that with small boates whereby it appeareth that this Island by reason of the situation is very strong on both sides of this Island there standeth a little hill whereupon the Gouernour had made his house and on a Rocke about fiftie or sixtie foote high in the middle of the Islande hee had placed his Court or Castle called Coligni in honour of the Admirall of France that had sent him thither In other plaine fieldes about the same were the rest of the Frenchmens houses made rounde and couered with leaues or boughes being in all about eighty men 10000. paces or two Spanish miles and ½ further from this Island lyeth another verie fruitfull Island in compasse about thrée French miles called the great Island inhabited by Tououpinambaâ—â—iâ—s great friends to the Frenchmen to whome they oftentimes went to fetch meale and other necessaries there are likewise in this creeke many other small and vnhabited Islandes where there are many good oysters the Barbarians diue vnder the water with theyr hands bring vp certaine great stones whereat there hangeth great numbers of Oysters and so fast cleued to the stone that they can hardly gette them off verie good to eate some of them hauing small Pearles within them they are by the Barbarians called Leripes This water is ful of strange fishes specially Barbels and Sea Swine there are likewise whales with verie fatte and thicke skinnes there runneth likewise into this creeke out of the middle part of the land two fresh riuers vppon both the sides whereof lyeth many villages of the Barbarians tenne or fiftéene miles further along the coast towards the riuer de Plata or the straights of Magellana there is another great creeke by the Frenchmen called Vasarum whereunto they vse to saile as they do to the other which they first took in Hereafter followeth the manner and customes of the people THe Toupinambaultii are not much vnlike our people well proportioned of bodie and limbe but stronger and healthsomer then wee and lesse subiect vnto sicknes among them are found fewe lame cripples blinde or mishapen men although there are of them that liue to the age of an hundred and twenty yeares accounting their yeares by the Moones fewe of them likewise hauing gray haires which is a certaine signe of the temperatenes of that land as hauing no extream cold nor excessiue heate hauing greene trées hearbes and fields al the yeare through and because they liue without care they shew alwaies of one age for they haue no hurtful poyson nor foule water to drink whereby all diseases do grow they haue likewise no passions or afflictions of minde in their countreyes which mooue vexe and consume both the spirits and bodyes as not knowing of any fauours couetous desires chidings hate or enuie which but to our shame consumeth the Christians As touching the colour of their bodyes they are not altogether blacke but browne like the Spaniards because of the heate of the sim they go al naked as they came out of theyr mothers wombes not once shaming therat vnlesse it be at bankets or when they goe to warres there are some of them that bind two great leaues together therewith to couer theyr priuie members not so much for their credite but because they haue either some deformity or else disease therin which oftentimes happeneth among them they are not rough nor hairie as some men describe them for they suffer no haire to hang vpon theyr bodyes for that as soone as they perceiue it they plucke it foorth either with theyr nayles or sheeres which they haue either of the Frenchmen or the Portingales which they pull not onely from their chins but also from their eye browes eye liddes which maketh them for the most part seeme feareful and vgly The hinder part of theyr heades is couered with haire the young boyes vntil they come to mans state we are theyr haire from the crowne of the head downe to theyr neckes but al theyr foreheades shauen as if it were a Friers crowne on the hinder part of their heades they let the haire grow after the manner of our auncestors which were all shorne only in their necks and that was rounded They haue likewise for a custome that they bore holdes in their boyes vnderlippes wherein they stick sharp bones as white as Iuorie which they take out and put in as often as they wil and being older they take away the bones and in steed thereof weare greene Iaspis stones being a kinde of bastard Emerauld inwardly flat with a thick ende because they shall not fall out
likewise be iudged by the history of Francisco Xeresio who writeth that in Cusco there were houses hauing the gates walls and roofe couered with plates of golde Besides this Giraua writeth that the inhabitantes of Anzerma hadde their weapons breastplates necke peeces and peeces for their shinnes all of massy gold he likewise writeth that about Quito there were gold hilles that yeeld more gold then earth the like do all Historiographers witnesse that write of king Atabalidas ransome which was so great that the like was neuer heard of for that he caused the chamber wherein he was kept prisoner beeing of twoo and twentie foot long and seuenteene foot broad to be filled so full of gold that hee standing vpright therein and stretching his armes and fingers aboue his head as high as hee could reach the gold couered them offering that if they would haue siluer and leaue the gold he would fill the Chamber twice full but the Spaniards tooke the gold whereof the kings duty being a fift part amounted to sixe hundred and seuenteene thousand six hundred fortie seuen Carolus gyldernes 30000. marks of siluer euery horseman had 12000. castilians euerie Castillian of fourteene rialles besides siluer and euerie footeman 1450. castillians besides siluer being 180. markes so that to conclude the golde onely ammounted vnto in Flemish money the summe of three millions eighty eight thousand two hundred fiue carolus gylderns besides the siluer wherby may be knowne the great aboundance of gold and siluer that is in those countries and although Atabalida payed so great a treasour for his ransome yet was it not comparable vnto y e which his elder brother promised to pay so that he might saue his life for that he had all the treasor of his predecessors and also his fathers which were not knowne to Atabalida when he first entered into the kingdome from whence by force he hadde driuen his brother and placed him selfe therein We reade likewise that when the Spaniards first entred that country they shooed their horses with shooes of golde and what it yeeldeth yeerly at this present doth sufficiently appeare by the Armada that came from thence into Spaine the last yeere whiche needeth not heerein to bee declared But now proceeding to the description of the coast of Panama to Peru you must first vnderstand that Panama and Nombre de Dios are two townes lying one right ouer against the other the one on the north sea or north side of Peru the other on the south sea seuenteene miles distant one from the other Panama lying in a little valley so neere vnto the sea that when the moone is in the full the sea entereth into the houses lying neerest to the shore the houses thereof are part of reeds and partly made of other substances mixed together most couered with tiles but there are not many houses in the towne There is in this towne a very fitte and safe hauen but very small where with the streame or floud the shippes doe enter and with an ebbe they go out but not heauy laden for that such as are deepe laden would be in danger to fall vpon the flattes in this hauen there runneth both a great floud and ebbe so that where the water is very deepe within an houre after it will bee drie sand whereby the shippes must keepe somewhat from the land discharging and lading their shippes by little scutes as well such as come out of Spaine thither as that goe from thence into Spaine This Towne hath from Peru maiz meale hennes and hony it hath of it selfe kine and hogges oranges lemons coleworts onions lettuce melons and such like things in great abundance This prouince of Panama in time past was much inhabited and haunted by the Indians and al the riuers yeelded gold but now by the Spaniards are most fished drie When men will trauel by land from Panama to Nombre de Dios the first dayes iorney is faire and good way the next day you enter into woods which continue till you come to Nombre de Dios. In the middle of this way you come vnto a water which in three houres can hardly be passed ouer because of the many crookings windings thereof and many are cast away therein the streame specially in winter when there falleth much raine running most swiftly Such as compare this towne to Venice are much deceiued for that both of them put together with many other townes erected by the Spaniardes in those countries wil not make the compasse or greatnesse of the Cittie of Venice although euery man may iudge as pleaseth him As touching the maner of sayling from Panama to Peru as also at what times of the yeare you must vnderstand that the best and fittest times of the yeere are in the three first moneths that is Ianuary February and March vntill the moneth of Aprill for as then the Sea is open summer comming on and many of the Brisen which are east and northweast windes doe blowe no weast or southerly windes as then stirring whereby the ships do easily performe their voyages and commonly ariue at their desired hauens before any other winde specially south winde which for the most part of the yeare vpon the coast of Peru doe blowe They may likewise put out in the moneths of August and September but make not so good ariuage as in the moneths aforesaide and if any ships do put out of Panama at other times than in the moneths aforesaide they are sure to haue a long and tedious voyage and commonly som one of them is forced to turne backe againe not being able to gette the coast and are by reason of the southern winds which for the most part of the whole yeere blow vpon the coast as I said before as likewise because of the great contrarie streame many of them are brought into great danger It is very good with the wind blowing from Peru to sayle to Panama Nicaragua and other quarters thereabouts but to sayle to Peru from Panama it is very dangerous and vncertayne The ships that are laden with Spanish wares and depart from Panama first come to â—aboga and the Ilands bordering on the same which haue receiued their names from the Pearles where they take in fresh water in those Islands that are at the least fiue and twentie or thirtie together The Spaniardes in times past founde many Pearles whereof they helde the name of Islas de Paâ—las They lie hardly vnder eight degrées northward The greatest of them in times past was woont to be inhabited but not now because the fishing for pearles beginneth to decay and such as are owners of those Islandes there in keepe slaues of Nicaragua and Cubagâ—a that looke to their beastes and sowe the ground as being very fruitfull from thence they put into the sea westward then see y e poynt called Carrachine which lieth northwest and southest from the great Island of pearles called Taboga distant about thirty Italian miles which are seuen Spanish
miles and a halfe as they come néere vnto this cape they shall perceiue it to be a high hilly land lying vnder seuen degrees and a halfe from this poynt to the Rio de Pinas or Pine trée hauen the coast runneth south west and southwest and by south and is distaunt from the poynt aforesaide foure and twenty miles which are six Spanish miles or sixe degrees and a halfe it is a high land with great hilles and dales on the sea side there groweth very great pine trees and therefore it is called the Hauen of Pine trees from thence the coast lieth southward and south and bywest to Cape de las Correntas that is the cape of Streames which is very small and reacheth into the sea and because of the great and stiffe streame that runneth like a strong fall of waters running eastward like riuers many times the Portingale ships which saile that way are forced to anker in the night and in the morning setting saile it happeneth oftentimes that when they thinke to winde that they are stayed and driuen backe agayne so hang somtimes 15. or 20. dayes about that Cape before they can passe it but passing forward beyond that Cape you come to the Island lying before the Rio de Palmas so called because of the aboundaunce of palme or Indian nut trées that do growe thereon This riuer is in compas somwhat more than fiue miles which is one Dutch mile and a mile and â— Spanish which was once inhabited it is distant from Cabo de Correntes seuentie fiue miles or foure degrees â— Thereabouts are many riuers all very good water and not farre from thence lyeth the land and riuer of Peru where Pizaâ—us arriued and after his name almost all the country is called Peru from the Iland de las Pâ—linas folowing along the coast and the same course you come to the strand of Bonauentura which is distant from the Island aforesaide somewhat more than nine miles which are two Spannish miles ¼ Hard by this strand which is very great lieth a high cliffe or rocke of stone and the entry of the Bay is vnder three degrées 1 â— All this side is full of very great hilles and there runneth into the sea many and verie great riuers that haue their springs out of the hilles by one of those the shippes enter into the land or haâ—â—n of Bonauentura but the â—ilots that puâ—â—h there ought to haue good knowledge of the riuer for that if they be not wel acquainted with it they are like to induâ—e much danger as it happeneth vnto many shippes that had Pilots to whom the riuer is not knowne from this Bay the coast runneth east and east and by south to the Island Gorgona which is distant from the strande seauenty fiue miles which are ninetéene Spanish miles the coast al along this course is very lowe full of trees and other wilde places and hilles from whence there runneth many great riuers whereof the chiefe and greatest is the riuer of Saint Iohn which is inhabited by Barbarians hauing builded their houses vppon great postes and stoopes in manner of houelles where many dwell in one house and some alone by themselues because the houses are very long and broade These Indians are rich of gold and their country is very fruitfull the riuers by force of the streames abounding with much gold but it is so sleeke and moorish that it can hardely bee gotten but with the losse of many people and with great labour This Island of Gorgona is vnmeasurable high wherein for the space of eight moneths yéerely it neuer ceaseth raining and thundering whereby it seemeth the Elements fight and striue one against the other it is in circuite about two miles or sixe Italian miles all high hilles vpon the the trees whereof are seene many peacocks phesants speckled cats great serpents many sea crabbes and night foules seeming as if it were not inhabited it hath likewise much fresh water Summer there beginneth at the end of Maie cleane contrary to Panama whereas then winter beginneth In this Iland Franciscus Pizarius with 13 others that had discouered the countrey of Peru stayed certayne days induring great paine and hunger before they coulde ouercome the countrey This country of Gorgona lieth vnder three degrees and as touching the miles that in this discourse as also in the description of Brasilia and other places I haue obserued they are all Spanish miles whereof seuenteene 1 â— make a degrée from this Iland the coast runneth west southwest to the Iland del Galâ—o or of the Cocke all this coast being lowe and full of vallies from whence there runneth many riuers this Iland is small and in compas scarse a mile or about three Italian miles it hath certayne redde Downes The same coast from the firme land thither lyeth twoo degrees from the Equinoctiall from thence the coast tourneth southwestward till you passe the point called Manglaâ—es which are trees so called and in our Card Manglalos which lieth scarce vnder two degrées and from the Island to the poynt which is sixe Spanish miles little more or lesse or foure and twenty Italian miles the coast is low and ful of vallies and thereabouts runneth certaine riuers into the sea which inwards to the land are inhabited from thence the coast runneth southwest to the strand called S. Iacob or S. Iago and maketh a greate Creeke where there is an open hauen or roade named by the Sardinians and from thence runneth the great riuer of S. Iacob where the gouernement of Pizarro began and this strand is 9. miles ¼ from the point of Manglares and it happeneth many times that the ships haue there at the beake head fourescore fadomes water and at the sterne they touch the ground and also it is often found that sometimes they sayle in two fadomes water and presently they find ninetie fadomes which the strong course and fury of the riuer causeth and although there are such banks yet are they not dangerous neither do the shippes refuse to passe in and out when they will The strand of S. Mathew in our Carde Mathias lyeth full in one degree from thence the coast runneth west to the Cape saint Francis which lieth from the strand thirtie Italian miles that is seuen Spanish miles and one halfe this poynt lieth on high ground and hard by it are certayne red and white Downes that are of the same height This poynt of saint Francis lyeth vnder one degrée on the north side of the Equinoctiall line From thence the coast runneth southweast to the poynt Passao which is the first hauen of Peru ouer the which passeth the Equinoctiall line Betweene these two poynts there runneth foure great riuers into the Sea which are called Liquixinus in Latine Quisinuae and there about there is an indifferent good Hauen where the ships finde good water and wood to burne From the poynt Passao to the firme land are diuers high hilles that are called De Quaque
bodies as bigge as akornes hauing deepe rootes worse and more deformed than por and must be wroong off by binding a threed about them when they are ripe they paynt their mouthes and boare holes in theyr eares nose lippes and cheekes vpon their festiuall dayes wearing iewels and pearles therein the scutes by them vsed in those countries to fish as also to saile in are like drifts made of thrée fiue seuen nine and eleuen light quarters or rafters of wood laid or bound together as men binde mastes and let them driue vppon the water and their manner is to binde the longest in the middle and the rest on both sides shorter than other and as their driftes are long or short so are their sailes proportioned and when they haue brought their drift a good way forwarâ— they throwe bread fruit and such like things into the sea praying for a good winde as being weary and wholly without strength to rowe any more The doores of the Churches in that Countrey stand Eastward hanged with certaine cotton linnen and in euery church there standeth two grauen Images of forme like blacke Buckes and before them there is a fire made of swéete wood which groweth in that countrey which fire burneth continually out of the which wood the barke being taken away there issueth a certaine sweet gumme I thinke it to be Cedar from whence the gumme Elemi is taken which is accounted for the life of the dead and the death of the liuing because it preserueth the dead body from putrifaction There are also in those temples certain Images of great serpents which they pray vnto and besides these common idolles euery man hath his seuerall Idoll each man according to the trade he vseth as the Fishermen a greate fish and the Hunters a hart or the Image of some wilde beast by the Cape Passao in some churches vpon euery piller thereof were placed the bodies of men women and children crucified that were so well kept and dried that by no meanes they could rot or cast foorth any vnswéete sauour there were likewise the heads of Indians set vpon nailes which with some certaine substaunce they had so closed and knitte together that they were no bigger in compasse than a mans fist their houses are made of great thicke réedes which growe in that countrey but for fruite they haue very little Procéeding further to the description of the coast and folowing on south and southweast to Cape saint Elena before you come to that poynt there are two hauens one called Colao the other Calemgo where the shippes anker to take in fresh water and woodde to burne and from the poynt saint Laurence to Cape saint Elena are full nine miles and lieth vnder twoo degrees and from the point towardes the north it maketh a hooke of land which is a very good Hauen about a bowe shoote from thence there standeth a fountayne which by certaine veines runneth into the sea from whence there issueth a certayne Bitumen altogether like pitch and by the Spaniardes is vsed about their shippes insteede of tarre and the Peruuians say that about that point in times past there dwelt great men like Giants but they knew not from whence they came and fedde vppon such meate as their neighbours vsed specially fish Those Giauntes fished likewise vppon drifts and manye times came on foote to land through the water where they had at the least two fadome déepe and somewhat more They went naked and were most cruell killing many of the people thereabouts When the Spaniardes arriued at Porto Vero they found therein two Images of those Giantes a man and a woman and the Peruuians say likewise that the destruction of those Giauntes was done by a boy that came downe from heauen shining like the Sunne that fought against them with fiery flames in such manner that where the flames touched they tare and rent the stones the rents and holes whereof are at this day to be seene and by that meanes the Giauntes ranne into certayne holes to hide themselues where they were all destroyed This tale was not greatly beléeued by the Spaniardes vntill one Iohn de Helmos borne in Truxillio Gouernour of Porto Vero in the yeare of our Lorde God euerlasting one thousand fiue hundred fourtie and thrée caused certayne places to bee digged vppe where they found so great bones and ribbes that it was incredible to bee mens bones but that they found the heads lying by them the teeth thereof being three fingers broad and foure fingers long and fiue quarters square which were sent into diuers places of Peru and from that time the Peruuians tale thereof was beleeued to be true The Spaniards opinions are that because the Giantes were giuen to sinne against the lawes of nature that the most righteous God had destroyed them by his Angel with fire from heauen as he did the Citties of Sodome and Gomorrha Yet is this not certainely to be credited because the Americans haue no histories bookes nor other writings to record the same onely the memories and rehearsalles of menne from time to time and by some tokens and memorialles there made of all sortes of painted cotten ropes which they call Quippos signifying by the number of knottes made of diuers fashions that which they would remember beginning from the bottome and so telling vpwardes from one to tenne and so forth painting the ropes of the same colour that the things were of which they woulde thereby signifie or haue in memorie whereof the Spaniardes by their Barbarian crueltie and negligence haue spoyled great numbers in euery prouince there were menne appoynted for the purpose in that manner to register such things as had happened as you may reade more at large in the Historie of Mexico those that did it were caled Quippo camayos of which cordes there were whole houses full which by such as were acquainted with them could easily be tolde although the things had béene done many yeeres before but returning againe to the description of the coast from the point of saint Elena you saile to the riuer of Tumbez which lieth almost nineteene miles off and from thence about foure miles lieth the Islande Pâ—na otherwise called the Island of Saint Iacob which is more than seuen miles and one half in compasse very rich and inhabited with so many people that they warred continually with the men of Tumbez and the people of the firme land betweene them hauing had many battells in open field but by continuaunce of tune and power of the Spaniardes they were in the ende wholely subdued This Island is very fruitful and ful of al sorts of trees abounding both with wilde beastes and fish also of fresh water for their apparel they vsed shirts and other clothes they fish with drifts of light wood bound vpon two other peeces of woodde as their neighbors do of the which drifts some of them are so great that at the least fiftie men and three horses might sit vpon them
which they vsed both with sailes and oares wherein they are very expert It chaunced on a time that the Peruuians bare certaine Spaniardes vpon one of those driftes and that they vntied the cordes that bound the wood thereof together whereby the Spaniardes were all drowned and the Indians saued themselues vpon the peeces of wood and many without them swamme to land as being very expert therein Their weapons are slings bowes clubbes and billes of siluer and copper also launces and pikes with heades of base golde both the menne and womeÌ„ weare many iewels their drinking cuppes and vesselles being of gold and siluer the Lorde of the Island was much honoured by his subiects and was so ielous that he cut off both the noses and priuy meÌ„bers of his seruaunts that attended on his wiues In this Island Pizarius and the Spaniards were very friendly entertained But the Gouernour perceiuing their great auarice and couetous desire in seeking for gold as also their lechery with the women fell vpon them with great numbers of Indians but in the end not being able to resist the Spaniardes he was forced to flie and keepe himselfe in the wooddes which victory was after by Pizarius most cruelly vsed and therewith passed ouer vnto the prouince of â—umbez which is about 12. miles distant but the inhabitants hauing heard of their cruelty vsed among those of Puna fled into a Castle lying somewhat inward from the sea but Pizarius to the contrary sent vnto the Gouernour making as thogh he would be friends with him whervpon the Gouernour came not alone but prepared himselfe very strong to go meete him thinking thereby to ouerthrowe him but the spaniards setting forward towards him in the night time passing ouer the riuer with their men being guided by such as were well acquainted with the way and going through sharp and rough waies they surprised the Peruuians by night as they lay sleeping and so ouercame them and after the ouerthrow entred the town of Tumbez which they robbed and spoiled the rich church taking away the same and in that towne hee was informed of the great riches in Perâ— Touching the Island Puna it is a common opinion both of the Indians Spaniards that in time past there was much golde and siluer hidden within theyr Temple Also the inhabitants at this present liuing do affirme that their forefathers were very religious and much addicted to soothsayings and other abuses very couetous and aboue all other things they vsed the accursed sin of Sâ—dome lying with their own sisters committing many other greeuous sinnes Into this Island fled brother Vincentius de Vaile viridi a Friar that was the chiefe cause of the warres against the Peruuians and after that first Bishop of Peru with two and fortie Spaniardes seeking to shunne the wrath of Didaci Almagâ—â— and hauing hidden himselfe in the night time the Ilanders with clubbes slew both him and his companye where hee receiued a very iust rewarde for his good workes In Puna and in the countries of Guaiaquil and Porto Veâ—o groweth the roote with vs called Zarzapeâ—â—â—a which is vsed against the por and other diseases In that Island they bruise it betweene two peeces of wood so presse out the iuyce which done they mixe it with warme water and giue it to the patient whereupon they sweate as much as possible they may which drincke they vse for certaine dayes eating onely a little bisket with a rosted henne in our country we vse to cut the roote in small peeces and seethe it causing the sicke person to drinke it certain dayes by this Island there lieth another but somwhat further into the sea called S Clara not that it is at this present neither was in time past inhabited as hauing neither woodde nor fresh water but onely because the predecessors of the Islanders of Puna vsed therein to bury their forefathers there offered their sacrifices y e place wherin they buried their dead was very high with whome they buried greate treasures of golde siluer other iewels as offered and layde vp for the vse and behoofe of their Gods which at the enterance of the Spaniards they caused to bee hidden no man knowing where it is become This riuer of Tumbez is greatly inhabited and in time past was much more populous by it there stoode a verie strong and beautifull Castle built by the Iugas or kings of Casco who ruled ouer all the countrey of Peru and therein kept a great treasor where there was a temple of the sunne and a couent of Maâ—aconas which is as much to say as cheefe or principall women and maides that were consecrated and appoynted for the seruice of the Temple which liued almost after the manner and custome of the Vastale virgins in Rome and were therein maintained but because these women with their seruices and works are spoken of hereafter I will for this present leaue them Touching the building of this castle it was long since destroyed yet not so wholly but that men may yet perceiue the greatnes and magnificence thereof The mouth of the Riuer Tumbez lyeth vnder foure degrees on the south side in the firme land Right ouer against Pana there are people that haue fiue or sixe of their foreteeth in the vpper gumme pulled forth some say they do it of pride and think it a beautie others say that they had their teeth pulled out as a punishment for certaine iniurie they hadde in times past doone and committed against the kings or Iugan of Pâ—ru and others say they offer theÌ„ vnto their Idols From the riuer Tumbez the coast runneth southwest to Cabo Blanco or the white Cape being distant full 11. miles and lyeth vnder three degrees and from whence it runneth west to the Island de Lobos or of â—olues betweene Cabo Blanco and the Isle de Lobos lyeth a poynt called Depaâ—na and in our Carde Pariana which reacheth almost as farre into the sea as Cabo Blanco from this pointe the coast reacheth againe southwest til you come to Parta betweene Cabo Blanco and Parta lyeth the towne of S. Michael which was the first town that the Spaniards built within Peru called Noua Castillia and was begun by Pâ—zâ—rius in the yeare of our Lord 1531. wherein also was the first Christian Church although at this time of small importance and so I wil leaue to speake thereof The whole coast from Tumbez is without hils or daies and where there are any dales they are bare only full of sand and stones and but fewe riuers issue from the coast the hauen of Pâ— lyeth beyond the Cape somwhat more then sixe miles and is a good hauen wherein they rig their ships newe tarre them being the principall staple of all Peru and of al the ships that sayle for those parts This hauen of Parta lyeth vnder fiue degrees from the Island of Wolues aforesaid thither you run east and by west which are distant three Spanish miles or
twelue Italian miles and from thence the coast runneth south wherewith you fall vppon the poynt de la Cora in the middle between the Island of Wolues and this point there is a great intercourse or creeke of water hauing very good harber for shippes to anker in it lyeth vnder six degrees on the south side of the line from thence you perceiue 2. Islands both called Islas de Lobos that is Islandes of Sea Wolues because of the great quantity that are thereabouts the first of these Islands lyeth north and south with the first poynt and is distant from the firme land three Spanish miles or 12. Italian miles the other Island lyeth 9. miles further forward and is not ful vnder seuen degrees southwest from the coast till you come to the hauen called Câ—sma and from this first Island you saile northeast southwest to Malabrigo which is the slender or bad defence where there is a hauen wherin their shippes may not enter but with faire weather and such specially as haue great occasion thereby to further their voyage Seuen miles and a halfe further you come to Tarrâ—eâ—sse that is the cliffe of Truxilio which is a verie bad hauen and hath no other harber or defence then onely good ankers and a mile and a halfe within the land lyeth the towne of Truxilio which is also one of the Spanish townes situate in the plaine countrie of Peru it is builded vppon the corner of a Riuer in the vallie of Chimo The countrey thereabouts is verie fruitfull abounding in wheat Mâ—lâ— cattell and water and the towne built in good proportion hauing about three hundred Spanish houses with broade streetes and a great market place rounde about the towne are many fayre gardens and euerie house is serued with water by channels comming out of the Riuer and runneth into all their gardens which are continually greene and full of blossomes wherfore it is saide this towne lyeth in a verie good place compassed about with faire and pleasant meddowes corne fieldes and Pastour groundes where the inhabitants feede their Cattell and likewise plant and sowe theyr Corne. There the Spaniards haue plaÌ„ted many kinds of spanish fruites as porâ—gaâ—nats oranges lemones citrons figs much of the countrie fruit in great aboundance and verie good besides this they haue many foules hens and capons whereby they are prouided of all things of flesh in great aboundance and fish out of the sea which is hard by them also in the riuer The Indians inhabiting about the towne are in subiection to the Spaniards and furnish the towne with all things that are necessarie at this Towne there are whole shippes laden with cotten linnen made by the Indians to sell in other places This towne was made and erected by Marquis Francisco Pizarto the first gouernour of Peru in the yeare 1533 From Truâ— by land vnto saint Michaeâ— another spanish towne and the first place where they inhabited in those countryes are about fiue and fortie spanish miles or an hundred and eightie Italian miles litle more or lesse for that comming from Saint Michaeâ—s to the vallie Motupâ— are fifteene miles and a halfe all sandie and bad way specially where men much cheefely trauell and being past those fifteene miles you enter into certaine vallies and though therabouts falleth certaine small riuers out of the hilles yet they reach not to the vallies but runne into the sands whereby they doo no good and to trauaile this way you must depart out of Saint Micaels in the enening and so go all night and earlie in the morning you come to certain places where you find water to drinke for by night the heate of the sunne doth not hurt some carrie bottles with water or wine and when you come vnto the vally Motupe you enter into the kings hieway very broad euen which I haue occasion to speake of the kings of Peru I will declare more at large This vallie is broade and fruitfull but the riuer that falleth from the mountaine stoppeth before it commeth vnto the sea but because the earth is verie moorish there groweth many trees the people draw their waterout of certaine pits which they dig within the earth their traffike is cotten wool and cloth made thereof three miles from Motupe lyeth the faire fresh vallie of Xaâ—anca which is also three miles great through the which there â—unneth a goodly riuer from whence they fetch water to moysten their grounds this vallie in time past was very populous and likewise the other in this vallie were many houses of great Lords that therein kept their stewards to commaund ouer the rest who were greatly honoured and feared by the common people from this vallie you goe to another called â—uqueme which likewise is great and full of bushes the ruines of the great houses that stood therin yet to bée séene do euidently shew that many people haue inhabited in that vallie a dayes iourney further there is yet another faire vallie called â—â—nto and between these two vallies there is nothing but sandy wayes and drie stony hils where you findâ— neither liuing creatures trees nor leaues but onely certaine birdes that flie ouer it and such as will passe that way must haue good guides lest they loose themselues in the sandie downes and by reason of the great heate of the sun and want of water should faint for thirst From Cinto you come to an other vallie called Coliche through the which there runneth a great riuer called by that name this vally likewise in times past was full of people but nowe for the most part by meanes of the warres they are almost consumed from whence you goe to Zana much like the â—ormer and somewhat further to Palcamayo of all the rest thereabouts the most fruitful and populous the people of this vallie before they were ouercome and subdued by the â—ings of Peru were verie mightie and much esteemed of by their neighbours they had great churches wherein they sacrificed but now al destroyed and ouerthrowne there were likewise many Indians graues Through this vallie there runneth a great riuer that watereth al their groundes and through it also passeth the kings high way and therein were many houses belonging to the king In this vallie they make much cotten work haue al kind of cattel as kine hogs goates and such like beasts and is verie temperate From this vallie you go to another called Cancama not inferiour for fruitfulnesse and pleasure to the other They haue likewise many sugar canes and very good fruit wherein there is a cloyster of Dominican Friers made by Dom di S. Themafe and three miles from thence in the vallie of Câ—â—â—o lieth Tâ—uxâ—lâ— as I said before which valâ—â—e keepeth the name of a Lorde called Câ—â—o who was a valiant Souldiour and liued long time 〈◊〉 warres The kings of Peru greatly esteemed that vallie wherein they builded many houses and gardens of pleasure and through it also passeth the kings high way
with the wales but returning again vnto the coast the hauen of â—xillo lyeth vnder seauen degrees â— and from thence you saile to the hauen of Goanape which lyeth full fiue miles from the towne of â—xâ—lo vnder eight degrees and â— and somewhat further southward lyeth the hauen 〈◊〉 or holie where the shippes put in by it there is a great riuer and a very good water all this coast is without hilles and as I saide before sandy and chalkie vallies This hauen of Porto Santa lyeth vnder nine degrees and further southward about foure miles distant lieth another hauen called Ferrol a very good and sure hauen but hath neyther fresh water nor wood to burne and about foure miles and a halfe further there lyeth a hauen called Casina where there is a Riuer of fresh water and much woodde to burne where the shippes doe ordinarilye refresh themselues it lyeth vnder tenne degrees From Casma the coast runneth south to the cliffes called Los Farollones di Guaura A little further lieth Guarmey wherein runneth a riuer and from thence you sayle the same course to the Barranca or Downes which is fifteene miles towardes the south and foure miles and one halfe further lieth the hauen of Guaura where the shippes may take in as much salt as they will for there is so much that all Spaine and Italie might be furnished with salt from thence and yet they woulde haue sufficient for the country three miles further lie the Cliffes or Farrollones From this poynt which â—utteth out of the land with the same northeast and southweast course you saile sixe miles further to the furthest cliffe that lyeth into the sea These Cliffes lie vnder eight degrées and one halfe from thence the coast turneth againe southeast till you come to the Island of Lyma in the middle way and somewhat more towards Lyma lieth a rocke which is called Salmarina and is vnder seuen or seuen degrées and a halfe This land maketh a barre of defence before Callao which is the hauen of the Towne of Kings or of Lyma and by this defence from the Island the hauen is very safe for the shippes to harbour in Callao lieth vnder twelue degrees and a halfe The way by land from Truxillo to Lima. THe towne of Truxillo lyeth distant from Lima sixtie spanish miles which is 48. duch miles or 240. Italian miles all the which way is sandie vnlesse it be when you passe certaine vallies Now when you set out of Truxillo you come first to the valie of Guâ—nape which is full fiue Spanish miles from thence that is 21. Italian miles which in times past was wel known because of the good drinke called Cica that was made ther no lesse then in Italy Mente Frascon and in Spaine S. Martin are esteemed for the good wines that are there to be solde and this vallie is inhabited and watered as the rest are it hath a verie good hauen where the shippes take in all theyr prouision from thence you come to a little valley where no riuer runneth through but it hath a small water where those of Peru and other trauailers vse to drinke and going further you come to the vallie of Santa which in time past was verie populous and had in it many braue souldiours and captaines for commanders which held stoutly against the Kings of Peru so that they were forced to ouercome them more by pollicie then force they were likewise much esteemed of by their kings that caused many houses pallaces to be built therin as being one of the greatest and biggest vallies in those countries and through it there runneth a verie strong and great riuer which is verie full and high when it is winter in the hilles wherein also were manie Spaniards drownde Nowe they haue a drift to set ouer their passengers therein in time past there dwelt many thousand people nowe there are not aboue 400. left They go apparrelled both men and women with certain maÌ„tles and shirts with bands or rolles about their heades all kindes of fruites both of that countrey and such as are brought out of Spaine do grow therein in great aboundance There likewise they take much fish the shippes that saile along the coast do there take in fresh water and other prouisions two daies iourney from thence lieth another vallie called Guambacâ—o for fruitfulnes other things like vnto the rest about a daies iourney and a halfe further lyeth the valley of Guarmey wherin are many beasts cowes hogs and horses from thence you go to Parmongo no lesse pleasant then the former in it are yet seene certaine faire castles built after theyr manner wherein vpon the walles are painted the Images of certaine beastes and birdes and it is to be wondered at howe they make the water runne out of the riuer so farre into the land whereby it moystneth all the countrey a mile and a halfe from the vallie lieth the riuer Guaman which in our speech signifieth the riuer of the fields and is by them called Barranca which vallie is like all the rest and when it raineth much in the hilles this riuer is verie dangerous A dayes iourney from thence lyeth the vallie of Guaura from the which you go to Lima the vallie wherin it lyeth is the greatest and broadest of all that are betweene it and Tumbez and as it is greatest so was it verie populous wherof at this time there are few left for when the towne began to be inhabited the inhabitants of the towne tooke the countrey and land from those that dwelt in the vallie who after that were likewise destroyed and cleane rooted out This towne next vnto Cusco is the greatest in all the countrey of Peru and the principall for that at this present the Viceroyes of Peru the Archbishop the Councell and the Chancerie wherein all processes are sued and the lawes of the whole countrie administred are resident therein whereby there is great traffike and concourse vnto Lyma because many people come thither out of the townes lying about it In this towne are faire houses some built with Towers and costly galleries the Market place is great and the streetes broade and entring into the market place from whence also you may goe into euerie place of the towne and to the fieldes and into most of the houses there runneth certain channels that conuay water a great commoditie and pleasure vnto the townesmen wherewith they may water all their gardens and orchards which are there verie faire and pleasant vpon the riuer likewise are many water milles made after the manner of our countrey wherewith they grinde theyr corne to conclude therein dwelleth manie rich inhabitants some worth 150000. duckets and from this towne oftentimes there saileth shippes that are worth in value at the least 800000. duckets and some a Million on the east side a little aboue the town lyeth a high hill whereon there standeth a Cruâ—â—fix on another side of the towne the townsmen haue certaine places
occasion of the droughts and of the other townes and places which lie in the further description of the sea coast BEfore I returne to procéeding with the description of the rest of the sea coasts from Lyma to Arequipa I thinke it not vnconuenient to declare why it raineth not in the plaine countrey of Peru lying on the sea side where neuertheles there is so great occasion giuen of raine because the Sea which commonly yeeldeth moysture lyeth vpon the one side and the hils whereon there is alwaies so great quantitie of water and snow vppon the other side you must vnderstand that vppon the hils summer beginneth in Aprill and continueth May Iune Iuly August and September and in October winter beginneth and continueth the other moneths til March not much differing from our Countries or froÌ„ Spain in that time they both plant build and gather in their fruites and seedes but day and night are al of a length onely that in Nouember they differ a little and in the plaine land it is contrary for when it is summer in the hils it is winter there so that in the plaine countrie summer beginneth in October and continueth til the moneth of Aprll where as then winter beginneth and surely it is a verie strange thing to thinke how so great difference should be in one countrey where a man may vppon one day in the morning trauaile from the hilles where it raineth and befoâ—e night bee in the plaine countrie where it neuer or verye seldome raineth for that from the beginning of October al the summer long it neuer raineth in that countrey onely there falleth certain dew which in many places hardly layeth the dust of the sandes wherefore the inhabitants of the plaine countrey must continually water their groundes and not till nor plant any more lande then they can bring the water vnto in other places by reason of the vnfruitfulnesse of the country there is no grasse as beeing all drie sandie and stonie grounds the trees growing theron are vnfruitfull with verie few leaues there likewise groweth diuers thistles and thornes and in some places nothing at all when it is winter in the plaine countrie there are certaine thicke and close cloudes onely as if the aire hung full of raine from whence there onely proceedeth a certaine small miseling that can hardly lay the dust of the sande which notwithstanding is a verie strange and wonderfull thing that the ayre being in that sort so thicke and close there falleth no other moysture and yet the sunne for many daies because of the clouds cannot be seene and as the hilles are verie high and the coast low it appeareth that the hilles draw the cloudes vnto them not suffering them to fal vpon the plaine lande so that when the waters do naturally keepe their course it raineth much in the hils and not in the plaine countrie but therein causeth a great heat and when the dew falleth then it is cleare weather vpon the hils and raines not there likewise it is very strange that for the most part of the yeere ther bloweth but one kind of wind in the plain countrie that is southwest windes which although in other countries they are commonly moyst and causes of raine there they are cleane contrarie I thinke because they are suppressed by the high hilles from whence they blow that they draw no moysture or dampenesse out of the sea into the aire wherby any great raine should folow by these windes also it happeneth that the water in the South sea runneth into the North and maketh a hard nauigation from Panama to Peru both against winde and streame in such sort that it cannot be done without lauering and striuing against the winde There is yet another thing to bee marked which is that vnder the line in some places it is moyst and in some places colde and moyst and in those plaine countries of Peru colde and drie and departing from thence to the other side it raineth continually Here followeth the description of the coast of the plaine countrey of Peru with the hauens and riuers lying therein between the towne of Lyma and the prouince of Dechia as also the degrees and the manner of the sayling on that coast THe Ships that saile from the towne of Lyma or of Kings take their course towards the south and so come to the hauen of Singalla which is verie great whereby at the first the Spaniards were in mind to haue built the town of kings in that place it lyeth distant from Lyma 2â— Spanish miles or 105. Italian miles whereof fiue make a Duch mile which is one and twentie Duch miles it lyeth not ful vnder fourteene degrees on the south side of the line Hard by the hauen of Sangalta lyeth an Island taking the name of the sea Wolues al the coast from thence forward is very low although in some places there are smal hils of plaine stone and some sandie downes wherein as yet neither before nor til this time it euer rained where also there falleth no other moysture then onely the smal dewe whereof I spake before about this Island of sea Wolues there are seuen or eight other Islandes which lie in Triangle wherof some are high some low and all vnhabited hauing neither water wood trees grasse nor any thing onely Sea Wolues and great store of sande The Peruuians of the firme land as they theÌ„selues say in times past vsed to goe into those Islands and there to offer sacrifices where it is thought much treasor lyeth hidden these Islands are distant from the firme land about three miles Further in the same course vnder 14. and 1 â— lyeth another Island of the same name and from thence sailing on and coasting along the shore southwest and southwest and by south and being 9. miles beyond the Island you come to a point called Nasca lying vnder fifteene degrees lesse ¼ vnder the which the shippes may anker but yet they cannot land with their boates neither throw foorth their Bocken following the same course vnder fifteene degrees 1 â— there is another head or poynt called S. Nicolas and from this cape the coast runneth southwest and when you haue sayled nine miles in that sort you come to a hauen called Hacan which lyeth vnder sixteene degrees from whence following on the coast you come to the riuer Diocouna on which side the coast is altogether wilde A little further there is another riuer called Camana and somewhat further the riuer Quilca and about halfe a mile beyonde it there is a verie good grounde where the ships may ride and anker which hauen is also called Quilca like the riuer and from thence as men put out they saile to the towne of Arequipa which lyeth 12. miles from this towne the hauen and the towne lying vnder seuenteene degrees ½ sayling along the coast of this hauen about three miles distant you see certaine Islands in the which certaine Indian fishermen of the firme lande doo
lie to catch fish about twoo miles further there is another Island hard by the firme lande where on the loofe side the ships may harber it is called Chulâ— from whence there are wares sent to Arequipa and is from Quilca nine miles it lyeth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe The way by lande from Lyma or Cidado de los Reâ—es to Arequipa DEparting from Lyma and following the coast about three spanish miles or twelue Italian miles you come to the vally of Pachacama in our card Pachamma a most pleasant place and wel known among the Peruuians because of the most statelie Temple that sometimes stood therein for riches exceeding al others in that countrey being placed vpon a litle hil made of square stones and earth in the which temple were many painted doores wals with formes of wilde beasts in the middle therof where the idoll stood were the priests that shewed themselues to be verie holie and when they offered sacrifice for all the people they turned their faces towardes the gates of the temple and their backs to the Image casting downe their eyes and ful of fearefull demonstrations made great stamping as some of the old Indians say like the maner of the sacrificators of the Idoll Apollo when the people staied to heare the prophesies Those old Indians likewise say that they vsed to offer many beastes and some men vnto this Idol at their cheefe feastes this Idol gaue them answere to their demaunds and what he sayd they beleeued in this temple there was great treasor of golde and siluer hidden and the priestes were greatly esteemed the Lords of the countrey being much subiect to their commaundements rounde about this temple were certaine houses made for Pilgrims and no man was esteemed worthie to be buried about that Church but onely their kings noblemen and the priests that came thither on pilgrimage bringing certaine offerings with them when they helde their greatest feast in al the yeare there assembled many people that according to their manner plaied on instruments when the kings of Casco subdued the vallie they hauing a custome throughout al their countries to erect temples in the honour of the sunne and beholding the greatnesse and auncientnes of that temple with the perswasion that the common people had of the holinesse of that place as also the great deuotion vsed therein they thought it not conuenient to destroy that church but appoynted another to be made by it in honour of the sunne which shuld be esteemed the greater which according to the kings commandement being finished be indowed it with great gifts sending thither certaine women wherwith the diuell of Pachacanâ—a was verie well pleased as it appeareth by the answere hée gaue vnto them being serued as well in the one temple as in the other and keeping the poore soules vnder his power and now although this temple is defaced yet hee ceaseth not secretly to speake with some of the Indians telling them that the same God which is preached by the Spaniards and hee are all one thereby to keepe them in obedience vnto him and not to become christians In steede of those Idols there are crosses erected as they think to please the diuel the name of the diuell was Creator of the world for Camac is creator and Pacha world but God permitting Francis Pizaâ—ius to take King Atabaliban prisoner he sent his brother Fernando Pizarrus to destroy the temple and to take away the treasure although the priestes before his comming had hidden part thereof which could neuer be founde yet a great part was carried away This vallie is verie fruitful rich and ful of trees abounding with kine and other cattel as also good horses From the vally Pachacama you come to Cilca where there is a notable thing to be noted for the strangenesse thereof for it neuer raineth there neither is there any riuer whereby they may conuay the water therwith to water their groundes yet the most part of this vallie is ful of Maiz and other rootes that are good to eate with fruitfull trees the meanes they haue to helpe themselues therein is thus that they make certaine deepe pits within the earth wherein they sow their Maiz and other rootes and other fruits and by reason of the cleare and pleasant aire as also the smal dew and moisture that falleth God sendeth them great aboundance of Maiz and other things but no other corne neither would that likewise grow therein if they did not throw one or two heades of the fish called Sardinia into the ground with euerie eare of corne which fish they take with nets in the sea and by that meanes it groweth in great aboundance whereby the people maintain themselues The water that they vse to drinke they take it out of great deepe pittes and for the better prouision of their corne they do euerie yeare fish for so many Sardines as they shal neede both to eate and sowe theyr corne There was likewise in that country many houses for prouision and munition belonging to the King of Peru therein to lodge and rest themselues when they trauaile through their countryes Two miles and a quarter from Ciâ—ca is the prouince of Mala where there runneth a faire riuer the coast whereof is ful of trees and not full foure miles further lyeth Goarco well knowne in that countrey being great and broade and ful of fruitful trees speciallie of Guuyas a certaine Indian fruit verie pleasant of smel and taste and also Guauas and Maiz in most great aboundance with al other things as wel Indian as Spanish fruites Besides this there are great numbers of Pigeons Turtle Doues and other kindes of foules in the woods and wilde countrey which make a good shadow in the vallie vnder the which there runneth certaine streames of fresh water The inhabitants of this country say that in times past that place was verie populous and that they ruled and hadde commandement ouer some of the hils and ouer plaine countries and when the Ingen or Kings of Peru or Cusco came to subdue them they held wars against him for foure yeares together minding not to loose the liberty which their predecessors before them had so long maintained During the which wars many strange things happened which are herein needlesse to rehearse because my meaning is not to make a History but onely to describe the coast and although the Kings of Peru in summer time because of the great heate withdrew themselues into Cusco yet they had their Captaines and Souldiours that helde continuall warres and because they might the better bring their affaires vnto effect the Ingen in this vally caused a newe Casco to be built whether he and his nobilitie repaired giuing the streetes and other places the names of the olde Cusco when he had subdued that people the saide residence of the King and the towne did both decay yet in steede thereof there remaineth a goodly Castle which he left in signe of victory situate
some narrower accounting the length from Quito to the towne Delia Platta in this country of Peru are thrée sorts of hilles wherein men cannot inhabite the first parte of the hilles are called Andes which are full of great Woods the country being vnfit and vnholsome to dwell in which likewise were not inhabited but beyonde the hilles the second parte of the hilles taketh her course from the Andes which are verie colde and are great snow hilles so that there also no man can dwell because of the great colde and aboundance of snow which maketh the ground so soft that nothing can grow therin The third parte of the hilles are the Sandie Downes which runne through the plaine land of Peru from Tumbez to Tarapaca where it is so hot that neither water trées grasse nor any liuing creature is seene thereon but onely certaine birdes that flye ouer them Nowe Peru beeing so long and scituate in this manner there are many wilde and desart places not inhabited for the causes before rehearsed and such as were inhabited were great vallies and dales that by reason of the hils are throwded and defended from the windes and snow wherby those vallies and great fields are verie fruitful so that whatsoeuer is plaÌ„ted therein yéeldeth fruit most aboundantly the woods about them bring vp manye beasts and birds the Peruuians that dwel betwéene these hils are wiser stronger and subtiller then those in the plaine countrey lying on the sea coast and apter to gouerne and for pollicy they dwel in houses made of stone whereof some are couered with earth others with strawe because of the raine whereof those in the plaine countrey by the sea side haue no care at all couering theyr houses thereby to keepe them from the sun with painted mattes or boughs of trees out of these vallies lying betweene the hilles there runneth many streames of good water into the south sea and moysten the plain countrey of Peru causing many fruitfull Trees corne and other things necessary for mans life to grow therein as I haue already declared Of the people and countries that are therein lieing from Pasto to Quito THe village of Pasto lieth in the vallie Atris which is in the land of Quillacinga people without shame and good manners as also they of Pasto little esteemed by their neighbours trauailing from Pasto you come to Funez and two miles and ¼ furder to Iles from thence to Gualnatan are two miles and a halfe and from thence to Ipiules two miles and a quarter in al these villages is very little maiz by reason of the colde although they are so neere vnto the line but much Papas and other rootes that are to be eaten from Ipiules you trauaile to Guaca but before you come at it you may see the Kings hie-way which is no lesse to be wondred at then the way that Hannibal made through the Alpes whereof hereafter I will speak also you passe hard by a riuer vpon the side whereof the King of Peru had made a fort from whence he made warre vpon those of Pasto and ouer this Riuer there is a bridge by nature so artificially made that arte coulde not possibly mend it it is of a high and thick rock in the midle whereof there is a hole through the which with great fury the streame passeth and vpon that rocke men may go ouer it this rocke in their speech is called Luâ—â—châ—ca that is a stone bridge about that place is a fountaine of warme water wherein a man cannot endure to holde his handes although the countrie about it and also the riuer are verie colde whereby it is hard trauailing by this bridge also the King of Peru ment to haue built another castle therin to keepe garrison but he was preuented by the Spaniardes ariuall in those countries in this countrie there groweth a certaine fruit as small as plumbs and blacke by them called Mortunnos whereof if any man eateth they are drunke and as it were out of their wittes for the space of foure and twentie houres From this small countrye of Guaca you come to â—usa where y e prouince of Pasâ—o endeth not farre from thence you come to a little hill wherevppon also the Kings of Peru had a castle much defended by the Peruuians and going furder you come to the riuer of Mira where it is very hot an there are many kinds of fruits and certaine faire melons good connies turtle doues and partriges great aboundance of corne barley and maiz from this riuer you trauaile downe to the rich and costly houses of Carangue before you come thither you must first passe ouer a lake in India called Aguarcocia in our speech the opeÌ„ sea because Guianacapa king of Peru at the Spaniards ariuall caused 20000. men of the places thereabout to be assembled destroyed them all because they had displeased him and threw their bodies into that lake making the water red with their blood The houses of CaraÌ„gue are in a little place wherin there is a goodly fountaine made of costly stone and in the same countries are many faire houses belonging to the kings of Peru all made of stone and also a Temple of the same wherein there was alone 200. maides that serued the temple and are verie narrowly looked vnto that they commit no vncleanes if they did they were cruelly punished and hanged or buried quicke with them also were certaine priests y t offered sacrifices and offerings according to their religious manner This Temple of the sunne in time of the kings of Peru was holden in great account being then very carefully looked vnto and greatly honoured wherein was many golde and siluer vessels iewels and treasure the walls being couered with plates of golde and siluer and although it is cleane destroyed yet by roums you may still behold the great magnificence thereof in times past the kings of Peru had their ordinary garison in the houses of Carangue with their Captaines who both in time of peace and warre continued there to punish offenders Departing from the houses of Carangue you come to Oâ—aballo which is also rich and mightie and from thence to Cosesqui and before you come thither you must passe certaine snowie hills where it is so colde that men trauaile ouer them with greate paine from Cosesqui you goe to Guallabamba which is three miles from Quito and because the countrie thereabout is lowe and almost vnder the line therefore it is there very hot yet not so hot that men cannot dwell therein or that it hindereth the fruitfulnes thereof by this discourse you may perceiue the eror of many ancient writers that say that vnder the line by reason of the great heate no man may dwell but to the contrary you see that after their maner they haue both summer and winter in some places colde and in some places hot as also that vnder it there dwelleth many people and there many fruites and seeds do grow In this way you passe
courteous and withall verie well apparrelled From thence you goe into another Prouince called Gâ—ancas a goodly countrey both those people of Cachapoia and Guanca are subiect to the Spaniardes of Frontiera as also those of Cascayunga people of another prouince In all those Prouinces the kings of Peru hadde their houses of amunition and in some of them rich mynes of Golde Both men and women in these countreyes go apparrelled In time past they hadde their Temples and offered to theyr Idols and were verie rich of Cattell and made much costlie apparrell for the king as yet at this day they doo and many fine couerlets and carpets In those Prouinces there are manie fruitfull trees and the countries are ful of Wheate and Barlie Touching their ceremonies customes burials and offerings they are like all the other Indians they burie much siluer and golde with their dead and some liuing women they offer vnto the Sunne as I will declare when I write of the Kinges of Peru. This Andes or hill beeing past you come to Maiobamba or Moyobamba another great riuer and some places inhabited From Mayobamba you trauaile to Guanuco a towne inhabited by Spaniardes and lyeth about fortie miles from Cachapoya it is likewise called Leon de Guanuco hauing the name of a Spanish Towne by the commaundement of Vacca di Castio borne in Leon. The scituation of this Towne is verie good and wholsome because the morning and night seasons are verie temperate where also by reason of the temperate aire men liue verie healthfull There they gather much Maiz and other graines Quinces Figges Citrons Lemons and other Spanish fruites as also much of their own country fruit besids this there is much Platain because it is a verie good soyle it is thought the towne will increase for all their kine goates horses and other beasts are kept in the fieldes There are likewise many Partriges Pigeons and other Birds wilde Hawkes and tame therewith to catch the other birdes In the hilles there are some Lions Beares and other wilde beasts and in most parte of the places that are vnder the gouernment of this towne the kings high way doth passe and there are likewise many houses for amunitioÌ„ among those people were certaine southsayers and coniurers that were skilful in the course and nature of the starres in time past there were so many of their countrie sheepe that it was incredible which by meanes of the Spanish warres were most part consumed Their houses are of stone and couered with straw The liuing womeÌ„ in those countries are buried with the dead men and are not so vnchaste as others are In their countrey are good mines of siluer Fortie miles further from Guanuco de Lion lyeth another towne inhabited by the Spaniards and builded on the hils by Francisco Pizarro in the kings name in the yeare of our Lord 1539. and called S. Iohan dila vitoria di Guamanga the cause why it was made was chiefly to cleare the passage betweene Cusco and Lyma from inuasion of the Peruuians before the countrey was wholly subdued by this towne there passeth a riuer of good sweete water to drinke and there are verie faire stone houses and some towers the market place is plain and verie great and there it is a wholsome aire for that neither sunne aire nor elements do any hurt but are verie temperate round about the towne the Spaniards haue their houses for cattell which lie in the vallies vpon the riuers side The greatest riuer that passeth thereabouts is called Vinaque where there are many ruines seene of great foure square pallaces built in other sort then the Peruuians vse to do that make theyr houses long and narrow They say those houses were built in olde time by strange people but what they were they knew not There is likewise goodly wheate whereof they make as good bread as any in Spaine and all kindes of fruites in great aboundance from Guamanga to Cusco are fiue and fortie miles little more or lesse in this way you passe the fields of Chiupas where the cruel battell was fought betwéene Vacca di Castra and Dondiego di Almagro and being eight miles beyond Guamanga lyeth Vilcas which is sayd to be in the middle of all the countreyes that are vnder the gouernment of the Kings of Peru for that Vilcas lyeth in the middle betwéene both and is as farre from Quito as from Chile where also were great and costly houses for the king and a temple of the sunne from whence fiue miles further you keepe on the kings high way to Vramarca whereabouts there is a bridge of two arches verie cunningly made that passeth ouer a riuer in breadth 166. paces The Riuer of Vilcas runneth out of the Prouince of Soras verie fruitful and aboundant in victuals golde and siluer mines and of warlike people apparrelled in wollen clothes and wel esteemed of by the kings of Peru. From thence to Andagnayla vpon the Riuer Abamcay are seuen miles and trauailing sixe miles further you come to another Riuer called Apurimâ— there the wayes are verie badde rough and sharp ouer hils and stony waies dangerous to descend for that many horses laden with gold do stumble and fall into the Riuer so are spoyled from Apurima you come to Maâ—ambo and passing the hilles of Vilca conga you come to Xaqui Xaguana which is verie euen but neither long nor broade in this vallie were certaine goodly houses and pallaces of pleasure for the kings of Cusco who vsed to go thither to recreate themselues and is scarce 4 miles from Cusco through the which also passeth the kings high way and otherwiâ—e it wold hardlie be trauelled as hauing certain moorish grouÌ„ds which crosse the way close by the wals and from thence you come to Cusco in times past the cheefe of all Peru and the whole countrey gouerned by the kings made by Mango Capo the first king of that race in a verie rough and sharpe place compassed with hilles and betweene two small riuers whereof one runneth through the middle of the towne and is inhabited on both sides it hath a vallie on the East side the streame that runneth through the towne taketh her course on the west side in this vally because it is colde there are verie few fruitful trees onely certaine Molles whereof hereafter I will speake because therewith they make their drinke On the north side this towne had a Castle vpon a hil which for the greatnesse and strength thereof was much esteemed but now most part destroyed although the foundation and some towers thereof are yet to be séene it hath likewise on the east and north side the Prouince of Andesuyo and Cinciasuyo on the south side the countreys of Callao and Condesuio vnder the which lyeth Callao betwéene East and South and Condesuyo betweene south and west a part of this Cittie was called Hauan Cusco the other Oren Cusco places where the Noble men and Gentlemen and principall of the
the Priests which answere the Priestes deliuered vnto the poople They do generally beleeue and tell that once there was a great floud whereby all the worlde was drowned onely a few persons that hidde themselues in certayne high hollow trées and hauing prouided victualles stopping the holes by that meanes saued themselues from the common misery of al mankind and that when thâ—se men thought the raine and waters to be gone they sent out two dogges who returning all wet backe againe they gessed the water not to be consumed and so thought it not time to goe foorth After that they sent the two dogges forth againe and perceiuing them to come home all dirtie they then knew the water to be gone and came foorth where they found great numbers of snakes which the slime earth had bred whereby they hadde worke enough to kill and destroy them They likewise say that the world shal be destroyed but not before there shal first come a great drought and in manner a burning of the ayre whereby the sunne and moone shal be darkened and taken away wherefore when there happeneth any Eclipses or darkenesses of the sunne or moone but specially of the sunne then they sing sorrowfull songs and make great mournings thinking the world shall be destroyed and that the end approcheth What are these but cloudes of their religion which the diuel in so great blindnesse could neuer driue out of these poore peoples hearts so that those of Brasilia beleeue the immortallitie of the soule and the Peruuians beleeue not onely the immortalitie of the soule but the resurrection of the body as it appeereth not onely by the manner of their graues but also by the request made by them vnto the Spaniardes when they opened their predecessors and Kings graues to take out the treasure desiring them not to take away or scatter the bones of the dead that they might not want them at their resurrection Touching the manner of their graues their Kings and Nobilitie are buried with great magnificence being set in seats within their graues apparelled with their best cloths one or two of their liuing wiues buryed with them being the fairest and such as in his life time hee loued best for the which when time serueth great controuersie riseth among the women which by the king in his life time is ordained and appoynted they bury likewise with him two or thrée of his seruauntes and much golde and siluer and the best they had also fruit bread maiz and such like things and which is more the last seruice the friendes doe for him is that with reedes or pipes they powre a certaine measure of theyr drinke called Cicha into the dead mannes mouth to this ende that hee may not want drincke before hee commeth into the other worlde in which his iourny he vseth that meate and the company of his wiues and seruantes which manner is vsed almost through all Peru and Mexico onely that euery one dooth more or lesse according to his estate but they vse most in Peru to burye liuing women which mischiefe sprang from the diuell that blinded them that at some time appeared vnto them in shape of those that were dead walking vpon the earth and women with him So great is the power and blindenesse of Sathan in the children of the vnbeleeuing In East India the diuell so wrought that hee got them to burne liuing women with the dead here in Peru hath perswaded them to bury liuing women with dead bodies They mourne many dayes for theyr dead and vppon the graue they place the Image of the dead person The common people and handiecraftesmen place something of their handiecraft vpon their graues and the souldier some kinde of weapon vsed in the warres whereby it may be seene who lyeth buried in that place So then the Peruuians pray vnto the Sunne and the Moone and acknowledge them for the highest gods and sweare by them as also by the earth which they esteeme to be their mother and if at anie time they speake with the diuell asking counsell and attending answere of him they did it more for feare they hadde to bee hurt by him than for any worshippe that they held and accounted the Sunne for the chiefe and highest God first it appeereth by many and so costly temples by them erected throughout al the kingdom of Peru as also by the answere of king Atabalida made to the Dominican Friar Vincentius de Valle Viridi after first Bishop of Peru who shewing him of the creation of the world by God and the redemption thereof by the death of Iesus Christ he answered him that no man made the world but onely the Sunne his god that died not as Christ did and said that he might beléeue in the crucified and dead Christ if it pleased him but for his part he would beleeue in his owne god and his Guacas which dieth not this Guacas were certaine stones that with weeping they honoured and called vpon Their maner of praying to the Sun THe Peruuian as I saide before had diuers great and sumptuous Churches of the Sunne in al places of the countrey many of them hauing the walls and Pillers couered and plated with gold and siluer with most costly stooles and benches and when the Prince Lords or Priests would desire any thing of the sunne they rise betime in the morning before the sunne riseth and get them vpon a high stone scaffold made for the purpose where holding downe their heades and with wringing and folding their hands and then presently lifting vp and spreading their armes as if they would receiue the Sunne into them they murmure certaine wordes shewing their requests and in the same manner they vsed to pray vnto the sunne since they were subdued they fal downe before the Spaniardes and desire them to be mercifull vnto them and not vtterly to destroy them in some places specially vnder the Line and thereabouts they placed the gates of their temples in the Est and couered them with certaine cotten linnen in euerie Church there stood two grauen Images of fashion like blacke Buckes before the which they kept a continuall fire of sweete wood which I thinke to be Cedar because the barke being taken off there issueth a certaine sweete gumme which is most excellent to preserue the bodyes of dead men and to the contrarie corrupteth the bodie of a liuing man Likewise there are in those Churches certaine Images of great Serpents which they pray vnto but this is only about the line in Peru and Cusco and not where they haue the Guacas which are stones about the which no man may come but onely the Priestes that are apparrelled al in white and comming to them they take in theyr handes certaine white cloathes and fal vppon the ground speaking to the Image in a strange speech because the common people may not vnderstand it Those Priestes receiue all the offerings that are giuen vnto the Idol burying the tenth part thereof in the
Church and keepe the rest for themselues and you must vnderstand that all the offerings must be wrought with golde and siluer and of such forme and fashion as the thing is which they desire to haue of their Guaca They offer also liuing men and all kindes of beastes looking in the hearts and intrailes of the men or beastes which they did offer for certaine secret tokens which if they founde not vpon the offerings they still offered newe men or beasts vntil they founde the tokens thinking the Idoll not to be pleased with such offrings as had them not When the priests should offer sacrifices then they abstaine from the company of their wiues and ceased not all night to doo nothing but crie out and pray to the diuell running into the fieldes and to the places where the Guacas stande whereof there were so many that euerie man hadde one before his dore and the day before they should speake with the diuell they fasted some binding a thing before their eies and some thrust them cleane out and it hath often bene seene that some of them haue done it of meere deuotion The kinges and noble menne enterprise not any thing before they haue consulted with the Priestes and the Priests with the Idoles in their sacrifices they vse not onely beastes but menne and children but they eate not mans flesh as the Caniballes do When the Spaniardes spoyled their Temples they founde therein many pottes full of the dried bones and flesh of dead children that had bin offered to their Idolles they offer likewise birdes and other beastes and with the bloud of their offerings they annoint the mouthes of their Idolles and the dores of their churches There was likewise among the golde that lay by their idolles certaine staues and myters for Bishops such as our Bishops vse when they are in their robes or as the Painters vse to set foorth Saint Nicholas with his Crosse and Myter and being asked what those things meant they knew not what to answere neyther from whence they came Besides those great temples of the Sunne and Guacas there were in all places of the countrey of Peru many other Churches and Cloysters for yong maides wherein some had one hundred some two hundred and some more al obseruing chastitie or at the least vowing to keepe it and to honour the Sunne like the Vastal virgins in Rome or our Nuns Those they called Mamacomas and were bound to stay in the cloyster during their liues and neuer to depart from thence dooing nothing but spinne weaue and sowe very fine cloth of cotten and wooll apparell and furnitures for their Idolles or as others affirme the clothes by them made were burnt with the bones of white sheepe the ashes whereof as a signe and token of godly honour they threw into the ayre against the Sunne Those maides were verye narrowely looked vnto by certaine Priestes and other men appoynted for the purpose wherof some were gelded because they should not seeke to defile them which if the maides once committed they were eyther put to death or buried quicke but if the maide with childe would take her othe that it was begotten by the Sunne then the childe was free from death and euerye yeere in the moneth of August when they had gathered in their corne or maiz the Perâ—uians that dwelt in the hilles made a great feast they set vp in the middle of their Market place two great hie trees like our Maie-poles and in the top of them they placed certaine Images made like men compassed about with flowers and so in roundes yet in good order comming thither they strike vp drummes throwing and showting one after the other with stones and arrowes at those Images making great noyse with whooping and hallowing and euery man hauing shott and thrown The Priests brought an other Image which was set belowe on the neather part of the trees whereunto they offered either a man or a sheepe annoynting the Image with the bloud thereof and after they perceiued the tokens in the heart or intrailes they certified it vnto the people and the tokens being found the feast was ended eyther with ioy or sadnes most part in drinking wherunto they are much addicted and so daunced turning and passing vnder each others armes each man hauing either a bill clubbe or some other weapon in his hand such as are desirous to know more of their ceremonies and false worshippings of Idoles let them reade the histories of the Spanish Indies The countrey of Peru was first ruled by Iudges which are Kings or Rulers that come from the great lake called Titicara or as some write Titicaca lying in Charcas being foure score miles in compasse which runneth westward through a great riuer which in some places is halfe a mile broad and then runneth into an other small lake fortie miles distant and it is to be wondered at how the abundaunce of water that runneth out of the great lake is comprehended in so small a place where it is not once perceiued to increase The lake beeing so small and the water so great but it is reported that in that lake there is no botome or ground and that the water runneth vnder the ground thorow the earth into another sea or riuer as it is saide of the riuer Alpheus that it runneth from Peioponces or Moica to Cicilia vnder the ground and from this lake or thereabouts the kings of Peru had their originall the petegree of which kings is by Iacob Fernando a Spaniard declared in this manner Frst Mango Capa who according to the Indians report was not borne of a woman but sprang out of a stone which vntill this day is yet shewne by them about the towne of Cusco hee by his wife Mama Guaco had issue one sonne called Sicheroca that ruled after his father and was the second Ingen or king you must vnderstand that the inheritance of the kingdome continueth in the issue sons successiuely and not vnto the children of the sonnes before all the brothers haue raigned one after another but first the eldest sonne is King then after his death his second brother succeedeth in the kingdome and not the eldest brothers sonnes and the second brother dying there being no more brethren the crowne falleth vnto the eldest brothers sonnes without alteration or change this Sicheroca was a valiant souldier like his father and broght many of his neighbours to subiection and by Mama Cura he had issue a sonne called Locuco Pangue the third king who studied rather to holde those landes he had vnder his subiection then to win or increase more vnto them and being aged he married a wife Mama Anauerque by whom he had a sonne called Maita Capa that augmented his kingdome and thervnto ioyned the prouince of Cusco and by his wife Mama Iacchi Dela he had issue a sonne called Capa Cyupangu of whom there is nothing worthy memory onely that he left a sonne by his wife Mama Cagna called Inga
for that they left other mines as Pero and the riuer of Carabaâ—a wherein they founde golde to come thither because there they made more profite In those hilles and al the land thorow there are many vaines of all colours wherof men may make faire colours the siluer found in this myne and which belongeth to the king for his parte is carried by lande to Arequipa and from thence to Lyma Panama Nombre de Dios and Spaine A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile and from thence to the straights of Magellana CHulli a Hauen of Arequipa lieth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe and one mile and a halfe from thence the Riuer of Tambopalla and seuen miles and a halfe further there reacheth a poynt into the sea not ful a mile beyond or further out then the other lande vpon the which poynt there are three cliffes about this poynte not ful a mile from it there is a goodly hauen called Illo in our Carde Rio de Vlâ—e and there runneth a riuer into the sea that hath good water and is also called Illo lying vnder eighteene degrees and â…“ from thence the coast lyeth southeast and southeast and by east and fiue miles a halfe further there is a poynt which the Sea men call Moro del Diauolo that is a rounde house or houel of diuels This coast is al wild and desert and with great Baâ—zen not full foure miles further from this poynt there is another riuer not verie great but good water From this riuer Southeast and Southeast and by east sayling seuen miles and a halfe there reacheth another round houel which is verie high and maketh certaine downes beyond this poynt is an Island and therabouts lieth the hauen of Arica which lieth vnder 19. degrees and 1 â— from whence the coast reacheth Southwest not ful seauen miles further there runneth into the sea a riuer called Pizagua and in the same course sayling along the coast you come to the hauen Taracapa which is 19. miles ¼ harde by Taracapa lyeth a Island little more then a mile in compasse and is distant from theÌ„ about one mile and a halfe and there maketh a strand or bay of Sand by the hauen vnder 21. degrees from Taracapa you saile along the coast south by west about foure miles and then you come to the poynte of Decacanna and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the hauen Moxillioni which lyeth vnder 22. degrees and a halfe from this hauen sailing vpwardes south southwest about 67 miles and a halfe the coast lyeth in a manner straight and therein are some poyntes creekes and sandie baies at the ende whereof there is a great creeke where there is a good hauen called Copayo lying vnder 27 degrees aboue the which lieth a smal Islande about halfe a mile from the firme land from thence beginneth the country of Chile inhabited with people being past this hauen of Copaypao a little froÌ„ thence there lieth a point which makeh another creeke wheron standeth two cliffes at the end therof is a riuer of good water called Eâ— Glasco this point lieth vnder 28. degrees â— following the coast southwest on about eight miles and a half there is another poynte which maketh a great hauen for ships but therein is neither fresh water nor wood and hard by this hauen lieth the hauen of Coquinbo betweene this and the poynt passing by seuen Islands there is a hauen vnder 29. and a half seuen miles and a halfe further following the same course there is another poynt about the which there is a great creeke or bay called Antogayo in the Carde Bahio de Tage about foure mile further lieth the Riuer Limara in the Card Lemare from this riuer you keepe the same course to another creeke or bay about 7. miles distant which hath a cliffe but no fresh water lying vnder 31. degrees and is called Choapa in our card Cupa further in the same course about 15. miles there is a verie good hauen called de Qâ—iâ—nicâ—o in our Card Cutero at Quintero it lyeth vnder 32. degrees seuen miles and a halfe further is the hauen Val Paraize and from the town of S. Iacomo by vs called Chile after the name of the country Touching this country of Chile it is very great stretching along the sea coast reaching aboue Chaicas and Peru a cold countrey which is by reason of the scituation thereof as lying by the Pole Antartico wherefore it is called Chile that is the cold countrie partly because of the great cold which men indure trauailing ouer the Andes vnto this countrey and partly because of the coldnes of the countrey it selfe although it is much like Spaine touching the temperatenesse of the aire This countrey was first discouered by Petro de Valdiuia in the yeare of our Lorde 1539. and is all inhabited in some place it is hillie and in other places plaine fieldes poynted and running very crooked by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea Touching the rest of the scituation as I sayde before it is verie temperate hauing winter and summer as it is in Spain yet at contrary times for their summer is winter in Spaine and the Spaniards winter theyr summer The south starre that should answere and be right distant to our starre being there on land cannot be seene but onely a small white cloude betweene day and night making a smal circuite or compasse about certaine places of the Pole Antarctike There likewise you see foure starres in forme like a crosse with three other stars following them which make seauen stars like ours without any difference that may be perceiued onely that the foure which in the south make the form of a crosse stand closer together then those of our Pole Antarctico Touching their day and night they are in Chile according to the scituatioÌ„ short and long as with vs yet contrarie to ours for that our shortest dayes are theyr longest daies Their apparell and meates are altogether like those of Peru both men and women are of good complection and behauiour vpon the coast of this countrey are many riuers which by day do runne with water and by night they are without water because the snow by day melteth by reason of the heate of the sunne and so runneth downe from the hils which by night by reason of the cold aire congealeth and so runneth not In Chile and Chaicas they haue many sheepe that are like camels but that they haue not a hill vppon their backes like the Cammel The Spaniards vse them to ride vppon as being able to beare a man foure or fiue miles a day but being wearie they lie downe and will not rise whatsoeuer they doe vnto them be they neuer so much beaten and whosoeuer rideth vppon them the sheepe being wearie shee will cast vp the head towardes him that sitteth vpon her and blowe a filthie stinke into his face thereby to bee eased
Cunha wind or lay the needle of the compasse a stryke and a half Northeastward and when it is an hower after twelue of the Clocke by the compasse it is then by the Astrolabium but full twelue of the Clocke and to know when you are hard by the Ilandes you shall find it by this that you shall see certaine Birds flying fiue and fiue in ranks together then you are hard by them and from thence forward certaine birdes will follow you by the Portingales called Feigions full of blacke and white spottes whereby they are easy to bee knowne béeing South and North ouer this Iland you shall see certaine thinges driue in the sea by the Portingalles called Sargoslo and is almost like the weedes that is found by Vieâ—inghen in Holland From these Ilandes of â—rulan de Cunha to the cape de bona Speranza being in this countrie about the eight of Iune you shall see in driuing the sea certaine weedes called Sargollo and Trombas like peeces of thicke reedes those reedes are short and full of branches and are not so long as those that are found by the Cape de bona Speranza here you must kéepe on your course till you finde them to increase and be not abashed thereat for it commeth by this meanes that the more it stormeth and is foule weather in the Ilands the more of those reedes weedes are smitteÌ„ down which w t the water the wind that commeth both from behind and ouer the Iland driue towardes the Cape de bona Speranza wherefore I aduertise you that if you find those réedes and weedes to keepe 150. miles further from the Ilandes of Tristan de Cunha for they are signes of that I told you of before When you come vnder the hight of 35. degrees full or scarse to the Cape de bona Speranza you shall see Trombas or péeces of thicke reedes in the water and when you see them assure your selfe they come from the Cape de bona Speranza and you are then past those of the Ilands when you find those Trombas then you are but 3â— or â—0 miles from the Cape de bona speranza Those peeces of reedes are long almost like Basuynen but when you are vnder 35. degrées and a half then you see them no more but certaine birds as great as Rauens with white and flat billes with blacke feathers those flie not past 20. or 30 miles from the Cape de bona speranza and some gray birdes by the Portingalles called Alcatiases these are the right tokens you finde from the Cape de Bona Speranza to the Cape das Agulhas you must likewise vnderstand that the trauersing or crosse way from Brasilia to the Cape de Bona Speranza is much shorter or lesse theÌ„ is placed in the sea cards but let no man seeke to know the cause thereof as hauing no great matter consisting therein coÌ„cerning the vosage though there were yet it is not coÌ„uenient y t other nations and strangers should vnderstand it you find likewise betwéen the Ilands of Tristan de Cunha and the Cape de bona Speranza certaine sea wolues but being in that couÌ„try about the last of Iune it may be you shal not sée them for then they withdraw themselues from thence because of the cold kéepe vnder the land but if you chaÌ„ce to be by those IlaÌ„ds of Tristan de Cunha about the 10 of May then you shal not passe aboue 35 degrées because at that time the West windes do there blow w t most great fury tempests specially with a new Moone least it happen to you as it did to the shippe called the Bon Iesus which was ouerwhelmed in the sea by the great waues that the windes raised as I my self sayth Diego Afonso haue seene beeing in the shippe called S. Clare of the Cape de bona Speranza y t shall sée certaine birds in the water called Antenas which are great speckled fowle then you are by Cape das Agulhas you shall likewise finde some fish bones or cuttle bones such as the Goldsmithes vse driuing vppon the water and when you haue the sight of land vnder the degrees aforesaid beeing thirtie miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza as also comming vnder the 36. degrées you shall finde those birdes called Antenales and when you are past the Cape de Bona Speranza and haue séene land whether it be y e Cape de Bona Speranza or the cape das Agulhas either beyond or on this side then kéepe aloofe from the land at the least 30. miles into the Sea and if you meane to goe to Mosambique then you must saile North East that is to the Baixos or droughts of India In the course from Brasilia to the Cape de Bona Speranza many birdes follow after you but as soone as you come within y e sight of the cape de bona Speranza they leaue you manie times the blacke Rauens aforesaid that you may be sure to be within the Cape that is on the east side of India you shall perceiue the waues of the sea that follow you from the Cape out of the East into the West doe presentlie leaue you as soone as you are past the Cape das Agulhas inwardes vntill you come to others out of the South West that is inward from the Cape also by this Cape the needle of the compasse is right and euen so that when it is noone by the Astrolobie it is likewise noone by the sunne diall or the compasse both agréeing in one which is a good signe that you are North and South with the Cape das Agulhas or betweene both that is the Cape de Bona Speranza and the Cape das Agulhas and this is a great signe as well from Portingall into India as from India to Portingall but sayling from Portingall to India then the néedle of the compasse turneth Northeastward again 30 miles froÌ„ the Cape das Agulhas towards Mosambique The coast runneth East and West and you must bee carefull being past the Cape das Agulhas sixe or seauen miles into the sea from the land called Auagda de Sanbras not to take the way towardes the Cape but towardes the South West and South West and by West because it is necessarie so to doe to saue a great deale of way by reason of the streames and waters that runne inwardes towardes the land If it chance you passe the Cape a farre off and so see not any of these signes theÌ„ take the height of the sunne and looke on your diall but you must doe it aduisedly and with a straight thread and then if you be 150. miles beyond the cape inward it being noone by the Astrolabie The shadow of the sunne diall will not be vpon noone but wil want a strike and when it is noone by the diall then it will be halfe a degree past the Astrolabe which if you find to be so then assure your selues you are 150. miles inwards beyond the cape de Bona
Speranza or das Agulhas and marke it well for you shall finde it to be true and when you set your course to saile within the Island of saint Laurence you shall find some small white birdes in companies together they flie about twentie miles from the land towardes the droughtes of India and comming vnder twenty degrees you shall most certainely find the birdes called Garagiaus and Alcatrases that are like Sea-mewes then you hold a good course and if you sée not any of those tokens looke well to your selfe for thē you are hard by the Island of S. Laurence or vpon the banks of the coast of Soffala and séeing many birdes you are but 10 miles from the droughtes of India then take your course North East and North East by North and so hold on till you come vnder 19. degrees and ¼ and from thence Sayle North East till you bee in eightéene degrées from thence you shall runne North and North and by East till you come to sixteene degrées and ¾ beeing vnder those degrees and séeing many birdes called Alcatrases in companies of 6.7.8 or 10. then you are but ten or fifteene miles from the Island of Ioan de Noua therefore vse all diligence both by day and night not to come néere it specially when it is with a new moone and saile North westward and then you will come by the Islandes named dos Angoxes and the more northward you run you shall keepe the better course towardes Mosambique being carefull not to come neerer the land then twentie fiue fadomes déepe for the coast is altogether droughtes shallowes where on Don Iohn Periera was cast away and yet is thirteene fadome déepe round about The 3. Chapter The Nauigation from Cauo das Correntes to the droughts called os Baixos de India from thence to Mosambique AND if you chance to sée the cape das Correntes being 6. or 7. miles from you and minding to saile to Mosambique then saile East Northeast hauing a sharpe wind and comming vnder 22. degrées vnder the which height the droughtes of India lie You shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus flying in companies and if you haue a full wind then saile Northeast to the height aforesaide to know if you be néere vnto the droughts you shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus and Alcatrases flying together and if you sée many Alcatrases then you are néere the droughts but séeing the Garagiaus alone without Alcatrases then you are twentie fiue miles from thence Frō thence you must saile Northeast and Northeast by North to 19. degrées and 1 ◠and then saile Northeast to 18. degrees and from thence north north and by East to 16. degrées and 1 ◠and beeing vnder this height you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases and so assure your selfe to be hard by the Island of Ioan de Noua and if you see Alcatrases by 6. or 7. together then you are but 10. or 15. miles from thence because there they vse to fetch their foode therefore vse all diligence to get your selues out of that height of the Island which is 16 degrées and 1 ◠and to bee out of danger sayle Northwest whereby you come to the Islands of Angoxas which are close by the coasts towards Mosambique and the more Northerly you kéepe the nearer you come to Mosambique but as you sayle from the Islands of Angoxas to Mosambique beware you come not nearer then 25. fadome to y e Corals where Don Ioan Perreira was cast away and yet round about it is thirtéene fadomes water beeing past the Islandes of Angoxas Northeast then saile Northeast by East which is a good course alwaies kéeping at twenty fiue fadome as I said before The courses aforesaid from Cabo das Correntes forwards may bee done nearer and shorter if you haue the wind Southeast for then you may sayle along by the Islands lying vpon the bankes of Solfala the sooner to Mosambique and with an east wind vnder the degrées and with the signes aforesaide you must likewise shun the drought of India and the bankes of the Island of S. Laurence that lye towardes the drougths of India betwéen those two droughts it is 95. fadome deepe and if you desire to enter into the road of Mosambique in the entrance you must passe by the two Islands of S. George S. Iames and leaue them on the southwest side keepe aloofe from S. George about six or seuen fadome déepe and so running forward til you be in hauing care to keepe off from the bankes where you sée the water breake till you come close before the Island and fortresse of Mosambique The 4. Chapter The Nauigation from Mosambique to India WHEN you depart from Mosambique towardes India then saile Northeast whereby you shall discouer the Islande Alha da Comoro which is distant from Mosambique 94. miles or 11 degrées and ½ whereof the furthest point Northward is a verie high land 15. miles from thence you shall sée certaine birdes called Rabo◠de Iuncos that is tayles of stalkes of berries for that they haue a long narrow taile stretching out like the stalke of a berrie and by night you shall heare the birdes called Garagiaus sing or make a noyse following your course from this Iland or towards India you must vnderstand as soone as you discouer the vttermost point of the Iland of Saint Laurence towardes the North that the water and streames run North and Northwest toward the Cape of Guardafu and to the mouth or entrie of the straightes of Mecco or the redde sea and you must marke that if it chance that you sayle with a halfe winde and shoot full or sayle before the winde yet therefore you must not recken according to the course you hold but alwaies take a strike for abatement or cutting off and being by the winde two strikes because the water and streame driue you continually to the Northwest and looke wel before you that if you find many heights it is by reason y e water driues you as I said before to be assured to fal vpon the coast of India you must take héede to the needle of your compasse that yéeldeth a strike and more to the Northeast and if you recken your course according to the way the shippe maketh then you lose all that which the néedle or compasse yéeldeth towards the Northeast and that which the water driueth you towards the Northwest whereby you come too short and cannot get the coast of India The streame or drawing of the water towards the redde sea is from 4. to 7. degrées wherefore you must alwaies haue great care to be forward and not to come to short In those countries you shall alwayes sée many of the birds called Rabos de Iuncos and when you are néere vnto the coast and droughtes of Pandua then you see them no more but onely about 5◠miles in the sea you shal perceiue diuers
the Compasse that in Portingall lyeth halfe a strike Northeast maketh the same Meridian 100. and so many myles within the countrey of Brasilia which also likewise doth so agrée with the sea In this course aforesaide you see many birdes called Rabos Forcados that is hanging tailes and by all the Islandes of Martin Vaas you shal sée white Garagiaus or sea Mewes Now when you come vnder the height aforesaide hauing a large winde and that you might saile East Southeast let the Compasse wind a strike or a strike and a halfe which will wind so much comming vnder 30. degrées and although the Compasse windeth a strike and a halfe yet you shall not therefore reckon any abatement in your course more then halfe a strike for this way is a strike shorter then it is placed in the sea Carde and vse all the meanes that you runne not higher then two and thirtie or 33. degrées towards the Island of Tristan da Cunha for you shal haue a better and surer course from very foule weather and lesse stormes for commonly for the most part you haue the winde there at North Northeast which to auoid take this counsel giueÌ„ by me because I haue well tried it to be true and comming by the aforesaide Islandes of Tristan de Cunha you shall sée some of the weed called Sargosso driuing vppon the water with diuers Trombas which are thicke peeces of reedes which when you see then you are beside the Islandes you shall there likewise see great sea Rauens and some small Rauens with white billes which flie close by the Islands and when you are right south and north with the Islandes then the winding of the compasse Northeastward beginneth to diminish and lieth but a strike and â— part for that 70. or 80. miles from this Iland you are in the middle or halfe way of the Meridian betweene Brasilia and the Cape das Agulhas also herewith you must vnderstaÌ„d that vnder the height of 35. degrees little more or lesse you must account 330. miles for each strike of the compasse from the Northeast and when you see the tokens aforesaid you must runne to 35. degrees and â— which is a good height holding your course east and east and by north till you be within 100. miles of the cape de Bona Speranza then the compasse will winde no more but â— part of a strike likewise the water wil there draw you northwest or north now if by negligence you chance to faile or by the windes are driuen vnder 35 degrees then when you are 30 or fortie miles from the cape de Bona Speranza you shall see many thicke peeces of reedes and sea wolues which being vnder 36. degrees you shall not see bee it full or scarse and comming within 40. miles of the Cape de Bona Speranza be it vnder 36. or 35. degrées you shall see a gathering or running together of the water that is in the day time for by night if you cannot see it because that when you are once in it then you cannot perceiue it there you find many birdes sitting vpon it by the Portingalles called Cauoitoijns and from thence to the Cape there are some sea Rauens with white billes which is a great signe for it may be you may find ground and neuer sée the birdes called Alcatrases and when you come North and South with the Cape de bona Speranza from fiue and thirtie to thirtie degrées then you shall find muddie grounde to the Cape das Agulhas and when you are past that muddie ground you shall finde a kinde of yellowish ground and somewhat more inwarde by the Cape das Vacquas which is towards the Agua de de San Bras you haue shelly and stone ground The Compasse as I said that is fire at the Cape das Agulhas must in Lisbone be marked or striked and must there lie a halfe strike Northeastward which they must very well know howe to marke although some of our Pilots thinke it not necessary to knowe how much the Compasse turneth or lyeth Northeast or Northwest saying that our predecessors vnderstoode not the Compasse and so marked the coast whereunto I answere that in some nauigations it may be excused but in most part of the voiage or nauigation it is very necessarie specially from the Northeast and Northwest as you must saile from the Cape de bona Speranza to Mosambique as wel in the course as to saile in the middle betwéen the Ilande of Saint Laurence Soffala it must haue a strike from the Northwest to saile in the middle of the channell and this is necessarie to be known by al pylots that saile to India because oftentimes they find themselues sometimes vpon the Islandes some-that by meanes of the streames and wa-times vppon the bankes of Soffala and ters as you take your course from Capo das Agulhas to Mosambique it is good to saile an hundred miles Eastward thereby to shun the coast because of the water and streames that runne southwestwarde and comming north and south with the Bay called Balâ—a Del Goa then the Needle of the Compasse will be 1 â— part of a strike and no lesse Northwestwarde from whence notwithstanding you must not goe néerer then 60. miles vnto the coast continuing your course as I sayde before to kéepe your selfe off from it from this place the Rauens with white billes will follow you vntill the Cape das Correntes be Northwest from you and so when the said Cape lyeth right vppon that strike then the Rauens will leaue you for that they are not found but from the Cape das Correntes to the Cape de bona Speranza being North and south with the point aforesaid then the Compasse will bee 1\â— of a strike rather more then lesse Northwestwarde and in the middle of the channell a whole strike Comming by the droughts of Os Baixos de Iudia being Westward from them or not séeing theÌ„ then you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases that being 10. or 15. miles from them but being 20. miles off on the same side you shall likewise sée some but the compasse will not winde a full strike but if you were on the side of the Iland of S. Laurence within 10.12 or 15. miles then peraduenture you may not sée them and when in the height of those droughtes which lie full vnder 28. degrées you sée the birdes called Alcatrases then passe not by the side of the Iland of S. Laurence for that on that side towards the Iland you shall not see them but hard by and on Soffala side you shal perceiue them 20. miles from the land this is to bee vnderstood at the time of the Monsons which is at the time that the Portingall shippes that depart from thence in the month of March do passe by for they that come in the Monson or winter time may possiblie not find them for that it happened vnto me that comming in the Monson of winter in companie
of the Earle Don Luis de Tayde I passed 20. miles and more from the droughts towardes the coast of Soffala and saw not one birde but the day before I had séene ten or twelue of the birdes called Alcatrases and as soone as you perceiue the signes aforesaid then run no further North or North and by East vntill you bee vnder 19. degrées and ¼ vnder the which heights y e Islands As Ylhas Prinneras doe lie and somewhat more to the West for that holding your course Northeast the streame runneth so fast that you should presently fall vppon the bankes of Soffala and if you chance to sée the Ylhas Prinneras trust not vnder that course for although you passe by them East Northeast yet it is false because the first and last of them lie East and West one against the other till you come to a drie sand called A Coroa de Sanguase that is the Crowne of Sangase then you runne by the Islandes of Angoxas East Northeast and West southwest from this Crowne of Sangase to Mosambique you runne along the coast Northeast and Southwest From thence to Mosambique are some rodes or ankering places from 18. to fiue and twentie fadome déepe but my opinion is if it be possible that it were better not to anker because that vppon that coast there are many cliffes and stormes which are oftentimes not séene if the water breake not vpon them The signes that are found within 14 miles from Mosambique is a great thicke land and a mile and a halfe from the coast lyeth a banke where you passe ouer with fifteene fadome water the land aforesaid is called Maginquale and vpon it along by the shore there are some trees like Pine-apple trees from thence to Mosambique are twelue miles and to Mocango 5. miles hauing all that way the aforesaid trees and sometimes the water breaketh about a mile from the shore Now to put into Mosambique you must take your course in the middle way betweene the Iland S. George and the droughtes of Canaciera where you shal find 7.8 and sometimes 9. fadome when it is high water and being as farre as the Iland so that in your sight the Iland of Saint George and that of Saint Iames are all one then you are right against the Islandes and from thence putting in you shall set your course right vpon the strand of S. Anthonio in the Iland of Mosambique vntil you be in a good depth which shal be a channel stretching North and South and comming with the same course to twelue fadome deepe then winde Northwarde alwaies keeping of the point called Noâ—â—a Senhora do Baluarte which is a Church that standeth vppon the highest part of the Iland vppon the water without the fortresse of Mosambique and also from the sandes called Cabaciera which lyeth on the other side right ouer against Mosambique This Bay of Mosambique lyeth scarce vnder 15. degrees in this hauen of Mosambique the Compasse windeth not a strike Northwestward and from thence to the a Ilha do Comoro you must run northeast which Iland lyeth vnder 11. degrees 1 â— that is in the end of Southwest the course from this Island or to the line is Northeast and northeast and by east from hence to the line certaine nightes you shall see shyning or white water till you come to three or foure degrées and shall haue the wind Southeast and from thence forwarde you shall beginne to haue it Southwest and south so you begin to come from India in the winter time from the Equinoctiall line or to the height of Coa that is vnder 15. degrées and 1 â— you must runne East Northeast and in this way the Compasse will lie a strike and a halfe Northwestwarde and as much as it lyeth Northwestwarde must be sayled north-Eastward vnto the afore said height of Goa the signes you alwaies find in this way are alwaies about ten degrées in the night time you haue white and shining water and from those ten degrees to the coast of India sometimes you see many birdes that come from the shore that is from the coast of Arabia as Quartelles and other such like smal birds and 180. or two hundred myles from the coast of India then the Compasse beginneth to lessen in the Northwest for that in the hauen of Goa it lyeth but one strike to the Northwest and 1 â— part and rather lesse then more The 6. Chapter To sayle from Goa to Cochin FRom Goa to Batecola you must saile two or three miles from the land from twentie to fiue and twentie sadom deep for it is deeper there then neerer to Cochin for about halfe a mile from the Islande of Batecola you finde sixe and twentie fadome deepe from thence it is good to runne Southeast and Southeast and by South to the fortresse of Barcelor and to know if you be by Barcelor or in the height thereof you must vnderstand that there are high hils which beginne at Batecola and continue to Barcelor and right aboue Barcelor there is a round houell like darke miste or clowde which standeth in the end of y e high hilles on the South side of Batecola to this hauen it is foure or fiue miles and halfe a mile from the shore it is all stonie By Barcelor you may anker at ten fadome deepe about a mile and a halfe from the shore and desiring to sayle vnto Cochin you must holde your course South southwest and somewhat more into the sea as the winde will permit you for there are other Islandes and cliffes being where you may passe by as I saide before at fourteen fadome water it is a good course to keep at sixteene fadome from those Ilands three or foure miles forwarde there are nothing but Ilandes and cliffes which hauing past you come to see the Fort of Mangalor as you passe by the shore at fifteene fadome deepe from thence you sayle to the Fortresse of Cananor from Cananor to the Islandes as Ilhas Cagidar which is â— miles let your course here be south southeast at 18. fadom deep from the Islands of Cagadas to Chale are 7. miles y e course is south southeast 18 fadome deepe from Chale to Panane are 9. miles in the same course and from Panane to Cochiin are 10. miles the course beeing south southeast and at twelue ten fadome deepe which is a good way The 17. Chapter The course or Nauigation from Cochin to Portingall written by the said Rodriâ— de Ligos THe towne of Cochiin lieth vnder nine degrees and â— â— rather lesse than more and departing out of Cochiin towards Portingall you must hold your course West and as much Frorth till you come â— miles from Cochiin and being there you shall so set your course that as you passe through the Islandes of Maldina and Maâ—ale you may come to the height of 8. or eight degrees and not to fall vppon anie Islands although the sea card in this course hath certaine Islandes yet
halfe it is a small ryuer beeing at high water within the Hauen but thrée Fadome déepe and for a marke hath a high trée standing on the South side and along the shore some Sandie dounes which in sight shew like Ilands without trées on the North side lie certaine shallowes you enter into the Hauen Northwest on that is on the side where the trées stand and there as you are within the point you may Anker at fiue and sixe fadome déepe Quiloan or Quiloane lyeth vnder 20. degrées and a halfe and on the South side hath a high Palme trée and the land on the same side is like a hooke and if you desire to put into Quiloane although it were with a shippe of foure hundred tunnes you may well doe it being high water but you must take heede of a drougth lying thrée myles from the Hauen This Hauen at high water is fiue Fadome déepe and when you are in hard by the point of the ryuer you find fiue or sixe Fadome water with muddie ground you enter therein West Southwest and Southwest and by West and the drougthes aforesaide lie East Southeast and West Southwest like Quiloane From Mataca or Mâ—nemone to Quiloane you shall see land at thirteene or fourteen fadome déepe and beeing vnder 21 degrees and 60 fadome deepe then you shall be fifteen myles from the land shall find Corall vpon the ground and from thence inward small sands sayling from Quiloane to Soffala you must runne North and north and by East without the poynt or hooke til you be at 12 or 13 fadome déepe and till you sée Soffala and if you desire to stay there then runne till you be vnder 6. or 7. fadome which is 6. or 7. miles from the land the Hauen of Soffala changeth euerie yeare therefore you can not put into it without one of the countrie Pilots and it hath for a marke a companie of palme trees standing together on the north side sailing froÌ„ thence to Mosambique you must runne East till you come to fourty fadome water and from thence East north east running fiftéene or sixtéene myles from the Ilandes Primeiras you shall alwaies in these countries all along the coast find smal thinne blacke sand mixed with the earth although you sayle close in sight of the land Soffala lieth vnder twentie degrees and the Hauen called Bango vnder nyntéene and ½ and the riuer of Cuama vnder eightéene and â— 4 and you runne along the Coast from Soffala to Cuama North East and South West beeing thirtie myles and if you haue occasion to enter into the Riuer of Cuama to take in fresh water you must enter with a small Boate for within it is all fresh water from Cuama to the Ilandes of Primeiras you runne along the coast east and West and somewhat East and by north and West and by South There are two sights of land and beeing vnder eighteene degrees you finde therne fyue fadome deepe in sight of land for the Bankes in those Countries are verie small the course is fiftie miles The Riuer called Dos Bonis Sinais or of good tokens lyeth vnder seuentéene degrees and ¾ and hath these markes that is vppon the North east syde at the mouth of the Hauen there standeth an heap of trées and on the south syde it hath a sandie strand and vppon the furthest poynt outwardes there is a sand Hill or Downes which farre off sheweth like an Iland the entrie is on the South West syde along by the sand the Hauen at the mouth with lowe water is two fadome and beeing within it you may ly at 6. or 7. fadome water you can not see the entrie as you are without but on the North West syde you see the begynning of the land that hath a heape of trees standing vppon it which a farre off showe like the Maste of a shippe and the neerer you drawe to the land the lesse you see thereof so that beeing in the Riuer you see nothing at all because it is hindered by the other branches The Channell of the Ilandes Primenas and of the Ilandes of Angoxas are all one and you sayle East North east and West south west and it is 30 myles with tenne or twelue fadome deepe and neerer to the Ilandes then to the firme land and if you will stay by one of these Ilandes with a West wind you may freelie inough goe close vnto it for it is deepe and passing good ground The first of y e Ilands of Primeiras lyeth vnder 17 degrees ½ if you desire to run betwéene them then runne Southwest from the Iland and you shall freelie enter the chanell without feare for it is déepe inough for the drougthes lye a myle and a half distant from the Iland and if you desire to put in there with a west wind then goe close to the Iland running to the middle therof towards the south syde where you may anker within the length of a great shot at 6 or 7 fadome déepe and desiring to passe either in or out betwéene the droughtes which lie Northeast you may very well doe it and though you beare all your sayles kéeping alwaies néerer the sand of the Iland then to the droughthes in the middle Iland for it is all one vpoÌ„ what syde of the Iland you sayle for there is no cause of feare but onlie where you sée the water breake and desiring to anker by the middle Iland you may fréely doe it and that close by it for it is 12 fadome déepe at low water with a West wind but not with an East wind in the middle way on that side which lyeth against the firme land there standeth a heape of trees by the which you shall find a lake of fresh water to serue you if necessitie requireth and lyeth a little inward from the strand and if you can not well goe farre inward to the lake doe but digge in the strand and you shall presentie find fresh water but it must be when it is an east wind for with a West wind the water striketh with so great a force vpon the shore that you are not able to stay there with your boate The middle Iland which lyeth North east hath no passage at all to the sea but from thence to the drouthes called Acoroa de S. Antonio are seuen miles and to the first Iland of Angoxa fyue miles and is all one course with the Ilandes you may fréelie passe by the land with what shippe so euer you will for it is déepe inough all the Ilandes of Angoxas haue thorow fares one running through the other al déep and good ground so that there is betwéene the Ilandes and the firme land at the least eight fadome déepe but you must alwaies sayle néerer the firme land then the Ilandes There lyeth a sandie drougth betwéene the Iland of Angoxa which likewise is to bee sayled on both sides These Ilandes of Angoxas are 4 and betwéen the two middle
same course from India to Porto Piqueno or the small Hauen of Bengalen set downe by an other Pilot large and better described with the whole situation and course thereof SAyling from the coast of India to the hauen called Porto Piqueno in the kingdom of Bengalen outward about the Ilande of Zeylon you shall take your course along the coast of India till you come to sée Briniaon lying by the Cape de Comorin which is the furthest point of the land of India from thence taking your way crosse ouer for from thence forward it is a good countrie and make the shortest crosse you can thereby to goe sure and not to fall inwards or betwéene the Iland of Zeylon and when you sée Barreias which are the Dounes of Briniaon aforesaid then you shal sayle Southward running so at the least fiftéene or twentie myles and from thence forward you shall shorten your way as you thinke best to get vnder fiue degrées and being there you shall sayle Eastwarde as much as you thinke conuenient that you may be assured to passe the point of Gualle which is the furthest point of the Iland of Zeylon on the Southwest side lying vnder sixe degrees when you thinke you are at the point de Gualle to be assured thereof make towards the Iland to know it before you come to the drougths betwéene Tanadare which is fyue myles from Punta de Gualla and the first drouth where commonlie all the shippes know the land such I say as wee sayle to Bengalen or to any of the Hauens thereof as Porto Piqueno or Porto Grande that is the small or the great Hauen where the Portingalles doe traffique and hauing sight of the land of the sayd countrie goe as close vnto it as you will but not passing aboue twelue fadome déepe towards the land because there ly certaine cliffes along the shore whereof we know not certainely the danger besides the sandes betwéene the which and the land you may passe through as hereafter shal be shewed and sayling thus as I haue sayd along the shore you must vnderstand that the land of Tanadare is for the space of fyue myles to the Drougthes on the sea syde altogether lowe land and when you are further to landward in you begin to see certaine hilles that is thrée great hilles right against it and then you shall presently sée the first drougth betwéene the which and the lād you may well passe for that most of the ships that goe and come by the Iland run through that way in the middle way you shall finde betwéene it and the land 11. and 12. fadome déepe of faire in some places stony ground and you néed not feare any thing but onelie that you see before your eyes This first drougth or sand lieth full vnder 6 degrées and ½ and right against it vpon the land you see a houell standing alone and no more in all that country to be séene 6 miles further from that first great drougth there lieth an other small drougth which is distant Northeast Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and southwest and by West this small drought lieth vnder 6 degrées and ¼ about 2 miles from the land and if you desire to runne betwéene it and the land you may well doe it for it is ◠or 6 fadome déepe at low water with sandie ground which I know by those that haue passed that way aboue 30. tymes as well going as comming backe again but if your ship be great then it is better to sayle about further into the sea Those drougths or sandes béeing past then runne along by the land and neuer put from it for it is your best course to goe close by it and passing by the Iland of the hilles and the high land you shall see a high sharpe Hill among others from whence there runneth a point that lieth out towardes the Southwest This hill is called O Capello de Frade that is the Fryers coule and lieth full vnder 8 degrées I set not downe the course you must commonlie vse to take along the Coast to the said Capello de Frade because you come vpon no direct line this fryers coule maketh a point of lād frō y e whence there runneth a Riffe about halfe a mile into the sea whereon in some places you may see the water breake from this point to Trinquanamale are 17. miles and you run by the coast north and south which is all low land with a bankie ground and from thence you shall see no land but the land that lieth inward fiue miles Before you come to Trinquanamale you finde a small riuer Trinquanamale is a great hauen beeing in the entrey more then 3. miles in bredth all low land but very déepe round about he that will anker therein may lie vnder certaine Ilands and inward it maketh a riuer that runneth to Seyta vaqua the other to it is all low land to know Trinquanamale a farre off at the mouth thereof on the north side lieth a yellow Sandie Downe and hath vpon one of the hookes or pointes two long hilles rising vp and reaching inwardes to the coūtrie and no other high land neither behinde them nor before thē in all that coast comming by Trinquanamale and hauing knowne it you must then presently crosse ouer for there it is best to follow your course and from thence you must runne North and North and by east alwaies reckning the declining or winding of the compasse and if it be in the monsons of the winds in the month of August then you shall sayle full north because as then the streame runneth very strōg into the sea and this course you shall hold till you come vnder 17. degrees which is the heigth of the point called a Punta de Guado variin lying on the coast of Choramandel which is the beginning of the kingdome of Orixa and being vnder 17. degrees from thence you shall put to the coast of the Firme land to make a good voiage alwaies taking care not to run aboue 19. degrées ½ without séeing land because that vnder 19. degrées there lieth a riuer called Puacota frō the mouth whereof 3. miles into the sea there lieth a rocke or stonie cliffe of the length of a ship which may easily be seene for it lieth aboue the water you may passe betwéene it and the land without danger of any thing but only that which you sée before your eyes all this coast from the point of Guadovariin is altogether great thicke land and hilles which may bee séene far off from the riuer of Puacota to another riuer called Paluor or Palura are 12. miles and you runne by the coast Northeast and Southwest aboue this riuer of Palura there lieth a verie high hill called a Seira de Palura that is the hill of Palura which is the highest hill in all that coast This riuer lieth full vnder 19. degrees and ½ from this riuer to the point called a Derradeira
to certaine high Beecken or downe falles of water you may haue wood to burne and from those Beeckens you must crosse ouer on the other side of Guijnette where you shall presentlie sée 5. or 6. trées higher then the rest vntill you be close to the other side Those trées stand at the mouth of the riuer Chandequā on the east side the depthes you shall finde vppon those bankes are 2. ½ and thrée fadome déepe till you be on the other side for there you finde manie depthes from this place forward you néede no other aduise for the Fisher men as then will bring you where you should bee you shall passe ouer the water with halfe flood but I aduise you once againe that if you saile in the morning by the aforesaid riuer of Cayegare then runne along the coast till you come to the point das Palmerias and from thence to 17. fadome deepe frō thence holding your course northwest and northwest and by north this way must be folowed with a Compasse that yeeldeth one strike till you come to 12. fadome deepe and then running the same course till you come to 4. and three fadome and ½ wherewith if it bee cleare weather you shall presentlie see the lād of Orixa but if it be darke and mistie weather then runne no more towards the land keeping still at 4. and 3. fadome and ½ runrunning East for the leade and the depthes will bring you well in and take héede you come not into many depthes kéeping still as I saide before at the small depthes and if it bee night being at seuentéene fadome then runne towards the 2. Ilands and see you anker not for it is badde ankering there and passing by the aforesaide Punta das Palmeiras running in by night you shal then not passe aboue 7. or 8. fadome vntill it be day wherewith as then you may go in if you chance to be there with a small shippe then keepe at 2. and 2. fadome and ½ till you be in the sight of the riffe of Orixa and when you begin to be right against it then runne within the length of a great shot neere vnto for it is deepe enough and from the side of Orixa it is all banks and shallow ground The riffe aforesaid shall bee on your right hande that is to seaward from you and from thence you must make right with the Island A Ylha dos Gallos or if you will to the point of the Riuer Angelijn where you may freely sayle for there you shall find two and a halfe and thrée fadome déepe but it must bee with a small ship as I said before The 13. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Aracan which is the same way that you hold to Porto Grande or the great hauen lying in the countrie of Bengalen SAyling from India or Cochijn to the hauen of Aracan you must holde your course to the Islande of Seylon in manner aforesaid as in the description of the course to Porto Pequeno running so to the pointe or ende of the sandes or droughtes lying full vnder 6. degrées and vppon the point of the lande which runneth East and West comming by this point or hooke you shall from thence put off from the land running 7. or 8. miles Northeastward to come out vnder the Islande and then let your course be Northeast and Northeast by North till you be vnder 12. degrées and that Manacosta be southwest from you and from thence you shall runne Northeast till you be almost vnder 20. degrées which is the height of Aracan and if then you sée no land you shall runne East vnto Aracan vnder the same height of 20. degrées thrée or four miles from the land there lyeth a riffe whervpon the water breaketh and at low water is vncouered it is in greatnesse and length about the length of seuen ships both waies and when you sée it you must take heed of it and goe no nearer then the shotte of a great peece The hauen of Aracan lyeth vnder 20. degrees and being fiue or sixe miles to seawarde from it you shall there find twentie fadome deepe sandie grounde and being at 19. degrees and ½ toward the lande you shall find deepe muddie ground at the least 6 miles from the shore and being but three or four miles from the land thirtie fadome déepe muddy ground you must be careful at 19 degrees and ½ not to runne in with the lande but do as I said before The 14. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Martauan lying in the kingdome of Pegu with the situation of the coastes SAyling from India to Martauan or to y e kingdome of Pegu you shall hold your course till you be past the Island of Seylon as they doe that saile to Bengalen and being about the Island you shal make to the Ilands called As Ylhas d' Andemaon whereof the first Iland lyeth south vnder 11. degrées and the furthest land in the North vnder 14. degrées you runne on the East side of them Northeast and Southwest from the Ilands d' Andemaon to the firme lande are aboue 60. miles and running to Andemaon you shall vse all the meanes you can to passe by them vpon the North side and being past you must as I said before make towardes Martauan which lyeth vnder 16. degrees and when you are at 14. degrées you shall make with the lande but better at 13. degrees because of the creeke or winding in of Martauan where you finde a very strong streame alwayes drawing Northwest and if you make with the lande being at 14. degrees you shall sée many Islands which you may freely passe close by for it is all ouer very deepe for there it is 12. and 13. déepe muddie ground close by the shore besides the Island Pulo Comudo which is about 6. or 7. miles from the hauen of Martauan betweene this Island and the firme lande there lyeth many riffes notwithstanding if you chance to fall betwéene those Islandes you shall make towardes the side of the Islande but not too close where you shall find a channell of thrée fadome deep and on the side of the firme land you haue many sands and shallowes passing from thence to the hauen of Martauan being past that Iland you shall passe along the shore where you shall see certaine cliffes lying towards the sea which shew like Almadias which are Indian Scutes by them vsed in y e riuers which cliffes lie about 2 miles from Pulo Comudo towardes Martauan and right ouer against these cliffes you haue on the firme lande a point or hooke of high land and on the North side of this point there lyeth a sandie strand vpon the low land this land belongeth to Xemiin Vegarum that is in Pegu spéech the Lord of Vegarum for Xemiin is Lord and Vegarum the name of the land from thence Northward the land is high in some places hauing créekes cliffes and Islandes before you come to the
hauen of Martauan there is a white houell or land that serueth for a marke hauing close by it two Palme trees and about two miles further you shall see a thicke top of lande vppon the end whereof towardes the sea lyeth an Iland which cannot be séen nor discerned from the land till you be right against it and that you haue discouered the Riuer within where the hauen of Martauan lyeth and being past this Iland you shall sée a white houel which lyeth likewise on the South side within the Iland there is a lake that hath good fish and before you come to the hauen comming from the Ilande of Comudo about a mile or a mile and a halfe to seawarde from the land you shall see a round Islande full of bushes called A Ilhas de Cebollas that is the Island of Onions by the which Island on the south side thereof there lyeth a cliffe whereon you sée the sea breake from this Island to the hauen of Martauan there are about two miles comming from Pulo Comudo you must put off from it towards the land holding your course as aforesaid as not hauing any cause of feare but onely of that which you sée before your eyes you must likewise vnderstande that from the Islande Das Cebollas forward towards the North there is no other Ilands nor cliffes which is a verie good marke of this creeke for that being on this side thereof you are no sooner past one Iland but you see another but from thence forward you see not any as I said before but you must bee sure not to passe beyond the hauen of Martauan for that being at twelue fadome not long after you should fal vpon the drought This hauen of Martauan is about a mile or a half and a half broad hauing on the North side a low flat land euen with the sea and is an Iland called Momua you may see it as you passe along the shore from Pulo Comuda towardes the hauen you must still keepe at twelue fadome and comming to 8. or 9. fadome then you shall anker for then you are in the hauen and put no neerer to the shore neither runne not further from the creeke to the banke for then you shall find lesse depth this riuer of Martauan runneth Northeast Southwest both out and in but you may not enter therein without a Pilot for that within the Riuer vpon the East side it hath a stone cliffe or rock which draweth the water vnto it therefore you cannot enter without a Pilot also in the entrie of this riuer and hauen on the right hand there lyeth a sandie banke where in the middle way there runneth a channell of sixe or seuen fadome deepe which you shal knowe by this that is in the deepest parte thereof it hath much fish which you may see and this hauen of Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrees and ◠4 and the towne of Martauan vnder sixteene degrees vpon the furthest end of the Iland of Andeman on the North side there lyeth two Ilands betweene the which and the Iland of Andeman you may safelie passe also on the furthest point of the South side of the Ilande of Andeman lying vnder 11. degrees there lyeth some Ilandes and from thence to the Ilandes of As Ilhas de Nicobar southwarde there reacheth an Iland also as you put off from the Ilandes of Andeman towardes the coast meeting with some gatheringes of water you neede not feare them for it is nothing but the water it selfe without any sands although there lyeth some vpon the coast there lyeth onely in the middle way an Ilande which the inhabitantes call Viacondam which is a small Iland hauing faire ground round about it but very little fresh water and nothing els but Pine trees wherefore you neede not go into it The 15. Chapter The course from Cochiin in India to Malacca HE that will saile to Malacca in the great Monson which is the principall time when the windes serue to go thether in the Month of Aprill then to make a good voyage you must set saile from Cochiin vppon the sixe and twentith of Aprill and being out of the hauen you must hold your course southward till you be vnder 7. degrées and from thence south southeast to 6. degrees and being vnder that height then you shall runne Southeast almost to fiue degrées and from thence East vntill you are past the Ilande of Seylon and being there you shall keepe on your course till you be vnder 5. and ⅓ and 5. degrees and ◠from thence you shall make towardes the Ilands of Gomespola which lie vnder 6. degrées by the point of Achiin in the Ilande Sumatra and comming to the Iland of Gomespola if you feare not the Acherins which are subiects to the kingdom of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra and deadly enemies to the Portingals then take your course along by the Iland of Sumatra to the Cape called Taniamburo lying on the same coast of the Iland almost 30. miles from the Ilandes of Gomespola and from thence you shall take your course towardes the coast of Malacca running as farre to loofewarde as possible you may to discouer Pulo Sambilao which is an Ilande lying close vpon the coast vnder 4. degrées and ⅔ and distant from Malacca 40. miles Northwest and by North for that such as discouer and come to this Iland maketh a quicke voyage to Malacca and those that fall to leeward towardes Pulo Pinan which is an other Iland vnder fiue degrées and ½ lying with Pulo Sambilao North and by West 12. miles neere Pulo Batun there is another Iland lying Northwest and by North from Pulo Pinaio ten miles vnder 6. deg might peraduenture find Southeast windes which blow much on that coast therefore he that goeth late to saile hath a long voyage wherefore it is best to depart earlie from Cochiin to make a better voyage The 16. Chapter An other larger descriptiō of the course to saile from Goa in India to Malacca with the description of the coasts SVch as desire to saile from Goa or out of India to Malacca must put 20. miles into the sea that he may saile without y e Ilande of Seylon vnto the Ilandes called As Ilhas de Nicobar through the middle of the channell which lyeth vnder 7. degrees and ½ and in that countrey you must looke to the streame because with a west wind they run towards the Gulfe of Bengalen and with an East wind into the sea about 20. or 30. miles frō the Ilandes there is such a concourse breaking of water and streames as if there were sands Whē you com to y e middle of y e Ilands of Nicobar ther you find a channel lying vnder 6. degrees and ½ the Ilands being distant one from the other about a mile and a halfe where you may passe through without feare as hauing nothing to fear but y t you sée before you the depth you find there is 12.
13. fadom at the end this channel by y e North Ilande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an Iland where you may passe throgh w t y t greatest shippe that is the South end of this Ilande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼ and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées if you go through the middle of the channell lying vnder 6. degrées you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland two of them are great and high the other small the fourth lyeth distant from the Ilande about thrée miles and is a great round Iland flatte on the top and Northward you shall see another Iland lying vnder 8. deg the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe flat at the end and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée another Iland lying hard by that vnder 8. deg a flat land distant from the other about two miles from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles and there you néed not feare any thing at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra which are continually thereaboutes and are deadly enemies to the Portingalles but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼ or 8. degrees and ◠for you may passe without danger for they are all channelles or thorow fares being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before you shall take your course towards the Iland Pulo Cuto you runne betweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West and somewhat East and by South and West and by North the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2 ◠to know Pulo Cuto comming out of the Sea towardes it vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land on the shore very low they are thrée Ilands together hauing on the South side on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncouered on the North side an other mouth or opening running between the great Ilande the Ilande of the sea in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water lying by a long point of lande you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera which is a small round Iland without trees lying vnder 5. deg and ⅔ the course being about 100. miles you run East Southeast and West Northwest from Pulo Pera to the Iland Pulo Pinaon are 15. miles and are one from the other East and west somewhat East and by South West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande full vnder fiue degrées and ¼ the marke thereof is that it is high in the middle hauing on the North point a round houell and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande and comming along by the lande it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand at the end wherof lyeth an Iland where there is a place of fresh water on the South point it is lowe land making an other Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North south there you must looke well to your selfe for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke reaching to a point or booke of high land which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe somewhat more but towards the land lesse when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east east by north then you shal see Sambilaon the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg East West from Pulo Sambilaō 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland called A Ilha das Iarres which is a smal round Iland ful of trees and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water but verie little but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof the greatest wherof nearest the land lyeth in the middle in the which on the North side there stādeth a houel on both sides whereof are sandie strandes wherein are fresh water likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands in the middle whereof where there is an opening you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands as well on the sea as the lande side as also through the channel running betweene them you may freely passe without feare for it is deepe enough you may anker in sight of the land at 20. 25. fadome deep If you desire to passe through the great channell of Pulo Sambilaon then you must run south south and by East to y e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru which lie vpon the coast of y e Iland Sumatra they are 3 smal flat Ilands full of bushes and woodes and when you are within a mile of these Ilands you shall sayle southeast southeast by east east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep towards Pulo Parcelor which is a high hill lying vppon y e coast of Malacca shewing far off to be an Iland it standeth in a flat land whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it frō Pulo Parcelor to y e point called Cabo Rachado that is the clouen point lying ful vnder 2. degr ½ you saile to Malacca East southeast West Northwest along y e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca you shall presently discouer the Ilands that lie about halfe a mile from Malacca close by the land The 17. Chapter To saile from Pulo Sambilaō or through the great channel to Malacca SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra you shal hold your course south for the space of 13. miles whereby you shal come vpon y e banke so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward as from the Iland das Iarras that is the Iland of pots southeast southeast by south for you come out al at one place whē the Ilands de Aru lie west west and by North from you then cast out your leade and you shal finde sandy ground frō thence you shal hold your course southeast stil casting out your lead finding 10. fadome kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground you shal runne southeast southeast and by east but finding 16. 17. fadome sandie ground then winde towards
the side of Malacca to 12. 13. fadome setting your course againe southeast southeast and by east if you finde your selfe to be at 10. fadome then turne againe to the southeast alwaies séeking to be at 10.12 13. fadom for it is the best ground and depth of y e channel when you see a round hil right before you which sheweth like an Ilande y t is Pulo Parselar to the which the droughts or sands aforesaid do stretch notwithstaÌ„ding you shal not let to passe on your way not coÌ„ming nearer to Pulo Parselar then 2. miles Northeastwarde for then you are past the drougthes aforesaid from thence forward put towards the lande about a mile distant holding your course southeast towardes y e point of Cabo Rachado before you come within 3. miles thereof you find a Riffe lying foure miles from the coast which is but 4. fadome deep at high water to seawarde froÌ„ thence there is a channel of 10. fadom deep running from the Island of de Aru to Pulo Parselar you shal vse all the meanes you can to haue the greatest Ilande de Aru Southwest and southwest by west from you holding your course southeast alwaies at 18. at the least 17 fadome if you wil put from Pulo Parselar to the Ilandes de Aru you shal let Parseâ—ar lie Northeast northeast by east from you running northwest Northwest and by West alwaies at 16.17 18. to 15 fadome deep this way is not otherwise to be done for I haue past so my selfe and founde it a very good way The 18. Chapter The course from Malacca to Goa with the stretchings and situations of the Coastes DEparting from Malacca to Goa or India your best course is to saile a mile or a mile and a halfe along by the coast of Malacca alwaies hauing in sight the strikes and neather partes of the Trées that stand vpon the land till you be at Pulo Parcelar and from thence you haue from 16. to 27. and 28. fadome déepe but you must remember not to passe aboue 14. fadome neyther on the one side nor the other and sailing from Malacca about two miles and ½ or 3. miles from thence you finde 2. or 3. droughts of stonie cliffes reaching about halfe a mile into the sea lying right ouer the cesterne or the Kinges Bath by the Portingales called Tanque del Rey you shall likewise looke that you goe not neere the chéeke of Cabo Rachado which Cape lieth vnder two degrees and ½ vppon the same Coast of Malacca Northwest and by North ten miles distant as well vpon the Southeast as the Northwest side and goe not neare the land by a mile at the least as I said before there you haue a good mile and a halfe to the principall part of the channell that runneth to Parcelar and passing by Pulo Pacelor and desiring to crosse ouer from the droughts you shall kéepe off from Pulo Parcelor about 2 miles because that from it there reacheth a banke that iutteth about halfe a mile into the sea being as I said about two miles froÌ„ the land to passe ouer the droughtes being with a flood then Pulo Parcelor shall lie Eastward from you and at an ebbe East Northeast therefore it is néedefull for you to haue great care of the tides that you be not deceiued comming in this sort into those parts you shall runne west Northwest kéeping either on the one side or the other as the tides fal and if you crosse ouer the sea Pulo Parcelor it is best for you to kéepe east and east and by south from it and being in the middle way to the Ilands of Daru lying close vpon the coast of Samatra vnder 3. degrees west Northwest and 30. miles from Malacca then if you see Pulo Pacelor let it be betwéen east southeast and east by south from you and yet you haue a good course and comming towards Pulo Parcelor you must haue it to lie northeast and southwest being two miles from it but when you leaue it to make towards the Ilands of d' Aru then it is best to haue it east and east and by south and being in the sight of the Iland of d' Aru making towards the great Iland you may run within a mile or two thereof safely and without danger for it is all deepe ground The depthes you shall finde by the droughts aforesaid passing through the Channell are from 10. to 11. fadome but not aboue and the greatest depthes you shall finde running through the channel are 12.13.14.15.16 and 17. fadome and although at 3. or 4. castinges you come to 10.9 8. fadome of small fine and blacke sand or muddy ground yet your course is good for you shall presently againe come to 12.13 and 14. fadome and hauing this depth and ground and holding the course aforesaid although at some castings you finde small fine white sand yet your course is good but if you finde great sand or shels then you are out of the channell and when you finde the ground full of black shels and great sand I counsell you to seeke againe for fine small and blacke sand or muddie ground for the ground of great sand and shels is out of the channell therefore you must not cease to cast out your lead to assure your selfe it is likewise good to know the depth with two leads vpon each side of the ship one with good and carefull ouersight alwaies hauing your ankers ready with a cable of 12. or 15. fadome long if need be therewith to help your selfe because herein there is mention many times made of Pulo Pacelor I thought it good likewise to set downe vnder what height it lieth although it is sufficiently set downe us the Sea Cardes it is a land that maketh a point like to a Cape lying on the Coast of Malacca Northwest and by North about fiftéene miles distant ful vnder thrée degrées also you must remember that taking your course from Pulo Parcelor to the Iland of d' Aru being in the middle way you must let Pulo Pacelor lie in East and East and by South from you and beeing somewhat nearer the Islands then Pulo Parcelor is from you almost East Southeast that is as you goe neere the Islandes for that running in this sort you haue a good course and are sure and safe from the droughtes and if by night you passe ouer the droughts then you shall marke the land in the day time as I said before hauing a good winde alwaies looking to your tides that they deceiue you not driuing you vpon the one or the other side for there the streame runneth verie strong as well in the flood and as in the ebbe alwaies ruling your selfe according to the tides and holding your course in such manner that you may cast out your lead and as the aforesaide great Island of d'Aru lieth Southwest from you béeing about two miles from it then
you shall haue Pulo Sambilao right against it so you fall not from the Islandes towards Samatra holding your course as aforesaide towardes Pulo Sambilao without feare because the monson or time of the windes do as then blow from the land into the Sea and if herein you chaunce to bee negligent you shall doe your selfe great hurt and procure great hinderance in your Voyage the depthes and ground that you finde from the Island of d'Aru to Pulo Sambilao and from 27. to 40. fadome muddie ground and in some places sand and passing by the Iland of d'Aru then you find from 40. to 50. fadome déepe from the Islandes of Pulo Sambilao to th Islands of Pulo Pinao you shall kéepe along by the shore not once putting from it shunning a banke lying right ouer against the land called Barus betwéene Pulo Sambilao and Pulo Pinao which is muddie ground and it is saide that there you haue thrée fadome water you shall still vse your lead and runne not nearer then fiftéene fadome to the land nor further then thirtie fadome to Sea ward because diuers times there commeth great blasts out of the hilles of Queda from Northeast and north northeast and sometimes sharper many times runne further from the coast as I said before and so you shall holde your course without danger from the coast of the Iland Samatra where in the monson you haue greatest cause to feare and therefore you shall hold your course without putting from the land till you come to the Island of Pulo Pinao and being by them or at the heigth and length of them and hauing the monson that is the winde which as then bloweth and is good for you you may then put from the land doing your best to kéepe too loofeward off Pulo Pera which is a good course but if the winde serue you to make towards Pulo Batum it is better for from this place you must take your course towards the channell vnder 7. degrées and ½ but hauing the monson as aforesaid although it be somewhat backeward you shall loose your time for the monson at the first is sometimes sharpe and after that beginneth to be larger as you turne or winde from the land or coast With this course you shall runne to the channell and passe it vnder seauen degrées and ◠2 and before you come vnder seauen degrées and 1 2 to seauen and 2 ◠or lesse hauing past the Ilands you shall alwaies kéepe vnder the aforesaide seauen degrees and ½ because in that gulfe or countrie many times the winde is north and north Northeast in your course towards the Island of Seylon you shall runne vnder seauen degrees and ½ and vnder seauen degrees with the which you shall come to the Island of Seylon to a place called Matecalou which lieth too loofeward off the sands there you haue no ground but within two miles of the land you must likewise vnderstand that from the middle of the Gulfe to the Island of Seylon the water and the streames in this time of monson runne outward into the sea likewise the compasse yéeldeth more to the Northwest whereunto you must haue great regard and béeing at the Island Seylon hauing it in sight you shall not loose it but kéep your ground from thirtie fadome looking well before you and taking heede of the droughtes that are very dangerous the foremost of them béeing of stone Cliffes the length of a Galley without any other then only those you sée to fourtéene and sixtéene fadome and in the halfe way or middle thereof and the land you shall finde the depth aforesaid and another Sand that lyeth behind you which is the first and cannot bee séene but that the Sea breaketh vppon it and they say you may passe with small Shippes betweene it and the land béeing foure fadome déepe but I thinke it is better to put from it to sea ward it is from thence to the land a mile and you may goe neare it at sixtéene eightéene fadome and if you fall vppon it by night you must saile onlie with your Foukesayle when you are in sight of vnknowne land kéeping at eightéene fadome neare the land and not aboue thirtie fadome to Seaward from this sand you shall runne along y e coast at fiftéene sixtéene twentie twentie fiue and thirtie fadome but in such manner that you loose not ground for you may haue a Calme and so by that loosing of ground the water and streames might driue you to the Islandes of Maldiua wherefore you must haue good regard vntill you come to Negumbo which is in the Island of Seylon and from thence it is good to crosse ouer to the Firme land and comming to Negumbo you shall not put off from the land vnlesse it bee from the fiftéene of Februarie for from that time forwardes then the streame and waters beginne againe to runne inwardes and being from the fiftéene of Februarie forwardes you may put from the shore that is from the Island of Verberyn which lyeth close vppon the Coast of Seylon to the Portingales Fort called Columbo as it falleth out best for you least it happen to you as it hath done to many other shippes that for want of care were driuen to the Ilands of Maldyua from this last sand to Tanadare and to the poynt called A Punta de Gualla along the Coast and sea side the Countrie is almost all of one higth and right ouer against the sandes aforesaid inwards to the land you see 3 high trees and from thēce to Tanadare you haue sandie strands and you may still runne along the shore without feare till you sée Tanadare which is verie well knowne and deceaue not your self for that outwardlie it sheweth like Punta de Gualla but the markes and right tokens thereof are that it hath a thyn point of land striking out in forme lyke a tongue with a stone riffe hanging from it towards the sea as farre as you may throw a stone this point of land or tongue striking out is full of Indian Palme trees which shew verie faire and a myle or two before you come at it this poynt or tongue of land appeareth beyond the Palme trees further into the sea but the Palme trees are thicke and shew verie faire and before you come to Tanadare you haue two or three sandie bayes not necessarie to be described and whē you come right against the wood or bushe of Palme trees in the middle thereof you shall see a white Pagode that is a Temple of the Indians Idoles from this Pagode towardes the North syde you shall see certaine downes of white and redde earth which are good markes and the right knowledge of that Countrey you must not goe too close vnto the shore for it hath a small sand stretching into the sea but not farre when you see the downes aforesayd then you must runne at eyghtéene twentie fadome déepe for that if the wind beginneth to calme and your ground to
be deeper you must cast anker for if you neglect it you should presentlie fall on ground because the streames and waters doe runne verie strong to sea ward from Tanadare to Belliguao are about 6. myles this place of Belliguao is a verie great créek and from the south syde thereof there appeareth certaine great houels of redde earth that lie within the Créeke and can not bee seene till you be full before the Creeke and on the North syde it hath two small Ilandes close to the land from the which Ilandes there commeth a small sand but it lyeth on the south syde towardes the land From Belleguao to Gualla are fyue myles and the way betweene them is altogether on the sea syde ful of Palme trees and betweene them lykewise lieth an Ilande hard by the land all of stonie cliffes and when you make towardes Gualla you shall perceaue a high land full of woods and a playne desert and from the North syde of the bay it hath a great wood of Palme trees and if you haue occasion to anker in the bay you may well enter at fiftéene and fourtéene fadome deepe but such as desire to keepe on their course neede not put in there From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualla which are twelue myles you runne from the one to the other Northwest and Southeast and somewhat Northwest by West and Southeast and by east and all the way along this Coast to Gualla is not to be sayled but onlie where you may see ground with your Lead From Gualla to the point called Belitote is fyue or sixe miles which point hath a thicke wood of Palme trees and right ouer against it about half a mile there is a great Cliffe and betwéen them both lyeth many stonie cliffes along the shore by the point of Gualla are two sandes whereon the water breaketh the one is before you come at the point which runneth into the sea about ¼ of a myle and the other is right ouer against the bay on the North syde running a small myle into the sea and of this you must take great care you may well passe by it in the night at twentie fadome deepe so that you need not feare vppon this same the sea breaketh verie long speciallie when it is high water From thence you shall take your course vnto Columbo as the Coast reacheth and from the Iland of Verberijn forward the ground is full of Bankes and shallowes and béeing hard by Columbo about three or foure myles towardes Negumbo you may anker at eight or nyne fadome but by Columbo you cannot doe it but if you haue great occasion then you may anker at eightéen fadome towardes the land There you finde stonie ground and the same you finde at the poynt where you haue twentie fyue fadome deepe inwardes to the sea and that in most places therefore you must bee carefull in throwing out your Anker first prouing with a lead the grounde of this Countrie is in some places small and in other places great sand which is the surest and in some places it hath redde sand and lykewise places of white and blacke sand which are tokens of the ground along the Coast vppon all the which ground you may anker The right markes and tokens of Columbo which is the place where the Portingalles holde their fort are these y t is when you are within the Hauen then the Pico of Adam so called which is a high hill higher then any other in al the countrie about it shal be in the East and setting your course to the Hauen of this fortresse then you shall loose the sight of all the hilles and Houels and begin to sayle by thinne flat land which is a marke and a verie good token of the Hauen the winds that you there shall finde for the most part of that time or Monson are North Northeast Northeast and sometime East Northeast and also East the Viracoins which are the winds that blow out of the Sea are many times North and Northwest I write this that men should not wonder to find them so in that place likewise you finde there West Northwest and West Southwest windes according to the coniunctions of the times when men are in that coast the winds that are called Viracoins which commonly blow out of the west throughout all India at such time as men vse to sayle vpon the Sea which is in Summer from noone to twelue of the clocke at night and come out of the Sea towards the land and therefore by the Portingales they are called Viracoins that is wind out of the Sea and from midnight to noone the winds blow out of the East which come ouer the land into the Sea as it is at large declared in my Indian Viage and is onely heere set downe because it should not séeme strange to any man to reade of these winds and their manner of blowing in these countries when you will put to Sea by night with the Terreinhos or land winds if they be not Northeast then you shall not set sayle before midnight if they be not full to Sea ward then put not to farre off from the shore because it would not bee good for you to put to farre into the Sea for that you could not well get the land againe because the Viracoins or sea winds that come out of the North and Northwest doe often stay late blow but slowly From Negumbo you shall crosse ouer to Cape de Comorijn to the East side of the Cape towards the land called das Areas Gordas that is of the fat or thicke Dounes which is 12. miles from Cabo de Comorijn on the side of Choramandel for it is good to put on there because of y e streame which runneth verie stiffe outward with a hard wind by these Areas Gordas as also some part of the way to the Cape you finde ground and many times sée the land because it is long at 40. fadome and lesse and if you come inward from the Cape being by night and find ground then you may fréely passe ouer this ground from 12. to 18. fadome déepe for as you come right against the Cape then the ground is ful of white Sand and you shal not find aboue 20. fadome to Seaward from Areas Gordas to the Cape for from Areas Gordas inwards the ground is ful of banks and small blacke Sand and you must runne a mile a mile and a halfe and two miles from the shore vpon the ground and depthes afore saide And when you passe by Cabo de Comorijn to Coulaon you shall holde your course along the coast about a mile from the shore that you may Anker and not going néerer to the sand then 12. fadome but it is good to run from 15. to 18. fadome alwayes taking héede of the stones of Trauancor which lie betwéene the Cape and Coulaon and being in the night time the surest marke to know if you be before Coulaon is to
stretching southward the other lieth in the South the shot of a gret péece from the issuing of the land of the straight reaching Eastward so y t they make a crosse one throgh the other and betwéen those two Riffes the chanel runneth and with the ebbe of a spring tide you may sée them the chanel y t runneth betwene thē both hath scarce 4. fadome deepe the ground within y e chanel is muddie without sand This I haue particularly noted vnto you for their instructions y t hereafter shal passe through that way for that the discriptions of the Nauigation or course thereof heretofore written set downe are very short and obscure for such as haue not past through that way wherby many ships haue run on grounde stricken passed many dangers some cast away but returning to our matter and folowing y e course aforesaid whē you are as far as the mouth of the entrie of the straight then you shall passe right throgh the middle of the way somwhat towards the North side because of the sands aforesaid that lie within y e straights alwaies with your Lead in your hand looking rounde about you for y t at the shalowest place in the middle of the chanel it is 4. fadom and ½ also because it is so narrow y t you can hardly cast out your Lead me thinketh it is your surest way vpon each Sand to set a Scute or other mark that may serue you for Beakens so to auoide them and going a little further by the Creeke which hath the opening that commeth out of y e other side of the Sea wher the Cliffe lieth two fadome vnder the water then kéepe presently towards the houel on y e right hand that maketh the point of the Creeke aforesaid wher also runing along by your Cōpasse as before by the land on the left hand somwhat neerer to it thē on the other side til you be out of y e straight alwaies taking héede of the land and creeke lying on the North side right against this Houel for it is ful of stones and Cliffs as I said before likewise you must shun the east side right against the issuing of the straight for that the shot of a great peece from thence it is altogether cliffes as aforesaid whē you are out of the straight desire to Anker then make towards the South side along by the land that you may get out of the streame you must Anker at 6. fadome for if you stay in the streame of the straight you may chance to lose an anker by the drawing and shaking of y e ship or that you shuld driue and runne vpon the sand at this road you are right ouer against a strand where you finde fresh water whē néed requireth being out of the straight in manner as aforesaid you shal take your course along by the land vpon the right hand alwaies casting out the lead and not putting lower thē scarce 4 fadom neither to the land nor towards the sea and whē you are past half way to the strand comming out of the straight you shal haue no more but ful 4. fadom déep and being past this first strand with a houell and cliffes that stand at the end thereof and a sandie bay lying against the houel being half way frō the other houel which standeth on the end of the aforesaid sandy bay behind the which that opening which is in y e straight commeth out again then hold your course eastward at 4. fadome not turning to the one nor the other side for you should presentlie find both drougthes sands the channel is muddy ground and you must still haue the Leade in your hand vntill you finde other depth which wil not continue long and for more securitie it is best to run before with a scute to try the channel for it will shew you both the channels whē you are at 12. or 15. fadome thē beware of the south side vntil you be aboue a mile beyond the straight for from 15. you shal come to 10. fadome frō thence to dry lād for it is al riffes sand this straight hath 6. Ilands lying at the end of the land of Iantana which is the North syde and you run along east west it is in distance about 8 miles but you must not passe betwéen it the land the sea by it about halfe a myle Southward is al faire good ground at 15. fadom sandy groūd in the middle of this way from the straight to the Ilands or litle more or lesse lieth the riuer of Iantana which hath a great mouth the entry thereof being along the land on the east side where great shippes haue many times entred on the West side where there standeth a houell of red earth it hath a Banke of hard sand ouer the mouth of the riuer reaching about half a mile into the sea vpon the which many ships haue fallen wherfore take héed of it from the point of the Iland abouesaid lying at the end of the land of Iantana there rūneth a riffe eastnortheast into the sea well 2. great miles and whē it is calme wether you cannot sée the water break vpon it only that it hath a certain white skin ouer it which is presently séen and discerned and when it is rough wether then the water breaketh all ouer betwéene this riffe and the Iland runneth a great Channell all stonie groūd and the shallowest place that I found therein was 5. fadome ½ and then to 7. fadome 1 ◠and then againe I found 6. or 8. fadome ½ and is in breadth about the shot of a great péece right ouer if you will passe this Channell you must runne half a myle of from the Iland come no néerer to it for if you should you would run on ground it were good that great ships shuld not passe through it vnlesse they were compelled thereunto as it happened to Francisco Dagmar that there ranne on ground and was in danger to haue cast away his shippe because he ranne to néer the Riffes and that the wind scanted two myles from these Ilandes Southsoutheast lyeth Pedra Branca that is White stone which is an Iland of white stone rockes and cliffes and hard by it there are other rockes and cliffes on the South side thereof on the which side likewise lyeth the Iland of Binton which is verie long in the middle whereof there is a high houel wherevpon there is déepe ground but not good to anker for such as come from China round about Pedra Branca and close by it there are 6. fadome déepe good ground but you must take heed of the cliffes and riffes lying by it I haue alreadie told you that in passing through the straight when you are ouer the sandes at 15 fadome in manner as aforesaid you must sayle Eastward towardes the Ilandes which you shall presentlie see as soone as you are past the Riuer of Iantana
not runne betwéen them for that without them and close by you finde good ground I haue layne there at anker with a calme about a mile from the Iland which lieth néerest the land there the streames run strong with the tyde Northeast and Southwest From this Iland Pulo CoÌ„dor to y e IlaÌ„d Pulo Secir the course is Northeast and Southwest northeast and by east and Southwest by West 45 miles This Iland is low and long land reaching North and south and on the North poynt it hath a stonie Iland lying halfe a myle from the land you may passe betwéene it and the Iland on the East syde it hath a Sandie Baye where once a Iunco that is to say an Indian or Chinish great ship was laid on the shore to bee new dressed belonging to a Rouer of Patane a countrey lying vpon the coast on the East side of Malacca towardes the kingdome of Syon I haue passed within halfe a mile to seaward by this sandie bay it is all good ground this Iland is distant from the coast of Camboia or Champa nine miles if you put to seaward from Pulo Condor without seeing it vnder 8. degrees you shall find 25. and 26. fadom deep with black muddy ground much of the skin or Sasbeene driuing vpon the water and being 12. miles past it at the height of eight degrées and ½ then you shall see certaine sea Snakes swimming in the water at 28. and thirtie fadome déepe and ten miles further much of the Herbe called Sargosso vnder the water at the same depth which depth you shall find to be 9. degrées â— to this place you shall holde your course Northeast for wee could run no higher because the West wind bloweth very stiffe but from thence runne southeast towardes Pulo Cain thinking to get the coast of Champa when you come within two miles of the Ilandes lying nine miles Southward from Pulo Secir you shal find muddie thick water comming by this Iland you shall find no grounde those two Ilandes aforesaid were by the Chinars called Tomsitom three miles distant from each other you runne along East Southeast and West Northwest the East Ilande is high and round on the sea side being calme in the vpper part therof it hath the fashioÌ„ of a Cap such as y e Mandorijus which are the Lords of China doe weare halfe a mile from it lyeth a Cliffe like an Ilande and hath on the West side reddish cliffes and on the north side an other Iland round about all these Ilandes and cliffes there is no grounde I set this down for that I haue sailed all this countrie and noted the way as also all whatsoeuer I haue declared in this discourse we took this course aforesaid for want of mastes for wee durst not beare our seales because of the stiffe West windes and if any man chaunce to fall in the like neede and troubles let him not hope to finde the coast on the borde side from those Ilands you shall holde your course northerly to discouer Pulo Secir and from thence to the coast of Champa for you must know that the streames from Pulo Condor and from the coast of Champa to Pulo Secir and those Ilandes runne Eastward by which meanes you runne presently to the coast as hereafter I will shew and as you passe by these Ilandes of Pulo Secir Northwestwarde thâ—n the streame runneth to the coast of Champa which wil driue you ouerthwart from the aforesaid Ilandes of Pulo Secir there are no sands nor shallows as many men suppose the worst you find is that there is no ground these Ilands lye 18 miles distant from the coast from Pulo Condor you shall presently run to the coast of Champa and if you passe by it on the south side then hold your course halfe a strike North northeast till you be in sight of the coast and halfe way in this course you shall find eight and twentie fadome deepe and if you passe by it on the North side you must runne Northeast and Northeast and by North and not higher to loofewarde to shun the drougthes whereon Mathias de Brito was cast away and if in the night time you passe by any land then cast out your lead and finding fifteene fadome water then put no neerer to the land but presently runne East Northeast as the coast lyeth for the sands in those countries lieth at 13. fadome along the coast 4. mile from it The coast of Champa along the sea side is low land and great sandy strandes you run along by them East north east and West Southwest to a point lying vnder 10. degrees and â— and before you come within two or three miles thereof the sandie strand and high way endeth for this point is a verie high land reaching Southwarde in so that it maketh a Cape from thence forward it is altogether verie high land to Varella with great hils within this point towards the West Southwest lyeth a creeke and two miles on this side before you come at it There lyeth close by the land a smal long and low Iland all of harde stony cliffes and rockes which a farre off shew like a towne from this Iland to Pulo Secir there runneth a banke of 10. and 12. fadome deepe vpon the aforesaid coast of sandie strands 15. miles before you come to the point aforesaid there is a riuer called Sidraon where you may enter with shippes of 6â—â— Barhes on this riuer lyeth the fairest and best towne in all the kingdome of Champa it hath for a marke a long houell w t 2. tops I haue passed within the shotte of a great peece neere to the stony Iland aforesaid and found 8. fadome deep altogether euen stonie ground with much of the hearbe Sargaslo whereby I could hardly make the lead to sinke downe and along by the aforesaid high point or hooke there is 20. fadome déepe When you are by the coast of Champa then you shal runne East Northeast within two or thrée miles at the furthest it is altogether faire and good anker ground to the point or hooke aforesaid you shal leaue the Island of stones on the land side not passing betweene it and the land from this point to another point are 12. miles you runne Northeast and from this second point yet 12 miles further there is another point this course is runne halfe a strike to the North Northeast betweene this second and thirde point there lyeth two creekes the first wherof is the hauen where you lade blacke woode which is called Deâ—raon from this thirde point to the Varella the coast runneth North and seuen miles before you come to y e Varella there is a creeke where there lyeth a town and two miles further there is an Iland of stonie cliffes close to the land which a farre off sheweth like a man that fisheth or angleth whereby the Portingalles call it Opescador or the fisher and if you desire to runne to
the Varella being past the Iland you shall presently be neere the land where you haue a great strande with faire grounde This Varella is a high hill reaching into the sea and aboue on the toppe it hath a verie high stonie rock like a tower or piller which may be seen far off therfore it is by the Portingalles called Varella that is a Cape Backe or marke at the foote of this hill on the South side it hath a verie great creeke reaching northward in all of muddy ground 15. fadome deepe you cannot sée it far off because the one lande runneth through the other but as you passe by the strand aforesaid and beginne to come neere the Varella then the creeke beginneth to open which hath a verie faire entrie and within hath two running streames of verie good fresh water hee that commeth thither with a ship by my aduise shall not put in there because hee shall haue much labour and trouble to bring the ship out again for there the wind is scant you may wel anker without at y e entry or mouth thereof as I haue done or you may seeke for the other places where fresh water is to bee had that stand on the other side of the hill towards the North at the foote thereof where the high lande that reacheth into the sea endeth where you begin to find a verie great strand to get this water you must goe verie neare to the point of this hill and as you run along towardes it when you compasse it about you shall see a small sandie bay with the aforesaid great strand and place of watering where you may anker when you will for it hath good anker grounde but it hath a great inconuenience and mischiefe which is that you lie compassed about by the country people that are great enemies to the Portingalles and sea Rouers therefore you must keep good watch with great care when you fetch fresh water as well within as without because the country people vse to ouer runne and spoile men on the sodaine this Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées this land of Varella is a hooke and from thence to Pulo Cutuo the course is North and north and by West for the space of 48. miles from thence the land beginneth to be a great deale lower then that you haue past hauing in many places sandie strandes where men may anker ten miles from Varella forward a mile from the land there lyeth a long flat Iland called Pulo Cambir and betweene this Iland and the land are 12. fadome deepe sandie ground in the middle of the Iland on the lande side there is a smal sandie bay that hath fresh water where if need be you may anker for it is good ground and in the middle of the channel betweene the Iland and the land it is altogether faire being a small mile in length from this Island about twelue miles Northward the land maketh a point and from thence to the Island there is a great creeke and inward to the Northwest where the high land endeth which from this point inwarde runneth to the West it is an open or broken low lande where you find a riuer of thrée fadome deepe within the hauen hauing sandie ground with a great mouth or entrie and within it hath a Wel of 13. fadome deepe this riuer runneth further into the land 4. or 5. miles inward from the entrie or mouth there lyeth a great village where you may haue great store of victualles and other necessaries in the mouth of this riuer on the east side there standeth a high houell and on the West side a low sandie strande you must enter right forth in the middle and although it is verie wide yet being within you must make your self sure w c ankers cables specially from the west side for y t if it were earlie in the yeare you shall there finde stiffe West winds which woulde driue you on the other side of the Riuer in this Riuer is much fish also in the land there is much wild flesh with Swine Tigers Rhinoceros and such like beastes the countrey people were of good nature but we haue giuen them cause of suspition by our bad dealing with them fiue miles further forward from this Riuer along the coast there are two Ilands with certaine cliffes about halfe a mile from the land and you may passe betweene them and the lande twelue miles from these Ilandes there lyeth other Ilandes by the lande where there are some places of rounde sande with a sandie strande and there is a small Riuer where you haue much Catte that is Ryce vnstamped in the huskes as it growgroweth and is twelue miles from Pulo Caton wherewith many haue deceiued thēselues that runne crosse ouer when they saw it and tanne on ground Pulo Caton is a long Island with two high hilles at the ende thereof and in the middle low so that farre of it séemeth to be two Islandes it hath a flatte and euen ground of bushes stretching northwest and southeast on the southeast side it hath a Riffe where the water breaketh forth running the shot of a great péece further into the Sea on the land side it hath fresh water and lieth distant from the coast 2. miles and ◠2 the channell betwéene both hath thirtie and thirtie fiue fadome déepe with good ground right ouer against this Island lieth a riuer with a great mouth or entrey being within the Hauen 5. or 6. fadome déepe it is verie well inhabited and built with houses in this Hauen Gomes Barretto entered with his ship this Island lieth vnder 15. degrées and ⅔ and North Northwest a mile and a halfe from it there lieth another small low Island and you may passe betwéene them both North Northwest 14. miles along the coast lieth the Iland of Champello full vnder 16. degrées and ⅔ this Iland Champello is great and high hauing vpon it certaine toppes or heades sticking out it lieth north northwest and south southeast it hath two high hilles with a valley in the middle that in the southeast being much higher then the other it hath likewise many trées on the Northwest side it hath a very high Island with two small Ilandes lying close at the foot thereof on the West side it hath much and verie good fresh water and is distant from the Coast about two miles it is a very low land along the sea strand and West Northwest from thence is the Riuer of Coaynon lying two fadome déepe in the Hauen it is sandie ground where much traffique is vsed but the people are not much to bee trusted from this Iland of Champello Northwest for two or three miles it is full of trées two miles further the Coast maketh a great thicke point full of trees and thrée miles beyond this point lieth a great créeke which in the entrey hath an Iland for a defence or closure and is all cleare ground where you haue much victuals
and Marchandises that come out of the countrie by the Riuer of Sinoha this créeke was called the Enseada or créeke of Saint Don Iorgie it hath much wood verie good to make ships of fiue miles from it along the Ceast lieth the riuer of Sinoha which hath in the Hauen 14. spanne of water all sandie ground in this Hauen is the whole handling and traffique of the goods that come from Cauchinchina and thether and to Champello you runne Northwest This Iland of Champello hath a good road and safe harbour but onely when it bloweth out of the west and southwest and although the wind commeth from the land notwithstanding it troubleth you much by reason of the lownes of the land you must vnderstand that ten miles before you come to Varrella 13. miles within the sea there beginneth certaine Sandes that are verie dangerous which reach as the land doth till you bee vnder 17. degrees and run nearer to the northeast at the end whereof in the way to China there lieth 8. Islandes three great fiue small all full of trées and sandie strandes but without fresh water betwéene them round about it is altogether flat and foule way so that as soone as you let fall the anker the cable is presently fretted in péeces betwéene these Islands there is 4. fadome deepe This information was giuen me by certaine people of Sian that lost their Iunco or shippe in that place by reason of a calme because they ankered and all their cables brake from the ground they saued themselues in the boate run through all those Islandes to find fresh water and could sée none you run from the hooke or point of those sandes to Pulo Caton Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by east and southwest and by west for they lie like a bow therefore trust not the old description of this Nauigation that saith they haue channels from thence to Pulo Caton running ouerthwart it is thirtie miles but returning againe to the course from Varella to Pulo Caton when you are as farre as where the coast stretcheth Northward then your course shall be two miles off from the land till you come to Pulo Caton for that if you come thether early in the yeare you haue the west windes so strong that if you should be far from the coast they would carrie you by force vpon the sands without any remedie as it happened to the ship called the Santa Crus you shall not passe aboue two or thrée miles at the furthest to seaward from Pulo Caton and if you chance to be on the side of the land you may likewise passe through by the Channell that runneth betwéene the Firme land and the Iland which is two mile and a halfe broad all faire and good ground as I said before Pulo Caton lieth with the south point of the Iland Aynon North and South and North by east and South and by West somewhat more then 50. mile This south point of Aynon lieth scarse vnder 18. degrées and ½ reacheth from the point aforesaid southwestward 12. or 13. miles and from the East side lyeth the way from China which you run Northeast and north east and by north to 19. degrees and ½ and on the side of the Firme land the Island compasseth about to the point or end of 19. degrees and ½ from the Northeast side in such manner that the Iland is in forme foure square the channell betwéene it and the Firme land is in the narrowest part 6. miles where there lieth a hauen called Anchio hauing certaine sandes betwéene thē yet with a channell wherein great ships may passe seuen miles eastward From Anchion lieth a créeke with good harbour and a mile further about thrée miles distant from the land there lieth a great Riffe and sandes but returning againe to the aforesaid South point of the Island which is right before a very high land that surpasseth all the rest of the land in the said Iland at the foote thereof on the north side there is a good Hauen called Taalhio at the mouth whereof lyeth a small round Iland and from this high land aforesaid it runneth 12. miles northwestward and from thence it is altogether low land on the sea side and inward hilles and houels from the end of the land Aynon on the north side vnder 19. degrées and ⅓ to the Iland Pulo Gom in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north are 8. miles and lieth 5. mile from the Firme land it is a high land in forme like a Bell and on the side of the land it hath a road with a good harbour wherein the ship Santa Crus lay from thence you goe to the seauen Ilandes called Pulo Tio in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north being fiue miles Pulo Tio are 7. Ilands great and small seperated one from the other without any Trees from thence the Coast reacheth Northeast and Northeast and by North to the Enseada dos Ladroins that is the Creeke of Rouers from Pulo Tio seauen miles lieth a Riffe which reacheth 5. or 6. miles from the land into the sea and vpon the east side therof about halfe a mile from it there is foure fadome water flat sandie ground and a mile further from thence there lieth a great riuer whether many ships doe saile and put in a little further from this Iland lieth another Riuer wherein I haue béene which hath a good harbour against the monsons of China and with a southwest winde is discouered and threre also runneth strong streames the entrie thereof is close on the east side along by a point of land it is faire and good ground and being about this point of land you shall run till you come to a sand bay where you shall anker for within it is shallow and sandie on the coast betwéene these 2. riuers lieth 2. or 3. Ilands close by the land and from these 2. riuers 6 miles forward lieth the Enseada dos Ladroins which is very great it hath on the west southwest side of the mouth certaine stonie cliffes from the which there stretcheth a Riffe towards the sea wherupon one of the Portingall ships did fall from the aforesaide second riuer to this créeke about halfe a mile from the coast there is 7. or 8. fadome déepe faire ground The land of this creeke on the north northeast side hath a verie high hooke or point of land passing about this hooke for the space of halfe a mile it is shallow but muddie ground you goe to the Hauen of Comhay whereupon the coast is called the coast of Comhay thether the ships of Sion or Sian vsed to come it is like a créeke that is very great hauing another point or end of high land which reacheth North and South and right ouer against this hauen on y e south side lieth the Iland of Sauchoin about 5 or 6 miles from it and is distant from the aforesaid point
the other which you passe along by so that they ly right ouer against you and when you come to the mouth or entry of Macau and begin to put into it it is altogether opeÌ„ without any Ilande to bee sayled or compassed about sayling right towards the firme lande which is 8. miles Northwarde from thence where the mouth or entry is whereby you goe to Caton by the Portingalles called Aâ— Orelhas de Lebre that is the hares eares In this entery it is 8.9 and 10. fadome déepe and if you come thether at the ebbe of a spring tide the streame runneth so strong stiffe that no wind will serue to get vp therfore it is best to anker there with all your sayles vp vntill you sée it flow running along by the row of Ilands that lie on the east side so inward shunning a rocke lying close by those Ilands aboue the water putting to seaward for that you cannot passe betweene it and the Ilands with any ship also you shall finde anoâ—â—er Cliffe vpon the west side being in the middle way séeing right before you a small and low Iland lying in the same rowe of Ilandes in the East as you goe then you are by the mouth or entrey of the second chaÌ„nell that runneth to Macau This entery reacheth East and West and may be about a mile broad you must make to that smal Iland and leauing it vpon the North side you must hold your course betwéene it and the other Ilands and so put in alwaies kéeping nearest to the small Iland where the depth will begin to lessen and much more wheÌ„ you are past it for there you haue a banke of 28 spannes of water of soft muddie ground the land lying vpon the south side of the channell is foure or fiue Ilands close one by the other which reach east and west and they haue on the north side a great and high Iland which runneth to the hauen where the Portingales inhabite and hath a créeke or bay that strecheth Northward at the mouth of this Hauen lieth a great and high Iland close by the land on the north side betwéene which and the Iland it is drie and shallow ground and before you come to this Iland there lyeth vppon the side of the north Iland a Cliffe vnder the water to seaward towards the middle of the chaÌ„nell therefore you shall hold off from this north land and put nearer to the south and when you being to discouer the Portingales towne with the Hauen where the shippes lie at anker theÌ„ you shal put to the east hooke of the entrey of this Hauen kéeping close to it till you be in where you shall find foure fadome and ½ or 5. fadome déepe shunning the west side for there it is all ouer bankes and sands and along by the point you finde muddy ground this point or hooke is a high land and from thence inward about the shot of a great peece further lieth another point of saÌ„d and from the low land runneth a banke of 18 spannes of water reaching crosse ouer to the other side as far as the first houses and before you come to it in the middle of the Riuer there lieth a Riffe therefore you must hold vpon the east side and runne along by it till you anker it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and ½ deepe The 21. Chapter The course from the Kingdome of Sion to China with the situation of the places DEparting out of the hauen or riuer of the towne of Sion or Sian you shall holde your course Westward and comming to it you shall finde a Riffe lying on the north side of the coast Hauen called Bancolea two miles from the land and betwéene it and the land there is a channell of foure fadome déepe notwithstanding you must passe without it as farre aboue it as you can this hauen of Bancosea lieth with the Hauen of Sion northeast and southwest and somewhat northeast and by east and southwest and by west and being against the coast you shall kéepe along by it for it is all good ground and when you haue past the Riffe aforesaid The Coast vpon the shore is low land hauing inward a small houell stretching North and south 4. miles from Bancosea Southward This low land maketh a point reaching outward lying vnder 14. degrées and ½ from thence forward you shall sée a great thicke land which séemeth to runne inward to the sea but before you come at it there is a riuer called Chaon at the mouth whereof stand certaine trées like palme trees and comming to the aforesaid land you shall see another great thicke land which sheweth to lie east and west inwards to the land hauing manie sharpe rockes there the land maketh a point or end which is commonly called the point of Cuy thetherto the lande reacheth Southeast this point of Cuy lieth vnder 12. degrees and â…” and betweene it and the aforesaid thicke land that lieth behind you you shall finde 11. and 12. fadome deepe with good ground when you are past or about this point of Cuy then you shall hold your course south southeast for the space of 25. miles and then you must sayle south east and southeast and by south whereby you shall see an Iland which a far off showeth like 3. Ilands being long flat ful of trees lieth ful vnder 10. degrees which will be on the east side all this way you must take care not to fall to leeward and being by this Iland aforesaid you shall run southeast and rather hold aloofe to the south then to fall to the west because of the sharpe winde which you commonly finde in that part and in this course you shall see another Iland greater then the first and reacheth East and West beeing on the toppe thicke and flatte land The West pointe a great thicke hooke pointed towards the sea side Eastwarde it descendeth towardes a black lande which séemeth to be a close and thick bushie place lying full vnder 9. degrees ½ This Iland lyeth with the Iland of Pulo Wy southeast northwest and so you must runne 25. miles Pulo Wy are two Ilandes whereof the greatest reacheth North and South hauing a high houell on the South side and on the North side two low houels with a valley in the middle thus the West side sheweth but on the south side it séemeth altogether high and rounde with a small valley in the middle making 2. rocks shewing like two men the other and the smaller Iland lyeth on the southeast side somewhat distant from the other making a channell betwéene both where you may passe through for it is fayre grounde this smal Iland on the Southeast side hath a smal Iland of stonie cliffes from the which there runneth a stonie Riffe which you must auoide for all the other places are good and faire being twelue fadome déep close by the Iland and in the greatest Iland on the south West side
there is fresh water with a sandie bay and when you make towardes this Iland comming to it you shall finde thereaboutes 14. fadome deepe with hard ground and if you find muddie grounde then you are hard by the land from Pulo Wy to the firme lande of Camboia are 7. miles this coast of Camboia is low land full of trées and along by it it is banky and muddy grounde it lyeth Northwest and southeast to a point which lyeth with Pulo Wy East Northeast and West Southwest stretching likewise the same course of the aforesaide point to the hauen of Camboia which is twelue miles distant this hauen is called Dos Malyos that is of the Malaquiters or those of Malacca lying right ouer against Pulo Condor which lyeth with this hauen or Riuer Northwest and Southeast and northwest by North and southeast and by South from Pulo Wy Northwestwarde there lyeth a great Riuer being thrée fadome déepe within the hauen on the side sandie grounde and in the middle muddie ground the Chinars that saile froÌ„ Sion to China passe by y e north side of Pulo Wy and when they are right ouer against it then they run Eastward to knowe the hooke aforesaid running the same course to Pulo Condor which they see vppon the North side when you are right against this point or hooke then you shall find ten fadome deepe muddie grounde and somewhat further 13. fadome sandie ground but you must not run nearer then this 13. fadom towards the land but rather kéep at 14. fadome for it is surer take heed of 2. Ilands that lie 6. miles from Pulo Condor which will bee on the South side and right before you you shal haue the North point of the Ilande Pulo Condor lying vnder 8. degrées and â…” and you runne with Pulo Wy East West and somewhat east and by south and west and by North and if you sée Pulo Wy on the south side and so it should be on your North side then you shall runne within a mile or halfe a mile thereof alwaies taking héede of the aforesaid Riffe of the Ilandes â—â—king your course Eastwarde to Pulo Condor with good regard of the Ilandes the Ilande to the which you shall come on the south point passing by the South side of Pulo Wy within 3. miles thereof you shall finde 16. fadome deep and keeping your course to Pulo Condor at the depth aforesaide you shall passe within halfe a mile to the south side of the Ilandes being 6. miles from Pulo Condor but rather take the depth for more securitie of scarce seuentéen fadome whereby you shal come on the South side of Pulo Condor within 3. or 4. miles thereof at the furthest and when you are in sight of the Ilands then you must put to Pulo Condor as you will leauing the Ilands on the North side if you passe on the south side of Pulo Condor to go to the firme land to the cost of Champa theÌ„ runne North Northeast and Northeast and by north which will bring you to the sea coast and to shunne the sands whereon Mathias de Brito fell which lie 4. miles from the land if you runne along the shore at 13 fadome then you come vppon those sandes but when you are past them all the rest of the course from Champa forwardes is farye and good ground and being in this Countrey you shall take your course as I haue shewed you in the description and nauigation from Malacca to China the sands aforesaid lie vpon the coast of Champa runne with Pulo Condor North and South and North and by East and south and by West and almost halfe a strike more The 22. Chapter Of the course from the Island Pulo Condor to the hauen of Sian FRom Pulo Condor to Pulo Wy there are about full 20. miles lying from each other East and West and somewhat East and by North and West and by south and to go to Pulo Wy hold your course right west not reckening any abatement for the yéelding of the Compasse and being founde what more theÌ„ halfe way you shal finde a banke of muddie ground of 8. or 9. fadome deepe and being northward in the sterne of the shippe you shal see the trees vpon the coast of Camboia which is a verie low lande this banke aforesaid being past it will not bee long before you shall see Pulo Wy right ouer against you and as soone as you sée it you shal make towards it on the north side you must vnderstand y t this land of Camboia maketh a point froÌ„ whence the banke aforesaid runneth of from this point to y e hauen of Sian you run along the coast north northwest by y t which lyeth many Ilands stretching along by it till you bee vnder 12 and 12. degrees and ½ In this countrie ly the most and greatest Ilandes one by the other and there make a hooke for the land hath a créeke called A Ensâ—â—da de Lian which runneth a good way inwardes and lyeth vnder 12 degrees and ½ the north point of the land of the mouth of this creeke lyeth vnder 12 degrees ¾ and the land of this point aforesaide which lyeth inwardes reacheth east northeast and hath many trees w t a sandy strand froÌ„ this point to sea ward there lyeth 2. high round Ilands without any trees you cannot passe beetweene the first Iland and the land for the channell or passage lyeth betweene the first and the second or the better to bee vnderstood betweene them both there is a small channell but very deep of 60. fadom water and there runneth a strong streame vnder the hight of the point aforesaid of this creeke little more or lesse about half a mile from the land on the inner side there lyeth a very long cliffe stretching as the land doth which at low water may bee seene you run from this point to the hauen of Sian along by the land north and south the Islandes aforesaide are within 10. miles of the hauen as you passe along they are not ouer great neyther haue they any trees nor fresh water and all along you find good ground till you be within halfe a mile and nearer you shall not goe neither runne in betweene them and the land but let them lie on the east side comming to Pulo Wâ— vntill the tenth of February there you find much east wind whereby the west coast lyeth like an emptie wall therefore you shal keepe on the east side of the aforesaid Ilands that ly along by the coast being sure not to put in betweene them keeping this course north northwest along the shore as I saide before and comming to the furthest pointe of the said Iland which is full vnder 12. deg without seeing any more Ilandes then bee assured that you are within the creeke of Lyon and being there you shall presentlie set your course Northwest Northwest and by North to get out of the creeke least the streame should driue you
North South and somewhat North and by West South and by East this Iland Pulo Cambir is long and flat and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veines the bushes thereof being euen and alike right ouer against the points thereof Northward vppon the Firme land there lyeth a ryuer which is the ryuer of Pulo Cambir if you come thether in the Monson of South winds you may haue therein fresh water for it is verie good You shal likewise vnderstand that being eight miles to Seaward from the Iland Sanchoan you wil take your course from thence South Southwest and then you shall likewise sée the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto but it must bee w t a Compasse y t is fix I aduertise you once more that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir about thrée or foure miles from it there lyeth certaine Ilands and halfe a mile to Seaward from the South point there lyeth certaine stonie Cliffes aboue the water that show like Bucks hornes you may fréely passe betwéene all the Ilands and that Iland for it is faire and good ground From thence to the Varella you runne along the coast North and South somewhat North and by West and South and by East it is twelue miles distant this Varella is a verie high tower standing vppon a point of land that commeth out from the land and reacheth into the Sea by this Varella there is a Hauen which you cannot sée as you come outward towardes it because the one land runneth through the other also vppon this point sticking out on the south side there is a place of verie good fresh water in the sandie strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water vpon an other sandie Strand the land there hath some Cliffes and smal Ilands and when you come thether to fetch water it must be with a good tide for there you haue no Anker ground but verie close to the shore the best way is to put into the Bay for it is a good Hauen I haue béene in it and it hath good Harber for North and South winds with 14.15 and 16. fadome déepe sandie ground and if you desire to goe any néerer to the land you shall finde eight and seuen fadome déepe good ground this hauen of Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir there are some Ilands lying about 9. or 10. miles from Varella from the point of Varella to these Ilands the coast runneth North and south and from these Ilands to Pulo Sesir you begin to runne along by the land North Northeast and South Southwest this Iland Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land because it lyeth on the coast for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward is a stonie Iland without bushes hauing in the middle a pointed hill like a Varella it is a flat Iland of yellow colour like the Sea water to know Pulo Sesir being a mile or two from it vpon the Firme land you shall sée an opening this countrie is good to passe along by it for the space of two miles where you shal haue ground at seuen fadome great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Sesir for it is an euill way because you haue but 4 fadome déepe with stonie ground Pulo Sesir lieth from the land vnder 10. and 13 degrees and the course from Varella to Pulo Sesir is about 50 miles from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west and southwest by south at 18. and 20. fadome deepe whereby you shall see the Iland Pulo Condor but I aduise you when you come ouer this crosse way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor to holde your course from the sandy point Southsouthwest at 18. or 20. fadome deepe and when you find 15. fadome thē you are right by the coast of Cambaia and shall not sée Pulo Condor but on the land side but for your better way you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fadome and by this course you shall goe full vpon Pulo Condor which is a great Iland hauing many Ilands roūd about it and in euery place much anker ground there likewise you haue fresh water on the west side it lieth vnder 8 degrees ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor are 50. miles and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon you shal hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fadome muddy ground in this course and depth you shal sée an Iland being right ouer against the 7. points of the coast it sheweth like 3. hilles which stand in the space of two openings which are in the middle of the land and on the Northwest side it hath a cliffe Iland From thence to Pulo Tymon you shall take your course south and south by west at 28. and 30. fadome being from the one to the other 115. miles and you shall alwaies runne as I said before to the Iland of the 7. points called Pulo Tingaron southsouthwest because of the the streames that runne to the Iland of Bornon leaue not that course at any hand til you see it for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Tymon this is a good course and I aduertise you againe that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon in the middle betweene them both you shall find 25. fadome deepe in the middle way to Pulo Tymon you shall haue 35. fadome Pulo Tymon lieth vnder two degr and ½ on the North side it is a great Iland hauing other Ilands lying by it on the North syde it hath fresh water in a sandy strand where the ships that come from Sunda to goe for China take in water being in sight of Pulo Tymon you shall passe on the out side therof till you passe by the south poynt along through the channell that runneth betwéen this point and an other Iland which Iland shall bee to sea ward from you and as soone as you are in the channell on the southwest syde you shall see an other high Iland called Pulo Tinge to the which you shall goe within a mile and a half or two miles thereof and being there you shall take your course southward to Pedra Branca or the white Cliffe at 18. or 20. fadome deepe alwaies with the lead in hand if in this course you come to lesse groūd thē put to sea ward till you be at 18 fadome about 4 miles distant from the coast to auoyd the riffe that commeth from the point or hook of Iantana where the Ilands lie which you shal presently sée hauing good regard that you passe not by Pedra Branca but when you sée you shall make towardes it which you must keepe on the lee side for y t being with a flood the streames runne very strongly to the Iland of Binton wherby you shuld not passe by Pedra Branca for there I was forced to cast out 2. ankers and
the aforesaid cliffs of Batotinge being here the depthes will presently beginne to increase to seauen and eight fadome which depthes you shall holde vntill the Cliffes lie behinde you and from thence putting to sea towards the side of Samatra leauing Sabon side being carefull to kéepe from it for you haue nothing els in that place that can hurt you but onely the cliffes which the streames runne vnto you shall likewise take heed on both sides as wel of Sabon as Sumatra for they are all ouer from thence along the coast full of bankes and shallowes These two Cliffes aforesaid being past which you shall almost leaue behinde you you shall presently runne to the land of Sumatra with the lead in your hand not passing lesse then fiue fadome nere vnto the land nor aboue seauen fadome to seaward with your lead neuer out of hand for in this countrie you must rule your selfe more by the lead and depthes then by the compasse When you are at the end of this Iland of Sabon then you haue another Island called Pulo Dure which reacheth to another Island called Pulo Boyon then another Iland called Pulo Buron which lie so close to Sumatra that they séeme to be all one land at the end of this Iland Dure lie 3. Ilands one great and two small This Iland Dure lieth with the point of Sabon where the two small Cliffes lie north northwest and south southeast they are in distance about sixe or seuen miles with 6.7 and 8. fadome water muddie ground when you are right ouer against the Iland called Pulo Buron which lieth close to the coast of Sumatra then run southeast and southeast by south and following that course vntil you come to tenne fadome then runne Southeast vntill you come by a point of the land of Sumatra called Tanianbaro from this point to the Iland of Pulo Buron are three miles which is without the channell and when this point of Tanianbaro lieth westward frō you then run south and south and by east to the 3. Ilands called Calantigas whereof the first hath an Iland lying by it on the south side the middle Iland hath nothing at all and the third Iland that lieth most southward hath an Iland lying by it on the North side These Ilands as you passe by them shall lie eastward from you from this point Tanianbaro somewhat further lieth an other point called Tanianbaro which is very euen with the sea betwéene these 2. points lieth the Riuer of Andargyn and the aforesaid point of Tanianbaro lieth with the Ilands East and West betweene both the points are 9. miles When you sée this point then from thence forward you shall no more sée the land of Sumatra because there are many créekes from this point you make to the Ilands Calantigas Northwest and Southeast and is in length about seauen miles These Ilands lie vnder 1. degree vpon the south side of the Equinoctiall on the east side of these Ilands you haue many stonie cliffes both aboue vnder the water therefore you must put off from them to seaward for that betweene them the Iland of Linga it is very foule and dangerous if you will goe from the Islandes Calantigas to the Island Varella then hold your course Southeast and Southeast and by East whereby you shall come to it They are in distance 9. miles and in this way you shall finde seuen or eight fadome déepe and close by the land sixtéene and seuentéene fadome on the North side but on the South side it is lesse This Island hath fresh water it lieth right ouer against a point of the land of Samatra called Tanianbon from the which point to the Island are two miles and you runne North Northwest and South Southeast and you must passe betwéene this Island and the point leauing the Island to seaward On the backe bord side in the face of this point lieth thrée Islandes whereof the greatest is called Iambe but along by the land of Samatra you haue neyther Islandes nor Cliffes To runne from the Island Pulo Varella to the Straightes of Palimbon then run Southeast at seuen fadome muddy ground and with this course you shall sée the hill called Monte de Manopyn which standeth right in the face of the Island Banca When you sée this hill then you can hardlie sée the coast of Samatra because of the créekes and you shall kéepe the same course to the said hill runnning a mile and a halfe from it towards the coast of Samatra leauing the hill on the northeast side not comming any nearer to it for it hath a great Riffe lying a mile from it and when you are right against the hill Manopyn thē you are right against the mouths or créekes called as Vocas de Palimbon lying vppon the Coast of Samatra a mile from the aforesaid point of Palimbon forward there lieth a smal or thin point of land and on the south side of the same point there are many cliffes rockes about a mile into the sea al lying vnder the water which make the riffes aforesaid wherefore I aduise you to kéep at the least a mile and a halfe or two miles from it be not deceiued by the great depthes that are along by those riffes for that from many depthes you will at the last fall on ground as it happened to a ship which sailing on that side close to the Island Banca at fiftéene fadome strak with his ruther vpon the stones You must likewise bee carefull not to kéepe too neere the land called as Bocas de Palimbon or the mouthes of Palimbon for they are altogether shallowes and sandes let your Lead be still in hand and goe no nearer then fiue fadome and ½ to the land vntill you be past them nor aboue eight fadome to seaward and if you come to eight fadome then rather kéepe at lesse depth as I said before You runne from this hill Manopyn which standeth in the Iland Banca to the mouthes or creekes of Palimbon that lie on the other side of Samatra north northeast south southwest and is in course fiue miles From thence beginneth the straight called Palimbon which reacheth southeastward and sometimes eastward and in other places southward till you be past through it being past the hill of Manopyn about two miles beyond it you shall hold your course to the first mouth or creeke of Palimbon with the Lead in hand keeping a mile from it at 5. fadome and ½ and goe no nearer to it for they are altogether shallowes and sandes wherefore I counsell you not to goe nearer then 5. fadome and ½ and towards Banca not nearer then 8. fadome holding your course in this manner till you be about a mile beyond the last mouth of Palimbon being there you shall make with the land of Samatra till you be within halfe a mile thereof where th◠land about a long mile right out before you maketh a point and being
about 4. miles you shall hold your course to the Hauen along by the Iland that lieth on the coast keeping to seaward or halfe a mile from it for it is all faire and good ground at 6 and 7. fadome deepe and so you shall runne along to the end therof and being there about a mile southeastward you shall sée a small Iland full of trees which you shall leaue on the southeast side running inward from it right to a high pointed hill that standeth within the land and when you begin to come néere it then you shall see the houses of the towne which lieth along by the strand and there you may anker at 4. and 3. fadome as you thinke good for it is all muddie ground and if you desire to runne into the Hauen through a Channell which passeth betweene the great Iland and the high land of Sunda you may well doe it alwaies running along by the land vntill you be by the Hauen for you shall leaue the Iland aforesaid and six Ilands more that are somewhat further to seaward but you finde but two fadome and ½ stonie ground wherefore the way passing about is the best as I said before The 26. Chapter The course from the Hauen of Bantam to the Hauen Calapa called Sunda Calapa both lying on the north side of the Iland Iaua Maior SAyling from the Hauen of Bantam to Sunda Calapa you should holde your course betweene the little Iland and the Iland lying right ouer against the crooked point because the streames runne towardes the Channell or straights sayling about the shot of a great peece from all the Ilands or along by them for it is all good way at fiue and sixe fadome deepe muddie ground because that froÌ„ the hooke of the bow or crooked point there runneth a great banke or sand and being about this hooke you shall run 6. or 7. fadome deepe till you be a good mile from it for from this crooked point to another that lieth on the same land it is altogether bankie shallow sandie ground and to seaward from this point lyeth a long Iland called Pulo Tunda and three or foure miles Eastward from thence there lieth a whole row of Ilands both great and small which are al vnder the same course at the end of those Ilands which are foure one great and thrée smal they are ioyned together with Riffes and along by those Riffes you shall finde twentie foure twenty fiue fadome deepe and you shall leaue al those Ilandes standing on a row to seaward from you from the point aforesaid called the crooked hooke All the coast vnto Calapa runneth East and somewhat East and by south you runne along by it at 7. and 8. fadome for if you put further to seaward then the streames run too stiffe towards the straight or the channell that runneth outwardes betweene Iaua and Samatra which is against you and is of manie depthes â—oure miles froÌ„ the crooked hooke or point forward then the coast hath another point of land where right ouer against it about a mile to seaward from it there lieth a round Iland but you must not passe betweene it and the land for it is very shallow stonie ground only small fusts may passe through it but you shall runne about halfe a mile to seaward from it for it is all along nothing but stones a little mile beyond this Iland there is another Iland and then yet a little further close by there lyeth another little Iland from these two Ilandes a mile southeastward close by the land there lyeth two other Ilands betwéene the two first Ilands and these two Ilands there is a channell of 6. or 7. fadome deepe which passing through you shall runne nerest to the Ilands that lie most to seaward if you will not passe through then run about to seaward from them at 12.13 and 15. fadome déepe from this long Iland northward endeth the Ilands that lie to seaward hauing the Riffs as I said before and make a mouth or opening of a channel of a great mile long you shall here run nearest to the Ilandes that lye closest to the land for that running by to the Ilands that lie to seaward you shall presently sée the Riffes which with a low water are most part vncouered being past this long Iland the other that lieth the shot of a great péece from it as also the two that lie further forward the land of the coast that hath the point then somewhat beyond this point 4. other Ilands betwéene the which and the land you may by no meanes passe a small mile further eastward there lieth other 4. Ilands two and two together at the end whereof to seaward there is a white saÌ„d that alwaies lieth vncouered all these Islandes you shall leaue on your right hand on the land side and being on the south side somewhat past this white sand you shall sée two high hils within the land which lie east west one from the other at the foote of the east hill lieth the hauen of Calapa where you shall anker if you wil enter into the hauen being past the foresaid sands an Iland that lyeth from thence toward the land then there wil foure Ilandes lie southeastward from you which teach towards the land another close by he land then you shal take heed of a sand lying north east close by the hauen which you may alwaies see and when it is high water it is washed away by the flood you shal runne towardes these Islandes which lie to seaward from the hauen béeing day time to shunne the droughtes aforesaid The 27. Chapter The course from the Iland Pulo Timon to the Hauen of Sunda in the Iland of Iaua Maior FRom the Iland of Pulo Timon you run to the Iland of Binton to a point of land that from the same Iland runneth almost Eastward into the sea south Southeast and North Northwest and hard by this point lieth certaine Riffes of small rockes and cliffes and on the north side of this point it hath an opening or mouth wherein there lieth a great Iland with two hilles and a vallie in the middle and along by this point lesse then halfe a mile from the land there are eight fadome deepe of flatte and cleare sandy ground and hath no foulenes but the stone Cliffes Rockes that lie close by the land from this point aforesaid of the Iland of Binton to the Southeast point of the Iland Pulo Panion which hath an Iland lying to seaward from it you runne Southeast and Northwest Southeast and by east and Northwest and by West betweene this Iland Pulo Panion and the Iland of Binton lieth an opening which in the middle way hath two flat small Ilands full of trées and if you cannot passe Pulo Panion on the east side then you may passe inward betwéene it and the land it hath fiue and sixe fadome déepe good
you may well passe running along by the Iland for it is a faire and great Channel or if you will you may passe to seaward without the cliffes if you desire not to runne between them you shall holde the course as I heere set downe Thorough the Channell that is betweene these Ilandes called As Ilhas de Sanchoan or of Canton and fourteene miles North-northwestward from the Iland Sanchoan there lyeth a poynt of land which reacheth from thence to the hauen of Comaye also from thence the land runneth East for the space of fyue miles where it maketh an end reaching from thence foure myles inwarde towardes the North from whence againe it putteth outward to the East to Macau in this land that stretcheth North there is a small Creeke from whence you runne Eastward to Comaye it is much sayled by the Lanteas and Bancoins which are the barks and Lighters of China that carie the Marchandise and goods aborde the Iuncos or shippes that come thether from Sian to take in lading this land maketh an Iland called Taaquinton three miles beyond the aforesaid small Creeke lyeth one of the mouthes or entries of the Riuer of Canton which is called Camon it is a verie good entrie for that through it the great Bancoins or Chinish Lighters doe passe to the Towne of Canton Beyond this mouth or entrie of Camon lyeth the Hauen of Pinhal to the seaward and close by the entrie thereof lyeth a sand which you must shunne and 2. miles beyond this hauen of Pinhal there is the other mouth or entrie where you put into Canton with small Lanteas and Bancoins which by the Portingales is called As Orelhas de Lebre that is the Hares eares because that inward to the land it hath two high and sharpe pointes of land like a Hares eares a little within this entrie lyeth a riffe which may easily be seene from thence to the Hauen of Macau are about three myles you runne along by the land thorough a small shallow Channel which is but a fadome and a half deepe at high water the West poynt of Taaquinton aforesayd lyeth North and South with the middle of the Channel from the entrie of Sanchoan and the Iland of Vasco de Faria This Ilande of Vasco de Faria reacheth Eastward like Taaquinton and they lie north and South from each other This entrie or Channel which both these Ilandes make is faire and good muddie ground therein to anker and you anker close by the Iland of Faria in the midde way where it is good fresh water from the East point or hooke of this Ilande aforesayd to the poynt of Taaquinton there is a Banke of three fadome deepe muddie ground the deepest part thereof is by the Iland of Faria aforesaid and being past that you haue more depthes if you desire to sayle from the Iland of Sanchoan to Macau you haue two wayes whereof the safest is outward through the mouth or Channel betweene the Iland of Vasco de Faria running to seaward along by the Ilandes like those that come outward from the sea the other way is East through the Channell of Taaquinton and Vasco de Faria and béeing at the end thereof about foure miles Northeastward you shall see the hauen of Lampacon which is two great and high Ilandes with manie trees lying East and West The mouth or entrie of this hauen which is betweene the Ilandes aforesayd hath within foure or fyue fadome déepe of verie soft muddie ground therefore it is hard ankering there and besides there runneth a great streame at the entrie on the west side it hath a great Iland or stony cliffe right in the middle of the mouth such as desire to enter on the west syde of this Hauen must runne between this great Cliffe and 3. Ilands there you find a bank of 8. spannes of water muddy ground on the South part of these 2. Ilands there is an other great high Iland which reacheth northeast southwest betwéen this Iland and Lampacon you may passe through on the east side of the mouth or entry of the hauē of Lampacon lieth a great and high Iland reaching north and south the south point of this Iland lieth East and west with the East poynt of the North Iland of Lampacon and the chānell that runneth betwéene these 2. Ilands which reach Northward it is déepe and faire hauing about the length of the shot of a great péece in breadth right on the East point of the south Iland of Lampacon lieth a round stony cliffe and somewhat eastward lieth a great and high Iland reaching on the north side east and west and on the west side northwest southeast the channel which this stony cliffe maketh is faire and déepe from this stonie cliffe South-eastward ther is an issue or going forth reaching inward to sea al sandy ground with 3 fadome déepe through the which al the ships do passe that come from Lampacon and desire to be outward what way soeuer they go for on the west side it is shalow as I said before Frō Lampacon 7. miles eastward lieth Macau and there is a row of Ilands in the same course of Macau al these Ilandes ly on your south side and from thence to the firme land are 5. or 6. miles this gulf or space betwéene the Ilands the firm land as also from Lampacon to Macau is altogether an open sea hath no more but 2. or 3. Ilandes yet it is all ouer bankie ground for the déepest part therof is but 2. fadome which reacheth about a mile néere the firme land and the Channell which runneth from the sea to the mouth or entry of the riuer of Canton called the hares eares runneth along by the Ilands of the hauen of Macau but returning backe again to the Iland of Vasco de Faria comming right ouer against the end thereof there you haue an other high round Iland and betwéen these 2. Ilands you runne through to sea ward and beyond this Iland there is a row of other Ilands which reach to the mouth or Channel where you passe through when you come out of the sea to Macau and lie Eastnortheast all this Channell or passage that runneth betwéen them out of the sea is faire and good way and there is nothing to be feared but that you sée before your eyes you must run along by these Ilandes leauing them on the south side on the north side hauing the Ilands of Lampacon and when you are right against them northeastward you shall sée an Iland that hath a point of land of very white sand to the which point you shal goe for frō thence to the Iland of Lampacon there is a sandie banke the déepest part thereof being along by this point by the which you shal run along within the length of a shot of a great peece and when you are past this point run Northeast and then on the Northwest side there wil be a great high Iland which lyeth
east west with the south Iland of Lampacon and betwéen it Lampacon there is no other hinderance but onely the great stony cliffe aforesaid you shall run by the southeast point of this Iland leauing it on the Northwest side passing through the channell that runneth betwéene it and another Iland that lieth westward and being through it theÌ„ you are in the channel which comming from the sea runneth to the mouth or entrie called the Hares eares northward and from the channell westward lieth the way to Macau I set not down this course for that I haue shewed it in an other place in the Nauigation from Malacca to China if you passe betwéen these Ilands you must alwaies run with the lead in your hand to find the depthes From Macau â— miles northeastward lieth a very great and high Iland with a very high sharp point which lieth in the greatest mouth or entry of the riuer of CantoÌ„ through the which y e great Iuncoâ— that is the Spanish shippes for marchandise doe passe where our ships I meane the Portingals may likewise passe through and on the West point of this Iland halfe a mile southward lieth certaine stone Cliffes betwéen the which and the Iland it is al déep faire ground as also along by the Iland on the south side beyond these stony cliffes to seaward there lieth certaine smal Ilands and beyond these Ilands somewhat further to seaward there lieth other great Ilands but you must not passe betwéene the aforesaid stony cliffes and the small Ilands but betwéen the smal the great Ilands you may fréelie passe without feare From Macau 4. miles southeastward lieth a great and high Iland being deuided in â— parts by a small running water out of the sea a farre off sheweth like a ship hauing neither trees nor bushes and halfe a mile from thence towardes the land there is an other long Iland with trees in the middle of the channel between these 2. Ilands in the entrie thereof on the side of Macau lyeth a rock or cliffe which the water washeth ouer which you must shunne for all the rest is fair and good way From this great Iland that deuideth it self in 2. parts 6. miles Eastsouth east lyeth an other long high Iland with a very black shining wood of trees called ToÌ„quion and froÌ„ thence half a mile to seaward lieth a row of 10. or 12. Ilands or cliffes you must run betwéene them and the land where it is faire ground or if you will you may passe outward to sea from all the Ilands from this Ilande aforesaid to the land about a myle or thereabouts distant from it lyeth an other low long Iland with trees in the middle of the channell betwéene these 2. Ilands there lieth an Iland or cliffe and an other by the Iland that lieth by the land betwéen this cliffe in the middle of the channell the Iland that lieth to seaward it is déepe faire and on the Eastnortheast point of the Iland to seaward on the land side there is a small créeke or bay where there is a good harbar for the Monson of the south winds and there is likewise good fresh water rouÌ„d about this Iland Tonquion it is all faire ground but turning again to the great Iland with the sharpe pointed top lying in the mouth of the Riuer of Canton from the west point of the same Iland â— or 8 miles eastsoutheast lieth a great high long Iland which reacheth northwest Southeast is altogether without trées or bushes from the Southeast point of the same Iland half a mile to seaward lyeth an other round high Iland and the channel that runneth between them is faire and good on the northeast side of this great Iland from the middle thereof to the land there lieth 2. or 3. long cloueÌ„ Ilands or rockes close by of a reddish earth without any trees betwéene the Northwest end of the aforesaid Iland the land runneth a smal channel through the which the small Bancoins which are the Chinish barkes or lighters doe passe From Canton to the aforesaid Ilande the water maketh a gulfe or créeke through this Countrie you passe when you come from Iapon From this round Iland from the mouth that is betwéene both 7. myles Eastnortheast the land hath a point with a high and eueÌ„ land vpon it ful of black shinning bushes hauing on the Westsouthwest side a still stéepe land and on the Eastnortheast side it is all Valleyes From this land there runneth a poynt into the sea and right against this point about the length of a harquebuse shot there lyeth a great long Iland reaching as the coast doth The channell betwéene this point and the Iland aforesaid is scarse 3. fadome déep within the poynt towardes the land on the Westsouthwest syde there are many and good roads to anker for the Monson of China at 7. 8. fadome déepe muddie ground I haue layne there at anker comming from the Iland of Iapon came through the aforesaid smal channel here al the Ilands called As Ilhas de Canton or the Ilands of Canton do end this way from the 2. aforesaid Ilands to this poynt or hooke of land maketh a golfe by meanes of the great Creeke al this crosse way is faire and good and when it is any hard wether then there goeth a verie hollow water speciallie close by the Channel of the two Ilandes From this poynt of the land aforesaid and the poynt of the Iland 6. miles along by the coast lieth a creeke with certaine Ilands and cliffes in the mouth thereof on the eastnortheast side which are good defence against stormes foule wether there you haue victuails other necessaries and being â— miles to seaward there lieth a stony rocke or cliffe y t a farre off sheweth like a shippe vnder sayle lying vnder 22. degr ½ this coast along by the sea is sandie strand inward béeing a high land it reacheth eastnortheastward to a point of land lying fifteene myles from the poynt Lamon you may anker al ouer and is in distance to this point of land 18 miles you must vnderstand that from the countrie lying at the end of the Ilands of Canton to the Iland Lamon 18. miles to seawarde there lyeth certaine sandes and riffes of red saÌ„d which at low water are vncouered in the which place all the fishermen of that country do meete all the aforesaid sandes and riffes are close without any channell or passage from the aforesaid point of land lying fifteene miles from the Iland Lamon to the Enseada dos Camoriins that is the creeke of Garnaet by the Chinaes called Caiâ—to lying full vnder 25 degrees and ½ you run along the coast northeast and southwest and northeast and by north and southwest and by south without all the points and hookes it is in course 86. miles and turning againe to the point from thence to Lamon are 15. miles and 10 miles from the
well on the Northeast as on the Southwest side in this Island you haue fresh water These Islands are called Chiocon it is all ouer very faire cléere ground only one stonie Cliffe whereupon you sée the water breake lying a shot of a great péece Westward from the rowe From these Islands of Chiocon thrée miles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chinchon and two myles from the land lyeth two Ilandes of white stonie Cliffes betweene the which and the land as also outward to Seaward it is all faire ground from these Islandes two myles forward and halfe a mile from the land there lyeth a high round island from whence there runneth a risse about halfe a myle into the Sea whereon you sée the water breake which you must shun Betweene the land and this island it is altogither shallowes and betwéene this island and the hooke of the mouth of Chinchon lyeth a small Créeke where the shippes in the monson of China do anker All this coast from Chabaquon to Chinchon is high land with deepe and faire ground onely the aforesaid riffe of the island The Hauen of Chinchon on the Southwest side hath lying aboue it a very high land with a stonie rocke vpon it like a pillar as the Varella in the coast of Champa hath This high land or hill descendeth downewardes to a hooke or point of land and comming to the Northeast side from the sea it hath a great opening with certaine islands in the mouth thereof from the aforesaide point the lande reacheth North about a myle and a halfe and from thence it runneth West Northwest hauing an arme of the sea that runneth a great way inwarde to the lande in the same course on this land that reacheth from the point of the sea where the land lyeth West Northwest there is a long high island without trées or bushes stretching like the same land and is a small halfe mile distant from the land and on the land side it hath a good Sandie bay in the middle way from the same island the shot of a great péece Westward lyeth a hidden Cliffe or stonie place of eightéene spannes water going a little way all the rest is faire and good ground to anker in In this island is good fresh water herein Diego Pereira wintered with his shippe you runne not on the South side of this island but about by the East side comming into the Hauen on the North side From this island a quarter of a mile further on there lyeth thrée islands stretching East and West one with the other from thence to the West part of the land there is a channell of about halfe a mile broad faire and deepe you may likewise if you will easily passe betwéene the first and the other two Islands The Island that lyeth Eastward is the longest and greatest of all the thrée these Islands are distant from the Northland about a great mile which land is very high ground The shot of a great péece from the East Island Northward lyeth a great and high Island reaching North and South which on the West side hath a sandy bay and vnder this sandy Bay close by the land there is a good Road to anker in with very good ground where oftentimes the Portingales ships haue laine to lade their wares and marchandises such as are there to bée had The shot of a great péece from this créeke Southwestward and the like shot of a great péece from the aforesaid Islands lyeth a flat sand of twelue Spannes of Water all the rest is faire and good ground by the Road and along by the Islands there runneth a great streame the best place to anker and to lie safest is close by the South point to lye out of the streame you must not passe by the point of the strand by the Créeke that lyeth Northward for it is shallowe Those that come from Liampo and Iapon put into this Hauen by the channell that is betweene this Island and the thrée Islands which is faire at fiue or sixe fadome water which you likewise find along by the Islands as well on the land side as the Sea side onely at the sandy place aforesaid This Island by the Câ—mais is called Tantaa Two miles to seaward from this Island lyeth a small clouen Island called Tantheaa from the Island Tantaa to the Northland it is about a mile which is altogither shallowe ground so that you can by no meanes passe nor a great way from thence to Sea ward From this Island Tantaa a myle Westward lyeth the Mouths or entery of the arme of the Sea which may bée halfe a myle broad on the South part it hath a point of land against the which on the other land Northward lyeth a Créeke or Bay with a great harbour thereabouts the King of Chinaes Shippes doe lye and a myle from the aforesayd point of land inwards of the Riuer there lyeth an Island by the South side with certaine redde downes In the middle way from this Island on the South side of the land there reacheth a point and somewhat beyond this point Westward there lyeth a Bay in the same Island wherein the Shippes anker and there you lye out of all the streames vnder the defence of the aforesayed point of land It happeneth oftentimes that the Shippes by negligence lye drie because they runne close to the land yet it hurteth them not for it is soft muddy ground From this point aforesayd to the East point of the same Island there is a very good place to lay the Shippes on land to newe rigge them where the Portingales haue often dressed their Shippes Likewise there you haue great store of victuals and other prouisions and the ships that lye by the Island Tantaa doe not stay there if it bée foule weather but as soone as they perceiue any hard weather comming they presently hoise vp anker and come to anker by this Island in the mouth of the aforesaid small Bay close by the South land all this way is fayre This Hauen of Chinchon lyeth vnder foure and twenty degrées and ¼ from the Island Tantaa and the Island of this hauen of Chinchon fiue miles East Northeast lyeth a point of land in the which there is a good Créeke against foule weather and the Monson of China called Lialoo The Road of this Créeke is close by the aforesaid point of land for all the land from this Créeke to the Island Tantaa is altogether there along of a bankey and shallow ground and so continueth to the Island for that betwéene the said Island and the land it is altogether drie and shallow as aforesaid From this Créeke of Lialoo forward the land beginneth to bée lower without any high hils as the aforesaid land and hath but few bushes in many places none at all It is a very faire coast so that you néed feare nothing there but that you sée before your eies From Chinchon to the Hauen of Foquyen are forty myles and you runne
Northeast and Northeast and by East From the point of Lialoo two miles forward lyeth a flat Island about halfe a mile distant from the land and another halfe mile further forward lyeth two Islands by each other somewhat closer to the land and hard by them is a Riuer at the mouth thereof hauing a sandie strand with low land into this Riuer runneth the Somas or Chinish Shippes that goe to the Towne of Enon which lyeth within the same where you haue much Marchandises of China on the coast seuen or eight miles further There lyeth the point of Chencheu which is a high and bare land of white and reddish colour reaching somewhat inward to sea on the Northeast side it hath a small Bay and aboue it a verie high steepe land in this Créeke lyeth a great Island betwéene the which and the point of land you may put in from this Island a harquebush shot in length northeastward lyeth a stonie place of ground halfe a fadome déepe vnder the Water and Northwestward from the said Island betwéene it and the land lyeth another stone and on the land side by this Island you haue a good harber to anker in I haue laine in this Hauen somewhat neerer to the Island then to the land with two Iuncos which are great Chinish Shippes each of them being of fiue hundred or sixe hundred Bhares Indian waight which is aboue a hundred and eightie tunnes and ranne in along by the point Beyond this point of land at y e vpper part lyeth a great Towne and North Northeast from this Island there lyeth two long clouen Islands of redde colour but they haue no faire ground nor anie harber two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu inward to land towards Chencheu there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso or the faire hill this Hill lyeth distant from Chencheu thirtéene miles in this countrey sixe or seuen miles from the land you haue certaine boyes lying with coloured feathers and flagges which serue for the countrey fishermen where they cast their Nets and the Somâ—s of that Countrey which are the Chinish Caruels haue â—un ouer it with one saile onely without any other furniture From the point of Chencheu seuen miles further on the Southwest end of the Island by the Portingales called Ilha dos cauallos that is the Island of Horses and by the Chinares called Tachoo hauing the name of a great Towne so called not farre from thence about two miles along the riuer within the land this Island lieth in the coast coÌ„passed about with an arme of the Sea like the Island of Goa in India which arme of the Sea issueth out againe about fiue miles further in the same coast which issue or mouth is called Puysu The first mouth from the Southwest may be about halfe a mile broad and from the point of the Island inward about halfe a mile there is good anker ground against the windes of the Monson of China at ten and eleuen fadome faire ground you must shunne the Southwest land which is low and sandy strands and is all ouer blackish and shallow ground for I haue run inward round about this Island it hath many shallowes and there is a channell the déepest part whereof is but two fadome if you desire to put in there it were good to haue one of the Country-men for a Pilote I entered the mouth thereof from the Northeast which is the narrowest and shallowest place and hath a hidden stony cliffe lying vnder the water close by the side of the Island about the shot of a great peece inward towards the point From this stony cliffe to the point many Shippes may anker and both these Hauens are without droughts or shallowes and the coast betwéene them both from the one mouth vnto the other hath some redde downes and bare land but is all along faire ground A mile from this mouth Northeastward to Seaward lyeth a small Island and from the moneth of Aprill to September there are many beastes pastured in this Island as horses and such like wherevpon the Portingales called it the Island of Horses as aforesaid from the mouth of Puysu of the saied Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast there is a great thicke point of land with manie bushes vpon it Close by this point lyeth a great round Island whereof the chanell betwéene them is small yet very cleare where if néede bee you may passe through from the point aforesaied to the Southwest it is a high land with bushes and from thence to the Sea it hath a great gréene field or plaine and along by this gréene field it is very good ankering against the winds of the monson of China another ground vpon the aforesayed point of land there is a great Towne called Pinhay From this point of Pinhay fiue miles along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Foquyen which hath a great Rode and is all thicke land with bushes and inward on the Southwest part it hath a great round Island with blacke shining bushes and beyond this Iland inward lieth the mouth of the riuer on the which lieth a verie great towne compassed with mightie walles and towers and hath a Bridge running out from the land whereunto the shippes that stay there are commonly tyed the entrie is faire and cleare From this Hauen of Foqueyen fiue miles lyeth a Créeke by the Portingales called Enseada dos camoroyns that is the Créeke of Gannaet and by the Chinars called Cayto in this way lyeth certaine small and high Islandes without any trées or bushes about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea and betwéene it and them it is all ouer full of Riffes and stonie Cliffes and in some places it sémeth to haue Channels or throughfares for I went through it with a Pilot of the countrey you must shunne this Island and from the end of this Island two miles forward there is a point of great thicke land wholly without any bushes or trées and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lyeth two Islands and on the Southwest side of this point there is a good harbour for the windes of the monson of China hauing faire sandie ground but it hath the winde verie scant to runne about without the Ilandes for the which cause wée ranne betweene them but it is not good for our shippes On the other side Northeastward from this point aforesaid close by the lande lyeth a small high Island stretching Northwest and Southeast the Channell betweene this Island and the Firme land being the shot of a great péece in breadth at thrée fadome deepe most part stonie ground in such manner that as soone as you let fall anker the ropes and Cables are presently cut in péeces by the sharpe stones This channell can not bée séene farre off and this Island hath on the land side a small créeke or Bay and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did you shall put in there
close by the Island and so néere it that you shall touch the strand with the kéele of your shippe to anker in the depthes of the hard ground for if you anker in the Sea your Cables will presently be cut in péeces as mine were This point lyeth hidden vnder a point from thence Northeast and Northeast and by East the land hath another point lying about a mile and a halfe distant from the other aforesaide making betwéene them both a certaine Gitte From this Island and point about halfe a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe whereon you see the water breake reaching Northwest and Southeast and about halfe a myle long from this Riffe to the Northeast point of the aforesaid Créeke it is about a mile all the rest of the Créeke is faire and cléere This is the Créeke called Enseada dos Camarouis the Rode thereof is vnder the harbour of the Northeast point aforesaid for it is good for the time of the windes of the Monson of China for such shippes as come from Liampon Iapon to put in there you must goe néere the land before you come at the point and runne along by it till you haue gotten about the point and are ankered within it there it is verie good muddie ground by this Northeast point so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you therefore you shall put neare the point of the lande not to fall vpon the Riffe from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor lying vnder 28 degrées and ¼ you runne along the coast Northeast and Northeast and by North without the aforesaid Island and the point of the saide Créeke and from the créeke twelue and thirtéene miles the land hath a point and from thence it runneth inwards North Northwest and somewhat further Northeast and Northeast and by North out againe Two myles from thence lyeth thrée Ilands by each other two great and high and one small béeing all faire ground round about but wholly without any Rode or succour to defend the shippes in foule weather These Islands are called Canton Sion all this coast of Enseada dos camarouis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaide is altogither lowe land with houels and valleyes with euen bushes and along by it it is both faire and calme Sea and pleasant ground In this Countrey in the middle way from Enseada dos Camarouis to the Ilands of Canton Sion about thrée myles to Sea-warde there lyeth two Islandes by each other and the Island lying nearest the land hath a great high hill in the middle which runneth stéepe downe to the endes of the Island they haue neither Trées nor Bushes within them being faire and cleare round about them From the Islandes of Canton Sion forward the Lande and Coast reacheth inwards ten miles from thence that is to say two miles from the land lyeth 2. high and great Islands nigh adioyning each to other without Trees or bushes reaching as the coast doth whereof the first lying on the Southwest side is very long and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle and the Channell separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone but déepe and faire for I haue passed through it and harde by the Northeast point of the first long Island which commeth out by the other there is a sandie Bay close by the which there is a verie good Rode for this Sandie baye hath defence for all windes and because it is like a Hauen it is by the Chinars called Pudeon that is a Sacke From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Peece Northwest lyeth a well of verie great depth therefore you must be carefull in entring the Créeke where you haue verie good ground at fiue and sixe fadome déepe In this Créeke or sandie Bay there is very good fresh water as also right ouer against it on the other side of the Island there is a great place of fresh water The channell betwéene these Islandes and the Firme land is all faire and deepe as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Hauen aforesaid there is another Hauen called Fuychon which is a riuer but with a small entry béeing in breadth about halfe the length of the shotte of a great peece with cleare and déep ground from the mouth inwardes there is good water running a great way into the land and all faire If you desire to goe in there and to anker you must gouerne your course by the Lead and the depthes This Baye hath many townes and villages lying along by the riuer From the aforesaid first Island fiue or sixe myles Southward to Seaward lieth two small Islandes halfe a myle distant each from other they are both without trées or any bushes the Island on the Land side is flat and that to Sea-ward is very high and hath a Créeke but verie small and onely with a Northwest wind it is harbourlesse the entrie is verie straight being round within with good and pleasant ground This Island in forme is like a Horse shooe for from the inner side of the Creeke towards the outside to Seaward it may be the length of a bow shot in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small From this Hauen of Pudeon fiue miles along the coast there lyeth two Ilands whereof the first is long reaching like the coast the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea for betwéen it and the land you can not passe The point of this Island reacheth beyond the Northeast point of the aforesaid long Iland that lyeth to Sea-ward betwéene them both is a small Channell but faire and déepe all along and round about this Iland as well inward as outward From this Island to the land it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and is a good Hauen for the Monson of China but wholly open for a Southwest wind with the which wind I there lost two Iuncos which are Chinish shippes This Hauen is called Guotimony Before you come within two myles of this Hauen vpon the coast there lyeth two Créekes close togither which runne about a myle into the land and are aboue the shot of a great Péece in breadth but are not fit for our ships The ground therabout is faire and inward it hath a village From this Hauen of Guotimony seuen or eight myles Eastward lieth a verie great and high Island on the South side hauing thrée or foure smal Ilands close to it it lieth about seuen or eight miles from the land and a good way from the other Ilands on the Northwest side it hath two Créekes hard by each other whereof that in the Northeast is the safest with good and faire ground reaching about halfe a mile inwards within it hauing good fresh water with a Sandie Bay where they draw vp their ships to mend and dresse them when néed requireth it is all faire round about onely you must not run betwéene
the small Islands the Island This Island is called Lanquyn From this Island Lanquyn fiue miles North and North and by East there are many Ilandes lying togither both great and small with some Trées but thinne and lowe reaching along the coast about ten myles forward the first lie close by each other to Seaward vpon a row The channels betwéene these ilands are thrée fadome deepe some lesse muddie ground if you haue occasion to séeke for succour in that place with the windes of the monson of China you may anker in the mouthes of those Channels where you may lie safe but in those Monsons or coniunctions of times there is no foule weather in the course of the generall windes you shall not passe from this first rowe of Islands lying to Seaward to the land for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places for the déepest place is but two fadome On the Northeast side inward from these Islands there are two other Islands lying along by the Lande which reach Northeast and Southwest whereof the Southwest Island is greater and higher then that to Landward The Channell betweene them is déepe and faire muddie ground The ground of the issue on the Northeast side of this Channell is all Corall and Kesell stone hauing many Ilands and stonie cliffes Here the streams runne strongest with the Monsons of the winde A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands there is a good and faire sea and ground it is verie dangerous to passe with great ships betwéene these Ilands for you can not passe On the Lande right against these Ilands there is a Hauen called Hunchon and the Islandes are called Lyon From this first Island of Lyon to the point of Sumbor are about thirtéene miles and you runne as aforesaid Northeast and Southwest These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor but in the middle way they are lesse and more distant from each other and before you come néere the point of Sumbor by sixe miles there is an Island of Reddish earth with two hilles like two men and in the middle there is a valley which reacheth Northwest and Southeast On the Southeast side it hath a good Hauen for the windes of the Monson of China This Iland is a good marke for them that come from Iapon The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea it is a thicke land with a high rising backe it hath on the end of the Southwest point close by a long and high Island and from the Northeast point of this Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe making betwéene this Island and the aforesaid point a verie narrow channell where the countrey shippes do passe through inwardes from the Southwest side and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke which in compasse is about foure great miles two miles from the point Southwestward there lieth two or thrée small Islands As you come outward to these Islands there is déepe and faire ground but from thence to the point and all ouer the Créeke it is all shallowe so that at lowe water it is drie and you may sée the muddie ground vpon the plaine of the aforesaid point on the southwest side there is a great towne where they haue many great Barkes that are made with Orloopes and nayled wherof some are 200. Bhares great On the Northeast side of this point there is a Créeke running inward to the Land at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hooke that lieth vnder 28. degrées and ¼ From this point foure miles to Seaward East Northeast there lieth two great Ilands without any trées or bushes whereof the first reacheth East West and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth which reacheth North and South the Channell betwéen them both may be a shot of a great péece broad déepe and faire This Island which reacheth East and West on the East end hath a point sticking out towardes the North in the which point there is a small Créeke of fiue or sixe fadome déepe faire ground where you may harbour in all weathers except it be with a Northwest wind The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a rowe whereof the one is great the other small and some what long betwéene the which and the Island you may passe with small shippes and round about these Islands it is faire ground In this Island you haue verie good fresh water and they are called Timbasam From these Islands a mile and a halfe or two miles Northward there lieth two other small Islandes which reach East southeast West Northwest wherof the one is greater and longer than the other they lie close togither the channell betwéene them is faire déepe with harbor against North Northeast Southwest windes for I haue laine there at anker with a great storme From this point of Sumbor to Liampo you passe without the Islands North Northeast and South Southwest and the coast all high ground and from this point of Sumbor fiue or sixe miles along by the coast within the land there is a high stony Rocke which sheweth like a Monkies coule in the Island Seylon called O Capello de Frade beyond this Friers coule or stonie rocke other sixe myles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chaposy which is a Riuer of fresh water and inward it hath a great Towne lying vpon it where likewise there is a fléet of the country shippes continually kept for the security and safegard of the coast The knowledge and right tokens of this Hauen are that when you are hard by Chaposy the Sea hath some reddish leaues or Flagges driuing on the water and some péeces of réedes like Cassia Fistola or Spanish Réedes which come out of this Riuer Two miles East Southeast from this hauen to Seaward there lyeth two small and high Islands close by each other wholly without trées or bushes round about them it is twentie fadome déepe muddy ground and from the mouth of the Riuer halfe a mile from the land Southward lyeth a long Island reaching like the coast betweene this and the land it is faire muddy ground of thrée fadome déepe whereof the entry on the South side is the déepest and along by the land it is shallow From Chaposy eightéene myles forward lyeth the Island of Liampo where the Portingales vsed to Trafficke These Islands were called Sinogicam the Firme land Liampo which along by the sea side is a high land The Portingales ships doe not passe along by it but betwéene the Islands At the first you haue but few and small Islands but being past them then vpon the rowe of Islands lying furthest out into the sea you haue a very great Island with high Trées and Creekes along by the Sea coast and it is there all ouer faire and good ground and on the West side it hath a Créeke in the middle whereof there is a great and high Island betwéene
the which and the land you haue a Roade against the Monsons of the South and Southwest windes This entry is of fiue fadome déepe but it is too narrow for a Shippe to wind in it therfore you must bind it fast or cast out ankers both before and behind From this Island two miles West Northwest lyeth another great Island with very high Trées and from the South Southwest side of the same Island there is a good hauen for the Monson of the North and Northeast winds on the which side it hath very good aire and fresh water and the other Island aforesaid for the Monson of Southwest winds is vnwholsome The channell betweene them both is 35 fadome déepe but in the Road you haue such depths as you would desire From this north Island to the land are about thrée miles hauing some small Islands in the way On the firme land West Northwestward there lieth a smal Créeke called Camocon from thence you run to the Hauen lying on the coast fiue miles beyond the Island which is a riuer called Tinay at the entrie it hath foure fadome déepe without any sands or shallowes These two Islands aforesaid of Synogicam where the Portingals vsed to traffike lie vnder 29 degrees and 2 â— and these islands of Liampo doe reach full vnder one and thirtie degrées Northward and are not as the Islands of Canton hauing their Channell faire and cleare without feare of any thing but that you sée before your eies But betwéene these Islands in some places you haue stonie cliffes and riffes lying vnder the water From the Islands of Sinogicam forwards there also the tides runne verie strong about a third part of the Water at an Ebbe and a third part at a flood wherefore you must haue good regard to the crosse streames that come from the many channels and droughts which runne verie strong and with so great force that oftentimes they driue a man vpon the point and Hookes of the Island when hée would passe by it Wherefore hée that will sayle by these Islands must haue a Pilote that knoweth the Countrey To Seaward from these Islands it is all faire and good ground Putting out of the Island where you may Winter for the South winde that is from the Road of the Islands or Cliffes to Sea-ward you must alwaies runne close by it and when the Island beginneth to lye East-ward then it maketh a point sticking out and before you come to this Point there is a small long Island which hath a small Créeke in the middle being inward of a clouen stonie Rocke at the foot whereof it is 20 fadome déepe it is distant from the great Island about the shot of a great péece The smal Island shall lye on the North side and you shall alwaies keepe towards the great Island as much as you can for this creeke aforesaid draweth the water to it so that if you were close by it it would draw you in as it happened vnto mee whereby I had great labor and danger before I could get out From this Island halfe a myle Northward there beginneth another great and high Island which from thence reacheth Eastward making a Channell betweene both that runneth in the Sea which Channell from the Sea to this small Island is all fair and cléere but from thence to the point of the other North Island and from both these Islands Westward which is a great space of the Sea it is altogether riffes and Stony Cliffes vnder Water that reach vnto the Channell that runneth from the Island where you may Winter for the North windes along by the Islands that lye on the land side Therefore when you come from the South Island to Sea-ward you must goe close by it to the point aforesaid lying on the same Island From the Island where you may Winter for the North winds there runneth a channell North Northeastward betwéene the Islands so that it deuideth the Islands leauing some on the land side and some to Sea-ward which channell oftentimes openeth and sheweth it self From this Island aforesaid where you may Winter for the North windes fiue myles further forward in the same course there beginneth another great and high Island of fiue myles long lying in the same course of North Northeast and South Southwest This Island is very populous of euill natured people from the South point of this great Island the length of a Cannon shot Eastward there is a hidden cliffe or Rocke of stone lying vnder the water wherevpon a Portingales Shippe was cast away laden with Pepper and other Spices which is a good marchandise to be brought out of India and all those countries The Riffes and Stones aforesayde reach vnto this Stony Rocke therefore if you will sayle through this Channell or depth aforesaide you must runne on the West side close by the Island From the point of this great Island thrée miles Northeast there is yet another great and high Island and is one of the Islands that lye to Seaward in a row wherein there standeth a Chinish Temple or Church most curiously built wherefore by the Portingales it is called A Ilha de Varella that is the Island of the marke or token and before you come at it you leaue two or thrée smal Islands on the land side and the great Island of fiue miles long reacheth behind these Islands to land ward and to Sea ward from these Islands lyeth another great Island reaching from the stony rock to the island of Varella Betweene these two Islands there runneth a small Channell the whole Channell from these thrée miles to the entery or passage of Varella is thrée fadome deepe at full Sea and that of Varella as also the month of the chanell which runneth Eastward through it towards the Sea is all deep In the entery of the Channell of this Island at the foote of Varella it hath a Créeke with a Sandy baye which is a good Road. From the South point of this Island of Varella or Chinish Temple to Sea ward there lyeth thrée Islands all on a row close by each other reaching East and West which Islands also are named after the name of Varella whereby the Channell is knowne This Island of Varella or Chinish Temple lyeth full vnder thirtie degrées and is distant from the Islands Sâ—ongâ—â—â—m aforesaid eight miles From the Islands Sâ—ongicam eleuen or twelue myles it is altogether great and high Islands lying close by each other but from thence to full one and thirtie degrées they begin to bée lesse and somewhat more separated At the end of these Islands there lyeth two Islands together whereof the Channell that runneth betwéene them hath a verye good harbour it is called Lepion they lye close by a great Riuer which is much inhabited and frequented by Marchaunts and other people In this Hauen of Lepion the Iapons doe often Trafficke from the end of this Island along by the Sea coast the land is low and bankey ground for that
a mile from the land it is but a fadome and a halfe déepe being hard stones The people of y e country passe ouer it with nailed barkes with pitched or loopes two péeces sailes of réeds or mats an yron dreg with sharpe téeth This coast reacheth Northeast to foure and thirtie degrées where there lieth a great riuer that commeth from Nanquyn within the mouth or entry hath an Island that is inhabited by many people both horse and footemen This Island maketh the Riuer to haue two mouths or entries from thence forward the land reacheth North Northeast and by East and comming to that part which lieth Southeast there the land hath an end or point and by that meanes it maketh a great Créeke From this point forward the coast runneth North again after turning again Northwestward Into the which coast those of Iapon doe ordinarily come to Trafficke with the Countrey people called Cooray and there you haue Hauens and harbors hauing a kind of small open péeces of wouen worke which the Iapons fetch from thence whereof I am certainely informed as also touching the nauigation vnto that land by Pilots that haue sailed and searched cleane through it as followeth From this point of the Creeke of Nanquyn twenty miles Southeastward there lyeth certaine Islands at the end whereof on the East side there lyeth a very great and high Island much inhabited as well by horse as footemen These Islands by the Portingales are called As Ilhas de core but the great Island Core is called Chausien on the Northwest side it hath a small Créeke wherein there lyeth an Island which is the Hauen but it is not very déepe There the lord of the country hath his pallace and is continually resident Fiue and twenty miles Southeast from this Island lieth the Island of Goto one of the Islands of Iapon which lyeth from the point of the Créeke of Nanquyn East and by North to Seaward sixtie miles or somewhat more This instruction I had from a Nobleman of Portingale called Pero da cunha that hath séene and trauelled through all the Countrey hauing by him all aduise seruing for the purpose as being of great experience hauing arriued and stayed in the Countrey aforesaid by tempest and stormy weather against their wils minding to sayle to Iapon and from thence againe to the aforesaide Island of Goto the Islands lying from this Island towards the land betwéene them and close about them all ouer are many riffes and stones The instruction of the Créeke of Nanquyn I had from an expert Pilote borne in the lande of Algaine in Spaigne that lost his Shippe vpon the Sands that sticke out from the Riuer of Nanquyn hauing runne round about all this Créeke with a Barke and hée saide that being within when the Sunne rose it came from ouer the land and that from the riuer of Nanquyn there ranne some sands and droughts reaching southward to two and thirty degrées and to the middle way of the Goulfe of Iapon Here endeth the description of the furthest parts that the Portingales haue sailed along by the Coasts lands and Islands of the Kingdome of China being that part thereof which at this day is knowne and discouered The 31. Chapter The description of a voiage made by a Portingale Pilote from Liampo to Iapon in a Chinchea Soma that is a Chinchon ship with the description of the coast of Bungo Miaco Cacay the Island Toca all countries of Iapon ON Wednesday the thirty of Iune being the third day of the new moone in the morning we set sayle out of the northeast chanell of the Island Siongicam with a southeast wind and being without the Island we had the wind South Southeast and ran east and somewhat East and by North about euening we had a South Southwest wind running East East and by South and East southeast with very great billowes out of the south whereby we could hardly kéepe on our course sayling with our sayles but halfe vp and in the morning we ran halfe a strike east and by south and east southeast because the wind came some what ful to the South west with shoures of raine and great billowes that rose very high by which means the waters and streames in these countries run Northward we made our account to haue sailed in the course of East and East and by North 26 miles in one meale tide which was til thursday at noone being the first of Iuly We had alwaies great and mighty waues because it was a Spring tyde all the night hauing great lightnings out of the East and in all the points of the Compasse from North to South On thursday the first of Iuly from noone to night we had a southwest wind running East and East and by South and somwhat East Southeast with great showres of raine without any high wind and being two houres within night the skie closed round about and became close with a great raine wherwith the wind beganne to be calme turning Northward which the officers of the Soma perceiuing being men of China they began to be in great feare for the Chinais doe hold for certaine that in the Moone of the moneth of Iuly vntill it bee 12. dayes old all along the coast of China there will follow great stormes and as I thinke it is till S. Iames day till when they alwaies looke for stormes and foule weather for that I my selfe vpon the same day haue passed two great stormes And touching our North wind y e began still to encrease they perceiuing it put presently Westward againe towardes the Islands and had sayled from noone to that time about ten miles in such manner that as wee gessed we were 36. miles from the land of China and so wée held our course in that manner West and West and by North after that hauing a close skie with little wind whereby we made very litle way On Friday the North wind beganne to blowe higher wee running so till noone and in that Westerly course wée sayled about sixe miles From Friday at noone we sailed with this North wind all that euening and by night til Saterday in the morning then the wind came Northeast then East and so West till noone whereby wee made our account to haue sailed eightéene miles letting the shippe goe West and West and by North and in all that time wée had neither Sunne nor Starre to take the height On Saterday two or thrée houres after noone the wind fell South the weather beginning to cleare vp and so wée ranne one glasse and perceiuing the weather to settle we turned againe towards Iapon being as then in mine opinion about 12. myles from the coast of China and so we held our course that euening and all the next night East and East and by South with a small wind and calme Sea The next day being Sonday at noone we tooke the height of the Sunne at 30. degrées 1 ◠part lesse wée set out
about halfe a myle forward you beginne to haue lowe land with sandie strands and Trées all along the Sea coast By all this coast and the low land it is all bankey grounds wherfore you must keepe from it about halfe a myle In the middle way of this lowe land there lyeth two mouths or entries of Riuers that are very shallow whereby you may not enter into them by any meanes and at the end of this low land you haue a riuer of fresh water of twelue Spannes in the Hauen at a Spring tide and within the Riuer at lowe Water the Shippes lie drie being sandy ground Close by the Roade or entry of this Riuer lyeth a Village called Aquina Fama Halfe a myle within the Land vpon the Riuer lyeth the greatest and mightiest Towne in all the Kingdome of Bungo where the Kings in time past held their Courts where now all the Marchaunts of the Countries round about it who are very rich and aboundant in wealth are resident From this Riuer vpon the other side of the Creeke lyeth a very good Hauen with harbour against all windes it is a small Bay for the points or heights therof doe runne through each other wherefore they make a good defence against the South windes The entry of this hauen is faire you need but run in through the middle of the Channell where you haue foure and a halfe and fiue fadome deepe and there you haue great furtherance for you runne in before the winde with the South Monson and you put out againe before the winde with the North Monson to vnderstand it well you must know that all this Countrey as also all China Malacca India and all the orientall places doe sayle with the coniunction of the windes which for certaine months together blowe out of one place as now in the North then in the South and that at certaine times and dayes in the yeare without fayling which coniunction is called as in other places I haue said the Monson as Monson of the South winde that is when the wind bloweth out of the South and monson of the North Windes in like sort wherewith through all India they make their accounts to passe from the one place to the other And because in this description there is oftentimes mention made of some Hauens Creekes Riuers Bayes and Islands where you haue good harbor for the Monson of the North and South Windes when they blowe which is to bée vnderstoode that if they bée against you in the way you should hold you should know which hauen is good to stay in for that time or to winter in for in the East Countries you must Winter when the winde is against you so that you cannot holde on your voyage and of force you must stay for the wind and weather that is the Monson which serueth you and where you haue a good harbour to stay for the Monson that you must haue and then to follow on your voyage Wherefore I thought it necessary to set this downe that you might the better vnderstand the meaning of the Portingall and Indian Pilotes that first set downe noted and obserued these courses and Nauigations vsing here the same manner and description of the countrey not chaunging the word of Monson although that in some places before I haue saied some thing thereof But to the matter you must knowe that the aforesaid Hauen or Bay is called Fingy but it is not free from Rouers and theeues From the aforesaid Riuer to this Hauen there is about three myles crosse-waies In the Roade of the Riuer it is twenty fadome deepe close by the land but it is bad ground and there it is not good to stay for the windes for there you could not saue any thing From this point you may see the East land and at the end where this great Creeke endeth it is low land which is called Mâ—ryee and is all along faire and cleare The aforesaid Riuer and Towne lye vnder 33 degrees and â— From this point or end of Mâ—ryee two myles further there is another point of land which lyeth with this point North and South it is a low land with sandie strands at the end whereof lyeth certaine stones and Rockes from thence forward you runne Northward along the coast and a myle beyond it there is a Village called Tamboca and another myle further lyeth another place called Tambico lying both on the Sea side but they haue no Hauens with harbours also the people of the same places are not to bee trusted Beeing right against this point of Land you shall along the coast see a long Island which a farre off sheweth like two Islands lying distant from the land about two myles it is called Fimexima betwéen this Island and the land it is all shallows from the point of the Créeke of Bungo to this Island aforesaid All this coast along for the space of a great myle is bankey ground Riffes Stones and other filth All this way from the beginning of the Kingdome of Bungo to this Island you must runne on the East side along by the land of Tocaa From this Island of Fimexima aforesaid nine myles Northward there is a very high Lande which reacheth East and West that is the land of Amanguchen a great mighty and rich country for therein is one of the mines of siluer of the countrey of Iapon In this coast are good Hauens as also the Island of Meagima which in times past before the Portingales trauelled to Iapon had great Trafficke for there was the staple of all the countrey of Iapon for all kindes of wares and Marchandises Along by this land of Amaguchen and the country of the Island Fimexima aforesaid beginneth the straight or passage to Facunda of the which as also the other places thereabouts I will speake in another place together with the Nauigation and scituation thereof To sayle from the point of Moryee in the Créeke of Bungo to the Hauen of Caminaxique lying in the country of Amanguchen which is very sure and good for all winds and of great Trafficke you shall holde your course Northeast and Northeast and by East being about sixtéene myles This Lande which you goe vnto is very great and high and you runne all the aforesaid coast along to a Hooke or point of Lande East and West and East and by North and West and by South and from the Hauen of Caminaxique to the aforesayed Point about fortie Portingale myles whereof seuentéene and ½ make a degrée as all the myles in this description likewise doe in the which coast lyeth the Hauens hereafter following that is from Caminaxique to Toraque are about two myles and â— from Toraque to the Island Meagima are sixe myles and a halfe The Roade of this Island is betwéene it and the Firme Lande from Meagima to Camangary are a myle and a halfe from thence to the Island of Anooxyma are fiue myles From Anooxyma to Toumoo are also fiue miles
Islands and Cliffes and a great Créeke At the issue of the Straight of Arima sixe miles forward lyeth an Island close by the coast called Cambexima which is a great high land hauing on the Sea side close by it foure or fiue Islands or cliffes and betwéene this Island and the Firme land there is a good harbour and in the same Island there is a village with many people with a good small Créeke or Hauen where many Fisher boats Foists doe lie from thence begin the Islands of Firando From this Island Cambexima fiue or sixe miles forward there is a point of land sticking out with many Islands and cliffes that reach from the land into the sea you must run to the same point northwestward This way from Cambexima to the aforesaide point of land is all one créeke because the land windeth inward and because that on this coast of Iapon commonly at such time as you goe thither it is cloudie mistie weather therefore you can hardly discerne the scituation of the land but if it be cléere weather you shall presently see the point sticking out that hath the Island and Cliffes at the end thereof but if it be cloudie and mistie weather then you must not saile along the coast but hold your course half a strike from the Northwest as aforesaid when you are hard by it you shall presently discouer all the Islands and cliffes The furthest to seaward of these Islands cliffes are two Islands separated from each other betwéene high and lowe and longer then round wholly without Trées and that which lyeth furthest to seaward hath two riffes reaching out from it one lying Eastward the other West Northwest about halfe a myle by the East Iland of these aforesaid two Islands as I was tolde if is faire and good ground close to it as it séemeth to be And vpon the North side it hath the harbour for the Monson of the South windes and if you haue occasion you may anker there From these aforesaide two Islandes to the lande there lyeth two Islandes or Cliffes in forme like two Pillars betweene these Cliffes and another Channell which the Islands begin to open before you many Iuncos or Chinish shippes doe passe laden with merchandises to Fâ—rando and the Hauen of Vmbra notwithstanding you shall leaue all these Islands or Cliffes on the East side or your right hand running about halfe a mile to Seaward from them and béeing right ouer-against these Islands then three or foure miles further in the same course of North Northwest there is another point of an Island stretching right Westward from the Land being a high and flat land on the top and in the first appearance it séemeth like three Islands although it is but one for it hath two broken partes and by that meanes maketh a shewe of thrée Ilands From the point of this Island thrée miles Westward to seaward you shall see a round Island hauing close by it a long small Island and if it be cléere weather West Southwest or West you shall see the Island of Goto which is very high and great with many rentes and clouen peeces on the toppe being all euen and flat ground When you sée the Island aforesaid that sheweth like three Islandes then runne straight vpon the point thereof that sticketh outward and if the tide chance to be against you with slatâ—e winde then the water by this point sticking out of the aforesaid Iland maketh a great roaring and hath much scumme so that it séemeth to be shallows which the water breaketh vpon notwithstanding it is all ouer faire and deepe therefore you may fréely put towards it without feare keeping a little from the point and in this manner passing about the point then you must saile along where you haue a great and good creeke where you shall put in till you find ten or eleuen fadome deepe it is hard ground where you may anker at pleasure it hath a good harbour for the winds of the Monson and being there you shall presently haue Barkes and Foâ—stes enough aboord your shippe that will bring you to Firando In the same créeke inward Eastward there is a Rode to anker with good harbour for all winds Likewise the length of the shotte of a great péece Northeastwarde lieth another Hauen that hath a good harbour for all winds wherein there may lie more ships then in the East Rode aforesaid If you chance to come into this country at such time as that you feare any foule weather then you may fréely lie in any of these Hauens where you lie safe from rouers and théeues that may come thither This Iland that seemeth to be thrée is called Faquyn and from thence to the Iland Firando are fiue miles From this Iland Faquyn if it be cléere weather you may well sée the Iland of Firando Northward from it but because for the most part you there find cloudie and mistie weather there is no certaintie but from the hauen where you lie you shall presently see a high and round Iland with some stonie rockes about it about halfe a mile from the rode of the aforesaid coast where you lie which reacheth North Northeast and North by West about two miles and a halfe from you you shall sée another long high and flatte Iland clouen in the middle and so sheweth to be two Ilands stretching East and West About halfe a mile from this iland lieth a great round Cliffe betwéene this Cliffe and the round Ilande that lyeth halfe a mile from the Hauen of the aforesaid Iland there is a great créeke which maketh a chanell through the which you passe to the Hauen of Vmbra and when you sée the Island that sheweth like two Ilands runne right vpon it to the Hooke or end thereof lying in the East to the which you shall go within the shot of an arrow as also by the great Cliffe that lyeth Eastward from you running inward then you shall sée a verie long land which is the coast that maketh the strait or channell betwéene the land and the Iland of Firando you must shunne all the land that lieth on the East side for it is all ouer foule ground as you passe about by the aforesaid Iland which is called Caroxyma leauing it on the West side about the length of the shot of an arrowe from the ende thereof you shall sée two Islandes whereof that Westwarde is long the other lying right before you béeing rounde hauing a stonie Cliffe which you must shunne and then presently you shall sée two other Cliffes which shall all lie Westward from you and béeing there you shall sée the Island of Firando lying before you being about two small miles from you you may fréely make towardes it for it is all ouer faire and passe aboue the coast of the Firme lande that lieth Eastward When you are by the Islands and cliffes then there are certaine small Channels which you shall shunne kéeping close
by the Island of Firando which is on your West side and is a verie great and long Island and sheweth on that side whereunto you saile with a great high Houell in the middle way vpon a point sticking out of the same Island when you are close by the same Island you shall runne along by it where you shall find an opening stretching inwards like a riuer you shall passe about a mile beyond it where you shall haue a small Créeke or Bay called Cochyn wherein you shall enter vntill you finde twelue fadome deepe and there anker and although there you lie open to the South winde yet the water goeth whole beeing there you shall send either by water or by lande to the towne where the Hauen is for certaine Foists or Barkes that may bring you into the Hauen which Hauen lyeth somewhat further for the entrie thereof is something dangerous because of the great streames that haue their Current therein If you desire to saile into this Hauen when it is almost high water haue care for the wind is strong at your entring and when the water beginneth to ebbe then it helpeth to bring you in then you shall runne in such maner along by the Island as I said before and being past the créeke of Cochyn to the first point of lande that you shall come vnto that sticketh out from the same Island from the which point Northward there iutteth two stonie Cliffes you shall goe neare the stonie Cliffes the better to get into the Hauen and you shall presently sée before you on the side of Firando a great and high Island full of trées when you sée it take your course right vpon the West point of the same Island vntill the saide Island lyeth wholly vncouered to Leeward from you whereby presently you shall sée inwarde the point or end of the towne and when you beginne to see the houses then put somewhat neerer to it right ouer against the aforesaid Island on the South side and the left hande and there the Island hath a small loâ— poinâ— of lande comming from a high hâ—uâ—â— and stretcheth into the Sea from the which point there runneth a Sand or Banke therefore you shall put towardes the side of the houses or end of the towne to kâ—pe out of the streame and when you are out being in calme water if the winde be not good then anker and from thence be rowed in either with Foists Barks or your own boat West West Southwest into the Hauen All this description and course of Nauigation is in breefe to conclude that when you come to the coast of Iapon you shall leaue all the Islandes that lie along vpon the coast on the East side and vpon the right hand and runne without them and the Islandes lying to Seaward from thence whereof the first beginneth from the end of the Island of the row called Saquyn and the long Island Caroxyma that lyeth further forwarde which reach North and North and by West from the ende of the rowe and the two small Islandes with two other small Islandes or Cliffes lying further forward and are seuen in all leauing them all on the left hand or the West side with the which course you shall goe directly vpon the Island of Firando as is before mentioned The 33. Chapter A voiage made by a Portingale Pilot with a Soma that is a Chinish shippe from Macau or out of China to the Island of Iapon and the countrey of Bungo with the scituations of the places along the course THe ninetéenth of Iune béeing Saterday we departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the issue or chanel of Macau running outward to sea putting out at the place where the ships of Malacca doe vsually enter but because we could not get aboue the Island called A Ilha grande dos Ladronis that is the great Island of théeues lying four miles East Southeast to Seaward from the Islande and the Hauen of Macau therefore wée ranne to Leeward thereof About the length of the shot of a base from it there are two Islands lying somewhat distant from each other with a very small channell running betweene them thorough the which they passed with Bankoâ— or Chinish Barkes From thence about halfe a mile Northward lieth another long Island full of trees and bushes and when you put in there on the West Southwest side in the middle of the channell there lieth a stone which is couered with the Sea Sixe miles East Southeastward from these Islandes lyeth the Island of Tonquian which is a high and long Island full of trees and bushes and close by it on the sea side it hath nine or ten Islandes or Cliffes and because wee could not take the height to passe betweene the Islandes and the Cliffes which is a faire good channell wée passed to Leeward between it and another Island about a small mile Northward from thence which is a great Iland and there lie two Ilands or cliffes the greater hard by it and the other further off which we left on the left hande running along by the Island of Tonquian where it is all fair ground Which Island on the point that lyeth East Northeast on the land side hath a sandie Bay which is a very good Rode for the Monson of the South windes When wee were out beyond that Island then wee helde our course East Southeast vntill wee were as farre to Seaward as the furthest Island and being in sight thereof wee tooke our course East and east and by North for threescore miles till wee were vnder the height of the Island Lamon which course we helde thereby to shunne Rouers and Theeues who at that time and in those countries were continually risident making warre against the Portingales of Macau and yet wee had the firme Land still in sight I meane the toppes of the Trees and Bushes that stoode vpon the lowe flatte Lande and comming to the coast of Lamon although wee sawe it not wee presently ranne Northeast by the which course wee had the sight of the high lande of Chabaquon lying on the coast of China and beeing there wee found much badde water and hard streames and at the last wee espied the Varella or stonie Rocke that standeth aboue the Hauen of China seeing nothing else but high hilles and from thence forwarde wee sawe no more of the coast of China and running in that course of Northeast which from Lamon wee alwaies held wée perceiued the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or Small Lequeo which was at the fourth mealetide after our departure from Macau for wée espied it on Wednesday in the morning and ankered eight miles from it towards the coast of China beeing on the Southwest point thereof This Island Lequeo Pequeno stretcheth Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South it is a very high Island and about fifteene or sixteene miles long the furthest point
the greater it séemeth This Island is very high in the middle and descendeth downeward towards the end The Northeast point is lower then the southeast so that it maketh as it were a tongue sticking out which is very lowe From thence East Northeastward are certaine Islands shewing like cliffes The depth in that place is fiue and twenty fadome muddy ground Wednesday being the seuentéenth we had a North Northeast wind and then it came North-east and began to blowe so stiffe that we were forced to strike all our sailes letting the shippe driue all that day Southeastward and by night wee willed the man at the helme to steere northwest and about morning the winde began to blowe so stiffe with so great waues that we were forced to go with half our foukesaile with all our cords wel bound made fast and the storm or Tuffon was so great that wee were forced to bind all that wee had on boord els it was presently stricken in péeces This Tempest began first North Northeast and so ranne about till it was North Northwest At the departure whereof it was so boysterous that the waues séemed to touch the clowdes This was vpon Thursday being the two and twentith day of the new Moone the next night following the wind came west but because as then the Sea ranne verie high we let not our sailes fall but in the morning we had the wind southwest and then we let fall our sailes minding to follow on our course with great ioy throughout our ship thinking certainely wee had the windes of the Monson but towards night it was calme againe and then wee had a North wind holding our course eastward but not long after it was altogither calme notwithstanding the waues ranne out of the South so that about two of the clocke we had the wind southeast wherewith we hoised sailes running northeast and Northeast and by North and when it began to be day we saw the Island called Dos Reys Magos that is the thrée kings lying South about tenne or twelue miles from vs and there I found the heigth of the sunne to be 26 degrées and ⅔ being the one and twenty day of the Moone The day before wee sawe the Island Fermosa which is a very high Land and séemeth to reach vnto the cloudes there wee had fiue and fortie and fiftie fadome water muddy ground On friday at sunne rising we cast out our lead and found one and twentie fadome with blacke sande The first token that we had of the aforesaid Tempest was a small Raine-bowe close by the Horizon on the Sea side being a faire russet colour with two other greater Rainebowes whereof the point or end shewed almost like the cloud called Olhos de Bois that is Cats eyes which are small clouds which at the first shewe seeme no greater then a mans fist about the Cape De bona Speranza which by the sailors that saile in the East Indian Seas are much marked for they are tokens of suddaine falling Tempestes and cruell stormes as in the voyage from India to Portingale is alreadie partly declared wherefore it is good to bée aduertised thereof the better to looke vnto it and to watch for them to y e which end I thought it not from the matter to speake of them in this place But returning vnto our matter I aduertise you that when you are come into those countries as long as the winde commeth out of the North and so Southwest you are to make no account thereof for it will presently bée North Northeast and East but when it is calme then you shall haue a Southeast winde and then South and Southwest which are the monson and windes of that time but if it beginne againe to be calme it may so fall out that it will bée East Southeast but it will presently be southeast againe with faire weather which wée also found in this Monson of Iuly Anno 1585. Monday the two and twentie day wée tooke the height of the Sunne at 27. degrées and 1 ◠hauing a Southeast Southsoutheast winde with good weather and helde our course Northeast and as I gessed wée had runne after wée had faire weather and wind about two and twentie miles béeing from the lande of China from the Cape called Sumbor about 12. myles being yet about an hundred miles from the Island of Meaxuma and that day wée cast out the Lead and found 55. and 57. fadome water and sawe many blacke and white Sea foules that helde thereabout the blacke birdes by the Portingales being called Alcatrases The thrée and twentie beeing Tuesday wée had verie good weather in such manner that at that mealetide wée sailed about fiftéene miles béeing about twelue miles from the firme land of China In the morning we cast out the Lead and found one and fiftie fadome with white and blacke sand Wednesday being the four and twentie day wee had the height of the Sunne at 29. degrées with an East Southeast and Southeast winde and good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North and sometimes but not much Northeast and by East I made my account to haue holden Northeast and by North and so to haue sailed 16. miles being yet from the Island of Meaxuma about 70. miles lying Northeast from vs and there we cast out our Lead and found 49. fadome déepe sandie muddy ground Thursday the 25. of Iuly wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wee lay driuing without sayles with an East wind winding Southward and so helde till the 26. day and draue Westward finding two fadome lesse in our depth The 26. we wound Northward without sailes yet not long after wee let our foresaile fall but wholly against my mind but onely at the importunate desire of the Chinish Pilat saying that the same day wee should haue the winde larger which was not so but cleane contrarie so that all the way wee made in that sort was more troublesome vnto bs wherefore it is better for such as finde themselues in those countries of 29. degrées to stay for Southeast windes and then to runne North Northeast Northeast and Northeast and by North because the waters and streames runne verie strong towards Liampo and when you are vnder 30. and 31. degrées hauing a South Southeast winde then you shall haue great labour and much paine to get the Island Meaxuma for so it happened vnto vs because the wind was so strong that we could beare but our foresaile and halfe the maine top-saile as also because the Sea ranne very high and hollow and put our shippe out of course and that the streames ranne Southeast This is about 25. or 30. miles from the Island Meaxuma But as soone as the winde came full whereby wee ranne East East and by North and East Northeast at 40. and 34. fadome water the ground being verie smal sand holding as much Eastward as possibly we might and sometimes east and by South wherby we
began to haue more depth yet very slowly that it would haue wearied vs if the ship had gone hardly forward but because the water ranne very hollow whereby the shippe was not verie well stéered wherein we onely put our trust at the last wee had 50. and 60. fadome deepe muddie ground and then â—0 and 75. fadome with small thin sand and a little after that wée had 80. fadome deep but I beléeue that chanced because the Lead hung somewhat backewarde At that casting the ground was somewhat greater sande and because as wee made account wée were neere vnto the Island Meaxuma I presently tooke in the maine toy and myssen in contrary to the opinion of some Pilots euery quarter or â—atch in the night cast the Lead continually ouâ— and presently in the morning we hoysed the maine top-saile vp againe sailing so for a little time we saw land which was part of the Island Meaxuma although other Pilots that were in the shippe saide it was the Island of Guoto but therein they were as perfect as in all the rest of their iudgements This Island of Meaxuma in the first discouerie had a high slope lande lying lowest to the Southwest and when you are right against it at the end therof you finde a Cliffe which sheweth like a Fortresse it was told vs that not farre from that Cliffe there lieth a Cliffe vnder the water whereupon the water breaketh This Island of Meaxuma sheweth like three or foure Islands whereof the first on the Southwest side sheweth as I said before hauing on the top or vttermost part thereof two round Houels like womens breasts or like a saddle the other two Islandes or likenes thereof in the middle way are like great Cliffes with many rockes and crags sticking out like Organ pipes and the other Island or likenes of an Island lying Northeast sheweth like a verie long but not ouer high cliffe we ranne along by the Island holding our course Northeast about two miles beyond it and when we left Meaxuma because the winde ranne Southeast then we ranne Northeast Northeast and by East and East Northeast and in the morning they said that we had the length of the land of Amacula and being to Leeward we espied a great thicke land lying close by the Island Cabexuma This Island Cabexâ—ma is long flat land verie smooth on the North side hauing a Cliffe this was the last of Iuly and the same day wée entred into the Hauen of Langasâ—que which is the Hauen place where at this day the Portingales haue their most trafficke The 37. Chapter The right markes of the Island Meaxuma as well by the depthes as by the opening of the land with an aduertisement how you shall put into the Hauen and in the Rode of Langasaque or Nangasache in the land of Iâ—pan FIrst when you are at seuentie fiue fadome water you must go right vpon the middle of the Island and seeing Land at that depth it will be a high plaine steepe land but not verie great on the vppermost part thereof hauing two pâ—ps and when you goe néere it you shall presently sée another long land béeing flat and euen on the toppe betwéene them both hauing two great cliffes with many small lying togither which you saile close by about two miles from them this Island on the Southwest side hath a Cliffe and a little further to Seaward from it there lyeth another stonie Cliffe vnder the water whereon the Sea breaketh and at the Northeast end it hath another Island or Cliffe You must vnderstand that comming to Iapon and finding more depthes then aforesaid and séeing land then it is not the Island of Meaxuma but rather the Island called Sancta clara if you find lesse depth then seuentie fadome then it is Meaxuma but then it will bée on the Starrebord side The Island of Meaxuma lyeth vnder 31. degrées and 2 â— Hée that desireth to goe to Langasaque passing from this Island about two miles Eastward from it he must runne Northeast and Northeast and by East hauing a full wind but if you saile by the winde you must rather saile East Northeast with this course you shall get the Island of Cabexuma and you shall likewise sée the hilles of Amacusa as also some small cliffes lying right ouer against Cabexuma which you shall presently sée and if you desire to be put into Langasaque then you must holde along by the cliffes aforesaid to Seaward from them and béeing past those cliffes you shall presently see the end of the Island dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Northwest ende hath certaine Pine trées you must put towardes that point and when you are right against it you shall not presently fall vpon it because of the billowes that come from ouer the Island Caffury which commonly you find most certainly in that place and when you find those billowes you shall put forwarde as much as you thinke conuenient thereby to put into the middle of the Hauen and when you are in the middle then you may fréely put on for there you haue no cause of feare and when you begin to put in then you shall presently sée the water breake vpon the stonie place which lieth as farre as to the middle way of the Island dos Cauallos so that in the entrie of Langasaque there is nothing els to doe then onely to runne in through the middle thereof till you be in the Rode where you must anker hauing foure fadome and ½ and fiue fadome water which is when a trée that is right against the great and principallest Church is euen with the toppe of the Church and you ouer against it then you are at the right place and it is a very good place to anker in but when you are hard by the point of land that commeth right from the Church you must take care to kéepe on the left hand thereby to shunne a Riffe of sand that commeth from the same point and so anker as aforesaid And if you chance by night to passe by the Cliffes aforesaid and desire to anker by them at fortie fadome as some ancient Pilots aduise you in danger of an East wind then my opinion is that you were better runne betwéene them and the Island Cabexuma and certaine Islands that lie in the ranke of the Islands dos Cauallos which is a verie broad and good channell of twentie fadome déepe and there you may wind and lauere from one bough to the other as he will so that you may anker there at twelue or fiftéene fadome which you will vpon a flat and euen ground hard by the Island Caffury wherby you are safe from the northeast to the Southeast and South béeing in more safetie and better assured in the morning to set faile betwéene the Ilands dos Cauallos and Caffury till you be in which is a verie good channell of ten fadome déepe you néed but passe right thorough the middle and to be the
then most certainly you are by the land When you sée the land of Sumbor then in the night time you musâ— runne South Southwest and by day make towardes the land thereby at times to kéepe somewhat to Seaward from the land thereby to shun the cliffes called As duas Irmaas or the two Sisters which lie far inward to sea as also the Island called do Baboxyn which lieth crosse ouer against you being distant from the firme land to Seaward about foure or fiue miles stretching Northwest and Southeast you runne along all the coast of Sumbor Northeast and Southwest and somwhat Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South When you are past the aforesaid Island of Baboxyn then runne the course aforesaide for the space of thrée or foure miles and from thence West Southwest whereby you shall come to the Island of Chinchon where you shall finde sand vpon the ground which in all the coast aforesaid you can not find with 18. or 20. fadome water From the Island of Chinchon to the Island of Lamon you shal hold your course Southwest or as you thinke good and when you are right against the Islandes or Cliffes called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo you shall find vpon the ground great sand with shelles and from thence to Lamon which is twelue miles you finde the like by the Island of Lamon you find shelles and blacke sand with oyster shels among it if you chance to be in that countrey by night runne not vnder 22. fadome water for that along by the riffes it hath 21. and 22. fadome with shels and blacke sand vpon the ground and runne still Southwest without leauing that course and if it chance before day or by day to be close aire running Southwest and that you haue small thin white sand then you are by Lamon and then hold your course west Southwest and so you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island called Ilha Branco and from thence runne West vnto the Channell whereby you goe vp to Macau The 40. Chapter Another voiage made from the Hauen of Langasaque to Macau which is from Iapon to China with certaine descriptions and accidents which happened by the Island Guâ—to with the description of the Hauens thereof accomplished in the yeere of our Lord 1584. by a Portingale Pilot. DEparting out of the Hauen of Langasaque the 25. of Februarie Anno 1584. and passing along by the Island of Facunda wee had a West Northwest wind so that wée ankered the 26. day it began to blowe so stiffe that wee were constrained to put for harbour into Tomache The 27. wée hoised anker with an East Northeast and an East winde and cleare weather and comming to the Island dos Cauallos we had a South wind againe wherewith we made back againe to Facunda from whence we set out The eight and twentie being Friday wée set saile againe from Facunda it beeing thrée dayes before the newe Moone with a cold East Northeast wind And beeing within thrée miles of the Island dos Cauallos we had a Southeast wind running on the Southwest bough all that day and the winde began to bee somewhat coole and then we gessed it to be thrée or foure miles beyond the Island of Guoto but in the morning watch wee first espied the point of Guoto being a houell lying on the Northwest part thereof there we had a sharpe wind and it began to rise high out of the South Southeast as much as the ship with all his Sayles might heare wee let the maine saile vp the better to make way and not long after the winde came about to the Southwest and West Southwest with two thunder claps and much lightning wherwith wee hoped it would haue beene still weather but it was not so whereat wee woondered On Saterday by day light wee were right ouer against the point of Guoto almost vpon the end of the Island that lyeth Northwest being about two myles from the lande hauing with the West Northwest winde a crosse storme with the waues of the sea out of the southwest which were verie hollowe and mightie high which tossed the shippe monsâ—rouâ—ly although the winde was ouer much but onely the force and power of the waues troubled vs most which fell behind at our sterne for there wee found a very strong streame and because the wind was slack we doubted we should not get aboue the point of the Island neither from the one side nor from the other for wee had the crosse vpon the Island At the end of this Island we saw another Island of low land being about two miles long and was about a mile and a halfe distant from Guoto some of our ship affirmed that there was a verie good Hauen running in on the one side and comming out againe at the other wherefore we determined to put in there for our better securitie as we did and we ranne in West Northwest At the entry there of it hath a verie great houell with two cliffes lying on the Southeast side of the point The Island that lieth without is on the left hand till you be about a mile from it betweene which and the lande it is all faire you may boldly goe as néere the Island of Guoto as you will and néed feare nothing but what you see before you The entry of the Hauen reacheth Northwest and Southeast hauing within it a great Bay which is all ouer verie déepe from twentie to thirtie fadome water and nothing therein to be feared From this Island to the land you haue all ouer the depthes of thirtie and fortie fadome and yet I haue tried it from the halfe way to Guoto and found eightéene to thirtie fadome with sand and shels on the ground in some places hauing good ground inward in some places you haue Sand and in some places muddie ground froÌ„ thence wée were brought out againe by Scutes about halfe a mile forward so that after that the North wind serued well to saue vs and to driue vs forward from the point lying on the South side which hath certaine stonie Cliffes wée ranne along the land Northeastward and it fell out well for vs for therby we had twentie or thirtie Scutes of the Island that for 20. taes Chiâ—â— money holpe vs well and pulled out our beat we likewise gaue them 50. taes and about 20. depesas to haue our shippe ankered and stayed but they asked vs 30â— whereupon we sent one of our Portingales on land whome they helde for a pâ—wâ—e although by certaine practise we got him out of their hands againe and when after that wee séemed to complaine they cried vs mercie and sent him backe againe although wee vnderstoode verie well that they were our friends by force as perceiuing they had no meanes to hurt vs because wee coulde helpe our selues without them but we marked so much in them that if they coulde haue hindered vs they would not haue failed to doe it or else wée must
Lequeo Pequeno also y e time and the weather will shew you what you should doe when you are past Lequeo Pequeno or before if it so fall out you must seeke to know the land for it is necessary for you to see it because of the Island Lamon as also not to kéepe too farre to Seaward You runne along by the coast from Sumbor to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by North and Southwest and by South but not much And when you are right ouer against Chinchon and that by marking the land or by the heigth of the sunne you know it being foure miles from the land you must hold your course southwest so to go without the Island of Lamon and if you desire to passe within the Islands you may well do it for it is faire ynough and you néede feare nothing But if you feare to mâ—e Lamon then it is better to runne as aforesaid for then you shall be farre inough from the Riffe of Lamon which is very dangerous There you must haue great foresight for when you are past Lamon then you must holde your course to the Island of Lanton The Islandes you sée before you come to Lamon are called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo that is the Islands of Ruy Lobo from the which that which lyeth Northeast is the smallest the other being somewhat greater Vpon the greatest are séene certaine Bushes from thence to Lamon are seuen or eight miles on the Sea side it is twentie fadome déepe with shels on y e ground from thence you shal run southwest and holde a little southwest and by South and if it be in the day time you shall presently see the Islands lying at the end of the Riffe of Lamon from whence the said Riffe hath his issue reaching a myle and a halfe or two miles with this course you shal make good way but if it be night you must looke well to your selfe And running the aforesaid course of Southwest you must keepe to Sea-ward from the stones of Lamon and doe 〈◊〉 best to passe by in the day time and 〈◊〉 you are past the Island of 〈…〉 â—sently make towards the 〈…〉 passe along by it From 〈…〉 15 miles from thence the coâ— of 〈…〉 land reacheth Northeast and Southwest and from thence East Northeast and West South-west to the Island 〈◊〉 Branco which lyeth distant from the coâ—st about fiue miles vnder 22 degrees and â— right ouer against the creeke of Fuâ—â—da de Bona Ventura that is the creeke of good fortune you may passe close by the Island Branco both on the sea side as you thinke best and being past that Island 〈◊〉 the Islands of Canton lye on a rawe From this Island Branco to the Island De Sanchoan are fifty miles When you are past Ilha Branco then you must runne west Southwest from Branco to Macau are foure and twentie miles that is twelue miles before you enter into the chanell that runneth betwéen the Ilands and twelue miles from thence to Macau you shall séeke to enter by the first channel you find by the which lyeth certaine high round Islands which will be on the Northeast side of you and on the Southside it hath two Islands whereof one is very high and plaine stéepe ground on the sea side therof hauing a stony cliffe and being ouer against those high bare Islands on the Northside thereof you shall see a channell which I neuer passed but leauing the aforesaid Islandes on your starboord and so running Southwest you shall presently sée the mouth of the chanell which you must passe through although it sheweth narrow notwithstanding it is very good for I haue run into it by night you must as I saied before leaue the great Island to seaward from you and runne in with the flood west west and by north and west Northwest and so you shall go right to Macau also the wind and weather will shew you what you shall doe And when you come from Iapon right ouer against the cape De Sumbor being fiftéen miles to seaward from it then cast out your lead and you shall find fortie and fiue fortie fadome water muddy ground with many streames of foule water and when you sée the land then you must run along by it to the last Island of Chinchon which lie eight miles into the sea whereby you shal find boies of nets and fuycken with whings and Flags which the fishermen of that Countrey haue set vp for markes From thence to Chincheon are twelue miles Right ouer against those boyes with whings and flags vpon them lieth a town called Guara from that Towne forward you must hold towards the land and to know the Somes which are Chinish carnels and Barkes vsed in those countries they beare but one saile Now to make toward the Lande as you would you must runne West you must likewise knowe that the Varella of Chinchon that is the banke or marke of Chinchon is a high Lande lying along by the entry of Chinchon on the Southeast side hauing a high land reaching southwest stéeping downeward reaching ouer towards an Island lying thrée or foure miles inward to Sea along by the point of the Varella lyeth an Island about a mile distant from it from the which runneth a riffe of sand at lowe water being two fadome déepe reaching about the length of the shotte of a great Péece towards y e other Islands abouesaid lying right ouer against the entry which in length reacheth East and West in the middle hauing a sharpe Hill and Southwestward the aforesaid land of Laylo runneth very lowe being there then you are close by it and you haue nothing els to do but passe about the point and anker at four fadome muddy ground on the Northeast side lie certain Islands close by the Point of Laylo and two miles to Seaward from it you haue twenty fadome water y e water of that country being very blew from thence to Lamon 3. or 4. miles from the land you passe not aboue the depth of 18. or 20 fadome and being past Chinchon towards Lamon You shal find thin smal sand vpon the ground with some shels being right ouer against Chinchon or towards the northeast pou shal find muddy ground with the same depth of 18 and 20 fadome and right ouer against Lamon you haue some blacke sand vpon the ground The 43. Chapter How you shall runne in out and through the channell betweene the Islands and cliffes of Macau with all the markes signes and tokens thereof so to saile into the Hauen of Macau IF you desire to saile out of Macau you must vnderstand y t as soone as you hoise anker in the road where the ships lie which is right ouer against the Bulwarke of Gaspar Borgies you shal presently sée in the Northeast a white vlacke standing vpon the hil and presently after towards the East you haue two houels which with the Hill of the white vlacke
make thrée The second houell which lyeth in the middle is bare wholly discouered appearing through the rocks cliffes y t lie vpon the top of y e field called Dos Paâ—anas which is in the middle of the chanel being by the last houses of the town and when you are right against y e aforesaid houses then you shal presently discouer the 3. houel so that when you are right against y e sandy point lying close by y e Varella called Dos Mandorins then the said houel is almost wholly vncouered where you shall find four fadome and a halfe déepe with a full sea of a Spring tide and as soone as you are past the sandy Point then you beginne to find more depths that is fiue and fiue fadome and a halfe and running in that sort you shall go right vpon a broken land lying on the other side ouer against the Island called Ilha do Bugio that is the Island of sea Cats When you are at the depths aforesaid then southward from you you shall sée an opening called Enseada de Gonsato vaaz which within it hath a hil on the east side which sheweth like an Island or Cliffe and on the West side it hath two Points sticking out and when those two Points are right ouer against each other theÌ„ you are in the middle of the channell and you must be carefull to sée y t they lye one right against the other for by that marke you shall runne in the déepest and best place which is at 27 Spannes of water with a spring tide as I haue found it in the time of the Monson when you saile to Iapon hauing an East winde for with a North wind you haue lesse water there Now to know when you are as farre as the banke you must vnderstande that Northward towards the Island Do Bugio there lyeth a stony cliffe which sheweth like a houell which lieth most Northward of all the rest along by the strand it hath a clouen Rocke with two Points when you haue the aforesaid stony Cliffe like a houell right ouer against the middle of the aforesaid clouen rocke then you are vpon the aforesaid banke and when the aforesaid marke standeth vneuen on the one or other side then you shall presently find more depths which shall bee thus that as you run Southeast right vpon the thickest and greatest land on the other side vntill you be at foure and fiue fadome water which is the point called Varella and desiring to passe through the east channell then you must runne Southeast and East Southeast vntill you haue discouered the Island Do Lastro wholly by the end of the Island Do Bugio then it is not good for you to runne more southward to shun the stone lying right ouer against the Varella and when you haue discouered the Island Do Lastro as I said before then you must runne along by the aforesaid stone about two cables length from it there you shall haue the depth of 28. and nine and twenty spannes of water with a spring tide and to know when you are néerest the stone it is wheÌ„ you haue wholly discouered the first cliffe of two that lye on the Northside of the Island Do Lastro and then you are about a stones cast from the aforesaid-stone at the depth aforesaid and when you haue wholly discouered the second Cliffe then you are beyond the stone you may likewise know it by another marke which is a white vlacke standing vpon the Hill which you see ouer the Towne and hath a stone which sheweth like a mans head When you bring the aforesaid white vlacke in the middle of the top of the house of Don Ioan d Almeyda then you are right ouer against the aforesaid stone and wheÌ„ you are past it it is good to make towards the land on the Southside in such sort that you leaue the two third parts thereof on the side of the town and one third part on the Southside and running in that sort you shall haue more depths then in the middle way vntill you be vpon the banke which hath no more then sixe and twenty Spannes Water with high Water of a spring tide And desiring to knowe when you begin to be right against it it is when you haue the crosse part or dore of y e great church right against the toppe of a house that standeth on the strand which commeth vpon the same way of the same dore right to the strand so that y e dore is wholly discouered there you haue seuen twenty or eight and twenty Spannes water which shall bee when you sée or discouer the clocke house or top of S. Paules church with a hill that standeth behind the same church and as soone as the said clockhouse is couered then you shall presently finde more depths as two and thirtie spannes water which is foure fadome which is right ouer against the place where you fetch fresh Water and going somewhat further forward you shall finde foure fadome and a halfe fiue fadome at a spring tide this was the Road where the shippe called S. Crus of the burthen of fourteene or sixtéene tunnes did anker and when the said ship did wind with an ebbe then the Island Do Lastro lay vncouered although it was a good way from the Land You haue a very good token or marke to know when the land on the Southside is neerest to you then you must make to the Island Do Lastro and Northward from it there is two cliffes and when those two cliffes are one against the other then you are in the déepest of the channell vntill you bee ouer the banke The 44. Chapter Of the course and streames of the water in the way from Malacca in the time of the Monson when they ordinarily trauell thether FRom the Island Pulo Catao lying on the coast of Champa part of the Land of Camboia to the Varella which is a place lying in the way from Pulo catao towards Malacca in y e same coast of Champa or Camboia y e streames run very strong towards the south from the Island Pulo Catao fiue miles forward y e streams run very strong towards the Island Champello and the créeke called A Enseada de Cauchinchina And in the monson of China when you saile from Mallacca in the months of October Nouember and December theÌ„ the streames in that part run Northwest And from the Month of Ianuary forward they run southwest that is towards the sands therfore such as trauel that way must obserue certain times and that with good aduise and as they begin to goe néere the country where the sands lie that are right against the coast of Champa betwéene them and the entery of the coast the streames run as swiftly into the south as a stone slyeth out of a mans hand But I aduise you not to goe so néere the Island Aynao that you may sée it vnlesse it be with a Northwind for with an East wind you would be
in great danger The 45. Chapter Of the tides and increasing of the waters of Malacca IN the entry of the Hauen of Patane lying on the East side of the country and coast of Mallacca to the Island of Bintao which lyeth by the straight of Singa Pura vnder the Equinoctiall line the streames doe alwaies runne Southward in the months of Nouember and December From the Island Pulo Condor lying right against the hauen and land of Camboia to the Island Pulo Timao lying on the East side of the coast of Malacca at such time as you come froÌ„ China holding your course halfe a strike from the south the streams run towards the Island Borneo and being halfe a strike Southwestward then the streames run towards the coast of Pan which lyeth on the coast of the East side of Mallacca From Pulo Condor to the Island Pulo Sesir lying right against the coast of Camboia the streames run Eastward and by Pulo Sesir in the way towards China the streames runne to the coast of Champa and from the Falce Varella which is distant from the right Varella fiftéen miles lying on the coast of Camboia y e streames runne Eastward about fiue or sixe myles from the coast which is at the end of Iuly and in the month of August In the Monson of the South windes when you saile from Mallacca to China the streames from the Gulfe of Pulo Catao and the Island Aynao runne to the créeke of Enseada da Cauchinchina vntill the last of December and from Ianuary forward then the streams in that Gulfe and countrey runne towards the Sands that lie ouer against the coast of Champa in Camboia from the other side and the later it is in the yeare from the Month of Ianuary forward the stronger they run towards the sands In the Monson of China when you saile from China to Mallacca then the streams run very strong from the Island Pulo Catao to y e Island Puto Cambir both lying on the coast of Camboia or Champa It happeneth oftentimes that from the eight and twenty of Iuly to the fourth of August from the Varella to Pulo Catao you haue calme sea and then you haue the Terreinhos which are Windes blowing from the land out of the West and northwest and the Viracoins which are winds that come from the Sea out of the East Southeast and east Northeast being in the North they presently change into the south whervpon it becommeth calme till the Terreinhos or land winds doe come again and thus they hold about two miles from the coast and not further for they are winds that do only blow vpon y e coast as in other places it is already sufficiently declared in speaking of the Terreinhos and Viracoins When you saile by the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or small Lequeo towards the land of Bungo in the Island of Iapon the streames in that country do run eastward to the Island of Tanaxuma From 30 degrées Northward a little further theÌ„ to the middle way to Iapon the streames from that country to the coast of China run northward towards the créeke A Enseada de Nanguyn in the monson of the south and southwest winds In this monson of South and Southwest winds the streams from the Island Pulo Tayo lying by the Island Aynao in the coast of China run Southwestward to the Islands of Sanchoan and Cantao The 46. Chapter Of the tides both for ebbe and flood by the daies and houres of the Moone in the haueÌ„ of Macau in China with the height of the same Hauen found by experience of an expert Pilot. THe 19. of September I marked the course of the Tides of China within the hauen of Macau it being Full Moone and I found it to be full sea about halfe an houre and somewhat more after eight of the clocke in the morning which I tryed at the Full moone to sée if it would agrée with the New Moone The 3. of Februarie An. 1585. I tooke the height of the Sunne which as then was about 13. degrées from the line and I found that the Hauen of Macau lieth full vndec 22. degrées 1 â— and as then I likewise tried the tides of the same hauen and found it to be full Sea a little after 12. of the clock the moone being thrée daies old in such sort that by the same account with a new Moone it is full sea in that hauen at ten a clocke and 2 â— in the morning which I also tried by the new Moone The 16. of Februarie Anno 1585. I marked the Tides within the Hauen of Macau it being then full moone and found the first day of the full moone that it was high water at eleuen of the clocke and a halfe before noone The 2. of Iune Ann. 1585. I marked the tides in the Hauen of Macau found it to be full Sea iust at 12. of the clocke at noâ—ne the moone being foure dayes old so that after the same account it is full sea at nine of the clocke in the morning béeing new moone but these Tides of China fall not out iustly vnlesse it be foure daies before and fiue daies after the changing of the Moone for then there is as much water as vpon the third day which I affirme to be most true because I haue often and many times tryed it to be so The cause is for that before it it is all Islands and Channels so that when the waters beginne to fall they ebbe not aboue thrée houres but with an East wind they ebbe with a greater course The 47. Chapter Of the signes and tokens of the tides waters and windes vpon the coast of China and in the way to Iapon IN the time of the monson of the South and Southwest windes it is most certaine in the whole coast of China and the way to Iapon that when the winds of the monson blow and from thence run into the East that they turne not againe out of the East into the south but from thence into the North and hauing continued there for a certaine time they turne againe into the east and from thence into the South if it be a Northeast wind then it turneth often times into the Southwest and not into the East but not often but the surest is as aforesaid It changeth also often times from North to South and not into the East which is very common and when the Sunne setteth and hath some red carnation cloudes about it and that many beames issueth from the Sunne in such manner that it séemeth to blaze then it is a signe of great stormes and tempests Likewise in the rising and going downe of the Moone if it sheweth in the like maner it is a signe of stormes and tempests When the Sunne riseth so faire and cléere that you may in a manner sée into it and perfectly discerne the compasse thereof then it signifieth good weather The like doth it signifie in the setting of
the Sunne and when the Sunne in the rising or setting is red and of a dead couler and so darke that you may sée it round about not casting forth any beames it signifieth calme weather The like doth the Moone In the time of the monson when the Northeast winds doe commonly blowe and that the clouds at the Sun-setting bée red then it signifieth North winds when in diuers places of the sea you sée skumme driuing vpon the water as white as Cotton being about a finger long then it signifieth tempests and foule weather This skum procéedeth of the small waues that breake wherof there are many in y e place In the moneth of Iuly there bloweth other winds in those places then the monson running from one place to the other till in the end they be northeast then it is certain it will be tempest foule weather If from the Island of Lamao to the Cape of Sumbor in the manson of the South and Southwest winds you find an East winde with great heate and same great droppes of water it signifieth foule weather The 48. Chapter In what dayes and moneths you find tempests and foule weather in the coast of China FRom the seuenth to the eleuenth of Iune often and commonly vpon the coast of China there are great tēpests From the beginning of Iuly to the 26. of the same moneth you are neuer frée nor out of danger of tempests and foule weather for that all that time you haue foule stormie weather the wind neuer staying in one place but running round about the compasse From the 12. of August forward in the whole Moone of September to the end of October all that time there is continually foule weather The 49. Chapter Of the times of faire weather vpon the coast of China THe whole moneth of Iune except it be from the seuenth to the eleuenth day there is very litle soule weather for that vnlesse it be vpon the daies aforesaid you haue the windes of the monson with faire and cléere weather without stormes to saile from the Island Pulo Cantao to the Islandes Cantao and Macau without stormes you must set saile on the 26. of Iuly and saile till the 12. of August and all that time you are without tempests In the middle way from the Island of Iapon to the coast and land of Liampo you haue alwaies West windes which blowe in Iapon in the moneths of Nouember and December The 50. Chapter A briefe description of the course from Macau in China to Noua Spaigna with the scituations of the countries PVtting out of the East channell of the Hauen of Macau then you must hold inward to sea as much as you may and hauing a contrarie winde runne as long as the wind giues you leaue to kéep that course but if the winde be scant whereby you may not holde your course Northeast or Northeast and by North then turne on the other side as long as the wind serueth that you may run Southeast for the space of thrée or foure daies for it is better to kéepe Southeast then to run Northward This course you shall holde as the winde serueth you vntill you think you are 300. miles from the land and being there you must run 200. or more miles beyond Iapon and although you holde your course North yet you néed not feare any thing kéeping good account of the wracking or winding of your compasse towardes the West for it might hinder you much running as often as you can Southeast or to Loofeward as also not leauing y e course of Northeast as often as you can vntill you be vnder the height In the gulfe you shal sée certaine great blacke birds which is a signe that you are farre to Seaward and if you sée them about euening that they stretch their legs out along by their tailes then looke to your selfe for it signifieth foule weather When you come within 200. miles or more of the other land then you shall loose the sight of those birdes and if the wind and weather driue you vnder many heights and that you sée many heapes of wéeds driuing vpon the water which are commonly séene when you are 100. and 120. myles inwarde to sea then you must runne on the outside of Iapon Southeastward till you be vnder 31. and 32. degrées and as then knowing the land which will lie hard by whē you see it first you must runne without it and beware you run not vpon the Island called Ilha de Sedros that is the Island of Cedar trées and make no account by the course of the Sea or compasse for the Island of Cedars lyeth by the Cape of S. Lucas béeing verie false in the course because the land if it lay by it doth come more and likelier out then it doth towardes the South The Cape of Saint Lucas is a high land and sheweth when you are hard by it as if it had stonie cliffes sticking out of it the end thereof béeing verie blacke shining and darke the Land thereof presently running inwards towards the North and if you néed fresh water within the cliffes of the said Cape of S. Lucas there is a great sandie strande where you haue a verie good Rode to anker where close by the sea you find great store of fresh water From thence you shall crosse ouer to the other side vpon the Southeast bough without the Marias which is a better course then inward all the coast is faire and good so that you may well runne along by it vntill you come to certaine cliffes lying by the Hauen called El Puerto de la Natiuidad where within the créeke you presently finde the Hauen of Saint Iago de Colima the marks wherof are those On the East side it hath a round houell that descendeth downward if you be forced to put into it you must vnderstand that it hath a great mouth or entrie aboue two or thrée miles wide wherin you haue no cause to feare any thing but that you sée before your eies you must runne into it till you be cleane within the point where you haue a riuer of fresh water that runneth into the Sea where you shall find Spanish Fishermen if you desire to saile further you must frō thence to the hauen of Acapulco run for the space of 80. miles along by the shore for it is verie faire and cleare till you be at the end of the high land that is to the Hauen called El Puerto del Marques which a farre off sheweth like an Island but when you goe so néere it that you may well discerne it to be firme land then on the vpper part thereof you shall sée some white stones which shewe like white Runderen that goe in the way you may fréely runne towardes it till you begin to sée the mouth therof and then put into it This in briefe in my opinion is the best course that you may bold in this voiage which I would likewise haue holden if I
open At the end of the said hill on the South side there is a point of stonie Cliffes called A punto do Tubaron that is the point of the Hedge And on the South side of the Baye there are two or thrée high hilles being there you shall put right ouer to the Bay and so run Westward If you should be in the same course vnder twentie degrées then you shall sée many hilles among the which standeth a high sharpe point called Serra de Guarapari that is the hill of Guarapari it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can that is the Hill of Peterwood these hils stand on the South side of Spirito Santo From these Hilles southwarde you shall see a hill standing alone called Guape when you sée it then you shall likewise sée thrée small Islandes lying togither on the south side whereof lyeth another small round flat Island and the land lying right against this roūd flat Island hath a great Baye where if néed be you may put in and anker if you desire to goe into it then you shall runne East and west with the hill and so runne in and then the round Island will bée on the North side This Island is called Ilha de Repouso that is the Island of rest it lyeth very close by the land and betwéene it and the land you may well anker From these thrée Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo you shall sée another Island lying alone which you passe running to Seaward by it and being by it you shall presently sée the mouth or Hauen of Spirito Santo this bay or hauen lyeth vnder 20. degrées The 61. Chapter To saile from the Bay or Hauen of Spirito Santo to the Bay of S. Vincent SAyling from Spirito Santo to y e Bay S. Vincent you must runne along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it to the point called Cabo Frio that is the cold point vntill you come to it in the way you haue a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador the Baye of our Sauiour which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles Before you come to Cabo Frio there are two Islands from the which you run to seaward yet if néed be or if you desire it you may passe betwéene them and the land Cabo Frio hath an Island right ouer against it which hath a point where you may anker if néede be on the West side where it is faire and cléere This Cabo Frio lieth vnder 23. degrées from thence to the riuer called Rio de Ianero that is the riuer of Ianuarie are 18. miles this riuer of Ianero hath thrée or foure Islandes in the mouth thereof If you will enter into this riuer you may well goe in taking your way betwéene two of the Islandes that lie in the mouth thereof on the South side of this riuer there is a Hill that sheweth like a man with a Friars Coule or Cape vpon his head When you are vnder the height of this riuer you shall to Landward see certaine high Hilles which shewe like Organs which is a good marke to knowe that you are by the riuer and when you begin to goe néere the lande you shall see a round high and bare Island on the South side the mouth of this riuer lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ From this riuer to the Rode or open Hauen by the Portingales called Angra are fiftéene miles and there are two riuers in the way but being in that country put not to the land vnlesse you be compelled thereunto From the mouth of this riuer West Southwest and Southwest by West you shall sée a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian which on the Southwest side hath another small high Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases that is the Islande of Seamewes before you come at it you must holde your course Westward to shunne certaine Sands that lie by it whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Muda that is the Island of the Dumbe woman and to put into the Bay of S. Vincent you shall leaue the Islandes on the East side The Bay of Saint Vincent lyeth vnder 24. degrées and if you be to leeward from it then you shall sée many Islands whereof some stretcheth outward which are the best markes for this Hauen and being there you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay The 62. Chapter How to saile from Cabo Frio or the cold point to the riuer of Rio de Plata or the riuer of siluer with all the course thereof FRom Cabo Frio to the riuer of Ianero or Ianuarie are eightéene miles and you saile East and West and lyeth vnder 23. degrées and hath these markes First inward to the land it hath certaine high Hilles called Organs but at this time most of them are falne down and on the West Southwest side towards the Sea side it hath the forme of the Mass of a shippe and in the mouth of the riuer lieth foure Islands whereof one is high and round which is a good marke as also the Sugar loafe being a houell that is called so lying in the Hauen although you can not sée it when you are at sea you may saile along this coast without daunger and you need feare nothing but that you sée before your eyes From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast and West Southwest and is in length two and fortie miles and all that way there is neither shallowes nor Sandes but there you finde good Hauens for all winds Twelue miles from the riuer lieth an Island called Ilha grande or the great Island which hath verie good Hauens as well on the Southwest as the East sides with very good fresh water and great fishing it is a high lande with many trees and inwarde to the lande it is verie high and sharpe pointed if you desire to put in there you néed not feare to do it for there is no danger From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteene miles and to the Island A Ilha dos Porcos that is the Island of Hogges are fourtéene miles the Isles of Hogges hath a very good Hauen but it is too farre inward Frō thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are foure miles which is a great high Island full of trees it hath a verie good entrie as well on the one side as on the other it lyeth Northeast and Southwest From thence to the lande about halfe a mile distant lyeth the Rode Southwestwarde there lyeth another long Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases or the Island of Sea-mewes Close by this Island there lyeth three Cliffes on the South side whereof lyeth an Island which is a verie good marke for the land is sometimes couered with miste and thicke weather whereby you can
not knowe it but when you see this Island then you may knowe where you are From this Island to S. Vincents are twelue miles which is a pleasant way and in that countrey there are three small Islands called As Ilhas de Boa Sicanga From these Islandes to the Hauen called A Berra de Birtioga are sixe miles which is a verie good a deepe Hauen Between the Islandes aforesaid this Hauen lieth another rouÌ„d Island called Monte de Trigo that is the hill or heape of wheate which is a verie good marke for such as desire to put into the Hauen of Bertioga From this Hauen to the Hauen called A Berra d'Esteuao da Costa that is the hauen of Steuen da Costa are fiue miles this is a good Hauen for great shippes it hath a very good Bay for shippes to lie in and if you will not put into it outwarde close by the land you haue an Island called A Ilha da Moela that is the Island of Chéese where you may anker From this Hauen Southwestward lieth an Island called A Ilha Queimada that is the burnt Island which is a flat Island all stonie but along by it it is faire ground like South southeastward From the Hauen lyeth a Cliffe which of many men is not knowne it lyeth aboue the water and is in the middle way betwéen the Island Dos Alcatrases and Ilha Queimada From thence to the Island called Canaueas that is the Island of Réedes are thrée miles you run North Northeast and South Southwest along by the coast Canaueia is an Island that hath a verie good Hauen and fresh water and lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ on the south side it hath two Rockie Islands whereof the one is somewhat long and round and right ouer against it lyeth the riuer called Rio de Canauea where you may put in with small ships From Canauea to the Island called A Ilha de Santa Caterina are 48. miles and you run along the coast North South This is a long Island full of trées it lieth by the coast which reacheth North and South On the North side at the entry of the Hauen it hath two Islands and on the South side another Island called A Galle that is the Island of the Gally on the North side thereof you can not enter but onely with small Barkes and ships but on the South side it hath a very good entrie for great ships it hath much fresh water and great store of fish and wilde Deere This Island lyeth vnder 28. degrees and ½ From thence to the Hauen called O Porto de Don Rodrygo are fiue myles and fiue miles further forward lyeth the Hauen called dos Patos that is the Hauen of Géese by some called La Laguna that is the Lake This Hauen serueth for Barkes and small ships that traffique in those countries From thence to the riuer of Rio de Plata there is not one hauen where you may put in the coast reaching North Northeast and South Southweast Sayling from the aforesaid Island of S. Caterina to Rio de Plata you must holde your course southward to the height of 34. degrees â…” Then you must put to the land when you sée it which at the first sheweth like an Island called los Castillos then you shall run along the coast which will lie Southwestward Southwest and by West and west southwest from you and make not your account to sée the Cape de Sancta Maria for the land there is so flat that there you can not discerne any signe or token of a point but there you shall sée certaine riffes but you néed not feare any thing more then that you sée before your eies and if you chance not to sée any land running towardes it then cast out your Lead and there you shall find 10.14 and 18. fadome déepe therfore feare not for it is all one kind of ground and you are in a good way Being there as aforesaid then run as long as you can well discerne the land then you shall sée an Island called A Ilha dos Lobos that is the Island of Wolues for there you sée many wolues it is a flat Island all full of stones on the south side it hath an Island and on the east a Riffe but you néede not feare any other then that you sée before your eies This Island is distant from the Firme land about two miles and ½ towards the northwest from this Island of Wolues there lieth a small flat Island with a low wood close by the land which hath a good hauen to anker in if you haue any tempest out of the Southwest If you passe along by this Island on the East Southeast side then goe néere the point or hooke of the firme lande which is a lowe stony point and betwéene this point and the Island lyeth a sand which you shall presently sée by the water that breaketh vpon it and if you enter on the Northeast side you néede not feare any thing and to anker kéepe close by the Island for there you haue fresh water and great store of fish vpon the ground Béeing there you must bée carefull for there beginneth the first high Lande and from it about eight or ten myles further lyeth a sand that is verie dangerous and is about foure miles from the Firme Lande being two myles in length you must runne betwéene it and the Firme lande and when you sayle from the high land aforesaide for the space of a mile and a halfe or two myles you must kéepe harde by the shoare because of the sande aforesaide and from thence with your Leade in your hande with good watch and foresight and if it bee not seasonable weather to saile by night then your best way were to anker and to stay till it bee day the better to make your voiage And when you thinke you are past this sand then you shal sée a hill called O monte de Santo Seredâ—o which is a rounde high hill the like whereof is not in those countries to bee founde betwéene the which hill and the sandes aforesaid lyeth an Island called A Ilha das Flores that is the Island of Flowers which you may passe about without danger And when you come into the salt or fresh water which floweth fiue and twentie miles beneath the riuer called Rio de Buenos Aires that is the Riuer of good aire where the water is verie fresh then hold your course West and then you shal be eight or ten miles beneath the Riuer of good aire which is the best course you can holde but I aduise you still to haue your Lead in hand and when you are at thrée or foure fadome water then saile no further if it bée by night but in the day time you may sée whither you saile which must be in sight of land and so neere that you may easily discerne the trées holding two miles from the land for you can not passe by the Riuer of
in the middle it hath thrée houels whereof that in y e middle is the greatest From this Island De Pinos to Cabo de Corrientes you must runne West Northwest by the which course you shall sée it This point on the sea side is a Lande running downeward vpon it hauing some palme Trées and on the West side a sandy strand where there is a Roade where you may lye Vpon this Point of Cabo de Correntes standeth a picked Hill which stretcheth further out theÌ„ all other points when from thence you put in you shall sée on the Lande righter ouer you a Lake of fresh water where if néede bee you may supply your want To saile from thence to the Point of S. Anton. Beeing two or thrée miles to Sea-ward you must runne West Northwest From the Island De Pinos to Cabo de S. Anton there are two great créekes one lying from the Island De pinos to the cape De Corrientes and the other from the Cape De Corrientes to Cape de S. Anton and before you come to the Point of Cape de Corrientes there is a point called La Punta de Guaniguanico behind the Land inward you shall sée certaine Hils called Las Sierras Guaniguanico Cape de S. Anton is a long Point full of trées with some bushes with sandye strandes and from it there runneth a bank or sand for the space of 4. miles northwestward Sayling from the Point of S. Anton to new Spaigne in winter time y t is from August to March then you must hold your course without y e Islands and Cliffes called Las Alactanes west northwestward with y t which course hauing sailed 60. or 70. miles you shall find ground which shal be of shels or great saÌ„d This you shal find til you be vnder 24. degrées if you find ground at lesse then 40. fadome sailing with the same course then hold your course north northwest northwest by west when therewith you begin to increase in depth then turn againe to your first course of northwest and wheÌ„ you begin to lose land then for the space of 20. miles you must saile West wherwith you shall be north south with the Island Bermeia FroÌ„ thence you must saile southwest till you be vnder 20. degrées if you sée not land you shall run west for at that time it is not good to goe beneath y e heigth Vnder this height course you shal sée La torre Blanca y t is the white tower if you chance to discouer y e Riuer of S. Petro S. Paulo then beyond y e riuer you shal sée certaine gréene hils but not very high If you finde 35. fadome déepe with muddie ground with shelles in some places then from thence you shall hold your course South and South and by East vntill you bée right against the fieldes of Almeria if you come out of the Sea you shall séeke ground lower and finding 30. or 40. fadome with some muddy ground then you are East and West with the riuer of Almeria about seuen miles from the land and if in the Southwest you sée the hilles called las Sierras del Papalo and that they run one within the other then you are Northeast and Southwest from them From thence you shall bolde your course South and South and by West whereby the hilles of Papalo will begin to shew themselues which wil make two round hilles you shall likewise see Las Sierras de Calaquote which are certaine reddish hilles This rowe of Hilles commeth out to the sea side If you desire to take the ground by the point of Villa Risa that is the rich towne thrée miles from the land you shall finde 80. and 90. fadome deepe muddy ground The riuer of S. Peter and S. Paul lyeth vnder 21. degrées and los Campos d'Almeria that is the fields of Almeria vnder 20. degrées Villa Risa la Vieya that is olde Villa Risa lyeth vnder 19. degrees and 2 â— Villa Risa la Vieya is certaine hils whereof the one end reach vnto the Sea side they are not very high but make many openings or rents like the hilles of Abano called Organs stretching North and South if you chaunce to come out of the Sea and should see the Hilles of Villa Risa then you shoulde see that they stretch North and South and the hils of S. Martyn stretch East and West you may know them another way which is that if you make Westward towards them comming close to them they will shew to be lower then the Hils of S. Martyn which are greater and higher as you passe along the Sea coast by them and béeing thrée myles to Sea-ward from Villa Risa you shall find ground which by S. Martins you shall not find although you were but halfe a myle from them Lastly although you should haue no knowledge of Lande yet you might knowe it by the markes aforesaid To Léeward from Villa Risa lieth a Cliffe called N. Bernards which is in forme like a suger loafe From Villa Risa la Vieya or out of Villa Risa to S. Iohn de Luz you shall hold your course South and South and by East and you shal find ground of shels muddy ground at thirty fadome towards the Land By the Riuer of Vera Crus you shall find sandye ground and in some places muddye ground If you were without then you must knowe that from S. Christopher to S. Iohn de Luz it is all sandye strandes and being East and west with the point called Punta Gordâ— then you are North and South with the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and being North-east and South-west with the Island at lesse then forty fadome déepe towards the Land then you shall haue reddish ground and in some places shels and from forty fadomes forward white muddy ground If you come out of the sea and desire to know if you bee East and West with the Island then you must marke a high houell that runneth out from the hils of Vera Crus And when you are East and west with this Houell so are you likewise East and West with the Island you must likewise vnderstande that when the Hill of Sierra Neuada y t is the snowy hill lieth West west and by south from you then are you likewise east and west with the Island aforesaid then you shall presently sée the point called AntoÌ„ Niquardo as also Mendano Montuoso or the high Houell aforesaid and you shal likewise sée the sea-coast Medelâ—n and on the North-west side the Point of Punta Gorda if you desire with a North wind to be in the hauen then run at 18 20 fadome déepe whereby you shal passe to loofeward through the chanell going close to the bulwark yet shunning it you shall anker on the loofe side for to Léeward it hath no great depth If you depart from the Point of S. Anton in summer time towards new Spain then you must hold your course westward for
The 67. Chapter The course right marke of the nauigatioÌ„ from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues to the riuer of Coâ—go in Angola southwards in the coasts of Guinea and Ethiopia with the situation of the countries SAyling from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues which lyeth full vnder 1. deg on the south side of the Equinoctial line in the Coast of Guinea or Ethiopia the coast froÌ„ thence forward stretcheth northwest southeast being a flat long land you haue the depthes of 10. and 9. fadome déepe water towards the land being all ground like sand of sand lopers all through the country except it be by the point Cabo de Catarina where you haue great sand some stones if you will make any hast being vpon this coast and voyage then euery night you must anker till you haue the Terreintios which are the winds blowing from off the land holding your course in that manner till you haue the Viracoins which are y e winds out of the sea therwith again to make towards the land vntil it be calme or that y e are at 10. fadom déep theÌ„ you must anker til the comming of the land winds which come dayly at their times as aforesaid if the streames run w t the wind theÌ„ you may wind from the one bough to the other holding to léeward as aforesaid the coniunction or time wheÌ„ the streames run with the winds is with a new Moone about 2. dayes before or after and 3. dayes before it is ful if you desire to run from one bough to the other y t must rule your selfe in such maÌ„ner that you be euery morning by the coast to get before the winds that as then blow off the land the marks of the long land are these it hath certain great thicke houels called As Sierras de santo Espirito that is the hils of the holy Ghost and somwhat further you haue 2 other houels which are very easy to be knowne in this country you haue muddy ground further forward you shal sée a high hill within the créek called Palmella for that it is like to Palmela the which lyeth betweene Lisbon and Setuval you shal likewise sée somewhat further in the créeke a land which stretcheth North south as you passe along by it close by the strand it hath a thicke flat houel which is called Cascars because it is like Cascais by Lisbon you must vnderstand that before you hoyse vp anker in that countrie you must let fal your sayles to see if the shippe may get out and if it cannot get out then lie still till you haue the Viracoins that blow out of the sea for in those countries the streames runne very stronglie out of the riuer of Congo into the sea wherby the shippe can hardlie get out when you are so far as the place called a Palmeirinâ—a that is the woods of Palme trees then let your best anker fall for the groundes in this crosse way is stiffe muddy ground whereby the ankers oftentimes will hardly holde fast but ship out againe And when you are in the riuer of Congo being at the depth of 30. or 40 fadome then you shall loofe the ground then you shall turne your howreglasse and when it is runne out then cast out your lead and you shall find 10 or 12 fadome water on the other side of the riuer of Congo and you shal sayle about the length of a stone cast from the land and the best course is close by the land for otherwise you could not get into the riuer by meanes of the great force of the streames wherby many men are much troubled as being the greatest stroÌ„gest streams that are found in any place and run aboue 12. miles into the sea Sayling from Congo to Angola in maner aforesaid and being 35. miles on your way you shal sée a high hill by the which ther lieth an IlaÌ„d called A Ilha de Loanda but if you be not very close by y e laÌ„d you shal not sée the Iland for it is very low flat if you chance to be by the land at 6. 7. deg then you shal be at the mouth of the riuer of Congo and 10. myles to seaward from it you shal sée many tokens signes thereof as great streames thicke réeds herbs with many cutle bones and wheÌ„ you are by the land at 7. 8. degr ½ then you shall sée a flat land with trées al ouer it and in this country in euery place at 18. 20. fadome you shal haue good ground from 2. to two miles and a halfe from the land on the sea side you haue white downes which shew like sandy strandes the ground by it is sandy with some stones that is from 7. to 8. deg and you must vnderstand that the land from 5 deg southwarde is altogether high all the ground being muddy and a mile from it it is 30. and 35 fadom deepe good ground being a cleare and faire coast with cause of feare of more then is séen before your dayes that is from 7 to 9 deg and the land from 8. degrees southward is verie high if you come out of the sea to the land vnder 7. degr and ½ then you shal sée 7. hils or Houels which stretch Northwest and southeast called As sete serras that is the 7. hils if you come to the land vnder 8. degr ¼ then you shall see a hie land lying eastwarde from you this point in shew hath the forme of cape S. Vincent in the coast of Spaine comming to the land not full vnder 9 degrées then north or northeast you shal sée the aforesaid point hauing vnder it some whit downs that strike somewhat out into the sea but you need not feare them for it is faire and cleare and therefore you may fréely go neere the land theÌ„ better to know it being vnder the hight aforesaid of scarce 9 deg then eastwarde to land you shal see a round hil called monte Pasqual when the point aforesaid is northeast from you then the other land shall stretch southwest which is the furthest land lying without the Iland of Loanda the land that lyeth southwarde from you is a greate thicke land at the foot thereof hauing some red and white downes with certaine small trees vppon it which show like figge trees of Algaruen in Spaine now to runne within y e land of Loâ—ndâ— you must hold your course right vpon the land that lyeth southward so you may go close coâ—t about half a mile froÌ„ it being there southwestward from the Iland you shal discouer the Iland which is very flat and of white sand whereby you can hardlie see it but when you are close by it that is the hauen of Angola This Iland of Loanda is like an Iland called A Ilha das Caruns lying by the cape called Cabo de santa Maria in the land of Algaruen vpon the coast
vnder 29. degrées and ◠accounting for one mealetide thirtéene miles so that I gessed as then to be 25. myles from China On Sonday after noone we held our course in the same sort East and East and by South for all that euening and the night following till the next day at noone with a still winde and water and had no Sunne to take the height but I made my account of eightéen miles for a meale tide at halfe a strike to the East and East and by North the wind being scant South From Monday at noon we still had a calme South wind which continued so that euening and all night and about Tuesday morning the wind was somwhat fuller till noone whē I tooke the height of the Sunne and found vs to be vnder 29. degrees and ¾ running East and East and by South for the space of 22. miles From Tuesday at noone being vnder the height aforesaid I willed them to saile east hauing the same wind but somewhat calmer all that night to Wednesday at noone and then we began to sée driuing in the sea some Sea-scumme or Cuttle bones hauing sayled fiftéene myles making my account to be yet 30. miles from the Island Tanaxuma hauing neither Sunne nor Starres to take the heights From Wednesday at noone the wind began to blow somwhat full South Southwest and because it was signified vnto me that the streames in that countrey ranne towardes the Island of Lequeo and perceiuing likewise in some places a certaine yellowe skumme driuing vpon the water which appeared vnto vs like ripe Limons I willed them presently to holde East Northeast and about euening wée sawe many signes of land as péeces of réedes risen and such like things At night I badde them runne East and East and by North but the first watch béeing done when the Chinish Pilot should watch his course hée had gone a great way out of the course hauing runne Eastward till the morning when againe I willed them to sayle East and by North the winde béeing as it was till Thursday at ten of the clocke and then although it was darke and close weather wee beganne to sée a land that séemed verie cloudie and couered with dampie mistes lying Southeast from vs and were about thrée myles from it Along by the same lande there lay two Islandes wée holding our course in the same sort vntill by the first land Eastward wee sawe another great high and long lande and at the end of the aforesaid high land Eastward wée sawe two other Islandes whereof the one was verie great stretching Northeast and Southwest and the other close by it stretching North and South being the smallest with many pointes On the North side of this small Island about a mile from thence there are fiue small Islands or stonie Cliffes vpon a rowe from the first Island that we sawe which is the last Island of those that are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters lying on the Northeast side to the aforesaid small Island with many pointes it may be about sixe myles Eastward as we were right against the aforesaid first Island of Stonie Cliffes it might bée about fiue houres after noone hauing run as we thought since wee had sight of land about twentie and foure miles The Thursday aforesaid in the morning wée tooke the height of the North Starre being vnder thirtie degrees and ⅙ Comming within two myles of the Island that wée saw first of the Islands of stonie Cliffes wee ranne Northeast and Northeast and by East and when wee were right against it whereby it laie Southward from vs béeing about thrée myles from it on the North side thereof wée sawe another great high and long Iland with many trees which as wée learned is called Icoo it reacheth East and West and wée were about three miles from it but by reason of the darke weather and mistes wee could not discerne it and comming somewhat néerer to it wée sawe another Island lying close by the West point of the aforesaid Iland beeing lesse than the other and because wée were by the aforesaid West point betweene both wee were fully determined to runne through the channell that shewed betweene the said two Islandes but because there was no man in the shippe that had any knowledge thereof fearing Riffes and shallowes wee durst not aduenture but wound vp to the East point to passe by the winde about the high Island running as much as wée might with a Southerly winde hauing great waues that put vs to the lande and so wee sayled East Southeast hauing yet about two myles to passe by the Island but night came on beeing verie darke so that wee could discerne no land although wee were close by it and to keepe from it wee ranne the same course till about one of the clocke after midnight then the moone shined yet wée could not see the Island but made Northward towardes it with fewe Sailes to the Island of Tanaxuma which according to my account should lie right before vs wherewith wée passed ouer the rest of the night till the morning when we sawe the Island Tanaxuma that laye right before vs beeing about two myles from it it beeing verie cloudie and wée made Northward towardes it to passe by the West side thereof but wée could not doe it by reason that the winde was Southwest and wee were by the South point thereof running along by the East side about halfe a mile from it This Island reacheth North and South beeing long and lowe ground hauing white sandie strandes with a verie gréene countrey of valleyes it hath many Pine trees but they stand scattering from each other and verie open it is about seuen or eight myles long hauing in the middle way on the East side close by the land an Island or stonie Cliffe which farre off sheweth like a Foist vnder Saile This Island lyeth vnder thirtie degrees and ½ right in the middle it is all saire and cleare ground From this Island of Tanaxuma Northwarde wée sawe a verie great and high lande reaching East and West about eight miles making as it seemed on the same coast Northeast and Northeast and by North from Tanaxuma an opening which is the mouth of the creeke called Xabuxij This Créeke hath for a marke that the lande on the East side thereof runneth all stéeping to the hooke or point of the Creeke beeing a flatte ground and on the West side the land is as high as the first that wee sawe lying North and South with Tanaxuma This coast aforesaid may lie distāt ouerthwart from the Island of Tanaxuma about seuen or eight myles From the North point of this Island wee made towardes the Créeke and béeing in the middle of our way the wind fell West Southwest whereby wee were enforced to lye by it the weather béeing calme so that the water that with the flood ranne Eastward draue vs off that wée could hardly get the Hauen but the ebbe that
after ranne very stiffe into it made vs get in and with the glimsing of the euening and the light Moone wée entred into a verie great goulfe wherein lay the aforesaide Créeke on the North side and within on the East side it hath a small Island full of trées lying about the shot of a base from the land Eastward from this Island the land hath a high houell and on the South side of the said houell there lyeth a great opening which on the other side hath a point of low land and white sand strands with trées There is the Hauen called Minatto which is a riuer better than that of Batecola lying in the coast of Malabar On the North side of this houell about a small myle there is another opening béeing in a land that is somewhat lower as the houell with some trées This opening right in the middle hath an Island wherein is the place of Xibuxij which is a great village full of people and is a riuer of fresh water but it is shallowe for you can not put into it without a spring tide From Xibuxij forward the Créeke runneth West all lowe land and sandie strandes for the space of two miles from thence it runneth Southward againe till it butteth vpon a high hill which is that which wée sawe comming from the Island Tanaxuma to the foote of the hill there lyeth a small riuer very shallow From this riuer the land runneth East againe to the mouth thereof which may bée about halfe a myle broad The ground of all this Créeke and entrie is sand and bad anker ground All this high land aforesaid is called Quimonsiquy From this Créeke of Xibuxij seuen myles East Northeast lyeth the Créeke of Tanora which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon you runne the coast East and East by North in the middle way from Xibuxij to Tanora there is a small Créeke or Bay which at the first shewe séemeth to haue a good harbor but when you are right against it then you may verie well perceiue it for it hath many stonie Cliffes and Rockes and runneth somewhat to landward I heare set downe the description of this Créeke that no man should deceiue himselfe therby that desireth to goe vnto Tanora as wée should haue done Béeing past this small Créeke you shall presently sée that the land maketh an end or point of high lande from the which point forward the coast windeth inward where you shall sée a sandie strand with two Ilandes full of trées lying along by it At the end of these Islands you shall sée other smaller Islands that lye off from the land inward to the Sea with other great stones and rockes Within these Ilands and Stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into this Hauen you must run to the point and the end of these Islands and Stones that reach into the Sea and béeing past them then on the Northeast side to Seaward there will lie a stonie Cliffe with an Island without bushes or trées béeing stéepe land reaching North and South betwéene this Island and the land there is a great Créeke where you may anker for right ouer against it it is 25 fadome déepe but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the point and the end of the aforesaid Islands and Stones that sticke outward to Sea then you shall presently passe along thereby inward towards the land which you may freely doe without danger for it is faire and cléere holding your course Westward and a point of land will be vpon your right hand and béeing past this point you shall passe close by shunning the land on the West side and being there you are within the Hauen which is a long Créeke or Bay reaching North till you be in you may ancre in the middle thereof at foure fadome déepe and then you are inclosed with a round bowe it is there altogither muddy ground Departing from Tanora to Fyunga the coast runneth North to a point of land lying about fiue myles from Tanora betwéene this point of land and Tanora there lyeth two Hauens the one called Gico not farre from Tanora the other further forward by some stonie Cliffes and Islands called Vmbra These two Hauens are good harbors for East winds that blowe much on this coast from the aforesaid point of land to Fyunga may be fiue miles more from whence the coast land doe turne in againe like a Créeke comming somewhat further Northward out this Créeke is a low land along by the Sea coast with sandy strands and a mile beyond y e aforesaid point of land the coast hath an opening and on the South side of this opening there standeth a great round trée close by the Sea side here is a good Hauen which is called Vndo and further forward there lyeth another Hauen called Toconosuchy this land is higher then the other hauen on the Southside it hath some high and great Trées and on the Northside a low land the which farre off outward sheweth like small Islands with trees This hauen is not good to put in A mile beyond this hauen there is another Hauen called Myme which is a good hauen for small shippes to enter and hath two enteries which you presently sée béeing without and may well discerne them in the middle hauing a flat Island full of Trees these Trees make two openings and you may see ouer the Island on the land which is higher a great gréene trée the land on the South side hath a high land with a valey From this Hauen about two myles and a halfe lieth another small Island called Tomxyma beyond this Riuer a myle and a halfe endeth the low land and then again it beginneth to be high from thence two myles further the land maketh a point or hooke of high land and a farre off seemeth to be the point called Cabo de Ramos lying on y e coast of India by Goa Sailing about this point hard by there is a Riuer Northward called Camyco which is two fadome deepe in the Hauen this is the furthest land of the kingdome of Fiunga From y e point of land aforesaid fiue miles distant from Tanora to this point of Camico the lande is like a Créeke or breech the water therein making a crosse streame for along by the land the Water runneth alwaies Southward you runne this point with the aforesaid point of land North and South and North and by east and South and by West and are about eight miles distant along by this Bréech you may anker at twelue and fiftéene fadome deepe faire sandy ground From this point called Cabo de Camico forward the coast runneth north northwest and when you are right against this point then you shall presently sée Northeastward and Northeast and by East the land of Toca which is an island and is about fortie myles long and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South it hath
Islands and great Rockes reaching from the land to seaward Within these Islands and stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into it you shall take your course towards the end of those Islands and stones that reach to seaward from the land When you are right against the end thereof then Northeastward from you to Sea-ward there will lye another Island or stony Cliffe You shall runne within this Island and betwéene it and the Land there is a great Créeke where you may anker at fiue and twenty fadome déepe if néed be but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the Islands and stones that lye outward to Sea then you shall presentlie runne along betwéene a point of Lande Northward on the right hand and the Islands into the Hauen that you shall sée lye open without feare and being about this point of land you shall presently sée a Creeke stretching Northward inwards and then you shall put to that point of land which will bée on your right hand where you may fréely enter for it is foure fadome déepe all muddy ground and anker by the East land shunning the West From this Créeke of Tanora forward you runne Northward along the coast which is the land of Fiungo and Bungo all faire and cleare ground hauing nothing thereon to feare then that you see before your eyes and eightéene myles further you shall find a very great Island that will bee on the East side from you which is the land of Toca and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South about fortie myles long comming out by Sacay and Miaco The Southside of this Island is faire and cleare along the which you runne to Sacay betweene this Island and the coast of Bungo on the West side thereof there is a straight or passage of foure fiue or more myles broad and such as will goe to Bungo must alwaies kéepe along by the coast of Tanora and Fiunga shunning the coast of Toca But returning to the coast of fiue and twenty degrées ½ beyond the Island of Lequeo Pequeno as aforesaid If you desire to saile to the Island Firando you shall runne from thence in the aforesaid course of Northeast and Northeast and by east to eight and twenty degrées and ¼ and being there kéepe Northeast by the which course you shall see two small long bare and broken Islands lying North and South with each other on the South side hauing two Islands or cliffes halfe a mile distant froÌ„ each other These two Islands aforesaid lye vnder one and thirtie degrées and ¼ Thrée or foure miles Northeastward from these Islandes lyeth an Island or stony Cliffe clouen in the middle hauing vpon it foure or fiue sharpe points or toppes when you are right against the aforesaid Island then you are yet tenne myles from the coast of Iapon Westward and running the same coast Northeastward you shall goe right vpon a very great high Island called Coiaquijn which lyeth East and West with the hauen of Angone being three or foure myles distant from the coast of thrée or foure myles long on the East side towards the Land it hath manie Islands and stony Cliffes If you chance to fall within the Island finding your selfe by the coast of Iapon whereby you cannot passe without the Island then take your course inward betwéene the Land and the Island without all the Islands and Stones about the length of the shotte of a great Peece from it but goe not neare the coast for that from the North Land there is a Point that reacheth to the other side Being past the length of the Island along by the Islands and stony Cliffes as I said before you shall presentlie put along by the Island outward to Sea-ward whereby Northward you shall sée the Point of Lande aforesaid which hath some Cliffes and Riffes within the which Northward lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa This point of land lieth right ouer against another point of lande that sticketh out from the Island lying North and South with each other and when you haue past beyond this point of lande then you shall hold along the coast about a mile from it You runne along by this coast from the one point of lande to the other North Northwest and South Southeast and if you passe without the Island of Coiaquin you shall take the same way béeing past and about it to come vnto the coast and so runne along by it as aforesaid From the aforesaid point of Amacusa that hath the Cliffes and Riffes thrée or foure miles forward there is another great and high point of lande in the same coast and beeing past it you shall sée a great opening or entrie of a Channell which is called O estrechio d'Arima that is the Straight of Arima within this straight lyeth two good Hauens the first called Xiquij which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon This Hauen lyeth about halfe a mile from the entrie inwarde on the South side and the right hand Westward at the end of a great Créeke which hath a harbour for all windes with foure or fiue fadome déepe muddie ground but in this Hauen three or foure Portingales were slaine I thinke it happened by their filthie pride and presumptuousnesse for in all places they will be Lordes and masters to the contempt and embasing of the inhabitants which in all places will not be endured namely in Iapon being a stubborne and obstinate people But to to the matter On the North side of this créeke on the land lying on the other side there lieth a high round Island and hitherto it is all ouer faire and cléere sea and ground To put into Arima you shall goe towards the North Lande for on the South side as soone as you are past the Creeke of Xiquij you haue two stones and thereabouts it is all ouer full of riffes and other filth This straight aforesaid as you first enter into it reacheth Eastward and then turneth Northwarde and along by the point where it turneth northward there runneth strong streames and so stiffe that if you be not carefull it will turne the shippe about and put it backe againe if you haue not a stiffe forewind to breake the force of the streames Being about this point aforesaid on the same land there lieth a very good Hauen called Cochinochy or Cochinâ—quyn and then the Hauen of Arima whereof the Straight receiueth the name and lyeth halfe a mile Northward from Cochinochy beeing a Creeke which is open for an East wind and without any defence for foule weather Somewhat further lyeth the Hauen of Simonbaia that hath thrée Islandes which make a harbour against the North wind but at low water the shippes lie drie In this Straight there are no other Hauens that are safe and good for All windes but onely Xiquy and Cochinochy as I said before From this Straight to the Island of Firando along the coast there are many